diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/kniwc10.txt | 14676 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/kniwc10.zip | bin | 0 -> 297446 bytes |
2 files changed, 14676 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/kniwc10.txt b/old/kniwc10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..790d01d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/kniwc10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14676 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty +(#7 in our series by G.A. Henty) + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: A Knight of the White Cross + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4932] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on March 31, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS *** + + + + +This etext was produced by Martin Robb (MartinRobb@ieee.org) + +PREFACE. + + +MY DEAR LADS, + +The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played +a very important part in the great struggle between Christianity +and Mahomedanism, was, at its origin, a semi-religious body, +its members being, like other monks, bound by vows of obedience, +chastity, and poverty, and pledged to minister to the wants of the +pilgrims who flocked to the Holy Places, to receive them at their +great Hospital -- or guest house -- at Jerusalem, dedicated to St. +John the Baptist, and to defend them on their passage to and from +the sea, against attack by Moslems. In a comparatively short +time the constitution of the order was changed, and the Knights +Hospitallers became, like the Templars, a great military Order +pledged to defend the Holy Sepulchre, and to war everywhere against +the Moslems. The Hospitallers bore a leading share in the struggle +which terminated in the triumph of the Moslems, and the capture +by them of Jerusalem. The Knights of St. John then established +themselves at Acre, but after a valiant defence of that fortress, +removed to Crete, and shortly afterwards to Rhodes. There they +fortified the town, and withstood two terrible sieges by the Turks. +At the end of the second they obtained honourable terms from Sultan +Solyman, and retiring to Malta established themselves there in an +even stronger fortress than that of Rhodes, and repulsed all the +efforts of the Turks to dispossess them. The Order was the great +bulwark of Christendom against the invasion of the Turks, and +the tale of their long struggle is one of absorbing interest, and +of the many eventful episodes none is more full of incident and +excitement than the first siege of Rhodes, which I have chosen +for the subject of my story. + +Yours truly, G. A. Henty + + + +CHAPTER I The King Maker + + +A stately lady was looking out of the window of an apartment +in the Royal Chateau of Amboise, in the month of June, 1470. She +was still handsome, though many years of anxiety, misfortune, and +trouble, had left their traces on her face. In the room behind +her, a knight was talking to a lady sitting at a tambour frame; +a lad of seventeen was standing at another window stroking a hawk +that sat on his wrist, while a boy of nine was seated at a table +examining the pages of an illuminated missal. + +"What will come of it, Eleanor?" the lady at the window said, +turning suddenly and impatiently from it. "It seems past belief +that I am to meet as a friend this haughty earl, who has for fifteen +years been the bitterest enemy of my House. It appears almost +impossible." + +"'Tis strange indeed, my Queen; but so many strange things have +befallen your Majesty that you should be the last to wonder at +this. At any rate, as you said but yesterday, naught but good can +come of it. He has done his worst against you, and one can scarce +doubt that if he chooses he has power to do as much good for you, +as in past times he has done you evil. 'Tis certain that his coming +here shows he is in earnest, for his presence, -- which is sure +sooner or later to come to the ears of the Usurper, -- will cause +him to fall into the deepest disgrace." + +"And yet it seemed," the queen said, "that by marrying his daughter +to Clarence he had bound himself more firmly than ever to the side +of York." + +"Ay, madam," the knight said. "But Clarence himself is said to be +alike unprincipled and ambitious, and it may well be that Warwick +intended to set him up against Edward; had he not done so, such an +alliance would not necessarily strengthen his position at Court." + +"Methinks your supposition is the true one, Sir Thomas," the queen +said. "Edward cares not sufficiently for his brother to bestow +much favour upon the father of the prince's wife. Thus, he would +gain but little by the marriage unless he were to place Clarence +on the throne. Then he would again become the real ruler of England, +as he was until Edward married Elizabeth Woodville, and the House +of Rivers rose to the first place in the royal favour, and eclipsed +the Star of Warwick. It is no wonder the proud Earl chafes under +the ingratitude of the man who owes his throne to him, and that he +is ready to dare everything so that he can but prove to him that +he is not to be slighted with impunity. But why come to me, when +he has Clarence as his puppet?" + +"He may have convinced himself, madam, that Clarence is even less +to be trusted than Edward, or he may perceive that but few of the +Yorkists would follow him were he to declare against the Usurper, +while assuredly your adherents would stand aloof altogether +from such a struggle. Powerful as he is, Warwick could not alone +withstand the united forces of all the nobles pledged to the support +of the House of York. Thence, as I take it, does it happen that +he has resolved to throw in his lot with Lancaster, if your Majesty +will but forgive the evil he has done your House and accept him as +your ally. No doubt he will have terms to make and conditions to +lay down." + +"He may make what conditions he chooses," Queen Margaret said +passionately, "so that he does but aid me to take vengeance on +that false traitor; to place my husband again on the throne; and +to obtain for my son his rightful heritage." + +As she spoke a trumpet sounded in the courtyard below. + +"He has come," she exclaimed. "Once again, after years of misery +and humiliation, I can hope." + +"We had best retire, madam," Sir Thomas Tresham said. "He will +speak more freely to your Majesty if there are no witnesses. Come, +Gervaise, it is time that you practised your exercises." And Sir +Thomas, with his wife and child, quitted the room, leaving Queen +Margaret with her son to meet the man who had been the bitterest +foe of her House, the author of her direst misfortunes. + +For two hours the Earl of Warwick was closeted with the queen; +then he took horse and rode away. As soon as he did so, a servant +informed Sir Thomas and his wife that the queen desired their +presence. Margaret was standing radiant when they entered. + +"Congratulate me, my friends," she said. "The Star of Lancaster +has risen again. Warwick has placed all his power and influence at +our disposal. We have both forgiven all the past: I the countless +injuries he has inflicted on my House, he the execution of his +father and so many of his friends. We have both laid aside all +our grievances, and we stand united by our hate for Edward. There +is but one condition, and this I accepted gladly -- namely, that +my son should marry his daughter Anne. This will be another bond +between us; and by all reports Anne is a charming young lady. +Edward has gladly agreed to the match; he could make no alliance, +even with the proudest princess in Europe, which would so aid him, +and so strengthen his throne." + +"God grant that your hopes may be fulfilled, madam," the knight +said earnestly, "and that peace may be given to our distracted +country! The Usurper has rendered himself unpopular by his extravagance +and by the exactions of his tax collectors, and I believe that +England will gladly welcome the return of its lawful king to power. +When does Warwick propose to begin?" + +"He will at once get a fleet together. Louis, who has privately +brought about this meeting, will of course throw no impediment in +his way; but, on the other hand, the Duke of Burgundy will do all +in his power to thwart the enterprise, and will, as soon as he +learns of it, warn Edward. I feel new life in me, Eleanor. After +fretting powerless for years, I seem to be a different woman now +that there is a prospect of action. I am rejoiced at the thought +that at last I shall be able to reward those who have ventured and +suffered so much in the cause of Lancaster." + +"My hope is, madam, that this enterprise will be the final one, +-- that, once successful, our dear land will be no longer deluged +with blood, and that never again shall I be forced to draw my sword +against my countrymen." + +"'Tis a good and pious wish, Sir Thomas, and heartily do I join in +it. My married life has been one long round of trouble, and none +more than I have cause to wish for peace." + +"There is the more hope for it, madam, that these wars have +greatly diminished the number of powerful barons. It is they who +are the authors of this struggle; their rivalries and their ambitions +are the ruin of England. Save for their retainers there would be +no armies to place in the field; the mass of people stand aloof +altogether, desiring only to live in peace and quiet. 'Tis the +same here in France; 'tis the powerful vassals of the king that +are ever causing trouble." + +"'Tis so indeed, Sir Thomas. But without his feudal lords how +could a king place an army in the field, when his dominions were +threatened by a powerful neighbour?" + +"Then it would be the people's business to fight, madam, and I doubt +not that they would do so in defence of their hearths and homes. +Besides, the neighbour would no longer have the power of invasion +were he also without great vassals. These great barons stand +between the king and his subjects; and a monarch would be a king +indeed were he able to rule without their constant dictation, and +undisturbed by their rivalry and ambitions." + +"That would be a good time indeed, Sir Thomas," the queen said, with +a smile; "but methinks there is but little chance of its coming +about, for at present it seems to me that the vassals are better +able to make or unmake kings, than kings are able to deprive the +great vassals of power; and never since Norman William set foot +in England were they more powerful than they are at present. What +does my chance of recovering our throne rest upon? Not upon our +right, but on the quarrel between Warwick and the House of Rivers. +We are but puppets that the great lords play against each other. +Did it depend upon my will, it should be as you say; I would +crush them all at a blow. Then only should I feel really a queen. +But that is but a dream that can never be carried out." + +"Not in our time, madam. But perhaps it may come sooner than we +expect; and this long war, which has destroyed many great families +and weakened others, may greatly hasten its arrival. I presume +until Warwick is ready to move naught will be done, your Majesty?" + +"That is not settled yet. Warwick spoke somewhat of causing a rising +in the north before he set sail, so that a portion at least of +Edward's power may be up there when we make our landing." + +"It would be a prudent step, madam. If we can but gain possession +of London, the matter would be half finished. The citizens are +ever ready to take sides with those whom they regard as likely to +win, and just as they shout at present 'Long live King Edward!' so +would they shout 'Long live King Henry!' did you enter the town." + +"This may perhaps change the thought that you have entertained, +Sir Thomas, of making your son a Knight of St. John." + +"I have not thought the matter over, madam. If there were quiet in +the land I should, were it not for my vow, be well content that +he should settle down in peace at my old hall; but if I see that +there is still trouble and bloodshed ahead, I would in any case +far rather that he should enter the Order, and spend his life in +fighting the infidel than in strife with Englishmen. My good friend, +the Grand Prior of the Order in England, has promised that he will +take him as his page, and at any rate in the House of St. John's +he will pass his youth in security whatsoever fate may befall me. +The child himself already bids fair to do honour to our name, and +to become a worthy member of the Order. He is fond of study, and +under my daily tuition is making good progress in the use of his +weapons." + +"That is he," the prince said, speaking for the first time, "It +was but yesterday in the great hall downstairs he stood up with +blunted swords against young Victor de Paulliac, who is nigh three +years his senior. It was amusing to see how the little knaves +fought against each other; and by my faith Gervaise held his own +staunchly, in spite of Victor's superior height and weight. If he +join the Order, Sir Thomas, I warrant me he will cleave many an +infidel's skull, and will do honour to the langue of England." + +"I hope so, prince," the knight said gravely. "The Moslems ever +gain in power, and it may well be that the Knights of St. John +will be hardly pressed to hold their own. If the boy joins them +it will be my wish that he shall as early as possible repair to +Rhodes. I do not wish him to become one of the drones who live in +sloth at their commanderies in England, and take no part in the +noble struggle of the Order with the Moslem host, who have captured +Constantinople and now threaten all Europe. We were childless some +years after our marriage, and Eleanor and I vowed that were a son +born to us he should join the Order of the White Cross, and dedicate +his life to the defence of Christian Europe against the infidel. +Our prayers for a son were granted, and Gervaise will enter the +Order as soon as his age will permit him. That is why I rejoice +at the grand prior's offer to take him as his page, for he will +dwell in the hospital safely until old enough to take the first +steps towards becoming a knight of the Order." + +"I would that I had been born the son of a baron like yourself," +the prince said earnestly, "and that I were free to choose my own +career. Assuredly in that case I too would have joined the noble +Order and have spent my life in fighting in so grand a cause, free +from all the quarrels and disputes and enmities that rend England. +Even should I some day gain a throne, surely my lot is not to be +envied. Yet, as I have been born to the rank, I must try for it, +and I trust to do so worthily and bravely. But who can say what the +end will be? Warwick has ever been our foe, and though my royal +mother may use him in order to free my father, and place him on +the throne, she must know well enough that he but uses us for his +own ends alone, and that he will ever stand beside the throne and +be the real ruler of England." + +"For a time, Edward," the queen broke in. "We have shown that +we can wait, and now it seems that our great hope is likely to +be fulfilled. After that, the rest will be easy. There are other +nobles, well nigh as powerful as he, who look with jealousy upon +the way in which he lords it, and be assured that they will look +with a still less friendly eye upon him when he stands, as you say, +beside the throne, once your father is again seated there. We can +afford to bide our time, and assuredly it will not be long before +a party is formed against Warwick. Until then we must bear everything. +Our interests are the same. If he is content to remain a prop to +the throne, and not to eclipse it, the memory of the past will not +stand between us, and I shall regard him as the weapon that has +beaten down the House of York and restored us to our own, and shall +give him my confidence and friendship. If, on the other hand, he +assumes too much, and tries to lord it over us, I shall seek other +support and gather a party which even he will be unable successfully +to withstand. I should have thought, Edward, that you would be even +more glad than I that this long time of weary waiting for action +is over, and that once again the banner of Lancaster will be spread +to the winds." + +"I shall be that, mother. Rather would I meet death in the field +than live cooped up here, a pensioner of France. But I own that +I should feel more joy at the prospect if the people of England +had declared in our favour, instead of its being Warwick -- whom +you have always taught me to fear and hate -- who thus comes to +offer to place my father again on the throne, and whose goodwill +towards us is simply the result of pique and displeasure because +he is no longer first in the favour of Edward. It does not seem to +me that a throne won by the aid of a traitor can be a stable one." + +"You are a foolish boy," the queen said angrily. "Do you not see +that by marrying Warwick's daughter you will attach him firmly to +us?" + +"Marriages do not count for much, mother. Another of Warwick's +daughters married Clarence, Edward's brother, and yet he purposes +to dethrone Edward." + +The queen gave an angry gesture and said, "You have my permission +to retire, Edward. I am in no mood to listen to auguries of evil +at the present moment." + +The prince hesitated for a moment as if about to speak, but with an +effort controlled himself, and bowing deeply to his mother, left +the room. + +"Edward is in a perverse humour," the queen said in a tone of much +vexation to Sir Thomas Tresham, when Gervaise had left the room. +"However, I know he will bear himself well when the hour of trial +comes." + +"That I can warrant he will, madam; he has a noble character, frank +and fearless, and yet thoughtful beyond his years. He will make, +I believe, a noble king, and may well gather round him all parties +in the state. But your Majesty must make excuses for his humour. +Young people are strong in their likes and dislikes. He has never +heard you speak aught but ill of Warwick, and he knows how much +harm the Earl has done to your House. The question of expediency +does not weigh with the young as with their elders. While you see +how great are the benefits that will accrue from an alliance with +Warwick, and are ready to lay aside the hatred of years and to +forget the wrongs you have suffered, the young prince is unable so +quickly to forget that enmity against the Earl that he has learnt +from you." + +"You are right, Sir Thomas, and I cannot blame Edward that he is +unable, as I am, to forget the past. What steps would you advise +that I myself should take? Shall I remain passive here, or shall +I do what I can to rouse our partisans in England?" + +"I should say the latter, madam. Of course it will not do to trust +to letters, for were one of these to fall into the wrong hands +it might cause the ruin of Warwick's expedition; but I should say +that a cautious message sent by word of mouth to some of our old +adherents would be of great use. I myself will, if your Majesty +chooses to entrust me with the mission, undertake to carry it out. +I should take ship and land in the west, and would travel in the +guise of a simple country gentleman, and call upon your adherents +in all the western counties. It would be needful first to make +out a list of the nobles who have shown themselves devoted to your +cause, and I should bid these hold themselves and their retainers +in readiness to take the field suddenly. I should say no word of +Warwick, but merely hint that you will not land alone, but with a +powerful array, and that all the chances are in your favour." + +"But it would be a dangerous mission, Sir Thomas." + +"Not greatly so, madam. My own estates lie in Sussex, and there +would be but little chance of my recognition, save by your own +adherents, who may have seen me among the leaders of your troops +in battle; and even that is improbable. At present Edward deems +himself so securely seated on the throne that men can travel +hither and thither through the country without being questioned, +and the Lancastrians live quietly with the Yorkists. Unless I were +so unfortunate as to meet a Yorkist noble who knew that I was a +banished man and one who had the honour of being in your Majesty's +confidence, I do not think that any danger could possibly arise. +What say you, wife?" + +"I cannot think that there is no danger," Lady Tresham said; "but +even so I would not say a word to hinder you from doing service +to the cause. I know of no one else who could perform the mission. +You have left my side to go into battle before now, and I cannot +think that the danger of such an expedition can be as great as +that which you would undergo in the field. Therefore, my dear lord, +I would say no word now to stay you." + +She spoke bravely and unfalteringly, but her face had paled when +Sir Thomas first made the proposal, and the colour had not yet +come back to her cheeks. + +"Bravely spoken, dame," the queen said warmly. "Well, Sir Thomas, +I accept your offer, and trust that you will not be long separated +from your wife and son, who will of course journey with me when +I go to England, where doubtless you will be able to rejoin us +a few days after we land. Now let us talk over the noblemen and +gentlemen in the west, upon whom we can rely, if not to join our +banner as soon as it is spread, at least to say no word that will +betray you." + +Two days later Sir Thomas Tresham started on his journey, while the +queen remained at Amboise eagerly awaiting the news that Warwick +had collected a fleet, and was ready to set sail. Up to this point +the Duke of Clarence had sided with Warwick against his brother, +and had passed over with him to France, believing, no doubt, that +if the Earl should succeed in dethroning Edward, he intended to +place him, his son-in-law, upon the throne. He was rudely awakened +from this delusion by Charles of Burgundy, who, being in all but +open rebellion against his suzerain, the King of France, kept himself +intimately acquainted with all that was going on. He despatched a +female emissary to Clarence to inform him of the league Warwick had +made with the Lancastrians, and the intended marriage between his +daughter Anne and the young prince; imploring him to be reconciled +with his brother and to break off his alliance with the Earl, who +was on the point of waging war against the House of York. + +Clarence took the advice, and went over to England, where he made +his peace with Edward, the more easily because the king, who was +entirely given up to pleasure, treated with contempt the warnings +the Duke of Burgundy sent him of the intended invasion by Warwick. And +yet a moment's serious reflection should have shown him that his +position was precarious. The crushing exactions of the tax gatherers, +in order to provide the means for Edward's lavish expenditure, +had already caused very serious insurrections in various parts of +the country, and his unpopularity was deep and general. In one of +these risings the royal troops had suffered a crushing defeat. +The Earl Rivers, the father, and Sir John Woodville, one of the +brothers, of the queen had, with the Earl of Devon, been captured +by the rebels, and the three had been beheaded, and the throne +had only been saved by the intervention of Warwick. + +Thus, then, Edward had every reason for fearing the result should +the Earl appear in arms against him. He took, however, no measures +whatever to prepare for the coming storm, and although the Duke of +Burgundy despatched a fleet to blockade Harfleur, where Warwick +was fitting out his expedition, and actually sent the name of the +port at which the Earl intended to land if his fleet managed to +escape from Harfleur, Edward continued carelessly to spend his +time in pleasure and dissipation, bestowing his full confidence upon +the Archbishop of York and the Marquis of Montague, both brothers +of the Earl of Warwick. + +The elements favoured his enemies, for early in September the Duke +of Burgundy's Fleet, off Harfleur, was dispersed by a storm, and +Warwick, as soon as the gale abated, set sail, and on the 13th +landed on the Devonshire coast. His force was a considerable one, +for the French king had furnished him both with money and men; on +effecting his landing he found no army assembled to oppose him. A +few hours after his disembarkation, he was joined by Sir Thomas +Tresham, who gave him the good news that the whole of the west +was ready to rise, and that in a few days all the great landowners +would join him with their retainers. This turned out to be +the case, and Warwick, with a great array, marched eastward. Kent +had already risen, and London declared for King Henry. Warwick, +therefore, instead of marching thither, moved towards Lincolnshire, +where Edward was with his army, having gone north to repress +an insurrection that had broken out there at the instigation of +Warwick. + +Lord Montague now threw off the mask, and declared for King Henry. +Most of the soldiers followed him, and Edward, finding it hopeless +to oppose Warwick's force, which was now within a short march of +him, took ship with a few friends who remained faithful, and sailed +for Holland. Warwick returned to London, where he took King Henry +from the dungeon in the Tower, into which he himself had, five +years before, thrown him, and proclaimed him king. + +On the day that this took place Dame Tresham arrived in London with +her son. The queen had found that she could not for the present +cross, as she was waiting for a large French force which was to +accompany her. As it was uncertain how long the delay might last, +she counselled her friend to join her husband. The revolution +had been accomplished without the loss of a single life, with the +exception of that of the Earl of Worcester, who was hated for his +cruelty by the people. Edward's principal friends took refuge in +various religious houses. The queen, her three daughters, and her +mother, fled to the sanctuary at Westminster. All these were left +unmolested, nor was any step taken against the other adherents of +the House of York. Warwick was now virtually King of England. +The king, whose intellect had always been weak, was now almost an +imbecile, and Margaret of Anjou was still detained in France. Sir +Thomas Tresham went down to his estates in Kent, and there lived +quietly for some months. The Duke of Clarence had joined Warwick +as soon as he saw that his brother's cause was lost; and as the +Duke had no knowledge of his changed feelings towards him, he was +heartily welcomed. An act of settlement was passed by Parliament +entailing the Crown on Henry's son Edward, Prince of Wales, +and in case of that prince's death without issue, on the Duke of +Clarence. On the 12th of March following (1471) Edward suddenly +appeared with a fleet with which he had been secretly supplied +by the Duke of Burgundy, and, sailing north, landed in the Humber. +He found the northern population by no means disposed to aid him, +but upon his taking a solemn oath that he had no designs whatever +upon the throne, but simply claimed to be restored to his rights +and dignities as Duke of York, he was joined by a sufficient force +to enable him to cross the Trent. As he marched south his army +speedily swelled, and he was joined by many great lords. + +Warwick had summoned Henry's adherents to the field, and marched +north to meet him. When the armies approached each other, the Duke +of Clarence, who commanded a portion of Henry's army, went over +with his whole force to Edward, and Warwick, being no longer in a +position to give battle, was obliged to draw off and allow Edward +to march unopposed towards London. The citizens, with their usual +fickleness, received him with the same outburst of enthusiasm with +which, five months before, they had greeted the entry of Warwick. +The unfortunate King Henry was again thrown into his dungeon in +the Tower, and Edward found himself once more King of England. + +Sir Thomas Tresham, as soon as he heard of the landing of Edward, +had hastened up to London. In his uncertainty how matters would go, +he brought his wife and son up with him, and left them in lodgings, +while he marched north with Warwick. As soon as the defection of +Clarence opened the road to London, he left the Earl, promising +to return in a few days, and rode to town, arriving there two days +before Edward's entry, and, purchasing another horse, took his +wife and son down to St. Albans, where leaving them, he rejoined +Warwick. In a few days the latter had gathered sufficient forces to +enable him to risk the fortunes of a battle, and, marching south, +he encamped with his army on the common north of Barnet. Edward +had come out to meet him, and the two armies slept on Easter Eve +within two miles of each other. + +Late in the evening Clarence sent a messenger to the Earl, offering +to mediate, but the offer was indignantly refused by Warwick. + +In the darkness, neither party was aware of the other's precise +position. Warwick was much stronger than the king in artillery, +and had placed it on his right wing. The king, in his ignorance of +the enemy's position, had placed his troops considerably more to +the right than those of Warwick's army. The latter, believing that +Edward's line was facing his, kept up a heavy cannonade all night +upon where he supposed Edward's left to be -- a cannonade which +was thus entirely futile. + +In the morning (April 14th) a heavy mist covered the country +and prevented either force from seeing the other's dispositions. +Warwick took the command of his left wing, having with him the Duke +of Exeter. Somerset was in command of his centre, and Montague +and Oxford of his right. + +Edward placed himself in the centre of his array, the Duke of +Gloucester commanded on his right, and Lord Hastings on his left. + +Desirous, from his inferiority in artillery, to fight out the battle +hand to hand, Edward, at six o'clock in the morning, ordered his +trumpets to blow, and, after firing a few shots, advanced through +the mist to attack the enemy. His misconception as to Warwick's +position, which had saved his troops from the effects of the +cannonade during the night, was now disadvantageous to him, for the +Earl's right so greatly outflanked his left that when they came +into contact Hastings found himself nearly surrounded by a vastly +superior force. His wing fought valiantly, but was at length +broken by Oxford's superior numbers, and driven out of the field. +The mist prevented the rest of the armies from knowing what had +happened on the king's left. Edward himself led the charge on +Warwick's centre, and having his best troops under his command, +pressed forward with such force and vehemence that he pierced +Somerset's lines and threw them into confusion. + +Just as Warwick's right had outflanked the king's left, so his own +left was outflanked by Gloucester. Warwick's troops fought with +great bravery, and, in spite of the disaster to his centre, were +holding their ground until Oxford, returning from his pursuit of +the king's left, came back through the mist. The king's emblem +was a sun, that of Oxford a star with streaming rays. In the dim +light this was mistaken by Warwick's men for the king's device, +and believing that Oxford was far away on the right, they received +him with a discharge of arrows. This was at once returned, and a +conflict took place. At last the mistake was discovered, but the +confusion caused was irreparable. Warwick and Oxford each suspected +the other of treachery, and the king's right still pressing on, +the confusion increased, and the battle, which had been so nearly +won by the Earl, soon became a complete defeat, and by ten in the +morning Warwick's army was in full flight. + +Accounts differ as to the strength of the forces engaged, but it is +probable that there was no great inequality, and that each party +brought some fifteen thousand men into the field. The number of +slain is also very uncertain, some historians placing the total at +ten thousand, others as low as one thousand; but from the number +of nobles who fell, the former computation is probably nearest to +the truth. Warwick, his brother Montague, and many other nobles +and gentlemen, were killed, the only great nobles on his side who +escaped being the Earls of Somerset and Oxford; many were also killed +on Edward's side, and the slaughter among the ordinary fighting +men was greater than usual. + +Hitherto in the battles that had been fought during the civil war; +while the leaders taken on the field were frequently executed, the +common soldiers were permitted to return to their homes, as they +had only been acting under the orders of their feudal superiors, +and were not considered responsible for their acts. At Barnet, +however, Edward, smarting from the humiliation he had suffered +by his enforced flight from England, owing to the whole country +declaring for his rival, gave orders that no quarter was to be +granted. It was an anxious day at St. Albans, where many ladies +whose husbands were with Warwick's army had, like Dame Tresham, +taken up their quarters. It was but a few miles from the field +of battle. In the event of victory they could at once join their +husbands, while in case of defeat they could take refuge in the +sanctuary of the abbey. Messengers the night before had brought +the news that the battle would begin at the dawn of day, and with +intense anxiety they waited for the news. + +Dame Tresham and her son attended early mass at the abbey, and had +returned to their lodgings, when Sir Thomas rode up at full speed. +His armour was dinted and his plume shorn away from his helmet. As +he entered the house he was met by his wife, who had run downstairs +as she heard his horse stop at the door. A glance at his face was +sufficient to tell the news. + +"We have lost the day," he said. "Warwick and Montague are both +killed. All is lost here for the present. Which will you do, my +love, ride with me to the West, where Queen Margaret will speedily +land, if indeed she has not landed already, or take sanctuary here +with the boy?" + +"I will go with you," she said. "I would vastly rather do so." + +"I will tell you more on the road," he said. "There is no time to +be lost now." + +The woman of the house was called, and at once set her son to +saddle the other horse and to give a feed to that of the knight. +Dame Tresham busied herself with packing the saddlebags while her +husband partook of a hasty meal; and ten minutes after his arrival +they set off, Gervaise riding behind his father, while the latter +led the horse on which his wife was mounted. A thick mist hung over +the country. + +"This mist told against us in the battle, wife, for as we advanced +our forces fell into confusion, and more than once friend attacked +friend, believing that he was an enemy. However, it has proved an +advantage to us now, for it has enabled great numbers to escape +who might otherwise have been followed and cut down. I was very +fortunate. I had left my horse at a little farmhouse two miles in +the rear of our camp, and in the fog had but small hope of finding +it; but soon after leaving the battlefield, I came upon a rustic +hurrying in the same direction as myself, and upon questioning him +it turned out that he was a hand on the very farm at which I had +left the horse. He had, with two or three others, stolen out after +midnight to see the battle, and was now making his way home again, +having seen indeed but little, but having learned from fugitives +that we had been defeated. He guided me to the farmhouse, which +otherwise I should assuredly never have reached. His master +was favourable to our party, and let the man take one of the cart +horses, on which he rode as my guide until he had placed me upon +the high road to St. Albans, and I was then able to gallop on at +full speed." + +"And Warwick and his brother Montague are both killed?" + +"Both. The great Earl will make and unmake no more kings. He has +been a curse to England, with his boundless ambition, his vast +possessions, and his readiness to change sides and to embroil the +country in civil war for purely personal ends. The great nobles +are a curse to the country, wife. They are, it is true, a check +upon kingly ill doing and oppression; but were they, with their +great arrays of retainers and feudal followers, out of the way, +methinks that the citizens and yeomen would be able to hold their +own against any king." + +"Was the battle a hard fought one?" + +"I know but little of what passed, except near the standard of +Warwick himself. There the fighting was fierce indeed, for it was +against the Earl that the king finally directed his chief onslaught. +Doubtless he was actuated both by a deep personal resentment +against the Earl for the part he had played and the humiliation +he had inflicted upon him, and also by the knowledge that a defeat +of Warwick personally would be the heaviest blow that he could +inflict upon the cause of Lancaster." + +"Then do you think the cause is lost?" + +"I say not that. Pembroke has a strong force in Wales, and if the +West rises, and Queen Margaret on landing can join him, we may +yet prevail; but I fear that the news of the field of Barnet will +deter many from joining us. Men may risk lands and lives for a +cause which seems to offer a fair prospect of success, but they +can hardly be blamed for holding back when they see that the chances +are all against them. Moreover, as a Frenchwoman, it cannot be +denied that Margaret has never been popular in England, and her +arrival here, aided by French gold and surrounded by Frenchmen, +will tell against her with the country people. I went as far as +I could on the day before I left Amboise, urging her on no account +to come hither until matters were settled. It would have been +infinitely better had the young prince come alone, and landed in +the West without a single follower. The people would have admired +his trust in them, and would, I am sure, have gathered strongly +round his banner. However, we must still hope for the best. Fortune +was against us today: it may be with us next time we give battle. +And with parties so equally divided throughout the country a signal +victory would bring such vast numbers to our banners that Edward +would again find it necessary to cross the seas." + + + +CHAPTER II THE BATTLE OF TEWKESBURY + + +Riding fast, Sir Thomas Tresham crossed the Thames at Reading before +any news of the battle of Barnet had arrived there. On the third +day after leaving St. Albans he reached Westbury, and there heard +that the news had been received of the queen's landing at Plymouth +on the very day on which her friends had been defeated at Barnet, +and that she had already been joined by the Duke of Somerset, the +Earl of Devon, and others, and that Exeter had been named as the +point of rendezvous for her friends. As the Lancastrians were +in the majority in Wiltshire and Somerset, there was no longer any +fear of arrest by partisans of York, and after resting for a day +Sir Thomas Tresham rode quietly on to Exeter, where the queen had +already arrived. + +The battle of Barnet had not, in reality, greatly weakened the +Lancastrian cause. The Earl of Warwick was so detested by the +adherents of the Red Rose that comparatively few of them had joined +him, and the fight was rather between the two sections of Yorkists +than between York and Lancaster. The Earl's death had broken up +his party, and York and Lancaster were now face to face with each +other, without his disturbing influence on either side. Among +those who had joined the queen was Tresham's great friend, the Grand +Prior of St. John's. Sir Thomas took up his lodgings in the house +where he had established himself. The queen was greatly pleased at +the arrival of Dame Tresham, and at her earnest request the latter +shared her apartments, while Gervaise remained with his father. + +"So this is the young Knight of St. John," the prior said, on the +evening of the arrival of Sir Thomas. "I would, Tresham, that I were +at present at Rhodes, doing battle with the infidels, rather than +engaged in this warfare against Englishmen and fellow Christians." + +"I can well understand that," Sir Thomas said. + +"I could not hold aloof here, Tresham. The vows of our Order +by no means hinder us from taking part in the affairs of our own +country. The rule of the Order is indeed against it, but the rule +is constantly broken. Were it otherwise there could be no commanderies +in this or any other country; we should have, on entering the Order, +to abandon our nationality, and to form part of one community in +the East. The Order is true to its oaths. We cannot defend the Holy +Sepulchre, for that, for the present, is hopelessly lost; but we +can and do wage war with the infidel. For this funds are necessary +as well as swords, and our commanderies throughout Europe supply +the funds by which the struggle is maintained, and, when it is +needed, send out contingents to help those fighting in the East. +It was from the neglect of this cardinal point that the Templars +fell. Their commanderies amassed wealth and wide possessions, but +unlike us the knights abstained altogether from fulfilling their +vows, and ceased to resist the infidel. Therefore they were +suppressed, and, with the general approval of Europe, a portion +of their possessions was handed over to the knights of St. John. +However, as I understand, it is your wish that as soon as the +boy comes of age to wield arms he shall go to Rhodes and become +an active member of the Order. This is indeed the rule with all +neophytes, but having served a certain time they are then permitted to +return and join one of the commanderies in their native countries." + +"I do not wish that for Gervaise," his father said; "at least, +I wish him to remain at Rhodes until all the civil troubles are +absolutely at an end here. My life has been ruined by them. Loving +retirement and quiet, and longing for nothing so much as a life +among my tenantry, I have almost from a boy been actively engaged +in warfare or have been away as an exile. Here every one of gentle +blood has been more or less mixed up in these civil broils. To +few of us does it personally matter whether a member of the House +of York or Lancaster sits on the throne, and yet we have been +almost compelled to take sides with one or the other; and now, +in my middle age I am on the eve of another battle in which I risk +my life and fortune. If we win I gain naught but the satisfaction +of seeing young Edward made King of England. If we lose I am going +into exile again, or I may leave my wife a widow, and my child +penniless." + +"It is too true, Tresham; and as I am as likely to fall as you are, +the child might be left without a protector as well as fatherless. +However, against that I will provide. I will write a letter +to Peter D'Aubusson, who is the real governor of Rhodes, for the +Grand Master Orsini is so old that his rule is little more than +nominal. At his death D'Aubusson is certain to be elected Grand +Master. He is a dear friend of mine. We entered the Order the +same year, and were comrades in many a fight with the Moslems, and +I am quite sure that when I tell him that it is my last request +of him, he will, in memory of our long friendship, appoint your son +as one of the Grand Master's pages. As you know, no one, however +high his rank, is accepted as a novice before the age of sixteen. +After a year's probation he is received into the body of the +Order as a professed knight, and must go out and serve for a time +in Rhodes. After three years of active service he must reside two +more at the convent, and can then be made a commander. There is +but one exception to the rule -- namely, that the pages of the +grand master are entitled to the privilege of admission at the age +of twelve, so that they become professed knights at thirteen. Your +son is now but nine, you say, and we must remember that D'Aubusson +is not yet Grand Master, and Orsini may live for some years yet. +D'Aubusson, however, can doubtless get him to appoint the boy +as one of his pages. But, in any case, there are three years yet +to be passed before he can go out. Doubtless these he will spend +under his mother's care; but as it is as well to provide against +everything, I will furnish your dame with a letter to the knight +who will probably succeed me as Grand Prior of the English langue, +asking him to see to the care and education of the boy up to the +time when he can proceed to Rhodes. We may hope, my dear Tresham, +that there will be no occasion to use such documents, and that you +and I may both be able personally to watch over his career. Still, +it is as well to take every precaution. I shall, of course, give +D'Aubusson full particulars about you, your vow, and your wishes." + +"I thank you greatly, old friend," Sir Thomas said. "It has taken +a load off my mind. I shall leave him here with his mother when +we march forward, and bid her, if ill befalls me, cross again to +France, and then to keep Gervaise with her until she can bring +herself to part with him. She has her jewels and a considerable +sum of money which I accepted from the man who has been enjoying +my estates for the last five years, in lieu of the monies that he +had received during that time. Therefore, she will not lack means +for some years to come. Besides, Queen Margaret has a real affection +for her, and will, doubtless, be glad to have her with her again +in exile." + +"When I am old enough," Gervaise said, suddenly looking up from a +missal of the Grand Prior's which he had been examining, "I will +chop off the head of the Duke of York, and bring mother back to +England." + +"You will be a valiant champion no doubt, my boy," the prior said, +laughing. "But that is just what your father does not want. Chop +off the heads of as many infidels as you will, but leave Englishmen +alone, be they dukes or commoners. It is a far more glorious +career to be aiding to defend Europe against the Moslem than to be +engaged in wars with your own countrymen. If the great lords will +fight, let them fight it out themselves without our aid; but I +hope that long before you become a man even they will be tired of +these perpetual broils, and that some agreement may be arrived +at, and peace reign in this unhappy land." + +"Besides, Gervaise," his father added, "you must bear in mind always +that my earnest wish and hope is that you will become a champion +of the Cross. I took a solemn vow before you were born that if a +son were granted to me I would dedicate him to the service of the +Cross, and if I am taken from you, you must still try to carry +that oath into effect. I trust that, at any rate for some years +after you attain manhood, you will expend your whole strength and +powers in the defence of Christianity, and as a worthy knight of +the Order of St. John. Too many of the knights, after serving for +three years against the infidels, return to their native countries +and pass the rest of their lives in slothful ease at their +commanderies, save perhaps when at any great crisis they go out +for a while and join in the struggle. Such is not the life I should +wish you to lead. At the death of your mother and myself, you will +have no family ties in England -- nothing to recall you here. If +the House of York succeeds in establishing itself firmly on the +throne, my estates will be forfeited. Therefore, regard Rhodes as +your permanent home, and devote your life to the Order. Beginning +so young, you may hope to distinguish yourself -- to gain high +rank in it; but remember that though these are my wishes, they +are not my orders, and that your career must be in your own hands." + +"I will be a brave knight, father," the boy said firmly. + +"That is right, my boy. Now go upstairs to your bed; it is already +late. I do not regret my vow," he went on, after Gervaise had left +the room, "though I regret that he is my only son. It is singular +that men should care about what comes after them, but I suppose it +is human nature. I should have liked to think that my descendants +would sit in the old house, and that men of my race and name would +long own the estates. But doubtless it is all for the best; for +at least I can view the permanent loss of my estates, in case the +Yorkists triumph, without any poignant regret." + +"Doubtless it is for the best, Tresham, and you must remember that +things may not, even now, turn out as you think. A knight who has +done a brave service does not find much difficulty in obtaining +from the Pope a dispensation from his vows. Numbers of knights +have so left the Order and have married and perpetuated their name. +It is almost a necessity that it should be so, for otherwise many +princes and barons would object to their sons entering the Order. +Its object is to keep back the irruption of the Moslems, and when +men have done their share of hard work no regret need be felt +if they desire to leave the Order. Our founder had no thought of +covering Europe with monasteries, and beyond the fact that it is +necessary there should be men to administer our manors and estates, +I see no reason why any should not freely leave when they reach +the age of thirty or thirty-five, and indeed believe that it would +strengthen rather than weaken us were the vows, taken at the age +of seventeen, to be for fifteen years only." + +"There is something in that," the knight said thoughtfully. "However, +that is far in the distance, and concerns me but little; still, +I agree with you, for I see no advantage in men, after their time +of usefulness to the Order is past, being bound to settle down to +a monastic life if by nature and habit unsuited for it. There are +some spirits who, after long years of warfare, are well content +so to do, but there are assuredly others to whom a life of forced +inactivity, after a youth and manhood spent in action, must be +well nigh unendurable. And now tell me frankly what you think of +our chances here." + +"Everything depends upon time. Promises of aid have come in from +all quarters, and if Edward delays we shall soon be at the head of +an overwhelming force. But Edward, with all his faults and vices, +is an able and energetic leader, and must be well aware that if he +is to strike successfully he must strike soon. We must hope that +he will not be able to do this. He cannot tell whether we intend +to march direct to London, or to join Pembroke in Wales, or to +march north, and until he divines our purpose, he will hardly dare +to move lest we should, by some rapid movement, interpose between +himself and London. If he gives us a month, our success is certain. +If he can give battle in a fortnight, no one can say how the matter +will end." + +Edward, indeed, was losing no time. He stayed but a few days +in London after his victory at Barnet, and on the 19th of April +left for Windsor, ordering all his forces to join him there. The +Lancastrians had endeavoured to puzzle him as to their intended +movements by sending parties out in various directions; but as +soon as he had gathered a force, numerically small, but composed +of veteran soldiers, he hurried west, determined to bring on a +battle at the earliest opportunity. The queen's advisers determined +to move first to Wells, as from that point they could either go +north or march upon London. Edward entered Abingdon on the 27th, +and then, finding the Lancastrians still at Wells, marched to the +northwest, by which means he hoped to intercept them if they moved +north, while he would be able to fall back and bar their road to +London if they advanced in that direction. He therefore moved to +Cirencester, and waited there for news until he learned that they +had visited Bristol and there obtained reinforcements of men and +supplies of money and cannon, and had then started on the high +road to Gloucester. + +He at once sent off messengers to the son of Lord Beauchamp, who +held the Castle of Gloucester for him, assuring him that he was +following at full speed, and would come to his aid forthwith. The +messengers arrived in time, and when the queen, after a long march, +arrived before Gloucester, she found the gates shut in her face. +The governor had taken steps to prevent her numerous adherents in +the town from rising on her behalf, and, manning the walls, refused +to surrender. Knowing that Edward was coming up rapidly, it was +evident that there was no time to spare in an attempt to take the +town, and the queen's army therefore pressed on, without waiting, +to Tewkesbury. Once across the river they would speedily be joined +by the Earl of Pembroke, and Edward would be forced to fall back +at once. + +By the time they reached the river, however, they were thoroughly +exhausted. They had marched thirty-six miles without rest, along +bad roads and through woods, and were unable to go farther. The +queen urged that the river should be crossed, but the leaders of +the force were of opinion that it was better to halt. Edward would +be able to follow them across the river, and were he to attack +them when in disorder, and still further wearied by the operation +of making the passage, he would certainly crush them. Moreover, +a further retreat would discourage the soldiers, and as a battle +must now be fought, it was better to fight where they were, +especially as they could choose a strong position. The queen gave +way, and the army encamped on a large field in front of the town. +The position was well calculated for defence, for the country +around was so broken and intercepted with lanes and deep hedges +and ditches, that it was extremely difficult of approach. + +In the evening Edward came up, his men having also marched some +six-and-thirty miles, and encamped for the night within three miles +of the Lancastrian position. The queen's troops felt confident of +victory. In point of numbers they were superior to their antagonists, +and had the advantage of a strong position. Sir Thomas Tresham +had, as he proposed, left his wife and son at Exeter when the force +marched away. + +"Do not be despondent, love," he said to his weeping wife, as he +bade her goodbye. "Everything is in our favour, and there is a +good hope of a happy termination to this long struggle. But, win +or lose, be assured it is the last time I will draw my sword. I +have proved my fidelity to the House of Lancaster; I have risked +life and fortune in their cause; but I feel that I have done my +share and more, and whichever way Providence may now decide the +issue of the struggle, I will accept it. If we lose, and I come +scatheless through the fight, I will ride hither, and we will +embark at Plymouth for France, and there live quietly until the +time comes when Edward may feel himself seated with sufficient +firmness on the throne to forgive past offences and to grant +an amnesty to all who have fought against him. In any other case, +dear, you know my wishes, and I bid you carry them out within +twenty-four hours of your receiving news of a defeat, without +waiting longer for my appearance." + +As soon as it was light, Edward advanced to the attack. The Duke +of Gloucester was in command of the vanguard. He himself led +the centre, while the rear was commanded by the Marquis of Dorset +and Lord Hastings. The most advanced division of Lancastrians +was commanded by the Duke of Somerset and his brother. The Grand +Prior of the Order of St. John and Lord Wenlock were stationed in +the centre, the Earl of Devon with the reserve. Refreshed by their +rest, the queen's troops were in good spirits. While awaiting the +attack, she and the prince rode among the ranks, encouraging the +men with fiery speeches, and promising large rewards to all in +case of victory. + +Gloucester made his advance with great difficulty. The obstacles +to his progress were so many and serious that his division was +brought to a halt before it came into contact with the defenders. +He therefore brought up his artillery and opened a heavy cannonade +upon Somerset's position, supporting his guns with flights of +arrows, and inflicting such heavy loss upon him that the duke felt +compelled to take the offensive. + +Having foreseen that he might be obliged to do so, he had, early +in the morning, carefully examined the ground in front of him, and +had found some lanes by which he could make a flank attack on the +enemy. Moving his force down these lanes, where the trees and hedges +completely hid his advance from the Yorkists, he fell suddenly +upon Edward's centre, which, taken by surprise at the unexpected +attack, was driven in confusion up the hill behind it. Somerset +was quick to take advantage of his success, and wheeling his men +round fell upon the Duke of Gloucester's division, and was equally +successful in his attack upon it. Had the centre, under Lord +Wenlock, moved forward at once to his support, the victory would +have been assured; but Wenlock lay inactive, and Somerset was now +engaged in conflict with the whole of Edward's force. But even +under these circumstances he still gained ground, when suddenly +the whole aspect of the battle was changed. + +Before it began Edward had sent two hundred spearmen to watch a +wood near the defenders' lines, as he thought that the Lancastrians +might place a force there to take him in flank as he attacked +their front. He ordered them, if they found the wood unoccupied, +to join in the fight as opportunity might offer. The wood was +unoccupied, and the spearmen, seeing the two divisions of their army +driven backwards, and being thereby cut off from their friends, +issued from the wood and, charging down in a body, fell suddenly +upon Somerset's rear. + +Astounded and confused by an attack from such a quarter, and believing +that it was an act of treachery by one of their own commanders, +Somerset's men, who had hitherto been fighting with the greatest +bravery, fell into confusion. Edward's quick eye soon grasped the +opportunity, and rallying his troops he charged impetuously down +upon the Lancastrians, seconded hotly by Gloucester and his division. + +The disorder in Somerset's lines speedily grew into a panic, and +the division broke up and fled through the lanes to the right +and left. Somerset, after in vain trying to stop the panic, rode +furiously back into the camp, followed by his principal officers, +and riding up to Lord Wenlock he cleft his head in two with a +battleaxe. His resentment, although justified by the inactivity of +this nobleman at such a crisis, was yet disastrous, as it left the +centre without a leader, and threw it into a state of disorganization, +as many must have supposed that Somerset had turned traitor and +gone over to the enemy. Before any disposition could be made, +Edward and Gloucester poured their forces into the camp, and the +Lancastrians at once broke and fled. Many of their leaders took +refuge in the church, an asylum which they deemed inviolable, and +which the Lancastrians had honourably respected in their hour of +triumph. + +Among them were the Duke of Somerset, the Grand Prior of the Order +of St. John, Sir Humphrey Audely, Sir Gervis of Clifton, Sir William +Gainsby, Sir William Cary, Sir Henry Rose, Sir Thomas Tresham, +and seven esquires. Margaret of Anjou fell into the hands of the +victors. As to the fate of the young prince, accounts differ. Some +authorities say that he was overtaken and slain on the field, but +the majority related that he was captured and taken before Edward, +who asked him, "What brought you to England?" On his replying +boldly, "My father's crown and mine own inheritance," Edward struck +him in the mouth with his gauntlet, and his attendants, or some +say his brothers, at once despatched the youth with their swords. + +The king, with Gloucester and Clarence, then went to the church +at Tewkesbury, where the knights had taken refuge, burst open the +doors, and entered it. A priest, bearing the holy vessels, threw +himself before the king, and would not move until he promised to +pardon all who had taken sanctuary there. The king then retired, +and trusting in the royal word, the gentlemen made no attempt to +escape, although it is said that they could easily have done so. +Two days later a party of soldiers by the king's orders broke into +the church, dragged them from the foot of the altar, and beheaded +them outside. + +The news of the issue of the fatal battle of Tewkesbury, the capture +of the queen, and the death of the prince, was borne to Exeter by +fugitives on the following day. Beyond the fact that the Earl of +Devon and other nobles were known to have been killed, and Somerset +with a party of knights had taken sanctuary, they could give no +details as to the fate of individuals. In the deepest distress at +the utter ruin of the cause, and in ignorance of the fate of her +husband, who she could only hope was one of those who had gained +sanctuary, Dame Tresham prepared for flight. This accomplished, +she had only to wait, and sit in tearless anguish at the window, +listening intently whenever a horseman rode past. All night her +watch continued. Gervaise, who had cried himself to sleep, lay +on a couch beside her. Morning dawned, and she then knew that her +husband would not come, for had he escaped from the field he would +long ere this have been with her. The messenger with the news +had arrived at eight the previous morning, and, faithful to her +husband's wishes, at that hour she ordered the horses to be brought +round, and, joining a party of gentlemen who were also making for +the coast, rode with them to Plymouth. Arrangements were at once +made with the captain of a small ship in the port, and two days +later they landed at Honfleur, where Sir Thomas had enjoined his +wife to wait until she heard from him or obtained sure news of his +fate. + +A week after her arrival the news was brought by other fugitives +of the violation of the sanctuary by the king, and the murder of +Somerset and the gentlemen with him, of whom Sir Thomas Tresham +was known to have been one. + +The blow proved fatal to Dame Tresham. She had gone through many +trials and misfortunes, and had ever borne them bravely, but the +loss of her husband completely broke her down. Save to see his +wishes concerning their son carried out, she had no longer any +interest in life or any wish to live. But until the future of +Gervaise was assured, her mission was unfulfilled. His education +was her sole care; his mornings were spent at a monastery, where +the monks instructed the sons of such of the nobles and gentry of +the neighbourhood as cared that they should be able to read and +write. In the afternoon he had the best masters in the town in +military exercises. His evenings he spent with his mother, who strove +to instill in him the virtues of patience, mercy to the vanquished, +and valour, by stories of the great characters of history. She +herself spent her days in pious exercises, in attending the services +of the Church, and in acts of charity and kindness to her poorer +neighbours. But her strength failed rapidly, and she was but a shadow +of her former self when, two years and a half after her arrival at +Honfleur, she felt that if she was herself to hand Gervaise over +to the Order of St. John, she must no longer delay. Accordingly +she took ship to London, and landing there made her way with him +to the dwelling of the Order at Clerkenwell. It was in process of +rebuilding, for in 1381 it had been first plundered and then burned +by the insurgents under Wat Tyler. During the ninety years that +had elapsed since that event the work of rebuilding had proceeded +steadily, each grand prior making additions to the pile which, +although not yet fully completed, was already one of the grandest +and stateliest abodes in England. + +On inquiring for the grand prior, and stating that she had a letter +of importance for him, Dame Tresham and her son were shown up to +his apartment, and on entering were kindly and courteously received +by him when informed that she was the widow of the late Sir Thomas +Tresham. + +"I am the bearer of a letter for you, given into my hand by my +husband's dear friend your predecessor," she said, "a few days +before his murder at Tewkesbury. It relates to my son here." + +The grand prior opened the letter and read it. + +"Assuredly, madam, I will carry out the wishes here expressed," he +said. "They are, that I should forward at once the letter he has +given you to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and that until an answer is +received from him, I should take care of the boy here, and see +that he is instructed in all that is needful for a future knight of +our Order. I grieve to see that you yourself are looking so ill." + +"My course is well nigh run," she said. "I have, methinks, but +a few days to live. I am thankful that it has been permitted to +me to carry out my husband's wishes, and to place my boy in your +hands. That done, my work on earth is finished, and glad indeed +am I that the time is at hand when I can rejoin my dear husband." + +"We have a building here where we can lodge ladies in distress or +need, Dame Tresham, and trust that you will take up your abode +there." + +"I shall indeed be thankful to do so," she replied. "I know no one +in London, and few would care to lodge a dying woman." + +"We are Hospitallers," the grand prior said. "That was our sole +mission when we were first founded, and before we became a military +order, and it is still a part of our sworn duty to aid the distressed." + +A few minutes later Dame Tresham was conducted to a comfortable +apartment, and was given into the charge of a female attendant. The +next day she had another interview with the grand prior, to whom +she handed over her jewels and remaining money. This she prayed him +to devote to the furnishing of the necessary outfit for Gervaise. +She spent the rest of the day in the church of the hospital, had a +long talk with her son in the evening, giving him her last charges +as to his future life and conduct, and that night, as if she had +now fulfilled her last duty on earth, she passed away, and was +found by her attendant lying with a look of joy and peacefulness +on her dead face. + +Gervaise's grief was for a time excessive. He was nearly twelve +years old, and had never until now been separated from her even +for a day. She had often spoken to him of her end being near, but +until the blow came he had never quite understood that it could +be so. She had, on the night before her death, told him that he +must not grieve overmuch for her, for that in any case they must +have soon been sundered, and that it was far better that he should +think of her as at rest, and happy, than as leading a lonely and +sorrowful life. + +The grand prior, however, wisely gave him but little time to dwell +upon his loss, but as soon as her funeral had taken place, handed +him over to the knights who had the charge of the novices on +probation, and instructed them in their military exercises, and +of the chaplain who taught them such learning as was considered +requisite for a knight of the Order. + +The knights were surprised at the proficiency the lad had already +attained in the use of his weapons. + +"By St. Agatha," one of them exclaimed, after the conclusion of his +first lesson, "you have had good teachers, lad, and have availed +yourself rarely of them. If you go on like this you will become +a distinguished knight of our Order. With a few more years to +strengthen your arms I warrant me you will bear your part well in +your first tussle with the Moslem corsairs." + +It fortunately happened that a party of knights were starting for +Rhodes a few days after the admission of Gervaise to the Hospital, +and the letter to Sir Peter D'Aubusson was committed to their +charge. They were to proceed to Bordeaux by ship, then to journey +by land to Marseilles, and thence, being joined by some French +knights, to sail direct to Rhodes. Two months later an answer +was received. D'Aubusson wrote to the grand prior saying that he +would gladly carry out the last wishes of his dead friend, and that +he had already obtained from the grand master the appointment of +Gervaise Tresham as one of his pages, and begged that he might +be sent out with the next party of knights leaving England. It was +three months before such an opportunity occurred. During that time +Gervaise remained at the house of St. John's studying diligently, +and continuing his military exercises. These were severe; for +the scions of noble houses, who hoped some day to distinguish +themselves as knights, were put through many gymnastic exercises +-- were taught to spring on to a horse when clad in full armour, +to wield heavy battleaxes, to run and climb, and to prepare themselves +for all the possibilities of the mode of fighting of the day. + +Gervaise gained the encomiums, not only of his special preceptor, +but of the various knights in the house, and of the grand prior +himself, both for his strength and activity, and for the earnestness +with which he worked. When the time approached for his leaving +England, the grand prior ordered for him the outfit which would +be necessary in his position as a page of the grand master. The +dresses were numerous and rich, for although the knights of St. +John wore over their armour the simple mantle of their order, which +was a sleeveless garment of black relieved only by a white cross +on the chest, they indulged in the finest and most costly armour, +and in rich garments beneath their black mantles when not in armour. + +"I am well pleased with you, Gervaise," the grand prior said, on +the evening before he was to leave, "and I see in you the making +of a valiant knight of the Order. Maintain the same spirit you +have shown here; be obedient and reverent to your superiors; give +your whole mind to your duties; strive earnestly during the three +or four years that your pagedom will last, to perfect yourself in +military exercises, that when the time comes for you to buckle on +armour you will be able to bear yourself worthily. Remember that you +will have to win your knighthood, for the Order does not bestow +this honour, and you must remain a professed knight until you +receive it at the hands of some distinguished warrior. Ever bear +in mind that you are a soldier of the Cross. Avoid luxury, live +simply and modestly; be not led away by others, upon whom their +vows may sit but lightly; keep ever in your mind that you have +joined the Order neither to gain fame nor personal advantage, but +simply that you may devote the strength and the intelligence that +God has given you to protect Christendom from the advance of the +infidel. I shall hear of you from time to time from D'Aubusson, +and feel sure that the expectations I have formed of you will be +fulfilled." + + + +CHAPTER III THE GRAND MASTER'S PAGE + + +The grand prior had, in accordance with Dame Tresham's request, +sent the steward of the house to one of the principal jewellers +of the city who, as the Order were excellent customers, paid a good +price for her jewels. After the payment for the numerous dresses +required for the service as a page to the grand master, the grand +prior handed the balance of the money Dame Tresham had brought +with her, and that obtained by the sale of her jewels, to one of +the knights under whose charge Gervaise was to travel, to be given +by him to D'Aubusson for the necessities of Gervaise as a page. +During their term of service the pages received no remuneration, +all their expenses being paid by their families. Nevertheless, the +post was considered so honourable, and of such great advantage +to those entering the Order, that the appointments were eagerly +sought after. + +The head of the party was Sir Guy Redcar, who had been a commander +in England, but who was now relinquishing that post in order to +take a high office in the convent at the Island. With him were four +lads between seventeen and twenty who were going out as professed +knights, having served their year of probation as novices at the +grand priory. With these Gervaise was already acquainted, as they +had lived, studied, and performed their military exercises together. +The three eldest of these Gervaise liked much, but the youngest +of the party, Robert Rivers, a relation of the queen, had always +shown a very different spirit from the others. He was jealous +that a member of one of the defeated and disinherited Lancastrian +families should obtain a post of such honour and advantage as that +of page to the grand master, and that thus, although five years +younger, Gervaise should enter the Order on an equality with him. + +In point of strength and stature he was, of course, greatly superior +to Gervaise; but he had been spoilt from his childhood, was averse +to exercise, and dull at learning, and while Gervaise was frequently +commended by his instructors, he himself was constantly reproved, +and it had been more than once a question whether he should be +received as a professed knight at the termination of his year of +novitiate. Thus, while the other lads treated Gervaise kindly, and +indeed made rather a pet of him, Robert Rivers ignored him as much +as possible, and if obliged to speak to him did so with a pointed +rudeness that more than once brought upon him a sharp reproof +from his companions. Gervaise himself was but little affected +by Robert's manner. He was of an exceptionally good tempered +nature, and, indeed, was so occupied with his work and so anxious +to satisfy his teachers, that Robert's ill humour passed almost +unnoticed. + +The journey was performed without incident. During their passage +across the south of France, Gervaise's perfect knowledge of the +language gained for him a great advantage over his companions, and +enabled him to be of much use to Sir Guy. They had fine weather +during their passage up the Mediterranean, and in the day their +leader gave them their first lessons in the management and discipline +of a ship. + +"You will be nearly as much at sea as you are on land for the five +years you must stay at the convent," he said; "and it is essential +to the education of a knight of our Order to know all things +connected with the management of a ship, even to its building. We +construct our own galleys at Rhodes, using, of course, the labour +of slaves, but under our own superintendence; and it is even more +essential to us to know how to fight on sea than on land. There +is, too, you see, a rivalry among ourselves, for each langue has +its duties, and each strives to perform more gallant deeds and +to bring in more rich prizes than the others. We of England are +among the smallest of the langues, and yet methinks we do a fair +portion of the work, and gain fully our share of honour. There +is no fear of your having much time on your hands, for it is quite +certain that there will soon be open war between Mahomet and the +Order. In spite of the nominal truce, constant skirmishes are +taking place, so that, in addition to our fights with pirates, we +have sometimes encounters with the sultan's galleys. + +"Seven years ago, a number of our Order took part in the defence +of Lesbos, and lost their lives at its capture, and we have sure +information that Mahomet is preparing for an attack on the Island. +No doubt he thinks it will be an easy conquest, for in '57 he +succeeded in landing eighteen thousand men on the Island, and in +ravaging a large district, carrying off much booty. Since then, +however, the defences of Rhodes have been greatly strengthened. +Zacosta, our last grand master, laboured diligently to increase the +fortifications, and, specially, built on one side of the entrance +to the harbour a strong tower, called Fort St. Nicholas. Orsini +has carried on the works, which have been directed by D'Aubusson, +who is captain general of the forces of the Island, and who has +deepened the ditches and built a wall on the sea front of the town +six hundred feet in length and twenty feet in height, money being +found by the grand master from his private purse. + +"At present we are not sure whether the great armament that Mahomet +is preparing is intended for the capture of Negropont, which +belongs to Venice, or of Rhodes. Unfortunately Venice and Rhodes +are not good friends. In the course of our war with Egypt in +'58 we captured from some Venetian vessels, in which they were +travelling, several Egyptian merchants with a great store of goods. +The Venetians protested that as the ships were theirs we had no +right to interfere with our enemies who were travelling in them, +and, without giving time for the question to be discussed, at +once attacked our galleys, and sent a fleet against Rhodes. They +landed on the Island, and not only pillaged the district of Halki, +but, a number of natives having sought shelter in a cave, the +Venetians blocked up the entrance with brushwood, set it on fire, +and suffocated them all. + +"Shortly afterwards, another and larger fleet appeared off Rhodes, +and demanded the restitution of the Egyptians and their merchandise. +There was a great division of opinion in the council; but, seeing +the great danger that threatened us both from the Turks at +Constantinople and the Venetians, and that it was madness at such +a time to engage in war with a Christian power, the grand master +persuaded the council to accede to their request. There has never +been any friendly feeling between Venice and ourselves since that +time. Still, I trust that our common danger will reunite us, and +that whether Negropont or Rhodes is attacked by the Moslems, we +shall render loyal aid to each other." + +There was great excitement among Gervaise and his companions when +it was announced that Rhodes was in sight, and as they approached +the town they gazed with admiration at the castle with its stately +buildings, the palace of the grand master and the Hospital of St. +John, rising above the lower town, the massive walls strengthened +by projecting bastions, and the fortifications of the ports. Of +these there were two, with separate entrances, divided from each +other by a narrow tongue of land. At its extremity stood Fort St. +Nicholas, which was connected by a strong wall running along the +promontory to the town. The inner port, as it was called, was of +greater importance, as it adjoined the town itself. It was defended +in the first place by Fort St. Nicholas, and at the inner entrance +stood the towers of St. John and St. Michael, one on either side. +Into this the vessel was steered. There were many craft lying there, +among them eight or ten of the galleys of the Order. + +"We will go first to the house of our langue," Sir Guy said, "and +tell them to send down slaves to fetch up our baggage; then I will +take you, Gervaise, to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and hand you over to +his care." + +On landing, Gervaise was surprised at the number of slaves who were +labouring at the public works, and who formed no small proportion +of the population in the streets. Their condition was pitiable. +They were, of course, enemies of Christianity, and numbers of them +had been pirates; but he could not help pitying their condition +as they worked in the full heat of the sun under the vigilant eyes +of numbers of overseers, who carried heavy whips, in addition +to their arms. Their progress to the upper city was slow, for on +their way they met many knights, of whom several were acquainted +with Sir Guy; and each, after greeting him, demanded the latest +news from England, and in return gave him particulars of the state +of things at Rhodes. + +At last they arrived at the house of the English langue. The Order +was divided into langues or nationalities. Of these there were +eight -- Provence, Auvergne, France, Italy, Germany, England, +Aragon, and Castile and Portugal. The French element was by far +the strongest. The Order had been founded in that country, and as +it possessed no less than three langues, and held the greater part +of the high official positions in the Order, it was only kept in +check by the other langues acting together to demand their fair +share of dignities. The grand master's authority was considerable, +but it was checked by the council, which was composed of the +bailiffs and knights of the highest order, known as Grand Crosses. +Each langue had its bailiff elected by itself: these resided +constantly at Rhodes. Each of these bailiffs held a high office; +thus the Bailiff of Provence was always the grand commander of the +Order. He controlled the expenditure, superintended the stores, +and was governor of the arsenal. The Bailiff of Auvergne was the +commander-in-chief of all the forces, army and navy. The Bailiff +of France was the grand hospitaller, with the supreme direction of +the hospitals and infirmaries of the Order, a hospital in those +days signifying a guest house. The Bailiff of Italy was the grand +admiral, and the Bailiff of England was chief of the light cavalry. +Thus the difficulties and jealousies that would have arisen at +every vacancy were avoided. + +In the early days of the Order, when Jerusalem was in the hands of +the Christians, the care of the hospitals was its chief and most +important function. Innumerable pilgrims visited Jerusalem, and +these were entertained at the immense guest house of the Order. +But with the loss of Jerusalem and the expulsion of the Christians +from Palestine, that function had become of very secondary importance +although there was still a guest house and infirmary at Rhodes, +where strangers and the sick were carefully attended by the knights. +No longer did these ride out to battle on their war horses. It was +on the sea that the foe was to be met, and the knights were now +sailors rather than soldiers. They dwelt at the houses of their +respective langues; here they ate at a common table, which was +supplied by the bailiff, who drew rations for each knight, and +received, in addition, a yearly sum for the supply of such luxuries +as were not included in the rations. The average number of knights +residing in each of these langues averaged from a hundred to a +hundred and fifty. + +It was not until some hours after his arrival that Sir Guy could +find time to take Gervaise across to the house of the langue of +Auvergne, to which D'Aubusson belonged. It was a larger and more +stately pile than that of the English langue, but the arrangements +were similar in all these buildings. In the English house Gervaise +had not felt strange, as he had the companionship of his fellow +voyagers; but as he followed Sir Guy through the spacious halls +of the langue of Auvergne, where no familiar face met his, he +felt more lonely than he had done since he entered the house at +Clerkenwell. + +On sending in his name Sir Guy was at once conducted to the chamber +occupied by D'Aubusson. The knight was seated at his table, examining +some plans. The room was furnished with monastic simplicity, save +that the walls were hung with rich silks and curtains captured from +Turkish galleys. + +"Welcome back to us, Sir Guy," D'Aubusson said, rising, and warmly +shaking his visitor's hand. "I have been looking for your coming, +for we need men with clear heads. Of strong arms and valiant spirits +we have no lack; but men of judgment and discretion, who can be +trusted to look at matters calmly and not to be carried away by +passion, are welcome indeed to us. I was expecting you about this +time, and when I heard that a ship had arrived from Marseilles I +made inquiries, and was glad to find that you were on board." + +"I am heartily glad to be back, D'Aubusson; I am sick of the dull +life of a commandery, and rejoice at the prospect of stirring times +again. This lad is young Tresham, who has come out in my charge, +and for whom you have been good enough to obtain the post of page +to the grand master." + +"And no slight business was it to do so," D'Aubusson said with a +smile. "It happened there was a vacancy when the letter concerning +him arrived, and had it been one of the highest offices in the +Order there could not have been a keener contention for it. Every +bailiff had his candidate ready; but I seldom ask for anything +for members of my langue, and when I told the other bailiffs that +it was to me a matter of honour to carry out the last request of +my dead friend, they all gave way. You see, I am placed in a position +of some little difficulty. The grand master is so enfeebled and +crippled that he leaves matters almost entirely in my hands, and +it would be an abuse of my position, and would excite no little +jealousy, were I to use the power I possess to nominate friends of +my own to appointments. It is only by the most rigid impartiality, +and by dividing as fairly as possible all offices between the eight +langues, that all continue to give me their support. As you know, +we have had great difficulties and heartburnings here; but happily +they have to a great extent been set at rest by forming a new langue +of Castile and Portugal out of that of Aragon. This has given one +more vote to the smaller langues, and has so balanced the power +that of late the jealousies between us have greatly subsided, and +all are working well together in face of the common danger. Well, +young sir, and how like you the prospect of your pageship?" + +"I like it greatly, sir, but shall like still more the time when +I can buckle on armour and take a share of the fighting with +the infidels. I would fain, sir, offer to you my deep and humble +thanks for the great kindness you have shown me in procuring me +the appointment of page to the grand master." + +The knight smiled kindly. "There are the less thanks due, lad, +inasmuch as I did it not for you, but for the dear friend who wrote +to me on your behalf. However, I trust that you will do credit to +my nomination by your conduct here." + +"There is a letter from our grand prior which I have brought to +you," Sir Guy said. "He commended the lad to me warmly, and seems +to be greatly pleased with his conduct." + +D'Aubusson cut the silken string that bound the missive together, +and read the letter. + +"He does indeed speak warmly," he said, as he laid it down on the +table. + +"He tells me that the lad, young as he was, had been well trained +when he came, and that he worked with great diligence during +the five months he was in the House, and displayed such skill and +strength for his age, as to surprise his preceptors, who prophesied +that he would turn out a stout swordsman, and would be a credit +to the Order." + +"He is well furnished with garments both for ordinary and state +occasions," Sir Guy said; "and in this packet are some sixty gold +crowns, which are the last remains of his patrimony, and which I +was to hand to you in order to pay the necessary expenses during +his pageship." + +"He could have done without that," D'Aubusson said. "Recommended +to me as he is, I would have seen that he lacked nothing, but was +provided with all necessaries for his position. I will in the future +take care that in all things he is on a par with his companions." +He touched a bell on the table, and a servitor entered. + +"Tell Richard de Deauville to come here," he said. + +A minute later the hangings at the door were pushed aside, and a +lad about a year older than Gervaise appeared, and, bowing deeply +to the knight, stood in a respectful attitude, awaiting his orders. + +"Deauville, take this youth, Gervaise Tresham to your room. He is +appointed one of the pages of the grand master. He is English, +but he speaks French as well as you do, having lived in France for +some years. Take him to your apartment and treat him kindly and +well, seeing that he is a stranger and new to all here. Tomorrow +he will go to the palace." + +Gervaise bowed deeply to the two knights, and then followed the +page. + +"I suppose you arrived in that ship which came in today," the latter +said, as soon as they had left the room. "You are in luck indeed +to have obtained a pageship at the grand master's. You begin to +count your time at once, while we do not begin to count ours until +we are seventeen. Still, good luck may befall us yet, for if the +grand master dies, Sir Peter is sure to be chosen to succeed him. +Then, you see, we too shall be pages of the grand master." + +"How many are there of you?" + +"Only De Lille and myself. Of course D'Aubusson will take on the +grand master's present pages; but as there are five vacancies on +an average every year, he will be able to find room for us among +the number." + +"Why, how many pages has the grand master?" Gervaise asked, in +surprise. + +"Sixteen of them, so you may guess the duties are easy enough, +as only two are generally employed, except, of course on solemn +occasions." + +"Are there any other English besides myself?" + +The boy shook his head. "There are eight belonging to the French +langues; the others are Spaniards, Italians, or Germans. There, +this is our room and this is De Lille. De Lille, this is the grand +master's new page, Master Gervaise Tresham, and our lord says we +are to treat him kindly and entertain him well until tomorrow, +when he will go to the palace. He speaks our language, and has been +some years in France." + +"How came you to be there?" De Lille asked Gervaise. + +"My father was a Lancastrian, and my mother a great friend of our +Queen Margaret of Anjou, and they were with her all the time she +was in exile." + +"How quarrelsome you English are!" De Lille said. "You seem to be +always fighting among yourselves." + +"I don't think," Gervaise said, with a smile, "there is any love +lost between Louis of France and the Duke of Burgundy, to say +nothing of other great lords." + +"No; you are right there. But though we talk a great deal about +fighting, it is only occasionally that we engage in it." + +The pages' room was a small one. It contained two pallets, which +served as seats by day, and two wooden chests, in which they kept +their clothes. + +Their conversation was interrupted by the ringing of a bell. + +"That is supper," De Lille said, jumping up. "We will leave you +here while we go down to stand behind our lord's chair. When the +meal is over we will bring a pasty or something else good, and a +measure of wine, and have our supper together up here; and we will +tell the servitors to bring up another pallet for you. Of course, +you can go down with us if you like." + +"Thank you, I would much rather stay here. Every one would be +strange to me, and having nothing to do I should feel in the way." + +The boys nodded, and taking their caps ran off, while Gervaise, +tired by the excitement of the day, lay down on the bed which a +servant brought up a few minutes after they had left him, and slept +soundly until their return. + +"I think I have been asleep," he said, starting up when they entered +the room again. + +"You look as if you had, anyhow," De Lille laughed. "It was the +best thing you could do. We have brought up supper. We generally +sit down and eat after the knights have done, but this is much +better, as you are here." They sat down on the beds, carved the +pasty with their daggers, and after they had finished Gervaise +gladly accepted the proposal of the others to take a walk round +the walls. + +They started from the corner of the castle looking down upon the +spit of land dividing the two ports. + +"You see," De Lille said, "there is a row of small islands across +the mouth of the outer port, and the guns of St. Nicholas, and +those on this wall, would prevent any hostile fleet from entering." + +"I hardly see what use that port is, for it lies altogether outside +the town, and vessels could not unload there." + +"No. Still, it forms a useful place of refuge. In case a great +fleet came to attack us, our galleys would lay up in the inner +port, which would be cleared of all the merchant craft, as these +would hamper the defence; they would, therefore, be sent round +into the outer port, where they would be safe from any attack by +sea, although they would doubtless be burnt did an army besiege +the town." + +Passing along the walls of the grand master's palace, which was a +strongly fortified building, and formed a citadel that could be +defended after the lower town and the rest of the castle had been +taken, they came to the western angle of the fortifications. + +"You must know that each langue has charge of a separate part of +the wall. From the foot of the mole of St. Nicholas to the grand +master's palace it is in charge of France. On the line where we now +are, between the palace and the gate of St. George, it is held by +Germany. From that gate to the Spanish tower Auvergne is posted. +England takes the wall between the Spanish tower and that of St. +Mary. You defend only the lower storey of that tower, the upper +part being held by Aragon, whose charge extends up to the gate of +St. John. Thence to the tower of Italy -- behind which lies the +Jews' quarter -- Provence is in charge, while the sea front thence +to the mole of St. Nicholas, is held by Italy and Castile, each +taking half. Not only have the langues the charge of defending each +its portion of the wall, but of keeping it in order at all times; +and I may say that nowhere is the wall better kept or more fairly +decorated with carvings than where England holds." + +"You have not told me who defends the palace itself." + +"That is in charge of a force composed of equal numbers of picked +knights from each langue." + +Gervaise leant on the battlement and looked with admiration at the +scene beyond. The land side was surrounded by hills, the ground +rising very gradually from the foot of the walls. Every yard of +ground was cultivated, and was covered with brilliant vegetation. +Groves and orchards occurred thickly, while the slopes were dotted +with chapels, summer houses -- in which the natives of the city +spent most of their time in the hot season -- and other rustic +buildings. + +"What a rich and beautiful country!" he said. + +"It is very pleasant to look at," De Lille agreed. "But all this +would be a sore disadvantage to us if the Turks were besieging +us, for the groves and orchards would conceal their approaches, +the walls and buildings would give them shelter, and our cannon +would be of little use until they reached the farther side of the +ditch. If the Turks come, I hear it is decided to level all the +buildings and walls, and to chop down every tree." + +"If they were to plant their cannon on the hills they would do us +much harm," Gervaise remarked. + +"The Turks are clumsy gunners they say," Deauville replied, "and +they would but waste their powder and ball at that distance, +without making a breach in our walls." + +"Even if they did, they could surely scarce pass that deep fosse," +Gervaise said, looking down into the tremendous cutting in the +solid rock that ran round the whole circuit of the walls; it was +from forty to sixty feet deep, and from ninety to a hundred and +forty feet wide. It was from this great cutting that the stones +for the construction of the walls, towers, and buildings of the +town had been taken, the work having been going on ever since the +knights established themselves at Rhodes, and being performed by +a host of captives taken in war, together with labour hired from +neighboring islands. Upon this immense work the Order had expended +no small proportion of their revenue since their capture of the +island in 1310, and the result was a fortress that, under the +conditions of warfare of that age, seemed almost impregnable; and +this without any natural advantage of position. + +In addition to the five great towers or bastions, the wall was +strengthened by square towers at short intervals. On looking +down from the wall upon which the three pages were standing, on to +the lower town, the view was a singular one. The houses were all +built of stone, with flat roofs, after the manner of most Eastern +cities. The streets were very narrow, and were crossed at frequent +intervals by broad stone arches. These had the effect, not only +of giving shelter from an enemy's fire, but of affording means by +which troops could march rapidly across the town upon the roofs +of the houses to reinforce the defenders of the wall, wherever +pressed by the enemy. Thus the town from above presented the +appearance of a great pavement, broken only by dark and frequently +interrupted lines. + +"How different to the towns at home!" Gervaise exclaimed, as, +after gazing long upon the beautiful country outside the walls, +he turned and looked inward. "One would hardly know that it was a +town at all." + +"Yes, it is rather different to the view from the top of the tower +of Notre Dame, which I ascended while I was staying in Paris. +But this sort of building is best here; the thickness of the stone +roofs keeps out the heat of the sun, and it is only when it is +almost overhead that it shines down into the narrow streets. As you +can see by the number of the people on the roofs, they use them +as a resort in the evening. Then carpets are spread, and they +receive visitors, and can talk to their neighbours over the low +walls that separate the roofs. You can trace the divisions. Some +of the house roofs are larger than others, but all are upon the +same level; this being the regulation, in order that there might +be free passage everywhere for the troops." + +By the time they had made the circuit of the walls darkness had +fallen, and concealed the martial features of the scene. Lights +twinkled everywhere upon the stone terraces; the sound of lutes and +other musical instruments came up softly on the still air, with +the hum of talk and laughter. The sea lay as smooth as a mirror, +and reflected the light of the stars, and the black hulls of the +galleys and ships in the harbour lay still and motionless. + +Greatly pleased with his first experience of the city that was to +be his future home, Gervaise returned, with his companions, to +the auberge of Auvergne. + +The next morning the bailiff D'Aubusson bade Gervaise accompany +him to the palace of the grand master. Here he introduced him to +Orsini, an old and feeble man, who, after a few kind words, handed +him over to the chamberlain, who, in turn, led him to the official +who was in charge of the pages. That officer took him down to the +courtyard, where four young knights were engaged in superintending +the military exercises of the pages. The scene was exactly the +same as that to which Gervaise had been accustomed at the House in +London. Some of the lads were fighting with blunted swords, others +were swinging heavy bars of iron, climbing ropes, or vaulting on +to the back of a wooden horse. All paused as the official entered +with his charge. + +"This is your new comrade, boys," he said -- "Master Gervaise +Tresham, a member of the English langue. Be good comrades to him. +By the reports I hear I am sure that you will find him a worthy +companion." + +The pages had been prepared to like the newcomer, for it was well +known that he owed his appointment to the bailiff of Auvergne, +who was the most popular of the officials of the Order, and who +was already regarded as the grand master. His appearance confirmed +their anticipation. His fair complexion and nut brown hair tinged +with gold, cut somewhat short, but with a natural wave, contrasted +with their darker locks and faces bronzed by the sun. There was +an honest and frank look in his grey eyes, and an expression of +good temper on his face, though the square chin and firm lips spoke +of earnestness and resolution of purpose. The official took him +round the circle and presented him first to the knights and then +to each of his comrades. + +"You may as well join them in their exercises. In that way you will +sooner become at home with them." + +Gervaise at once laid down his mantle, removed his doublet, and then +joined the others. There was but one half hour remaining before +they broke off to go to dinner, which was at half past ten, but +the time sufficed to show the young pages that this English lad +was the equal of all -- except two or three of the oldest -- both +in strength and in knowledge of arms. He could climb the rope +with any of them, could vault on to the wooden horse with a heavy +cuirass and backpiece on him, and held his own in a bout with +swords against Conrad von Berghoff, who was considered the best +swordplayer among them. As soon as the exercises were over all +proceeded to the bath, and then to dinner. The meal was a simple +one, but Gervaise enjoyed it thoroughly, for the table was loaded +with an abundance of fruits of kinds altogether novel to him, and +which he found delicious. + +The official in charge of them sat at the head of the table, and +the meal was eaten in silence. After it was over and they had +retired to their own rooms discipline was at an end, and they were +free to amuse themselves as they liked. There were many questions +to be asked and answered, but his display of strength and skill +in the courtyard saved Gervaise from a good deal of the teasing to +which a newcomer among a party of boys is always exposed. + +He, on his part, learnt that the duties of the pages were very light. +Two only were on duty each day, being in constant attendance on +the grand master, and accompanying him wherever he went. When he +dined in public four of them waited on him at table, and one of +them performed the duties of taster. If he returned to the palace +after dark, six others lined the staircase with torches. On occasions +of state ceremony, and at the numerous religious festivals, all +were in attendance. By this time Gervaise's trunks had been brought +over from the English auberge, where they had been conveyed from +the ship, and his garments were taken out and inspected by his +comrades, who all admitted that they were, in point of beauty of +colour and material, and in fashion, equal to their own. + +"You will have to get one more suit, Gervaise," one of the lads +said. "At one or two of the grand ceremonies every year we are +all dressed alike; that is the rule. On other occasions we wear +what we choose, so that our garments are handsome, and I think it +looks a good deal better than when we are dressed alike; though +no doubt in religious processions that is more appropriate. +De Ribaumont, our governor, will give orders for the supply of +your state costume. He is a good fellow. Of course, he has to be +rather strict with us; but so long as there is nothing done that +he considers discreditable to our position, he lets us do pretty +nearly as we like. + +"We have four hours a day at our military exercises, and two hours +with the sub-chaplain, who teaches us our books and religious +duties. The rest of our time we can use as we like, except that every +day eight of us ride for two hours and practise with the lance; +for although it is at sea we fight the Moslems, we are expected +to become finished knights in all matters. These eight horses are +kept for our service, and such as choose may at other times ride +them. On Saturdays we are free from all our exercises; then some +of us generally go on horseback for long excursions on the island, +while others take boats and go out on the sea; one afternoon in +the week we all make a trip in a galley, to learn our duties on +board." + + + +CHAPTER IV A PROFESSED KNIGHT + + +Gervaise was soon quite at home in the palace of the grand master, +and his companions were, like other boys, of varying characters; +but as all were of noble families, were strongly impressed with +the importance of the Order and the honour of their own position, +and were constantly in contact with stately knights and grave +officials, their manners conformed to those of their elders; and +even among themselves there was no rough fun, or loud disputes, +but a certain courtesy of manner that was in accordance with their +surroundings. This came naturally to Gervaise, brought up as he had +been by his father and mother, and having at frequent intervals +stayed with them for months at the various royal castles in which +Margaret of Anjou and her son had been assigned apartments during +their exile. Even at St. John's house the novices with whom he +lived were all a good deal older than himself, and the discipline +of the house was much more strict than that at Rhodes. + +He enjoyed both his exercises with the knights and the time spent +with the sub-chaplain, no small proportion of the hours of study +being occupied in listening to stories of chivalry; it being +considered one of the most important parts of a knight's education +that he should have a thorough acquaintance, not only with the +laws of chivalry, but with the brave deeds both of former and of +living knights, with the relations of the noble houses of Europe +to each other, especially of the many great families whose members +were connected with the Order of St. John. + +These matters formed, indeed, the main subject of their studies. All +were taught to read and write, but this was considered sufficient +in the way of actual instruction. The rules of the Order had to be +committed to memory. Beyond this their reading consisted largely +of the lives of saints, especially of those who distinguished +themselves by their charity or their devotion to their vows of +poverty, to both of which the members of the Order were pledged. +Gervaise, however, could see around him no signs whatever of poverty +on their part. It was true that they all lived and fed together in +the auberges of their respective langues, and that they possessed +no houses or establishments of their own; but the magnificence of +their armour and attire, and the lavish expenditure of some upon +their pleasures, contrasted strangely with the poverty to which +they had vowed themselves. It was true that in many cases the means +to support the expenditure was derived from the shares the knights +received of the plunder acquired in their captures of Moslem ships; +but undoubtedly many must have possessed large private means; the +bailiffs, for example, although only required by the rules to +place before the knights at their auberges the rations they received +for them, with such luxuries as could be purchased by their yearly +allowance for that purpose, expended annually very large sums in +addition, and supplied their tables with every dainty, in order to +gain popularity and goodwill among the members of the langue. + +Not only did the post of bailiff confer upon its owner a very +high position at Rhodes, but it was a stepping stone to the most +lucrative offices in their langues. The bailiffs at Rhodes had the +right of claiming any of the grand priories or bailiwicks at home +that might fall vacant, and the grand master was frequently chosen +from among their number, as, by being present at Rhodes, they had +many advantages in the way of making themselves popular among the +electors. The emoluments of some of these provincial bailiwicks +were large; and as the bailiffs at Rhodes were generally elected +by seniority -- although younger knights who had greatly distinguished +themselves were sometimes chosen -- they were usually glad to resign +the heavy work and responsibility of their position at Rhodes, +and to retire to the far easier position of a provincial bailiff. +In the majority of cases, doubtless, the fortunes of the high +officials were obtained from the money amassed when in possession +of rich commanderies at home; but even this was assuredly incompatible +with their vows of poverty. + +His hours of leisure Gervaise spent either on the water or in the +saddle, and his love of exercise of all sorts excited the wonder +and even the amusement of his companions, who for the most part +preferred spending the time at their disposal in sleep, in idly +looking out from a shaded room at what was going on outside, or +in visits to friends and relations at the auberges of the langues +to which they belonged. The natural consequence was, that by the +time he reached the end of his three years' pageship, Gervaise was +indisputably superior in strength, activity, and skill in military +exercises, to any of his companions. The majority of these, after +completing their time, returned to the headquarters of their langue +at home, to pass their time there, until of an age to be eligible +for the charge of a commandery obtained for them by family influence, +which had no small share in the granting of these appointments. As +it was known, however, that Gervaise intended to remain permanently +in the Island, his progress was watched with particular attention +by his instructors; and, seeing his own earnestness in the matter, +they took special pains with his training. The bailiff of Auvergne +continued to take much interest in him, inquiring often from the +officers in charge of the pages, and from his instructors, of +his conduct and progress, and occasionally sending for him to his +auberge and talking with him as to his life and progress. Just before +his pageship terminated, he said to him, "I was rather puzzled at +first, Gervaise, as to what we should do with you when your term +of office concluded, but I am so no longer, for, although you are +some two years younger than the professed knights who come out +here, you are better fitted than the majority to take your place +in the naval expeditions, and to fight the Moslem pirates. I will +see that you have your share of these adventures. All young knights +are, as you know, obliged to make three voyages, but beyond that +many of them do not care to share in the rough life at sea, and +prefer the bustle, and, I grieve to say, the gaiety and pleasures +of this city. For one, then, really eager to distinguish himself, +the opportunities are frequent. When danger threatens, or heavy +engagements are expected, every knight is desirous of bearing his +part in the fray; but this is not the case when the work to be done +consists of scouring the sea for weeks, without perchance coming +across a single pirate. Of course, as soon as your pageship is +over you will go to the English auberge, but I shall still keep +my eye upon you, and shall do my best to help you to achieve +distinction; and I shall take upon myself the providing of your +arms and armour as a knight." + +Accordingly, on the day on which his duties as a page terminated, +two servitors of the auberge of Auvergne brought across to the +palace a suit of fine armour and a sword, a battleaxe, a lance, and +a dagger; also three complete suits of clothes, two of them for +ordinary wear, and one for state occasions. The next day Gervaise +took the oaths of the Order in the Church of St. John. The aged +master himself received the vows, and formally inducted him as a +professed knight of the Order, Peter D'Aubusson and the bailiff of +the English langue acting as his sponsors, vouching that he was of +noble blood and in all ways fitted to become a knight of Justice, +this being the official title of the professed knights of the +Order. Ten newly arrived novices were inducted at the same time, +and the ceremony was a stately one, attended by a number of the +knights from each langue, all in full armour. + +The ceremony over, Gervaise bore the title of Sir Gervaise Tresham; +but this was an honorary rather than a real title, as the Order +did not profess to bestow the honour of knighthood, and it was usual +for its members to receive the accolade at the hands of secular +knights. At the conclusion of the ceremony, he returned with the +bailiff of the English langue to the auberge, and took up his +quarters there. By his frequent visits he was well known to all +the members, and in a day or two felt as much at home as he had done +in the pages' room in the palace. A week was given to him before +he was assigned to any special duty, and he was glad when he +was told off as one of the knights who were to take their turn in +superintending the work of the slaves employed in strengthening the +fortifications, although he would rather that any other employment +should have been assigned to him, because he felt deep pity for +the unfortunate men who were engaged in the work. + +He knew well enough that if he himself were ever made prisoner by +the Turks, his lot would be as hard and as hopeless as that of +the Moslem captives; but this, although he often repeated it to +himself in order to abate his feeling of commiseration, was but a +poor satisfaction. He saw one side of the picture, and the other +was hidden from him; and although he told himself that after slaving +in a Turkish galley he would feel a satisfaction at seeing those +who had been his tyrants suffering the same fate, he was well aware +that this would not be the case, and that his own sufferings would +only make him sympathise more deeply with those of others. He had +found, soon after his arrival on the Island, that it was best to +keep his feelings on this subject to himself. While the knights +were bound, in accordance with their vows, to relieve sufferings +of any kind among Christians, they seemed to regard their captives +rather in the light of brute beasts than human beings. The slaves +were struck on the smallest provocation, and even the killing of +a slave was considered a very venial offence, and punished only +because the slave was of value to the Order. + +It was true that edicts were from time to time published by the +council, enjoining fair treatment of slaves, and it was specially +ordered that those employed as servants in the auberges were not +to be struck. The lot of these servants was, indeed, very much +easier than that of those engaged on the public works, and such +occupation was therefore considered a privilege, the servants being +for the most part selected from among the captives of superior +rank. + +For the next six months Gervaise worked at various duties in the +town. He was employed for a fortnight in the infirmary, then for +a while he was transferred to the galleys; but for the most part +he was with the slaves working on the fortifications. At the end +of that time he was, to his great delight, informed by the bailiff +that he was one of the six knights of the langue told off to join +a galley that was on the point of sailing. Among those going in +her was Sir Ralph Harcourt, one of his companions on the journey +from England. + +"So you are to go with us, Gervaise," the young knight said, "to +try your luck for the first time against the infidels. This is +my third voyage, and I hope that it will be more fortunate than +its predecessors, for, beyond picking up two or three small craft, +which did not venture upon resistance, we gained neither honour nor +booty. I regard you as having specially good fortune, and besides +being glad that we shall be together, I expect that you will bring +good luck to us, and that we shall meet with foes worth contending +with. The corsairs have been very active of late, and have +captured many prizes, while, on the other hand, our galleys have +been unfortunate, and have but seldom come upon the miscreants." + +"How many knights will there be on board?" + +"Forty. Aragon, like us, furnishes five, Germany ten, Portugal +five, Auvergne ten, and Provence five. We shall be commanded by +Sir Louis Ricord, a knight of Auvergne, and we could wish no better, +for he has proved himself a good seaman and a brave captain. Two +other galleys are to start with us. We are to cruise separately +unless one gets news of a force so superior that he will need aid +to attack it, when he will meet the others at a rendezvous agreed +upon, and we shall work together." + +"Who are the other three Englishmen?" + +"John Boswell, Marmaduke Lumley, and Adam Tedbond -- all, as you +know, brave knights and good companions." + +That evening Gervaise received a message from D'Aubusson, requesting +him to call at his auberge. + +"So you are going to sea, Sir Gervaise? I hear from your bailiff +that you have been working to his satisfaction in the town." + +"Yes, sir. I shall indeed be glad to change it for a life at sea. +In truth, it is grievous to me to witness the sufferings of the +slaves, and I would rather do any other work." + +"They are far better off than the Christians who fall into the hands +of the Turks," the bailiff said; "and, moreover, it is because +their countrymen are preparing to attack us that we are forced to +use their labour in strengthening our fortifications. They have +naught to complain of in the way of food. Still, I would myself +gladly see their lot alleviated; but we could not afford to keep so +great a number of captives in idleness; they must work for their +living. Had it not been for their labour we could never have built +and fortified the city. After all, they are little worse off than +our serfs at home; they build our castles and till our land." + +"It may be so, sir; but with us in England men are free, and it +was, when I first came, strange to me to see them working under +the fear of the whip. It is necessary, I know, that such work should +be done, but I own that I shall be glad to be away from the sight +of the poor wretches, pirates and enemies of the faith though they +be." + +"I can understand your feelings, and I too felt somewhat the same +when I first came here. Nevertheless, there is work that must be +done if the Order is not to be crushed by the infidels. Here are +captives, for the most part malefactors, who have to be fed; and +there is no injustice in their having, like all men, to give work +for food. I have learnt to see this and recognise the necessity, +though I would that the work could be obtained without the use of +harshness and severity. We ourselves are prepared at any moment to +sacrifice our lives for the good of the Order and for the great +cause, and it would be wrong, nay, sinful, not to use the means +that have been placed ready to our hand. Now, Sir Gervaise, I wish +you a pleasant voyage. You will find the life somewhat hard, after +your three years' residence at the palace, but this I know you will +not mind. I have specially commended you to Ricord as one in whom +I am personally interested, and from whom I hope great things in +the future. Be brave; be resolute. From what you have said I need +not say -- be merciful. Fulfill all orders promptly and without +question; bear yourself courteously to all; above all things, +remember that you are a soldier, not only of the Order, but of the +Cross." + +The next day Gervaise embarked with his companions on board the +galley. It was a long, low boat, similar to those in use by the +Venetians and Genoese. It was rowed by fifty slaves, who slept at +night on or beneath the benches they sat on by day. The knights +occupied the great cabins in the poop. There were two tiers of +these; the upper one contained the little cabin of the commander, +while the rest of the space on this deck, and that below it, was +used by the knights in common. In the upper cabin they took their +meals, and a third of their number slept there, the remainder in +the cabin below. A fourth of their number were, however, always +on guard, lest any attempt at a rising or escape should be made by +the galley slaves. + +On leaving the harbour the galley, with its two consorts, rowed +north, and Gervaise learnt that they were to cruise between the +mainland and the islands. Some of these were in the hands of the +Turks, while others were still occupied by Greeks. + +Except when there was a formal and actual state of war, the Moslem +and Christian islands remained in a state of neutrality, trading +with each other and avoiding all unfriendly proceedings that would +lead to struggles which would be fatal to the prosperity of both. +The Archipelago, and indeed the whole of the eastern portion of +the Mediterranean, was infested by pirates, fitted out, for the most +part, on the mainland. These, when in force, openly kept the sea, +attacking the Christian merchant ships, but when cruising alone +they hid in unfrequented bays, or behind uninhabited islets, until +they could pounce upon a passing ship whose size promised an easy +capture. The Order of St. John furnished a maritime police, earning +thereby the deep gratitude of Spain, France, and Italy. They were +aided occasionally by the Venetians, but these, being frequently +engaged in quarrels with their neighbours, did but a small share of +this work, only sending their fleets to sea when danger threatened +some of their possessions in the Levant. + +"This is delightful, Ralph," Gervaise said, as they stood together +on the poop, looking back at the receding city. + +"What a pleasant change it is from standing in the broiling sun +watching those poor wretches toiling at the fortifications! There +is only one drawback to my pleasure. I wish that we carried sails, +and were moved along by the breeze, instead of by the exertions +of the slaves." + +"Much chance we should have of catching a pirate under such +circumstances!" Ralph said, laughing. "You might as well set a +tortoise to catch a hare." + +"I don't say that we should not be obliged to carry rowers, Ralph; +but all the prizes that have been brought in since I have been at +Rhodes carry masts and sails, as well as oars, and, as I understand, +for the most part cruise about under sail, and only use the oars +when chasing or fleeing." + +"That is so; because, you see, in most cases the crew themselves +have to row, and I have no doubt if we had no slaves to do the +work we should soon take to masts and sails also; but for speed the +rowing galleys are the best, for unless a brisk wind were blowing, +the mast and sails would but check her progress when the oars +were out, and at any rate constrain her to travel only before the +wind. I know your weakness about the slaves, Gervaise; but as we +could neither build our fortifications nor row our galleys without +them, I cannot go as far as you do in the matter, though I own +that I am sometimes sorry for them. But you must remember that it +is the fault of their people, and not of ours, that they are here." + +"All that is true enough, Ralph, and I cannot gainsay you. Still +I would rather that we were gliding along with sails instead of +being rowed by slaves." + +"At any rate, Gervaise, you will not see them ill treated, for I +myself heard Ricord, just before we were starting, tell the slave +overseers that so long as the rowers did fair work they were not +to use their whips, and that only if we were in chase of a pirate +were they to be urged to their utmost exertions." + +"I am right glad to hear it, Ralph, and shall be able to enjoy the +voyage all the more, now you have told me that such orders have +been issued." + +For a fortnight they cruised about among the islands. Several times +boats rowed out from the shore to the galley with complaints of +outrages by pirates under a notorious corsair named Hassan Ali, +who had landed, burnt villages, killed many of the inhabitants, +and carried off the rest as slaves; but no one could give any clue +to aid them in their search for the corsairs. The time passed very +pleasantly. There was no occasion for speed; often they lay all +day in some bay, where they could approach near enough to the shore +to lie in the shade of trees, while two or three of the knights +ascended a hill and kept watch there for the appearance of any +vessels of a suspicious character. One morning, after passing the +night at anchor, Harcourt and Gervaise were despatched just before +sunrise to take a look round before the galley got under way. From +the top of the hill they had an uninterrupted view of the sea, +studded with islands on all sides of them. Beyond a few fishing +boats, looking like black specks on the glassy surface, no craft +were in sight. They were about to return to the galley when, taking +a last look round, Gervaise suddenly exclaimed, "Look, Ralph! +There is smoke ascending from that island to the southwest. There +was none just now." + +"You mean from that bay, Gervaise? Yes, I see it; it is not more +than a light mist." + +"It is growing thicker," Gervaise said, "and spreading. Maybe it +is but a hut that has accidentally caught fire, but it seems to +me that the smoke is rising from several points." + +"I think you are right, Gervaise. Let us hurry down with the news. +It may be that it is a village which has been attacked by pirates +who have landed on the other side of the island during the night, +for I can see no ships in the bay." + +A few minutes' run and they stood on the shore. + +"Quick, men!" Ralph said to the rowers of the boat that had brought +them ashore. "Row your hardest." + +The slaves bent to their oars, and they were soon alongside the +galley, which lay two or three hundred yards from the shore. Those +on board had noticed the young knights running down the hill, and, +marking the speed at which the boat was rowing, concluded at once +that they must have observed one of the pirate's ships. + +"Do you see anything of them, Sir Ralph?" the commander shouted, +as they came close. + +"We have seen no ships, Sir Louis, but there is smoke coming up +from a bay in an island four or five miles away to the southwest. +It seems to us that it is far too extensive a fire to be the result +of an accident, for there was no smoke until within two or three +minutes of the time we left, and before we started it was rising +from several points, and we both think that it must come from a +village that has been attacked by pirates." + +The commander rapidly issued his orders, and in two or three minutes +the anchor was weighed, the boat hoisted on deck, and the oars in +motion. + +"Stretch to your oars!" Ricord shouted to the slaves. "Hitherto +we have exacted no toil from you, but you have to work now, and +woe be to him who does not put out his full strength." + +Grateful for the unusual leniency with which they had been treated, +the slaves bent to their oars, and the galley sped rapidly +through the water. On rounding the end of the island there was an +exclamation of satisfaction from the knights as they saw wreaths +of white smoke rising from the distant island. + +"There can be no doubt that it is a village in flames," Sir Louis +said; "and from the suddenness with which it broke out, it is +clear that it must have been fired at several points. You say you +saw no craft near?" he asked, turning to Harcourt. + +"There were none there, or from the top of the hill we should +assuredly have made them out, Sir Louis." + +"Then the pirates -- if this be, as I hope, their work -- must +have landed at some other point on the island, and if they catch +sight of us they may make for their ship and slip away, unobserved +by us. Instead of rowing direct, therefore, we will make for that +islet to the right, and row round behind it. There are two others +almost adjoining it. Once past these, 'tis not more than half +a mile to that island stretching away south. Once round that, we +shall be beyond the one from which we see the smoke rising, and +can come down on its southern side. The course will be double the +distance that it would be if we took a straight line, but except +when we cross from island to island we shall not be exposed to +their view, and may fall upon their ships before the crews have +returned from their work of plunder." + +The knights fully agreed, and orders were given to the helmsman +accordingly. + +"We must not over fatigue the rowers," the commander said. "We may +have a long chase if they have started before we get round." + +He therefore gave orders to the slaves that, while they were to +exert themselves to the utmost when crossing the open sea, they +were to relax their efforts and to row within their strength while +coasting along behind the islands. On board, everything was made +in readiness for a fight: the knights buckled on their armour, the +cooks set cauldrons of pitch over the fire, the cannoneers loaded +her eight guns. It was an hour and a half after their start +before they rounded the end of the last island. It extended a little +farther to the south than did that to which they were making, and +as they rounded the point, eager looks were cast in search of the +pirate ships. No craft were, however, to be seen. + +"They must be in some bay or inlet," the commander said; "they can +hardly have left, for it would have taken them half an hour at +least to cross the island with their booty and captives, and even +if they made straight away after having fired the village, their +ship could have gone no great distance, for we must have seen her +if she put to sea -- unless indeed they were anchored on the east +of the island, and have sailed in that direction." + +"Keep them rowing along steadily," he said to the overseers of the +slaves; "but do not press them too hard. We may have a chase yet, +and need all their strength, for most of these pirates are fast +craft, and if they should get a start of three or four miles, it +will be a long row before we catch them." + +They made straight for the island, and on nearing it coasted along +its southern side. It was some three miles long, the shore being +for the most part steep, but here and there falling gradually to +the water's edge. Two or three little clusters of houses could be +seen as they rowed along; one of these was on fire. + +"That is good," Sir Louis exclaimed, as, on turning a point, they +saw the flames. "That cannot have been lighted long, and we are +pretty certain to come upon the vessels before the marauders have +set sail." + +Several inlets and small bays were passed, but all were empty. +A few fishing boats lay on the shore, but there were no signs of +life, as no doubt the people would, long since, have taken alarm and +sought shelter in the woods. There was a sharp point just before +they reached the southeastern extremity of the island, and as the +galley shot past this, a shout of exultation rose from the knights, +for, near the mouth of an inlet that now opened to their view, +there lay four long, low vessels, above each of which floated the +Moslem flag. A number of men were gathered on the shore near the +ships, and heavily laden boats were passing to and fro. + +A yell of rage and alarm rose from the ships as the galley came into +view. There was a stir and movement on the shore, and numbers of +men leapt into the boats there, and started for the ships. These +were some quarter of a mile away when first seen, and half that +distance had been traversed when a puff of smoke shot out from +the side of one of them, followed almost immediately by a general +discharge of their cannon. One ball tore along the waist of the +galley, killing six of the rowers, and several oars on both sides +were broken. Two balls passed through the cabins in the poop. +But there was no pause in the advance of the galley. The whips of +the slave masters cracked, and the rowers whose oars were intact +strained at them. There was no reply from the guns, but the +knights raised loud the war cry of the Order, a war cry that was +never heard without striking a thrill of apprehension among their +Moslem foes. + +As they neared the pirate ships, the helm was put down, and the +galley brought up alongside the largest of them and a broadside +poured into her; then the knights, headed by their commander, leapt +on to her deck. + +Although a number of the crew had not yet come off from shore, +the Moslems still outnumbered their assailants, and, knowing that +their consorts would soon come to their aid, they threw themselves +in a body on the Christians. But in a hand-to-hand conflict like +this, the knights of the Hospital were irresistible. Protected +by their armour and long shields from the blows of their enemies' +scimitars and daggers, their long, cross handled swords fell +with irresistible force on turbaned head and coat-of-mail, and, +maintaining regular order and advancing like a wall of steel along +the deck, they drove the Moslems before them, and the combat would +soon have terminated had not a shout been raised by one of the +overseers of the slaves. One of the other ships had rowed alongside +the galley, and the crew were already leaping on board it. At the +same moment another ship came up alongside that they had boarded, +while the fourth was maneuvering to bring up under her stern. + +"Sir John Boswell," Sir Louis shouted, "do you and your countrymen, +with the knights of Spain, finish with these miscreants; knights +of Germany and Provence keep back the boarders; knights of Auvergne +follow me," and he leapt down into the galley. + +The English and Spanish knights redoubled their exertions. The +Moslems endeavoured to rally, seeing that help was at hand, and +that but a small body were now opposed to them, but their numbers +availed little. The ten knights kept their line, and, hewing +their way forward, pressed them so hotly that the Turks broke and +sprang over the bulwarks into the sea. Then the knights looked +round. A fierce fight was going on between those of Germany and +Provence and the enemy, who strove desperately to board from the +ship alongside. The other vessel was now almost touching the stern, +and her crew were swarming to her side in readiness to leap on +board as soon as the vessels touched. + +"We will keep them at bay there," Sir John Boswell shouted. "Do +you, Don Pedro, and your comrades, aid Ricord. When his foes are +finished with, you can come back to help us." + +Then, with the four English knights, he ran along the deck, and +reached the stern just in time to hurl backwards the Moslems, who +had already obtained a footing. For a time the five knights kept +back the surging mass of their foes. The deck was wide enough +for each to have fair play for his sword, and in vain the pirates +strove to obtain a footing. + +At last Sir Marmaduke Lumley fell, severely wounded by an arrow +from a Moslem marksman, and before the others could close the gap +a score of pirates leapt on to the deck. + +"Fall back, comrades, fall back; but keep together!" Sir John Boswell +shouted, as he cleft the skull of one of the pirate officers who +sprang at him. "Sir Louis will soon finish his work, and be here +to our aid. Ah!" he exclaimed, looking over his shoulder, as he +retired a step, "Provence and Germany are overmatched too." + +This was indeed the case. Stoutly as they fought the knights were +unable to guard the whole of the line of bulwark, and the Moslems +had already obtained a footing on the deck. The discipline of the +knights stood them in good stead. Drawing closely together as they +retreated, they made a stand on the opposite side of the deck, +and were here joined by Sir John Boswell and his companions. They +now formed a semicircle, each flank resting on the bulwark, and +the pirates in vain endeavoured to break their line. Again and +again they flung themselves upon the knights, only to be beaten +off with heavy loss. At length a loud cheer arose from the galley, +and Sir Louis Ricord, with the knights of Auvergne and Spain having +cleared the galley of their foes, and carried the pirate that +had grappled with her, sprang on to the deck of the ship, and fell +upon the throng that were attacking the knights there, oblivious +of what was going on elsewhere. At once the English knights and +their comrades took the offensive, and fell upon their assailants +who, at the sight of the reinforcement, for a moment stood +irresolute. For a short time there was a fierce struggle; then the +pirates sprang back to their two ships, and endeavoured to cast +off the grapnels. But the knights followed hotly upon them, and, +panic stricken now, the pirates sprang overboard. Many were drowned, +but the greater part managed to swim to shore. + + + +CHAPTER V SCOURGES OF THE SEA + + +Breathless and faint from their tremendous exertions, the knights +removed their helmets. + +"By St. Mary," Sir Louis said, "this has been as hard a fight as +I have ever been engaged in, and well may we be content with our +victory! Well fought, my brave comrades! Each of these vessels +must have carried twice our number at least, and we have captured +four of them; but I fear the cost has been heavy." + +Seven knights had fallen, struck down by sword, arrow, or thrust +of spear. Of the rest but few had escaped unwounded, for, strong +as was their armour, the keen Damascus blades of the Moslems had +in many cases cut clean through it, and their daggers had found +entry at points where the armour joined; and, now that the fight +was over, several of the knights sank exhausted on the deck from +loss of blood. + +But the dressing of wounds formed part of a knight of St. John's +training. Those who were unwounded unbuckled the armour and +bandaged the wounds. Others fetched wine and water from the galley. +The chains of the galley slaves were removed, and these were set +to clear the decks of the Moslem corpses. The anchors were dropped, +for what little wind there was drifted them towards the shore. They +had learned from a dying pirate that the vessels were part of the +fleet of Hassan Ali, a fact that added to the satisfaction felt +by the knights at their capture, as this man was one of the most +dreaded pirates of the Levant. They learnt that he himself had +not been present, the expedition being under the command of one of +his lieutenants, who had fallen in the fight. + +"Now, comrades, let us in the first place take food; we have not +broken our fast this morning. Then let us consider what had best be +done, for indeed we have got as much in our hands as we can manage; +but let us leave that till we eat and drink, for we are faint +from want of food and from our exertions. But we shall have to +eat what comes to hand, and that without cooking, for our servants +all joined the pirates when they boarded us, and are either dead +or are ashore there." + +A meal was made of bread and fruit, and this with wine sufficed to +recruit their energies. + +"It seems to me, comrades," Sir Louis said, when all had finished, +"that the first thing is to search the holds of these vessels +and see what valuables are stored there. These may be all carried +on board one ship, and the others must be burnt, for it is clear +that, as there are four of them, we cannot take them to Rhodes; and +even with one and our galley we should fare but ill, if we fell in +with two or three more of Hassan's ships." + +"But how about the pirates on shore, Sir Louis?" a knight asked. +"There were very many who could not get off to their ships during +the fight, and scores must have swum ashore. I should say that +there must be full two hundred, and it will be a grievous thing +for the islanders if we leave them there." + +"It is certain," the commander said, "that we are not strong enough +to attack them, for were we to land, a party would have to be +left on board, or the pirates might elude our search, seize some +fishing boats, and regain possession. Certainly, we are in no +position to divide our forces." + +"Methinks," Sir John Boswell said, "that the best plan would be to +send a boat, manned with ten galley slaves, taking two or three of +us to the rendezvous, to fetch hither the other two galleys. With +their aid we might take all the four ships safe into port, after +first clearing the island of these pirates. It is but forty miles +away, and eight hours' rowing would take us there." + +There was a general murmur of assent, for all wished that the trophies +of their bravery should, if possible, be carried to Rhodes. + +"That will certainly be the best plan, Sir John, though it may +detain us here for two or three days, or even more, for it is quite +uncertain when the other two galleys may put in at the rendezvous. +Will you yourself undertake the mission?" + +"With pleasure." + +"How many will you take with you?" + +"Two will be sufficient, for we shall have no fighting to do, as +we shall have to trust to our speed if we fall in with an enemy. +I will take, with your permission, Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir +Gervaise Tresham, both of whom have today fought with distinguished +bravery. Indeed, I owe my life to them, for more than once, when +I was hotly pressed, they freed me from my assailants. Truly none +bore themselves better in the fray than they did." + +Three or four others joined in hearty commendations of the two +young knights. + +"Indeed," one said, "I was greatly surprised to see how Tresham bore +himself. He is but a lad, with scarce, one would think, strength +to hold his own in such a fray. It chanced that he was next to me +in the circle, and for a time I kept my eye on him, thinking he +might require my aid; but I soon saw that I need not trouble myself +on his account, for he wielded his weapon as doughtily as the best +knight of the Order could have done, and one of the proofs is +that, while most of us bear marks of the conflict, he has escaped +without scratch. I trust, Sir Louis, that when you give an account +of the fighting you will specially mention that this, the youngest +knight of the Order, bore himself as stoutly as any of them. I say +this, Sir John, because, not being of your langue, I can speak +more warmly than you can do of his skill and bravery." + +"I thank you, De Boysey," Sir John Boswell said, "and I am proud +that my young countryman should have so gained your approbation. +And now," he went on, "while the galley slaves are getting a meal +-- which they have right well earned today -- I should like to +see what there is under the hatches of these ships, so that I can +give our comrades in the other galleys some idea of the value of +this booty we have taken." + +They rose from the table, and, going on board the prizes, lifted +the hatches. + +"Beware!" De Boysey exclaimed, looking down into the hold, when +the first hatch was taken off. "There are people below." + +A chorus of cries followed his exclamation. + +"They are the voices of women and children," Sir Louis exclaimed. +"They must be captives." + +This turned out to be so. In the holds of the four ships were +found over a hundred and fifty women and children; these had been +brought on board in the first boat loads by the pirates, and when +the Christian galley had been seen coming round the point, had +been thrust below, and the hatches thrown over them. They had +heard the din of battle above, but knew not how the conflict had +terminated, and, being afraid to cry out, had remained silent until, +on the hatch being lifted, they had seen the figures of Christian +knights standing in the bright sunshine. All had come from the +village on the other side of the island. They related how the +pirates had suddenly burst upon them, had slaughtered all the men, +set fire to the village, and had driven them before them across +the island to the ships. The poor creatures were delighted at their +escape from slavery, but at the same time were full of grief at +the loss of husbands, fathers, and sons. + +Some laughed, others cried; while some thanked God for their rescue +others heaped imprecations upon the authors of their misfortunes. + +The knights explained to them that for a short time they must remain +on board, as half the pirates were still on shore, but that aid +would soon arrive that would enable them to clear the island. + +Half an hour later Sir John Boswell, with the two young knights, +started in a rowing boat, manned by ten of the galley slaves. The +wind had sprung up since the fight ceased, and as it was nearly +astern, they anticipated that they would make a good passage, and +be at the little islet, named as the place of rendezvous, before +nightfall. + +Among the many bales of rich merchandise in the hold of the pirate +vessels an abundance of wine had been discovered, and of this a +tankard had been given to each of the slaves, by Sir Louis's orders, +as a token of satisfaction at their work in the morning. + +They had gone some two miles when, from one of the inlets in the +island they had left a large fishing boat was seen to issue out. + +"By St. George!" Sir John exclaimed, "that boat must be full of +pirates. And if they see us, which they cannot help doing, and +take it in their heads to chase us, we shall have a hard time of +it." + +The fishing boat for a few minutes kept along the coast, and then +suddenly her course was altered, and her head directed towards +their boat. + +"Now stretch to your oars," Sir John, who spoke some Turkish, said +to the slaves. "Keep ahead of that boat, and I promise you, on +my honour as a Christian knight, that I will myself purchase your +freedom as soon as we get to Rhodes." + +With a shout of delight, the galley slaves bent to their oars, and +the boat flew along at a greatly increased speed. + +"There is but small chance of our getting away," Sir John said +quietly. "At present we must be rowing as fast as they sail; but +wind never tires, while there are limits to the powers of muscle +and bone. If those fellows follow us -- and I doubt not that +they will, for they must be thirsting for vengeance -- they will +overtake us long before we get to the rendezvous; and even did we +reach it, the chances are that we should not find either of the +galleys there. We must hold on as long as we can, and as a last +resource must run ashore. Unfortunately there are no large islands +on our way. Nor have we any hope of assistance from our friends +behind. The inlet looks east, and they will know nothing of our +danger; nor, if they did, could they help us. The galley is short +handed now, and there are the captured ships to look after, and +the captives we rescued. We have only ourselves to depend on." + +At the end of an hour's rowing the boat astern had gained little; +but the exertions of the rowers were telling severely upon them. +They were still doing their best, but their breath came in short +gasps, the rowing was getting short and unsteady, and there was +a sensible decrease in the speed of the boat. Three miles ahead of +them was an islet about half a mile in diameter. In some parts it +was covered with foliage, but elsewhere it was bare rock. + +"That must be our goal," Sir John said. "They will be close to +us by the time we get there." Then he said to the rowers, "Stop +for a minute to get breath. We will land at that islet ahead, and +I shall hold to my promise if we get there in time. Those of you +who like can remain in the boat until your countrymen come up; +those who choose can leave the boat and hide yourselves as best +you may. I leave the choice to yourselves. If we are overtaken +and fall, I cannot keep my promise, and it will be best then for +you to remain in the boat." + +For three or four minutes the slaves bent forward over their oars; +but as soon as Sir John gave the word they straightened themselves +up and began rowing again. The rest had done them good, and they +again fell into a long, steady stroke. + +"Shall we buckle on our armour again?" Sir Ralph Harcourt asked; +for they had not put it on when they left the ship, as the heat +was very great. + +"I think we had better don our mail shirts only. In climbing about +that rock ahead of us, the less weight we carry the better, and +with this heat I would rather fight unprotected than in casque +and armour. Besides, there can be little doubt that, if they come +upon us, it will be our last battle. That craft behind is crowded +with men, and, armour or no armour, it will come to the same in +the end. If it were not that we have a mission to fulfil, and +that it is of all things important to send the galleys to aid our +friends, I would say let us choose a spot at the foot of the rocks +there, where they cannot attack us in the rear, and there fight it +out as becomes knights of the Cross; but as it is our duty above +all things to carry this message, we must strive to preserve our +lives, and must, if we can, conceal ourselves from these paynims." + +"What are you going to do?" Sir John asked the slaves, when they +were within a quarter of a mile of the islet. "I should think, +after we have left the boat, it will be best for you to sit quietly +on your benches till our pursuers arrive." + +"They would cut our throats at once, Sir Knight; they will be furious +at our having given them so long a chase. Hassan Ali's men care +little whom they slay, and, irritated by their misfortune, it will +be naught to them whether we are Moslem or Christian. I, for one, +shall take to the woods, and hide." + +There was a chorus of assent among the other rowers. + +"I trust that you may escape," the knight said. "It is for us +they will be hunting, and if they catch and slay us they will not +trouble to search the island further." + +"It seems to me, Sir John," Gervaise said, "that with the aid of +these good fellows we may yet have a chance of escape." + +"What is your plan, Sir Gervaise?" + +"I think, Sir John, that if, when we land, we climb straight up +that hill, in full sight of the shore, the pirates, when they see +us, will follow at once. The slaves should, therefore, be safe for +a time if they hide in that wood to the left of the spot we are +making for. Will you tell them to keep down by the water's edge +among the bushes, and that after crossing that crest, we will try +to make a dash round, so as to join them there. 'Tis probable that +most of the pirates will start in pursuit of us, and if we and the +slaves make a rush for the shore we may seize our boat, push off, +and capture their craft, if there are but a few left on board, +knock out a plank and scuttle her, and then row away." + +"By St. George, your plan is a good one, Tresham! A right good +scheme, and we will try it." + +He at once translated what Gervaise had said to the rowers, by whom +it was received with short exclamations of approval, for they were +too breathless and exhausted for talk. Already they could hear the +yells of the pirates, who, as the boat ran up on the beach were +but a quarter of a mile behind. + +"Now, away for that wood!" Sir John cried, as he leapt ashore. +"Now, comrades, for a climb up the hill!" + +It was a steep ascent, and more than once one had to be helped up +by the others, and then in turn to assist them to get up beside him. +Louder and louder rose the shouts of the pirates, but the knights +did not glance back until they reached the top of the hill; then +they turned and looked round. A swarm of men were climbing after +them, and were already halfway up the cliff. + +"Heave them down!" Sir John exclaimed, pointing to some loose rocks, +and set the example by lifting a great stone and hurling it over +the edge. Harcourt and Gervaise at once did the same, and twenty +or thirty rocks were speedily sent rolling down the steep ascent, +and yells, shouts, and cries were heard below. + +"That will check them a bit. Now let us be off," Sir John Boswell +said, and they at once started. After crossing a hundred yards +of bare rock they stood at the edge of another slope into a deep +valley, beyond which rose the central hill of the island. The valley +ran right across, and was filled with trees extending to the sea +at either end. Running rapidly down, the knights were within the +shelter of the wood before the Moslems had reached the brow behind +them. A minute later they heard the shouts of their enemies. Once +in the wood they turned to the left, and in a few minutes stood on +the sea shore. It was a little bay some two hundred yards across, +and at either point the cliffs rose abruptly from the water. + +"We shall have to swim round the point," Sir John said. + +"Take off your mail shirts. We will make our way along the rocks +as far as we can, and then drop them into the sea, otherwise they +will know that we have taken to the water." + +They hurried along the rocks, and were able to make their way to +within fifty yards of the point; then, throwing their mail shirts +into the sea, they plunged in. All knew the importance of getting +round before any of the pirates, who would be searching the +valley, came down on the shore, and they swam their hardest until +they rounded the corner. The wood rang with the shouts of their +pursuers, but no yell had risen from the water's edge. A hundred +yards farther, and they were able to land, and were in a short time +in the shelter of the trees that fringed the water to the point +where they had left the boat. There was no longer any occasion +for speed, and they made their way through the thick bushes +and undergrowth quietly, until they recovered breath after their +exertions. They had gone a few hundreds yards when from the bushes +the slaves suddenly rose up. + +"All has gone well," Sir John said to them in their own language. +"The pirates are searching for us on the other side of the hill. +There are not likely to be many of them left here. We shall soon +be in possession of our boat again." + +Followed by the slaves, they made their way forward until they +stood at the edge of the wood. Five or six pirates were standing +on the shore. + +"I expect they have been left there," Harcourt said, "to prevent +the slaves from carrying off the boat. They must have seen them +run into the wood. They won't reckon on our being with them." + +Drawing their swords, the three knights rushed out, followed by +the slaves. They had but a hundred yards to run. The pirates, on +seeing them, raised a yell and drew their scimitars; but the sight +of the knights rushing upon them, when they had expected but a +few unarmed rowers, was too much for their courage, and when their +assailants were still fifty yards away they turned and fled. The +fishing craft had been run ashore but a few yards from their boat. + +"Get her afloat, Harcourt, and bring her to the stern of the +fisherman. Now, Tresham, follow me." + +Sir John Boswell climbed up on to the fishing boat, which was +a craft of some fifteen tons burden. She was entirely deserted, +but the sail still hung from the yard, and a fire was burning on +a stone hearth, raised on some logs of wood in the centre of the +deck. + +"Look for something to stave in a plank, Tresham." + +Gervaise leapt down into the hold. There were some nets and spare +sails lying there, but nothing that would answer the purpose. He +examined the planks. The boat was very strongly and roughly built. + +"There is nothing here, Sir John, that will do, and nothing short of +a heavy sledge hammer would suffice to smash one of these planks." + +"There are a lot of them coming down the hill, Tresham. We have not +many minutes to spare, but we must disable the craft. They will +soon be after us again; they have run her hard and fast here, but +when they all come back they will soon get her off. Let us try +one of these sweeps." + +He lifted one of the heavy oars, and holding it upright he and +Gervaise together tried to drive the handle through the bottom. +Again and again they raised it and drove it down; but the plank +was too strong, and too securely fastened to the timbers. + +"We must give it up," the knight said, with a sigh. "Fortune has +befriended us so far, Tresham, but she has deserted us at last. +Another three minutes, and we shall have thirty or forty of them +upon us." + +At this moment the lad's eye fell upon the fire. + +"We shall manage yet," he exclaimed, and, seizing a blazing brand, +he jumped below and set fire to the sails stowed there; they were +as dry as tinder, and the flame shot up at once. + +"That is good, Tresham," the knight said; "but they will put it +out before it has caught the boat." + +"Not before it has burnt the sails," Gervaise replied. "Now for +this one," and he applied the brand to the lower edge of the great +sail. Without a word Sir John seized another brand, and fired the +sail on the other side of the deck. The flames flashed up, and a +wild yell of rage and alarm broke from the pirates, who were now +rushing down towards the beach. + +"Now to the boat, Tresham; we have no time to lose if we would +avoid being pounded with stones." + +They dropped over the stern into the boat. The galley slaves dipped +their oars into the water, and she shot away just as the foremost +of the pirates reached the edge of the water. A few stones were +thrown; but the pirates were so anxious about the craft, by which +alone they could escape from the island, that the majority at once +climbed on board. + +At a word from the knight, the slaves stopped rowing a hundred +yards from the shore. The sail was already consumed, and the yard +and the upper part of the mast were in flames. A dense smoke was +rising from the hold, and the pirates were throwing buckets of +water down into it. In a few minutes the smoke decreased. + +"I thought that they would be able to put it out; but, as far as +we are concerned, it matters little. They have lost their sails, +and as I saw but four sweeps, we can travel five miles to their +one. If we find the galleys we will look in here on our way back, +and if they have not left we will fire that craft more effectually, +and then the pirates will be trapped, and we can leave them till +we have fetched off Sir Louis and his prizes, and then have a grand +hunt here. We took no prisoners before, and a hundred slaves will +be a useful addition to our wall builders. Now, Tresham, I have to +thank you warmly, for Harcourt and I doubly owe our lives to you. +It was thanks to your quickness of wit that we regained our boat, +for I would not have given a ducat for our chances had you not +thought of that scheme. In the second place, we should assuredly +have been overtaken again had it not been for your happy thought +of crippling them by burning their sails. By St. George, Harcourt, +this young countryman of ours is as quick and as ready of wit as +he has shown himself a brave and gallant fighter! We have no lack +of sturdy fighters; but the wit to devise and to seize upon the +right thing in the moment of danger is vastly more rare. As for +myself, I have no shame that this lad, who is young enough to be +my son, should have thus, twice in a single hour, pointed out the +way to safety. With sword and battleaxe I can, I trust, hold my +own with any man; but my brain is dull when it comes to hatching +schemes. If we live, we shall see Sir Gervaise one of the most +distinguished knights of the Order." + +"While I feel gratified indeed, as I may well be by your commendation, +Sir John, I must, under your favour, say that you have given me +a far greater degree of credit than is my due. There was the fire, +and there was the sail, and the thought that the one would destroy +the other was simply a natural one, which might have occurred to +a child. As to the plan about the boat, seeing that there was the +hill and the wood, it flashed upon me at once that we might make +a circuit and come back to her." + +"Just so, lad; but those thoughts did not flash upon my mind, nor +upon that of Harcourt. It is just because those sort of ideas do +flash upon the minds of some men, and not of others, that the first +rise to the rank of distinguished commanders, while the others +remain simple knights who would play their part in a charge or in +the defence of a breach, but would be of no account as leaders. + +"Now row along steadily, men," he went on, speaking to the slaves. +"We are still in good time, for it was not an hour from the moment +we touched the island to our departure from it, and much of that +time we have gained by the speed with which you rowed before. At +any rate, we shall make out the island before sunset, and whether +we arrive there a little sooner or later matters little. Harcourt, +hand me that wineskin and a goblet. A draught will do us good +after our climb and swim, and these good fellows will be none the +worse for a cup also." + +Inspired with the hope of freedom, the slaves rowed steadily, and +the sun had just set when they entered a little inlet in the rocky +isle that was their place of rendezvous. + +"Thanks be to the saints!" Sir John exclaimed, as they reached the +entrance. "There is Santoval's galley." + +There was a stir on board the galley as the boat was seen approaching. +The knights had put on their armour, which they had found still +lying in the boat, the pirates, in their haste to pursue, having +left her unexamined, while those who had remained on guard had +abstained from touching anything until the return of their captain +and comrades. + +"Whence come you, Sir John, and what is the news? No misfortune has +befallen Ricord's galley, I hope?" the Spanish knight in command +shouted, as the boat came near enough for him to recognize the +features of its occupants. + +"All is well," Sir John shouted back; "but we have taken more +prizes than we can manage, though not without hard fighting. Seven +knights have fallen, and at least ten others will not be able to +buckle their armour on again for some time to come, so I have been +sent here to beg your assistance; and it is well that it should +be given speedily, for if more pirate vessels come up before you +join, Ricord and his companions will be in a sorry plight." + +By this time the boat had reached the side of the galley, and +as Sir John and his two companions stepped on board, the knights +crowded round to hear the details of the news. Exclamations of +approval and satisfaction arose when Sir John related the incidents +of the fight, and told them that the four vessels that had fallen +into their hands formed part of Hassan Ali's fleet. + +"That is good news indeed, Boswell," Don Santoval said; "and I would +I had been there to take part in so gallant a fight. It is well +you found us here, for with four prizes on hand, and with half his +strength dead or disabled, Ricord must be in sore need of aid. +We will start tomorrow morning at daybreak. As all the ships were +taken, there is little fear of any of the other pirates hearing +news of what has happened." + +"I don't know," Sir John replied. "There were, as I told you, some +two hundred pirates left on the island. About half those, we +know, seized a fishing boat and escaped, for they chased us, and +we have had as narrow an escape from death as has ever fallen to +my lot, though I have been in over a score of hard fought battles. +The rest may well have taken another fishing boat and made off +also, for we saw several craft along the shores of the island. If +so, they may have made for Hassan Ali's rendezvous, wherever that +may be, just as I made here, and by this time some of his ships +may be on the way there." + +"By St. Anthony, this alters the situation gravely!" Don Santoval +said. "Fellow knights, we must lose no time in going to Ricord's +assistance. The slaves have had a long row today, but they must +start on another. Let them have a good meal to strengthen them, +and a cup of wine each. Whatever their scruples at other times, +they never refuse wine when there is heavy work to be done, knowing +full well that a draught of it helps them mightily in their labours. +Your men must have rowed well, Sir John, to have brought you here +so quickly?" + +"I have promised them their freedom," Sir John said; "and they shall +have it, even if I have to pay their value into the treasury. As I +told you, we were hotly pursued, for the craft with her sail went +faster than we with our oars; and, knowing the importance of +bringing the news here, I encouraged them by promising them their +freedom, should we get away. Not only did they row right manfully, +but they proved faithful in our extremity, and, when all seemed +lost, stuck to us instead of deserting and joining the pirates." + +"But how did you get away, Sir John, if their craft outsailed you?" + +"I owe my life entirely to the quick wit of my young countryman, +Sir Gervaise Tresham here." And Sir John then related the incidents +of their adventure on the island, his narrative eliciting warm +expressions of approval from the knights. + +"Of course, you will go with us, Boswell?" Don Santoval said, when +the master of the slaves announced that these had eaten their +meal, and were ready. + +"I must do so," Sir John replied. "I want you, on your way, to +look in at that island where we had so narrow an escape, and if +we find their craft still there we can destroy it. The place is +directly in our course; we shall, therefore, lose but little time +in looking in. Of course, they may have gone as soon as they got +their vessel afloat, but it is hardly likely. They would have no +idea of my returning with a galley so soon, and will probably set +to to make a dozen more oars before they start, for she had but +four on board, which will scarce suffice to send her a mile an +hour through the water. Therefore, I fancy they will not put off +until tomorrow morning. If that is so, and we destroy their craft, +they will be trapped in the islet, and on our return we can capture +them all. I think of leaving Harcourt and Tresham in the boat, in +order that when Piccolomini's galley comes in, they may direct +him also to join us." + +"He may be in at any moment; we met him three days since. He had +captured a pirate, and sent her off under charge of ten of his +knights. We agreed to meet him this evening; and as he is not here, +he will probably be in the first thing in the morning." + +Gervaise and Harcourt took their places in the boat again. The galley +got up its anchor and started. Just as she reached the mouth of +the inlet another galley rounded the point and nearly ran into her. + +"I am going to Ricord's assistance, Piccolomini," Don Santoval +shouted. + +"Is it urgent?" the commander of the galley shouted back. "We have +had a very long row, and can go no farther, unless his strait is +a very sore one." + +"No. Come on in the morning. You will hear all the news from +a boat lying two hundred yards astern. Two young English knights +are waiting in her to give you the news. Ricord has made a fine +capture. Row on, men." And the galley proceeded on her way, while +the newcomer proceeded up the harbour. + +Harcourt and Gervaise at once went on board, and the former gave the +Italian commander an account of the battle that had taken place, +and the capture of the four pirate vessels. After the exclamations +of satisfaction by the knights had ceased, he recounted their own +adventures, which were heard with lively interest. + +"I hope indeed that Santoval will burn that fishing boat, and that +we shall capture the pirates," the commander said. "We have need +of more slaves to carry out the works at Rhodes. Now, let us to +supper, gentlemen, and then to sleep. In six hours we will be off +again, for if some more of these villains have escaped and carried +the news to Hassan Ali, our swords may be sorely needed by Ricord +and Santoval tomorrow." + + + +CHAPTER VI KNIGHTED + + +At three in the morning all on board the galley were astir. A ration +of bread and meat was served out to the slaves, and the boat was +soon afterwards under way. The rowers of the English knight's boat +had been warmly commended by the commander and placed in charge +of the overseer, with instructions that they were to be treated as +free men. As soon as the galley slaves set to work, however, they +seated themselves on the benches and double banked some of the +oars, anxious to please the knights. With the exception of those +whose turn it was to be on watch, most of the knights slept until +daybreak. + +"At the rate we are rowing, Gervaise," Harcourt said, as they went +up on to the poop together, "it will not take us very long to join +our friends. We are going through the water at fully six miles an +hour; and as we have already been two hours under way, in another +three we shall be there." + +An hour and a half later they passed the island where they had +landed. The two young knights pointed out to the others the valley +into which they had descended, and the point round which they had +swum. In a few minutes they caught sight of the landing place. + +"Look, Gervaise, there is something black showing just above the +water." + +"I see it. I think it is a line of timbers. There were certainly +no rocks there when we ran ashore." + +"Then Santoval must have found the craft still there and burnt +her," one of the knights standing by remarked, "and the pirates +are caged up. It will take them some time to make a raft that will +carry them to the next island, and before they can do that we shall +be back again. I shall be sorry if they escape, for they are as +ruthless a set of villains as sail the seas." + +The galley had traversed half the remaining distance when the sound +of a gun was faintly heard. For a moment there was an absolute +hush on the poop; then three or four shots in rapid succession were +heard. + +"Some more pirate ships must have come up," the commander exclaimed. +Then he shouted down to the slaves, "Row, men -- row for your lives! +Overseer, do not spare your lash if any hang back from their work." + +The galley had been travelling fast before, but her speed greatly +increased as the slaves rowed their hardest. Fast as she was +travelling, the impatience of the knights was extreme. They walked +up and down the deck, making vows of candles that should be burnt +at the shrine of St. John if they arrived in time to take a share +in the fight, stopping at times to listen to the sound of artillery, +which was now so frequent as to show that a severe engagement was +being fought. Many of the younger knights ran down to the waist +and double banked the oars, and in a shorter time than it seemed +possible the galley arrived at the mouth of the bay. + +A desperate fight was going on. Ricord's ship lay, idle and deserted, +at anchor. Five pirate crafts surrounded Santoval's galley. Two +of them were alongside of her; the others were raking her fore and +aft with their shot. The young knights left the oars, sprang up +to the poop and joined in the shout of encouragement raised by the +others, and then, resuming their helmets and armour, stood ready to +leap on board an enemy as soon as they reached her. Piccolomini +directed the helmsman to lay him alongside one of the ships grappling +with Santoval. As they came up, their galley's cannon poured their +fire into her, and a moment later the knights sprang on board. + +In the din of battle their shout had been unheard. The pirates thronging +the other side of their ship were intent only on overcoming the +resistance of the knights, and even the discharge of cannon had not +called their attention to their foe, until the latter, shouting +the war cry of the Order, fell suddenly upon them. A panic at +once seized them. Some were cut down almost unresistingly, but +the great majority, running to the bow or stern, threw themselves +overboard and swam to the other ships. The pirate ship on the +other side of Santoval's galley instantly threw off the grapnels +and thrust off from her side, and, immediately hauling in the +sheets of the big sail, began at once to draw away, while her three +consorts made for the mouth of the bay. + +"Back to your galley, comrades," Piccolomini shouted, "or with this +brisk wind they will escape us." + +The knights at once crossed on to their own craft, the oars were +got out, and the chase began. A minute or two later Don Santoval +followed them, but soon gave up, as so large a number of the oars +had been broken when the two pirate ships ran alongside him, +that it would have been hopeless to pursue. The wind was blowing +freshly, and was rapidly increasing in strength, so that, in spite +of the efforts of the galley slaves, the pirates gradually drew +away, running straight before the wind, and aiding the effects +of the sails with oars. Seeing the hopelessness of the chase, +Piccolomini abandoned it, after rowing for two miles, and returned +to the island. The other two galleys were lying beside each other, +and Piccolomini had his craft steered alongside them. + +"Thanks, Piccolomini, for arriving so opportunely," Santoval, who +was seated on the deck leaning against the bulwarks, said, as his +fellow commander leapt on board, and came towards him. + +"Would that I had arrived sooner, Santoval, for I see that you have +been grievously wounded!" + +"Ay. One of the paynims' cannonballs has carried off both my legs +below the knee. The leech has been searing the wounds with a hot +iron, and says that he thinks I shall get over it; but if so I fear +that my fighting days are past, unless, indeed, I fight seated on +a chair. However, I ought not to grumble. I have lost many brave +comrades, and others are wounded more sorely than I am." + +Sir Louis Ricord now joined them. He embraced Piccolomini warmly. + +"I never heard a more welcome shout, Piccolomini, than that which +you gave when you fell upon the Moslems, for in truth the issue +of the conflict was doubtful. I was delighted when this morning at +daybreak Santoval's galley rowed in. We had all kept watch during +the night, thinking the pirates might obtain boats and make an +attack upon us; and, with but twenty of us fit to wield a sword, +our position would have been a bad one, and at any rate they +might have recaptured the prizes. We agreed that Santoval and his +knights should land at once. This they did. Sir John Boswell had +of course told me how his boat had been chased by a fishing craft, +manned by a large number of the pirates, and that he feared the +rest might similarly have escaped, and might have gone to bring +some more of Hassan Ali's ships upon us. + +"As soon as Santoval landed, some of the natives came down and told +him that there was not a pirate remaining there, the rest having +started in another boat a few minutes after the one that had chased +Boswell. Santoval left two of his men with orders to ascend to the +highest spot on the island, and to keep watch, and then brought +the rest off to his galley. Our first step was, of course, to send +all the women and children ashore. Then we consulted as to what had +best be done if the pirates should come back in force. We hoped, +at any rate, that this would not happen until you arrived. We +expected that you would be here before noon; but we decided that, +should they get here before you, we from our galley would embark +on Santoval's, as it was better to fight in one strongly manned +boat than to divide our forces. + +"It was scarce half an hour after Santoval came down before the +men left on the lookout appeared on the beach. On fetching them +off, they told us that as soon as they reached the top of the hill +they saw five vessels approaching with sails and oars, and that +they would be here in half an hour at the outside. We at once +abandoned my galley, brought the rowers and the wounded here, and +prepared for the fight. As you saw, they ran their two biggest +ships alongside us, and for two hours the fight went on. They +were crowded with men, who in vain strove to get a footing on our +decks. Had we only had these two to deal with, we should have had +nothing to fear, heavily manned though they were; but the other +three kept sailing backwards and forwards, discharging their guns +into us as they passed, firing not only shot, but bags of bullets. + +"Their gunners were skilful, and, as you see, they have completely +riddled our poop. Twenty knights have been killed, and eleven +others are sorely wounded. Scarce one has escaped unscathed. You may +guess, then, how welcome was your aid, which we had not expected +for another three hours. We were on the point of abandoning the +waist and gathering on the poop, which we could still have defended +for a considerable time, when, as if dropped from the skies, you +fell upon the pirates, and turned the tables. How is it that you +were here so early?" + +"We started at three o'clock, instead of waiting for daybreak. +It seemed, from the story of the two young knights, that it was +possible you might be attacked early, and, crippled as your command +was, and with four prizes on your hands, I deemed it best to come +on as soon as the rowers had had a few hours' rest." + +"It is well that you did so; it would have been a grievous affair +had two of our galleys been captured by the pirates. It would have +been a blow to the prestige of the Order, and would have brought +such strength to Hassan Ali and other pirate leaders that nothing +short of sending out a fleet would have recovered our ascendancy; +and as every ducat we can spare has to be spent on the fortifications, +it would have been a misfortune indeed had we been obliged to fit +out such an expedition at present." + +"Who have fallen, Sir Louis?" + +"Five more of the knights of my galley -- Pierre des Vignes, Raoul +de Montpelier, Ernest Schmidt, Raymond Garcia, and Albert Schenck. +Here is the list of the knights of Santoval's galley." + +"'Tis a long list, and a sad one," Piccolomini said, after reading +the names. "With the seven who fell in your first fight, twenty-seven +knights have fallen, all brave comrades. Truly, we can ill spare +such a loss. It is true there are five prizes to show for it, +and we have struck Hassan Ali a blow that will resound through the +Levant; but the cost is heavy." + +"It is indeed," Ricord agreed. "The four vessels are well filled +with rich spoil that the scoundrels had gathered, and I doubt +not the one you captured is equally rich. Still, had they been ten +times as valuable, the booty would be dearly purchased at such a +price." + +There was now a consultation among the leaders, and it was agreed +that six knights should be placed in each of the captured ships, +with ten of the galley slaves to work the sails, the others being +equally divided between the three galleys. They were, in the first +place, to row to the island where the pirates were imprisoned, +and to slay or capture the whole of them; afterwards they were to +make direct for Rhodes; with so numerous a fleet there was no fear +of their being attacked. The arrangements took but a short time +to complete. An hour later they left the port, the three galleys +rowing ahead, while the five prizes, under easy sail, followed +them. + +Sir John Boswell had been wounded, but not so seriously as to +altogether disable him, and he was in command of one of the prizes, +having Sir Adam Tedbond, Harcourt, Gervaise, and a German knight, +with him. Sir Marmaduke Lumley, who, after the first fight was +over, was found, to the surprise and pleasure of his comrades, to +be still living, was, with the rest of the wounded, on board one +of the galleys. Two of the pirates had fallen dead across him, +and in the ardour of their attack on the knights, he had lain there +unnoticed until the return of Sir Louis and his comrades had driven +the pirates overboard. The leech was of opinion that he might yet +recover from his wound. + +On arriving at the island, sixty of the knights disembarked. The +woods near the shore were first searched, but were found untenanted. +They were about to advance up the hill when a man appeared on the +crest above them waving a white flag. He was told to come down, +and on his arrival said that he was sent by his companions to offer +to surrender, on the promise that their lives should be spared. +The knights were well pleased to be saved the trouble of a long +search through the woods, and the messenger left at once to acquaint +the pirates that their terms were accepted. In a short time some +eighty men made their way down the hill. On reaching the beach they +were disarmed, divided equally between the galleys, and distributed +among the rowers, filling up the places of those who had been +killed by the fire of the Moslems, and of the men drafted into +the prizes. They begged for food and water before they began work, +and, on being questioned, admitted that their surrender was due +principally to the fact that they had been unable to find food +of any sort on the island, and that after searching all over it no +spring of water could be discovered. + +"In that case," Sir John Boswell said, "I have no doubt they have +all surrendered. I before thought it probable that a good many +of them would have remained hidden, trusting to be able to make a +raft after we had left, and so get away, believing rightly enough +that we should be disinclined to search every foot of the island +for them. As it is, I doubt not, all are here." + +The little fleet anchored that night at the rendezvous, and after +two more days' rowing reached Rhodes, where the appearance of +the three galleys, followed by their five prizes, was greeted with +great acclamation. The news, however, that twenty-seven knights +had fallen, and that thirteen or fourteen others were very gravely +wounded, damped the satisfaction that every one had at first felt. +D'Aubusson came down as soon as they reached the mole, and was +greatly affected when he received Ricord's report. + +"It is an unfortunate loss indeed, Sir Louis," he said, "though +it may be that the victory is not too dearly purchased. I do not +speak of the captured ships, nor of the spoil they contain, nor +even of the slaves you have brought us, welcome though all may +be, but of the effect that the defeat and capture of these craft +of Hassan Ali's will have. It is plain that the preparations the +sultan is making, and the belief that Rhodes is doomed, have so +encouraged the infidels that they are becoming really formidable +at sea. This blow will show them that the Order has yet power to +sweep the sea of pirates. Since, however, this adventure has taught +us that a single leader like Hassan sails with at least nine ships +under his orders, it is clear that in future our galleys must not +adventure singly among the islands. It was fortunate indeed that +first Santoval, and then Piccolomini, arrived to your assistance. +How was it that they happened to come up so opportunely?" + +"Sir John Boswell, with Ralph Harcourt and Gervaise Tresham; went +in a boat to the rendezvous we had arranged, and reached it after +an adventure, which I will leave Sir John to tell himself. I may +say that the two young knights named had in our encounter both +obtained very high credit amongst us all for the valour with which +they fought. No one bore himself more stoutly, and I am glad to +take this early opportunity of bringing their conduct before your +notice. As you will learn from Sir John, Gervaise Tresham afterwards +showed a quickness of wit that was the means of saving the lives +of those with him, and I may say also of all with me, for had they +failed to reach the rendezvous we should have fallen easy victims +to the five ships Hassan Ali brought against us." + +Sending for Sir John Boswell, the grand prior heard from him the +details of his adventure in the boat. + +"I am right glad to hear you speak so warmly of Tresham, Sir John, +for I regard him as my special protege, and am pleased indeed to +find that at this outset of his career he has proved himself not +only a brave knight, but full of resource, and quick at invention. +I think, Sir John, that these two young knights have shown themselves +well worthy of receiving the honour of secular knighthood." + +"Assuredly they have," Sir John agreed. + +"Then, Sir John, will you bestow it upon them? The Order, as an +Order, does not bestow the honour, but its members do not forfeit +their right as knights to bestow it individually, and none among +us are more worthy of admitting them to your rank than yourself." + +"I would gladly do it, Sir Peter; but the honour would come far +better from yourself, and would not only be more highly prized by +them, but would be of greater value in the eyes of others. I am but +a simple knight commander of the Order, and my name would scarce +be known beyond its ranks. But to be knighted by one whose name +is known and honoured throughout Europe would give them a standing +wherever they went, and place them on a level with the best." + +"If that is your opinion, Boswell, I will myself undertake it, and +will do it at once; it were better done here than at a conclave +of the Order -- now, when they are fresh from the battle. Let the +knights be summoned from the other galleys at once." + +In a few minutes the whole of the knights were assembled on the +poop of the galley. + +"Friends, and brother knights," D'Aubusson said. "First, in +the name of the Order, I have to thank you all most heartily for +the brave deeds that you have performed, and for the fresh honour +you have won for it. Every man has, as I learn from the three +commanders, borne himself as a true and valiant knight, ready to +give his life in the cause of the Order and of humanity. Two names +have been specially brought before me by commander Ricord, and +by the good knight Sir John Boswell; they are those of two young +companions who, though knights of our Order, have not yet received +secular knighthood, and this, in the opinion of these two knights, +they have right worthily won. Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise +Tresham, step forward." + +The two young knights, colouring with pleasure at this unexpected +honour, removed their helmets, and stood with bowed heads before +the grand prior. D'Aubusson went on, turning to the knights around +him, "I am about, comrades, to undertake the office of knighting +them. Sir Louis Ricord and Sir John Boswell stand as their sponsors. +But before I proceed I would ask you all whether you, too, approve, +and hold that Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham have +proved themselves worthy of the honour of secular knighthood at +my hands?" + +There was a general reply in the affirmative, the answer of the +survivors of Ricord's crew being specially emphatic. The grand +prior drew his sword, and the two young knights knelt before him, +their sponsors standing beside them. + +"Sir Ralph Harcourt, you have now been four years a knight of this +Order, but hitherto you have had no opportunity of drawing sword +against the infidels. Now that the chance has come, you have proved +yourself a true and valiant brother of the Order, and well worthy +of the secular accolade. It is in that capacity that I now knight +you. It is not the grand prior of Auvergne, but Sir Peter D'Aubusson, +of the grand cross of St. Louis, who now bestows upon you the honour +of secular knighthood." He touched him lightly with the sword. He +then turned to Gervaise. + +"You, Sir Gervaise Tresham, are young indeed to receive the honour +of secular knighthood; but valour is of no age, and in the opinion +of your commanders, and in that of your comrades, you have proved +yourself worthy of the honour. You have shown too, that, as Sir +John Boswell has related to me, you are not only brave in action, +but able, in the moment of danger, to plan and to execute. You +were, he tells me, the means of saving his life and that of your +comrade, and, by thus enabling him to bear to the place of rendezvous +the news of Sir Louis's danger, were also the means of saving the +lives of Sir Louis and his companions, and of bringing home in +safety the prizes he had taken. With such a beginning it is easy +to foresee that you will win for yourself some day a distinguished +position in the ranks of the Order, and are most worthy of the +honour I now bestow upon you." And he touched him with his sword. + +The two young knights rose to their feet, bowed deeply to D'Aubusson, +and then retired, with their sponsors. They were at once surrounded +by the knights, who shook them by the hand, and warmly congratulated +them upon the honour that had befallen them, receiving equally warm +congratulations on their arrival at the auberge of the langue. + +The five prizes turned out, when their cargoes were landed, to +be much more valuable than the cursory examination made by the +knights had warranted them in expecting. They contained, indeed, +an accumulation of the most valuable contents of the prizes taken +by the pirates for a long time previously; and as these desperadoes +preyed upon Turkish commerce as well as Christian, the goods +consisted largely of Eastern manufactures of all kinds. Costly +robes, delicate embroidery, superb carpets, shawls, goldsmiths' +work, and no small amount of jewels, were among the spoil collected, +and the bulk of the merchandise captured was, two days later, +despatched in galleys to Genoa and Marseilles, to be sold for the +benefit of the Order. + +D'Aubusson without hesitation carried out Sir John Boswell's +promise to the slaves who had rowed his boat. They were not only +set at liberty, but were each presented with a sum of money, and +were placed on board a galley, and landed on the mainland. + +The English knights were all proud of the honour that had been won +by their young countrymen, the only exception being Robert Rivers, +who was devoured with jealousy at their advancement. He did not +openly display his feelings, for the reports not only of Sir John +Boswell, but of the other two English knights, were so strong that +he dared not express his discontent. He himself had twice been +engaged with pirates, but had gained no particular credit, and +indeed had, in the opinion of his comrades, been somewhat slack +in the fray. He was no favourite in the auberge, though he spared +no pains to ingratiate himself with the senior knights, and had +a short time before been very severely reprimanded by the bailiff +for striking one of the servants. + +"I have more than once had to reprove you for your manners to the +servants," the bailiff said. "You will now be punished by the +septaine; you will fast for seven days, on Wednesday and Friday +you will receive bread and water only, and will be confined to +the auberge for that period. The next time that I have reason to +complain of you, I shall bring the matter before the grand master, +and represent to him that it were best to send you home, since you +cannot comport yourself to the servants of the auberge as befits a +knight of the Order. We have always borne the reputation of being +specially kind to our servants, and it is intolerable that one, +who has been but a short time only a professed knight, should behave +with a hauteur and insolence that not even the oldest among us +would permit himself. There is not one of the servants here who +was not in his own country of a rank and station equal, if not +superior, to your own; and though misfortune has fallen upon them, +they are to be pitied rather than condemned for it. In future, +you are to give no order whatever to the servants, nor to address +them, save when at meals you require anything. If you have any +complaints to make of their conduct to you, you will make them to +me, and I will inquire into the matter; and if I find they have +failed in their duty they will be punished. I shall keep my eye upon +you in the future. There are other faults that I have observed in +you. More than once I have heard you address Sir Gervaise Tresham +in a manner which, were not duelling forbidden by our rules, might +bring about bloodshed; and from what I have seen when I have been +watching the exercises, he is as much your superior in arms as he +is in manner and disposition." + +This reproof had greatly subdued Robert Rivers; and as he felt that +any display of his jealousy of Gervaise would be resented by the +other knights, and might result in serious consequences to himself, +he abstained from any exhibition of it when they returned to +the auberge, although he could not bring himself to join in the +congratulations offered to them. The next day, however, when he +was talking to Ralph Harcourt, he remarked, "From what I hear, +Harcourt, D'Aubusson praised young Tresham very highly. It seems to +me that there was nothing at all out of the way in what he did, +and it was very unfair that he should be selected for higher praise +than yourself." + +"It was not unfair at all," Ralph said warmly, for he was of a generous +nature, and incapable of the base feeling of envy. "Tresham did +a great deal more than I did. When we saw the pirate boat gaining +so fast upon us, it seemed to Sir John Boswell, as well as to +myself, that there was scarce a chance of escape, and that all we +could do was to choose a spot on which to make a stand, and then +to sell our lives as dearly as we could. I could see that Sir +John was scanning the hill for a spot where we could best defend +ourselves. As to hiding on so small an island, with a hundred men +eager for our blood searching for us, it was well nigh impossible. +It was Tresham's suggestion alone that saved our lives and enabled +us to fetch succour to Sir Louis. Sir John, who is an old and +tried soldier, said that for quickness and merit of conception, +the oldest knight in the Order could not have done better; and he +is not one to praise unduly. I am four years older than Gervaise +Tresham, but I tell you that were he named tomorrow commander of +a galley, I would willingly serve under him." + +"Well, well, you need not be angry, Harcourt, I have nothing to +say against Tresham. No doubt he had a happy thought, which turned +out well; but I cannot see that there was anything wonderful in +it, and it seemed to me unfair that one who is a mere boy should +receive higher praise than yourself, who, as I heard Sir John and +Sir Adam Tedbond say last night at the refectory, bore yourself +right gallantly." + +"I did my best," Ralph said shortly; "but there was small credit +in that when we were fighting for our lives. The most cowardly +beast will fight under such circumstances. When you see a Moslem +rushing at you, scimitar in hand, and know that if you do not cut +him down he will cut you down, you naturally strike as hard and +as quickly as you can. You have never liked Gervaise, Rivers. I +am sure I don't know why, but you always speak in a contemptuous +sort of tone about him. True, it does him no harm, but it certainly +does you no good. For what reason should you feel a contempt for +him? Although so much younger, he is a better swordsman and a +better rider than you are. He is liked by every one in the auberge, +which is more than can be said of yourself; he is always good +tempered, and is quiet and unassuming. What on earth do you always +set yourself against him for?" + +"I do not know that I do set myself against him," Rivers said +sullenly. "I own to having no great liking for him, which is +natural enough, seeing that his father was a Lancastrian, while +we are Yorkists; but it is not pleasant to see so much made of a +boy, merely because D'Aubusson has favoured him." + +"I am certain," Harcourt said hotly, "that such an idea has never +occurred to any one but yourself. Sir Peter is a great man and will +soon be our grand master, but at present he is but grand prior of +the langue of Auvergne, and whether he favours Tresham or not is +a matter that concerns none of us. Gervaise is liked by us for +his own good qualities. He bears himself, as a young knight should +do, respectfully towards his seniors, and is ever ready to do a +service to any one. No one has ever seen him out of temper; he is +always kind and considerate to the servants, and when in command +of parties of slaves at the public works never says a harsh word +to them, but treats them as if they were human beings, and not +brute beasts. Besides, though he is more skilful than any of us +with his sword, or indeed at any of the military exercises, he is +unassuming, and has no particle of pride or arrogance. It is for +all these things that he is liked, and the friendship of D'Aubusson +has naught whatever to do with it. It is not only D'Aubusson who has +prophesied that he will rise to a distinguished rank in the Order. +Boswell and Ricord both said the same, and I for one thoroughly +believe it. Is there one among us under the age of twenty -- and I +might go farther -- who has already won such credit for himself? +One who when but sixteen can make his mark in an Order like ours +is certain to rise to high office, and you and I may, before many +years are over, be proud to serve under him." + +"That I will never do," Rivers said fiercely. "I would rather go +and bury myself for life in the smallest commandery in England." + +"That may be," Harcourt retorted, his temper also roused, "But +possibly you might prefer that to fighting under any other leader." + +"That is a reflection on my courage, Sir Ralph Harcourt, I shall +lay this matter before the bailiff." + +"You can do as you like," Harcourt said disdainfully, "But I don't +think you will benefit by your pains." + +When his temper cooled down Rivers acknowledged to himself the truth +of what Harcourt said. He was not in the favour of the bailiff, +while both Harcourt and Tresham stood at the present moment high +in his estimation. Any complaint would lead to an inquiry into the +matter that had led to the former's words, and even if Harcourt +were reprimanded for using them, he himself would assuredly not +gain in the estimation of the knights. Harcourt himself thought no +more of the matter, though he laughingly told Gervaise that Rivers +was by no means gratified at their both attaining the honour of +secular knighthood, which virtually placed them over his head. + +"He is not a nice fellow," Gervaise said. "But naturally it must +be galling to him, and to a good many others who have not yet had +the chance of distinguishing themselves. I think it is very good +of them that they are all so kind and cordial. Of course it is +otherwise with you, who are as old as most of the other professed +knights serving here; but with me it is quite different, and as +Rivers, somehow, has never been very friendly with me, of course +it is doubly galling to him. I hope he will soon get an opportunity +of winning his spurs too." + +"That is just like you, Tresham. If I were in your place, I should +have no good wishes for a fellow who has never lost an opportunity +of annoying me, and that without the smallest cause of offence on +my part." + +"I am sure you would not wish him ill, Harcourt. You would make +allowance for him just as I do, and feel that if he had had the same +opportunities he would have obtained the same credit and honours." + + + +CHAPTER VII A FIRST COMMAND + + +The first news that the knights heard on their return from their +expedition was that the Grand Master Orsini was seriously ill, +and that, at his advanced age, the doctors feared there was little +hope of his rallying. Gervaise felt a keen regret on hearing +that the kind and gentle old man, who had been for three years his +master, was at the point of death. Nevertheless, it was generally +felt among the knights that, in view of the dangers that threatened +Rhodes, it was for the good of the Order that a strong and capable +man, whom all respected, and who possessed their entire confidence, +should at such a time be invested with absolute power. + +D'Aubusson had, indeed, for some years been the real head of the +community, but every question had, if only as a matter of form, +to be referred to the grand master, in order to obtain his approval +and signature. In the state of feebleness to which he had for +some months past fallen, much time was frequently lost before he +could be made to understand the questions referred to him. +Moreover, orders of D'Aubusson could be appealed against, his views +thwarted, and his authority questioned; and it was therefore felt +that, much as they all respected the old grand master, it would be +an advantage to the Order when the supreme authority passed into +the hands of D'Aubusson. + +Four days after the return of the expedition Orsini died. A few hours +later the grand council was convened, and D'Aubusson unanimously +elected grand master of the Order. The ceremony of the funeral of +his predecessor was an imposing one. Every knight of the Order in +Rhodes was present, together with a number of the leading natives +of the Island; and although Gervaise had, since his arrival on the +Island, seen many stately ceremonies, this far surpassed anything +he had previously beheld. + +Gervaise had, at one of his first interviews with D'Aubusson after +his arrival at the Island, been advised by him to acquire some +knowledge of Turkish. + +"There are but few knights of the Order who speak the language," he +said. "As a rule, while young men are ready to devote any amount +of time to acquiring dexterity in all martial exercises, they will +bestow no labour in obtaining knowledge that may be fully as useful +to them as skill in arms. In our dealings with the Turks, one or +other party has to employ an interpreter, and it is often by no means +certain that these men convey the full meaning of the speeches +they translate. Again, we have large numbers of Turkish slaves, and +it is highly to be desired that the knights should be able to give +their orders to these men in their own language. Lastly, a knight +who has been taken prisoner by the Turks -- and even the bravest +might meet with such a misfortune -- would find it an alleviation +of his lot, and might be able to plan and carry out his escape, +did he speak Turkish well. I should strongly counsel you to acquire +a knowledge of the tongue." + +Gervaise had intended to follow the advice of the grand prior, but +the duties of his office as page, and the time required for his +military exercises and his studies with the chaplain, had rendered +it well nigh impossible, during the first three years, to turn +his attention to learning Turkish. As soon as his pageship was +at an end, and he found that his duties included supervision of +Turkish slaves, he felt the want of a knowledge of the language, +and from that time devoted an hour a day to its study, employing +one of the servants of the auberge, who was a man of rank and +education at home, to instruct him. + +While he conscientiously spent this amount of time at the work, +it was the most disagreeable portion of this day's labour. The +events, however, that had taken place during the expedition had +impressed him greatly with the utility of a knowledge of Turkish, +for had it not been for Sir John Boswell's possessing some +acquaintance with the language, it would have been impossible to +communicate with the rowers of their boat, or to have arranged the +plan by which they had escaped the pirates. He had then and there +determined that as soon as he returned to Rhodes he would take the +matter up in a very different spirit to that in which he before +approached it. He had on the way home spoken to Sir John, who had +highly approved of the determination. + +"I myself, when I was a young knight of eighteen, was taken captive, +twenty-six years ago, at the time when the Egyptian fleet appeared +before Rhodes. Our galleys advanced to attack them, but under +cover of night they retired, and proceeding to the mainland took +shelter under the guns of a Turkish fort. We attacked them there; +it was a desperate engagement, but without any decisive advantage +on either side. We lost no less than sixty knights, the Egyptians +seven hundred men; and their fleet returned to Egypt. I and three +others who were left wounded on the deck of one of their ships we +had boarded, but failed to capture, were carried to Egypt, and +remained there captive for six months, when we were ransomed by +the Order. + +"During that time I learnt enough of their language, which is akin +to Turkish, to be able to make myself understood and to understand +what was said to me. I have kept up that much for intercourse with +the slaves and servants at Rhodes, and have found it very useful. +I consider, then, that you will do well to acquire their tongue; +it will be useful not only to yourself, but to others, and when +we get back I will, if you like, ask the bailiff to free you from +all duty in order that you may devote yourself to it." + +The head of the langue at once granted Sir John's request. + +"I would," he said, "that more of our young knights would give a +portion of their time to study; but most of them look to returning +home when their term of service here has expired. Many think only +of amusement, and all imagine that advancement is best achieved by +valour. Tresham has already distinguished himself very greatly; +so much so, that I think it would be well if he did not go on +another expedition for a time, but stayed here while others have +the opportunity of doing the same. Were we to send him out with +the next galleys that start, I should be accused of favouritism, +and the lad, who is now deservedly popular with all, would be +regarded with envy, and possibly even with dislike. + +"At the same time, after what he has done I should have difficulty +in refusing, were he to volunteer to sail in the next galley that +sets out. The desire, then, on his part to learn Turkish is in all +ways opportune. It will, too, in the long run be of great advantage +to him in the Order, will give him weight, and bring him into +prominence. I do not think there are six in the Order who can +fairly translate a Turkish document; there are but two who could +write a reply in the same language. Inform him, then, that from the +present time he will be excused from all work, except, of course, +to join in ceremonials when all are required to be present; and +if you, Sir John, will pick out from among the servitors here one +who is well instructed and educated, and capable of writing as +well as reading his language, I will similarly relieve him of all +other work, and place him at the disposal of young Tresham. Tell +the lad that I hope he will persevere until he obtains a complete +knowledge of the tongue. You can mention to him what I have said +as to my opinion of the advantage the knowledge of it will be to +him in the Order." + +Gervaise accordingly devoted himself to study. His instructor was +a Turk of fine presence. He had been a large landowner in Syria, +and held a high official position in the province, but had been +captured in a galley on his way to Constantinople, whither he was +proceeding on an official mission. He was delighted with his new +post. Gervaise, both as the youngest member of the community, and +from the kind manner in which he always spoke to the servants, +-- all of whom had acquired some knowledge of English, -- was a +general favourite among them, and the Turk was glad that he was +to be thrown with him. Still more he rejoiced at being appointed +his instructor, as it relieved him from all menial work which, +although preferable to that to which the bulk of the slaves were +condemned, yet galled his spirit infinitely. + +Now that he had entered upon the work with the approbation of his +superior, and a conviction of its great utility, Gervaise set +to work with the same zeal and ardour which he had exhibited in +his military exercises. During the heat of the day he sat in the +shade reading and writing with his instructor. In the cool of the +morning and afternoon he walked with him on the walls, or in the +country beyond them. After sunset he sat with him in an unfrequented +corner of the roof, all the time conversing with him, either of +his own country, or that of his instructor. + +At first this was difficult, and he had to eke out the Turkish +words he had acquired with English; but it was not long before +there was no necessity for this. His intercourse for ten or twelve +hours a day with this Turk, and the pains taken by his instructor, +caused him to acquire the language with extreme rapidity. Of course, +he had to put up with a great deal of banter from the younger +knights upon his passion for study. Sometimes they pretended that +his mania, as they considered it, arose from the fact that he was +determined to become a renegade, and was fitting himself for a +high position in the Turkish army. At other times they insisted +that his intention was to become a Turkish dervish, or to win a +great Turkish heiress and settle in Syria. But as he always bore +their banter good temperedly, and was ready occasionally to join +them in the sport when assaults-at-arms were carried on, they soon +became tired of making fun of him. + +After nine months' constant work, the young knight's studies were +abruptly stopped by the receipt of a letter from the Pasha of Syria, +offering a considerable sum for the ransom of his instructor. The +request was at once acceded to, as it was the policy of the knights +to accept ransoms for their prisoners, both because the sums +so gained were useful, and because they were themselves compelled +sometimes to pay ransom for members of the Order. Suleiman Ali +was, it was arranged, to be put on board an Egyptian craft bound +for Acre, a safe conduct having been sent for the vessel and her +crew, and for a knight, who was to receive the ransom from the +pasha. + +"At any rate, Sir Gervaise," the Turk said, when the young knight +expressed great regret at his leaving them, "our position as +instructor and pupil would have come to an end shortly. For the +last three months there has been but little teaching between us; +we have talked, and that has been all, save that for a short time +each day you read and wrote. But there has been little to teach. +You speak the native language now as fluently as I do, and would +pass anywhere as a Syrian, especially as there are slight differences +of speech in the various provinces. I believe that in Syria you +would not be suspected of being anything but a native, and assuredly +you would be taken for a Syrian elsewhere. You have learnt enough, +and it would be but a waste of time for you, a knight and a soldier, +to spend another day in study." + +On the following day Gervaise was, to his surprise, sent for by the +grand master. Except on the occasion of a few public ceremonies, +he had not seen D'Aubusson since he had been elected to his present +high dignity, and the summons to attend at the palace therefore +came unexpectedly. + +"We have become quite strangers, Tresham," the grand master said +cordially when he entered. "I have not forgotten you, and have +several times questioned your bailiff concerning you. He tells me +that you have become quite an anchorite, and that, save at your +meals and for an occasional bout-at-arms, you are seldom to be +seen. I was glad to hear of your devotion to study, and thought it +better to leave you undisturbed at it. Yesterday evening I sent +for your instructor. He is a man of influence in Syria, and I wished +to learn how he was affected towards us, now that he is about to +return there. We talked for some time, and I then asked him what +progress you had made, and was surprised and pleased to find that +in his opinion you could pass anywhere as a native, and that you +were perfectly capable of drawing up and writing any document I +might desire to send to the sultan or any of his generals. This +is far more than I had expected, and shows how earnestly you must +have worked. Your knowledge may prove of much assistance to the +Order, and believe me, the time you have spent in acquiring it may +prove of much greater advantage to you in your career than if you +had occupied it in performing even the most valiant deeds, and +that at some future time it will ensure your appointment to a +responsible office here. It was partly to assure you of my approbation +that I sent for you, partly to inform you that I have appointed +you to proceed with Suleiman Ali as the knight in charge of the +vessel, and to receive the ransom agreed on, upon your handing him +over. The office is an honourable one and one of trust, and it is +the first fruits of the advantages you will gain by your knowledge +of Turkish. No, do not thank me. I am selecting you because you +are better fitted than any knight I can spare for the mission, and +also, I may say, because the choice will be pleasing to Suleiman +Ali, whose goodwill I am desirous of gaining. Before now Turkish +provinces have thrown off their allegiance to the sultan. They +have, I must admit, been usually reconquered, but such might not +be always the case; and if such an event happened in Syria, this +man's influence and goodwill might be of great advantage to us, +as it might well suit us to ally ourselves with Syria against +Constantinople. I am glad to say that I found him at least as well +disposed as any man could be who had been some years in slavery. He +admitted that, for a slave, he had been kindly and gently treated, +and added that any unpleasant memories he might have retained had +been obliterated by the nine months of pleasant companionship +spent with you." + +When Gervaise returned to dinner at the auberge, and informed Ralph +Harcourt and the other young knights that he had been appointed to +take charge of the vessel in which Suleiman Ali was to be conveyed +to Acre, the statement was at first received with incredulity. It +seemed incredible that the youngest knight in the langue should be +chosen for such a mission, involving as it did a separate command. +Even the older knights, when the news was passed down the table, +were surprised. + +"I must say that I am astonished at the grand master's choice. Sir +Gervaise Tresham doubtless distinguished himself greatly some months +since, but from that time he has not been out with the galleys, +or, indeed, done anything that would seem to recommend him for so +marked a favour as a separate command." + +"I don't know, Wingate," Sir John Boswell said. "It seems to me that +when a young knight of seventeen eschews all pleasure, refrains +from volunteering for service at sea, and spends his whole time +in study, he does distinguish himself, and that very greatly. Of +the three or four hundred young knights here I doubt if one other +would have so acted. Certainly, none to my knowledge have done so. +Yet I do not suppose that D'Aubusson selected him for this duty +as a reward for so much self denial and study, but because by that +self denial and study he is more fitted for it than any of us here, +save some three or four knights in the other langues, all of whom +are in too high a position to be employed in so unimportant a duty. +He can speak Turkish -- not a few score of words and sentences +such as I can, but, as Suleiman Ali tells me, like a native. Were +one of us chosen for this mission, it would be necessary to send +an interpreter with him; and every one knows how hard it is to +do business in that manner. It seems to me that the grand master +has acted wisely in putting aside all question of seniority, and +employing the knight who is better suited than any other for it." + +"You are right, Boswell," the bailiff said. "I really have been +astonished at the manner in which Tresham has given himself up to +study. It would have been a natural thing had he, after gaining so +much credit, been anxious and eager to gain more. When you spoke +to me about his determination to learn Turkish, I thought he +would speedily tire of it, and that when the next galley sailed, +his name would be among the list of volunteers for the service. I +am sure, comrades, that there are few, if any, among us who would +not infinitely prefer fighting the Moslems to spending our whole +time in learning their language; and I for one consider the fact +that he has for nine months laboured so incessantly and assiduously +that he has come, as Boswell says, to speak it like a native, is +even more to his credit than the deed for which he was knighted." + +This conversation took place at the upper end of the table, and was +not heard at the lower end where the younger knights were seated. + +"I am not chosen from favour," Gervaise said hotly, to one of his +companions who had asserted that this was so. "I am simply chosen +because I can speak Turkish." + +"How much Turkish can you speak?" one of them laughed. Gervaise +turned to the Turkish servant behind them, and said, in his language, +"Hassan, Sir Giles Trevor wishes to know how well I speak Turkish. +You have heard me talking with Suleiman Ali. Will you give him +your opinion about it?" + +The man turned gravely to Sir Giles Trevor. + +"My lord," he said, in English, "Sir Gervaise Tresham, he speaks +Turkish same as I do. If he dress up in Turk clothes I suppose +him Turk, not know he Christian by his speech." + +Exclamations of surprise broke from the young knights. + +"Well, you have earned the appointment, Tresham," Ralph Harcourt +said heartily. "You always told me when I asked you that you were +getting on, but I had not the least idea that you were getting on +like this. And can you read and write the Turkish language?" + +"Well enough for practical purposes, Ralph. At any rate, I wrote +a complimentary letter this morning from the grand master to the +governor of Syria, and the bailiff of Spain, who was, as you know, +for ten years a prisoner among the Turks, read it through at +D'Aubusson's request, to see that there was no error in it, and +was good enough to pass it without alteration." + +"I would give a good deal," Sir Giles Trevor said, "if I could +follow your example, and shut myself up for nine months with an +infidel to study his language; but I could not do it if my life +depended on it. I should throw myself off the wall at the end of +the first fortnight." + +"I don't pretend that I can do what Tresham has done," Ralph Harcourt +said. "I always hated our lessons with the chaplain, who gave me +the character of having the thickest head of any of his pupils; +but I vow" -- and he kissed the handle of his dagger -- "I will +spend half an hour a day in trying to learn something of Turkish. +Of course, I know that such time will not be enough to learn a +great deal; but if one could get up just enough to be able to give +orders to the slaves, to question the captain of a vessel one has +captured, and to make them understand a little, if by bad luck +one fell into their hands, it would be quite enough for me. I am +sure sometimes one is quite at a loss how to pass the hours when +the sun is at its hottest, and if one tried one ought to be able +to pick up a little without much trouble. Look at the servants; +there is not one of them but speaks a little English. And if an +infidel can learn enough English to get on with, without any regular +study, I can't see why we shouldn't be able to learn enough Turkish +in the same way." + +Two or three of the other young knights declared that they too +would devote a short time during the heat of the day to learning +Turkish, and they agreed to begin together forthwith with one of +the servants, who spoke English most fluently. Robert Rivers was +not present, for he had returned to England six months before, to +take up his residence at the House in Clerkenwell, in order that he +might bring to bear the interest of his many powerful friends to +secure for him an appointment as commander of one of the estates of +the Order in England. His departure had caused general satisfaction +among the other knights, whom his arrogance and ill temper had +frequently irritated. Gervaise especially was glad at his leaving +the Island, for after he received the honour of knighthood, +Rivers made a point of always addressing him with an affectation +of deference and respect that often tried his temper to the utmost. + +"It is well that Rivers has gone," Ralph said, laughing, "for I +don't know how he would have supported the chagrin your appointment +would have given him. He was devoured with jealousy as it was, but +this would have been a trial beyond bearing." + +"I am heartily glad he has gone," Gervaise said gravely. "I have +put up with a great deal from him, but I don't think I could have +stood much more. If our vows had not forbidden our fighting I should +have called him to account long ago; but the only thing else to +do was for me to lodge a formal complaint before the bailiff, of +his continually offensive bearing and manner, which I could not +bring myself to do, and indeed there was no special matter that +would have seemed to justify me, no single speech that in itself +would warrant such grave action on my part. I used to wish over and +over again that we could but meet in some quiet spot in England, +both unarmed, and could there settle the matter in good English +fashion, with our fists, or even with a couple of quarterstaffs." + +The others laughed. + +"That would be a very unknightly form of contest." + +"I care not for that," Gervaise replied. "It would be a very +satisfactory one anyhow, and quite serious enough for the occasion. +His sneers and petty insults were not sufficient to justify the +drawing of blood, and there has been enough of that shed for the +last twenty years in England without two brother knights betaking +themselves to their swords against each other. But a sound thrashing +would have done neither of us harm, and if it had fallen to his +lot to get the largest share of it, it might have done him some +good." + +"He thinks he is sure of an appointment," one of the others said, +"but he has been so frequently in trouble here that it is likely +that the official report, which is always sent home to the grand +prior when the knights return to England, will be so unfavourable +that even the most powerful influence will fail to obtain him a +post. If so, we may have him back here again, especially if the +Turks carry out their threat of assailing us, for an appeal will +be made to all the grand priors for knights to aid in the defence." + +That evening Gervaise went again to the palace to receive final +instructions. + +"The craft in which you are to travel is an Egyptian trader. As +at present war has not been formally declared between us and the +sultan, peaceful traders, as you know, carry on their avocations +unmolested either by the warships of the Turks or by ours; they +do not enter our ports without a special permit, and the crews +are never allowed to land, in order that no detailed account of +our fortifications may be taken to the sultan. Moreover, brawls +might arise between them and the native population, or they might +aid slaves to escape. However, you will be altogether safe from +interference from Turkish war vessels, and if overhauled by one of +them the safe conduct will be sufficient to prevent interference +with you. But it is not so with pirates. They will plunder their +own countrymen as readily as they will Christians, and the safe +guard of the governor of Syria will be of no use whatever to you. +In this consists the danger of your mission. I cannot send one +of our war galleys on such an errand, and if there are not enough +knights on board to beat off any pirate, the fewer there are the +better. I hear that the craft is a fast sailor, and as the crew +will be as anxious to avoid pirates as you, they will do their +best to escape. I leave it to you to take any route. You can either +sail hence direct for Acre, or you can coast along the shores of +Anatolia and Syria, lying up at night in bays. + +"Should you be overtaken I do not think it would be of any use +for you to disguise yourself, for some of the crew would be sure +to denounce you. Should the worst happen, and you are captured +by pirates, you will of course in the first place show them your +safe conduct, and if I find that you do not return I shall send at +once to the governor of Syria, complaining of your capture when +furnished with his safeguard, and requesting him to order a search +for you to be made at every port on the coast, with instructions +that you are to be at once released, and either sent to him for +return hither, or placed on board a craft bound for any Christian +port; while you, on your part, will endeavour to acquaint the +Turkish authorities with the fact that you have been seized while +travelling with a safe conduct from the governor of Syria. + +"But, more than from any efforts on your part or mine, I rely upon +Suleiman Ali, who will, I am sure, as soon as he is set on shore, +lose no time in acquainting the pasha of your capture, and in +calling upon him to interfere in your favour. In that case, the +worst that could befall you would be a temporary detention, unless, +indeed, the pirates should take you to Egypt. As that country is +friendly with us at present, since Egypt dreads the ever increasing +power of the Turks, it will be but a question of ransom, for I +have secret agents there who will inform me without delay of the +arrival of a Christian captive." + +"I understand, sir, and will do my best in the matter. If I am +captured I trust that an opportunity of escape will soon present +itself, for I should, if taken, conceal from my captors the fact +that I understand their language, and should thus, if I could +evade my guard, have every chance of escaping, as in a native dress +I could meet and converse with those hunting for me, without their +having a suspicion of my being the white slave for whom they were +in search." + +"Once at Acre you will be safe. But do not land unless it is absolutely +necessary, for you might fall a victim to the fanaticism of its +inhabitants, and no knight has ever set foot on shore there since +the ill fated day when the Moslems wrested it from us, bathed the +ruined walls with the best blood of our Order and the Templars', and +destroyed the last hope of our ever recovering the Holy Sepulchre." + +The next morning at daybreak Gervaise and Suleiman Ali went on +board the Egyptian trader, and sailed for Acre. The current of +opinion had changed at the auberge when the knights came to think over +the mission on which Gervaise was about to start, and the slight +feeling of jealousy with which the younger knights had received +the news was entirely dissipated. While it did not seem to them +that there was any chance of his distinguishing himself, they +perceived, as they thought it over, the considerable danger there +was of capture by pirates, and Ralph and some of his companions +came down to the mole to see him off, with feelings in which envy +bore no part whatever. + +"I see now, Gervaise, that it is truly no holiday excursion on +which you are starting. I should envy you greatly were you going +in command of an armed galley, prepared to beat off any craft that +might try to overhaul you; but, going alone as you are, it is a +very different thing. Should pirates meet you, you could offer +no resistance, and your position would be a perilous one indeed. +However, I think you are born to good luck, and am confident that +your patron saint will look after you, and therefore expect to see +you back here in a fortnight's time at the outside." + +"I hope so with all my heart, Ralph. It will be no fault of mine +if I tarry." + +"Will you keep the open sea, or skirt the land, Tresham?" one of +the others asked. + +"I shall keep the open sea. The grand master left me to choose my +course; but I think there is more danger by the coast -- where +pirates may be hiding in unfrequented bays, in readiness to pounce +upon a passing craft -- than in the open sea, where we should have +at least the advantage that we could not be taken by surprise, and +might make a race of it. But the sun will be up in a few minutes, +and my orders were to set out at sunrise, so I must say goodbye +at once." + +As soon as the vessel was under way, Gervaise took a seat on the poop +by the side of Suleiman Ali, and related to him the conversation +he had had with the grand master. + +"The risk that you will run has not escaped me," the Turk said, "and +indeed, I now regret that you were chosen as my escort. I almost +wish that my son had not purchased my freedom at the present time, +since it involves the risk of you losing yours. There is no doubt +that the sea swarms with pirates; the sultan is too busy with +his own struggles for Empire to bestow any attention upon so small +a matter. The pashas and the officers of the ports have not the +power, even had they the will, to put down piracy in their districts, +and indeed are, as often as not, participators in the spoils. Your +Order, which, years back, scoured the seas so hotly that piracy +well nigh ceased, have now for forty years been obliged to turn +their attention chiefly to their own defence. They possess a +comparatively small fleet of galleys, and their wealth is expended +on their fortress. + +"What with Egypt and the sultan their hands are too full for them +to act as the police of the sea, and the consequence is that +from every port, bay, and inlet, pirate craft set out -- some mere +rowboats, some, like those under the command of Hassan Ali, veritable +fleets. Thus the humblest coasters and the largest merchant craft +go alike in fear of them, and I would that the sultan and Egypt and +your Order would for two or three years put aside their differences, +and confine their efforts to sweeping the seas of these pests, to +storming their strongholds, and to inflicting such punishment upon +them as that, for a very long time to come, peaceful merchants +might carry on their trade without fear. + +"I heard you tell the captain that he was to steer straight for +Acre, and I think you are right in avoiding the coast, where the +most harmless looking fishing boat may carry a crowd of pirates +hidden in her hold. At the same time, if you will take my advice +you will head much more to the south, so as to be out of the regular +track of ships making from Constantinople or the islands to Acre. +You may meet pirates anywhere, but they are assuredly thicker along +the more frequented routes. The safest plan of all would probably +be to bear south, and strike the Egyptian coast well to the east +of the mouth of the Nile. Thence, till you get to Palestine, the +country is utterly barren and uninhabited, while, running up the +coast to Palestine, there are, save at Jaffa, no ports to speak +of until you arrive at Acre; and besides, the inhabitants there, +even if pirates, would not venture to disregard the pasha's safe +conduct. I do not by any means say that such a course would be +absolutely safe. You may meet with vessels on your way south, and +doubtless some of them cruise off the barren coast I speak of, +to intercept traders to and from Egypt and Acre, and other Syrian +ports; for the trade carried on is considerable, and, although of +the same religion, the Turks are disposed to view the Egyptians as +enemies rather than as friends, and would have even less hesitation +in plundering them than in robbing their own countrymen." + +"I think that your suggestion is a good one, and will follow +it, at any rate. The course is a good deal longer, but that is +comparatively of little moment. The great thing is to carry you +safely to Acre." + +"And to get back with equal safety," Suleiman said, with a smile. + +"That is quite as important in my eyes; in fact, of the two, I +would far rather that we were captured on our voyage thither, for +in that case I might be able to arrange for the ransom of both of +us." + + + +CHAPTER VIII AN EVENING AT RHODES + + +Suleiman Ali's advice was carried out. It added considerably to +the length of the voyage; but they saw only one doubtful craft. +She was lying close inshore under the shadow of the sand hills, and +they did not see her until she hoisted her sails and shot out from +the land. They were, however, three miles distant from the land +at the time, and the wind was blowing from the north; consequently +the pirate was dead to leeward. Every sail was set at once on board +the trader, and, being a fast sailor, she maintained her position +until nightfall. The wind then dropped, and just as the light +faded they could see that the vessel behind them had put out her +sweeps. The trader kept up her sails until certain that she could +be no longer seen; then the canvas was lowered, and the crew took +to the boats and towed her due north. + +The night was fortunately a dark one, and those watching anxiously +from the deck of the trader were unable to discern her pursuer +as she passed behind them. As soon as they were well assured that +she must have gone on, the boats were got in, the sails hoisted +again, and, taking advantage of every light flaw of wind, they +proceeded on their course. In the morning the sails of the galley +could be seen on the horizon, but the distance was too great for +her to take up the pursuit again with any chance of success, and +the trader continued her course to Acre without seeing more of +her. + +As soon as the trader entered the port, the Egyptian captain went +on shore, taking with him a copy of the safe conduct and the letter +from the grand master to the pasha. Going to the residence of the +governor, he handed these to him, saying that he had on board Aga +Suleiman Ali, and a knight who was charged to deliver him up on +payment of the ransom. + +"I have been expecting you," the governor said. "I have received +a letter from the pasha, stating that he had written to the grand +master respecting the ransom of the aga, and sending me the amount +which Suleiman's son had offered. The young man was not of age +when his father was captured, but he is so now, and was therefore +able to raise the sum required. I will go down to the port with you +myself, hand over the ransom, and welcome Suleiman, whom I know +well, back from his captivity." + +The transfer was speedily made; a heavy purse was handed to Gervaise, +and Suleiman was a free man. + +"Send me word, if you can, when you return to Rhodes," the latter +said, as he bade farewell to the young knight. "I shall be anxious +until I hear. Fortune was with us as we sailed hither, but it may +desert you on your return. Should aught befall you, tell your +captors that if they bring you to me I will pay any ransom that +they could, in fairness, require. Should they refuse to do this, +send, if possible, a messenger to me, and on receipt of your +message I will send a trusty man to purchase your freedom. You have +treated me as a friend and an equal, and a friend I shall always +remain." + +The vessel was to remain four days in port, to discharge her cargo +and take in another, and Suleiman had talked of remaining at Acre +until she sailed, but Gervaise protested strongly against this. + +"You have your family, from whom you have been so long separated, +awaiting your return with anxiety, and I pray you to make no +stay on my account. I am well content to remain on board here, and +to look at the city which has so often been the theatre of great +deeds -- which Richard the Lion Heart captured, and which so many +of the Hospitallers died to defend. I was charged by the grand +master not to land, and indeed I feel myself that it would be an +act of folly to do so. There are doubtless many on shore who have +relatives and friends now working as slaves among us, and some of +these might well seek to avenge them by slaying one of the Order. +I feel your kindness, but it would be a pain to me to know that +you were lingering here on my account, when you must be longing +to embrace your children." + +The four days passed rapidly. Gervaise had, at the suggestion of +the governor, laid aside the mantle and insignia of the Order. + +"If you do not do so," he said, "I must place a strong guard of +soldiers on board, in order to ensure that the pasha's safeguard +is not violated. Sailors are a turbulent race, and were you recognised +here they might make a tumult, and slay you before a word of what +was going on reached me. In any case I shall place two soldiers +on board until you leave the port." + +On the morning of the fifth day the sails were got up, and the +vessel sailed out from the port. Fortune again favoured them, and +they reached Rhodes without any adventure. Gervaise went at once +to the palace, and handed over the purse of gold to the treasurer. +He then sent up his name to the grand master, and was immediately +conducted to his room. + +"I am glad to see you back, Tresham. I have been uneasy about you. +Have you fulfilled your mission without adventure?" + +"Without any adventure, sir, save that we were once chased by +a pirate on our way east, but escaped in the darkness. Save for +that, the voyage has been wholly uneventful. I have received the +ransom, and handed the purse to your treasurer." + +"I am glad that your first command has turned out so well. I will +see that you do not lack employment; and the fact that you are able +to act as interpreter will ensure you a welcome on any galley. At +present, however, it is not my intention to send out many cruisers. +Every life now is precious, and no amount of spoil that can be +brought in will counter balance the loss of those who fall. However, +I may find some mission on which you can be employed. I know that +you love an active life; and as, for nine months, you have put a +rein on your inclinations, and have devoted yourself wholly to study, +so that you might be of greater use to the Order, you have a good +right to any employment in which your knowledge can be utilised." + +On his arrival at the auberge, Gervaise was very heartily greeted +by the younger knights. + +"I told you you were born lucky, Gervaise," Ralph Harcourt said. +"There has been more than one wager made that you would be captured; +but I, for my part, was confident that your good fortune would not +desert you. Still, though not surprised, we are delighted to see +you again. Now tell us about your voyage." + +Gervaise gave a brief account of the adventure with the pirate, +and then described the visit of the governor to the ship. + +"Did he say anything to you?" + +"He was courteous and solemn; just the sort of man you would fancy +a Turkish governor should be. He looked a little surprised when I +accosted him in Turkish, but asked no questions at the time, though +I daresay he inquired afterwards of Suleiman how I came to speak +the language. The only time he actually said anything was when +he requested that I would not wear the mantle of the Order while in +port, as sailors were a turbulent race, and it might lead to an +attack upon me; and as he was responsible to the pasha that his safe +conduct should be respected, it would be necessary, if I declined +to follow his advice, to keep a strong body of soldiers on board. +As this would have been a horrible nuisance, especially as I wanted +to enjoy in quiet the view of the city, with its castle and walls, +I acceded at once to his request, which seemed to me a reasonable +one. He did send two soldiers on board, but they remained down in +the waist, and did not interfere with my pleasure in any way." + +"Next to Jerusalem, how I should like to see Acre!" Ralph Harcourt +exclaimed. "It is, of all other cities, the most closely connected +with our Order. We helped to win it, and we were the last to defend +it. We have heard so much about the fortress, and it has been so +often described to me, that I know the situation of every bastion +-- at least, as it was when we left it, though I know not what +changes the Turks may since have made." + +"That I know not, Ralph. Of course, I only saw the seafront, and it +was upon the land side that the attack was made. We know that the +breaches were all repaired long ago, and it is said that the place +is stronger than ever. From the port all was solid and massive. It +is indeed a grand and stately fortress. Here we have done all that +was possible to make Rhodes impregnable, but nature did nothing for +us; there nature has done everything, and the castle looks as if +it could defy the assaults of an army, however large. And indeed, +it was not wrested from us by force. The knights, when the city +walls were stormed and the town filled with their foes fought +their way down to the water's edge and embarked there, for they +were reduced to a mere handful; and however strong a castle may +be, it needs hands to defend it. Still, it well nigh moved me to +tears to see the Turkish banner waving over it, and to think how +many tens of thousands of Christian soldiers had died in the effort +to retain the holy places, and had died in vain." + +"I wonder whether the Turks will ever be forced to relinquish their +hold of the holy places?" + +"Who can tell, Sir Giles?" the bailiff, who had come up to the group +unobserved, said quietly. "Certainly not in our time -- not until +the Moslem power, which threatens not only us, but all Europe, has +crumbled to dust. So long as Acre remains in their power there is +no hope. I say not but that by a mighty effort of all Christendom, +Palestine might be wrested from the infidels, as it was wrested +before; but the past shows us that while men or nations can be +stirred to enthusiasm for a time, the fire does not last long, and +once again the faithful few would be overwhelmed by the odds that +would be brought against them, while Europe looked on impassive, +if not indifferent. No, knights; the utmost that can be hoped for, +is that the tide of Moslem invasion westward may be stayed. At +present we are the bulwark, and as long as the standard of our +Order waves over Rhodes so long is Europe safe by sea. But I foresee +that this cannot last: the strongest defences, the stoutest hearts, +and the bravest of hearts, cannot in the long run prevail against +overpowering numbers. As at Acre, we may repel assault after +assault, we may cause army after army to betake themselves again +to their ships; but, as a rock is overwhelmed by the rising tide, +so must Rhodes succumb at last, if left by Europe to bear alone +the brunt of Moslem invasion. All that men can do we shall do. As +long as it is possible to resist, we shall resist. When further +resistance becomes impossible, we shall, I trust, act as we did +before. + +"We were driven from Palestine, only to fortify ourselves at Rhodes. +If we are driven from Rhodes, we shall, I feel assured, find a +home elsewhere, and again commence our labours. The nearer we are +to Europe the more hope there is that Christendom will aid us, +for they will more generally understand that our defeat would mean +the laying open of the shores of the Mediterranean, from Turkey +to Gibraltar, to the invasion of the Moslems. However, comrades, +this is all in the future. Our share is but in the present, and +I trust the flag of the Order will float over Rhodes as long, +at least, as the lifetime of the youngest of us, and that we may +bequeath the duty of upholding the Cross untarnished to those who +come after us; and we can then leave the issue in God's hands." + +All listened respectfully to the words of their leader, although +his opinion fell like cold water upon the fiery zeal and high +hopes of his hearers. The possibility of their losing Rhodes had +never once entered into the minds of the majority of them. It was +likely that ere long they might be called upon to stand a siege, +but, acquainted as they were with the strength of the place -- +its deep and seemingly impassable moat, its massive walls, and +protecting towers and bastions -- it had seemed to them that Rhodes +was capable of withstanding all assaults, however numerous the +foe, however oft repeated the invasion. The bailiff was, as all +knew, a man of dauntless courage, of wide experience and great +judgment, and that he should believe that Rhodes would, although +not in their time, inevitably fall, brought home to them for the +first time the fact that their fortress was but an outpost of +Europe, and one placed so distant from it that Christendom, in the +hour of peril, might be unable to furnish them with aid. As the +bailiff walked away, there was silence for a short time, and then +Sir Giles Trevor said cheerfully, "Well, if it lasts our time we +need not trouble our heads as to what will take place afterwards. +As the bailiff says, our duty is with the present, and as we all +mean to drive the Turks back when they come, I do not see that there +is any occasion for us to take it to heart, even if it be fated +that the Moslems shall one day walk over our tombs. If Christendom +chooses to be supine, let Christendom suffer, say I. At any rate, +I am not going to weep for what may take place after I am turned +into dust." + +"That sounds all very well, Sir Giles," Ralph Harcourt said, "and +I have no argument to advance against it, though I am sure there +is much to be said; but if the bailiff, or the chaplain, or indeed +any of the elders, had heard you say so, I have no doubt you would +have had a fitting reply." + +Sir Giles tossed his head mockingly. "I shall fight neither better +nor worse, friend Harcourt, because it may be that someday the +Moslems are, as the bailiff seems to think, destined to lord it +here. I have only promised and vowed to do my best against the +Moslems, and that vow only holds good as long as I am in the flesh; +beyond that I have no concern. But what are we staying here for, +wasting our time? It is the hour for those of us who are going, +to be starting for the ball given by Signor Succhi; as he is one +of the richest merchants in the town, it will be a gay one, and +there is no lack of fair faces in Rhodes. It is a grievous pity +that our elders all set their will against even the younger members +of the community joining in a dance. It was not one of the things +I swore to give up. However, here in Rhodes there is no flying in +the face of rules." + +Three or four of the other young knights were also going. + +"What are you thinking of doing, Gervaise?" Harcourt asked. + +"I have nothing particular to do, Ralph, except that, first of all, +I must write a letter to Suleiman Ali and hand it to the bailiff, +praying him to send it off by the first vessel that may put in here +on her way to Acre. If I do not do it now it may be neglected, +and I promised to write directly I got here. I will not be half an +hour, and after that I shall be ready to do anything you like." + +In less than that time, indeed, he rejoined Ralph. "Now what shall +we do with ourselves? What do you say to a stroll through the +streets? I am never tired of that." + +"I like better to go by way of the roofs, Gervaise. The streets +are badly lit, and although they are busy enough in some quarters, +they are so narrow that one gets jostled and pushed. On the terraces +everything is quiet. You have plenty of light and music, and it is +pleasant to see families sitting together and enjoying themselves; +and if one is disposed for a cup of wine or of cool sherbet, they +are delighted to give it, for they all are pleased when one of us +joins a group. I have quite a number of acquaintances I have made +in this way while you have been working away at your Turkish." + +"Very well," Gervaise said. "If such is your fancy, Ralph, let us +take one of the paths across the roofs. I might walk there twenty +years by myself without making an acquaintance, and I do not pledge +myself to join in these intimacies of yours. However, I shall be +quite content to amuse myself by looking on at the scene in general, +while you are paying your visits and drinking your sherbet." + +"There are plenty of fair girls among the Rhodians," Ralph said, +with a smile; "and though we are pledged to celibacy we are in no +way bound to abstain from admiration." + +Gervaise laughed. + +"Admire as much as you like, Ralph, but do not expect me to do so. +I have scarcely as much as spoken to a woman since I entered the +House in London, and I should have no idea what to say to a young +girl." + +"But it is part of the education of a true knight to be courteous +to women. It is one of the great duties of chivalry. And you must +remember that we are secular knights, as well knights of the Order." + +"The work of the Order is quite sufficient for me at present, Ralph. +In time I may come to like the society of women, to admire their +beauty, and possibly even to wear the colour of some one, for that +seems to be the fashion; though why we, who are bound to celibacy, +should admire one woman more than another I cannot understand." + +They had by this time descended from the castle, and were taking +their way along one of the broad paths that led over the flat roofs +of the houses by means of the bridges thrown across the streets. + +"These are some acquaintances of mine," Ralph said, stopping at +one of the walls, some three feet high, that bordered the path. + +Beyond was an enclosure of some fifty feet square. Clumps of shrubs +and flowers, surrounded by stonework some eight or ten inches +high enclosing the earth in which they grew, were scattered here +and there. Lamps were hung to cords stretched above it, while +others were arranged among the flowers. In the centre a large carpet +was spread, and on this some eight or ten persons were seated on +cushions. A girl was playing a lute, and another singing to her +accompaniment. She stopped abruptly when her eye fell upon the +figures of the two young knights. + +"There is Sir Ralph Harcourt, father!" she exclaimed in Italian, +which was the language most used on the Island, and spoken with +more or less fluency by all the knights, among whom it served as +a general medium of communication. "Are you waiting to be invited +in, Sir Knight?" she went on saucily. "I thought that by this time +you would know you were welcome." + +"Your tongue runs too fast, child," her father said, as he rose and +walked across to Ralph. "You are welcome, Sir Ralph, very welcome. +I pray you enter and join us." + +"I will do so with pleasure, Signor Vrados, if you will also extend +your hospitality to my friend Sir Gervaise Tresham." + +"Most gladly," the merchant said. "I pray him to enter." + +The two knights passed through the gate in the wall. All rose to +their feet as they went up to the carpet, and greeted Ralph with +a warmth which showed that he was a favourite. He introduced Gervaise +to them. + +"I wonder that I do not know your face, Sir Knight," the merchant's +wife said. "I thought I knew all the knights of the Order by sight, +from seeing them either at the public ceremonies, or observing them +pass in the streets." + +"For the last nine months Sir Gervaise has been an anchorite. He +has been learning Turkish, and has so devoted himself to the study +that even I have scarce caught sight of him, save at meals. As for +walking in the streets, it is the last thing he would think of +doing. I consider myself a good and conscientious young knight, +but I am as nothing in that respect to my friend. I used to look +upon him as my little brother, for we were at the House of the +Order in London together. He is four years younger than I am, and +you know four years between boys makes an immense difference. Now +the tables are turned, and I quite look up to him." + +"You will believe as much as you like, Signora, of what Sir Ralph +says," Gervaise laughed. "As you have, he says, known him for +some time, you must by this time have learnt that his word is not +to be taken literally." + +"We learned that quite early in our acquaintance," the girl who +had first noticed them said, with an affectation of gravity. "I +always tell him that I cannot believe anything he says, and I am +grateful to you, Sir Knight, for having thus borne evidence to +the quickness of my perception." + +By this time the servants had brought some more cushions, and on these +Ralph and Gervaise seated themselves. Wine, sherbet, and cakes, +were then handed round. The master of the house placed Gervaise on +his right hand, as a stranger. + +"You have been among our islands, Sir Gervaise? But indeed, I need +not ask that, since I know that you and Sir Ralph were knighted +together for your valour in that affair with the ships of Hassan +Ali. We come from Lesbos. It is now eighty years since my family +settled in Rhodes, and we have seen it grow from a small place to +a great fortress." + +"'Tis a wonderful place," Gervaise said. "I know nothing of the +fortresses of Europe, but it seems to me that no other can well +be stronger than this -- that is, among places with no natural +advantages." + +"The knights have always had an abundance of slaves," the merchant +said; "so many that they have not only had sufficient for their +work here, but have been able to sell numbers to European potentates. +Yes, Rhodes is wonderfully strong. That great fosse would seem +as if it could defy the efforts of an army to cross; and yet the +past has shown that even the strongest defences, held with the +greatest bravery, can be carried by generals with immense armies, +and careless how they sacrifice them so that they do but succeed. +Look at Acre, for example." + +"I was looking at it five days ago," Gervaise said, "and thinking +that it was beyond the might of man to take." + +"Do you mean that you were at Acre?" the merchant asked, with +surprise. + +"Yes. I went there to hand over a captive who had been ransomed. +Of course I had a safe conduct, and I was glad indeed of the +opportunity of seeing so famous a fortress." + +"You were fortunate indeed, Sir Knight, and it was, if you will +pardon my saying so, singular that so young a knight should have +been chosen. Assuredly, even the senior knights of the Order would +rejoice at the opportunity of beholding a fortress so intimately +connected with the past history of the Order." + +"It was due entirely to my being able to speak Turkish," Gervaise +said. "As my friend Sir Ralph was mentioning, I have been studying +hard, and can now speak the language fluently; and as this was a +necessity on such a mission, and the few knights who can so speak +it are all in high office, and could hardly be asked to undertake +so unimportant a service, I was selected." + +"And you really speak Turkish well? It is an accomplishment that +few, save Greeks subject to Turkey, possess. Do you intend, may +I ask, to make Rhodes your home? I ask because I suppose you would +not have taken this labour had you intended shortly to return to +England." + +"Yes; I hope to remain here permanently. I know that the first step +towards promotion here is generally a commandery at home, but I +did not enter the Order with any idea of gaining office or dignity. +I desire simply to be a knight of the Cross, and to spend my life +in doing faithful service to the Order." + +"A worthy ambition indeed, and one that, so far as my experience +goes, very few knights entertain. I see yearly scores of young +knights depart, no small proportion of whom never place foot on +Rhodes again, although doubtless many of them will hasten back +again as soon as the danger of an assault from the Turks becomes +imminent. You see, we who dwell here under the protection of +the Order naturally talk over these things among ourselves; and +although, in the matter of fortifications, all will admit that +enormous efforts have been made to render the town secure, it is +clear that in the matter of knights to defend them there is very +much left to be desired. It is all very well to say that the knights +from all parts of Europe would flock hither to defend it; but the +journey would be a long one, and would occupy much time, and they +would probably not receive news that the Turks had sailed until +the place was already invested. Then it would be difficult, if +not altogether impossible, for ships with reinforcements to make +their way through the Turkish fleet, and to enter the port. To +man the walls properly would need a force five times as numerous +as that which is now here. I recognise the valour of your knights; +they have accomplished wonders. But even they cannot accomplish +impossibilities. For a time they could hold the walls; but as their +number became reduced by the fire of the Turkish cannon and the +battles at the breaches, they would at last be too weak any longer +to repel the onslaughts of foes with an almost unlimited supply of +soldiers." + +"That is true enough," Gervaise admitted; "and to my mind it is +shocking that four-fifths at least of the Order, pledged to oppose +the infidels, should be occupied with the inglorious work of looking +after the manors and estates of the society throughout Europe, +while one-fifth, at most, are here performing the duties to which +all are sworn. Of the revenues of the estates themselves, a mere +fraction finds its way hither. Still, I trust that the greater +part of the knights will hasten here as soon as danger becomes +imminent, without waiting for the news that the Turkish armament +has actually set forth." + +For an hour the two young knights remained on the roof, Gervaise +talking quietly with the merchant, while his companion laughed +and chatted with the ladies and friends of their host. After they +had left, with the promise that it would not be long before they +repeated their visit, Ralph bantered Gervaise on preferring the +society of the merchant to that of his daughters. + +"I found him a pleasant and very well informed man, Ralph, and +enjoyed my talk with him just as you enjoyed talking nonsense to +his daughters and listening to their songs. Who was the man sitting +next to the eldest daughter?" + +"He doesn't belong to Rhodes, but is a Greek from one of the +islands, though I did not catch from which. I don't know whether +he is a relative of the family, or a business connection of the +merchant's, or a stranger who has brought a letter of introduction +to him. Nothing was said on that head; why do you ask?" + +"I don't like the man's face; he is a handsome fellow, but has a +crafty expression. He did not say much, but it seemed to me that +at times, when he appeared to be sitting carelessly sipping his +sherbet, he was really trying to listen to what Vrados was saying +to me. He could not do so, for we were on the other side of the +circle, and were speaking in somewhat low tones, while the rest of +you were chatting and laughing." + +"What should he want to listen for, most sapient knight?" + +"That I can't tell, Ralph; but I am certain that he was trying to +listen." + +"Well, as you were no doubt both talking more sensibly than most +of us," Ralph laughed, "he certainly showed his discernment." + +"I daresay I am wrong," Gervaise said quietly; "but you know +we have our spies at Constantinople, and probably the sultan has +his spies here; and the idea occurred to me that perhaps this man +might be one of them." + +"Well, I am bound to say, Gervaise," Ralph said, a little irritably, +"I have never heard so grave an accusation brought on such +insufficient evidence -- or rather, as far as I can see, without a +shadow of evidence of any kind. We drop in upon a man who is one +of our most respected merchants, whose family has been established +here many years, whose interests must be the same as those of +the Order; and because a guest of his does not care to take any +active part in my joking with the girls, and because you imagine +that there is a cunning expression on his face, you must straightway +take it into your head that he must be a spy." + +"Excuse me, Ralph, I simply said that the idea occurred to me that +he might be a spy, which is a very different thing to my accusing +him of being one. I am ready to admit that the chances are infinitely +greater that he is an honest trader or a relation of the merchant, +and that his presence here is perfectly legitimate and natural, +than that he should be a spy. Still, there is a chance, if it +be but one out of a thousand, that he may be the latter. I don't +think that I am at all of a suspicious nature, but I really should +like to learn a little about this man. I do not mean that I am +going to try to do so. It would be an unworthy action to pry into +another's business, when it is no concern of one's own. Still, I +should like to know why he is here." + +Ralph shrugged his shoulders. + +"This comes of living the life of a hermit, Gervaise. Other people +meet and talk, and enjoy what society there is in the city, without +troubling their heads for a moment as to where people come from or +what their business is here, still less whether they are spies. +Such ideas do not so much as occur to them, and I must say that I +think the sooner you fall into the ways of other people the better." + +"There is no harm done," Gervaise said composedly. "I am not thinking +of asking our bailiff to order him to be arrested on suspicion. +I only remarked that I did not like the man's face, nor the way +in which, while he pretended to be thinking of nothing, he was +trying to overhear what we were saying. I am quite willing to admit +that I have made a mistake, not in devoting myself to Turkish, but +in going to the merchant's with you this evening. I have had no +experience whatever of what you call society, and, so far from it +giving me pleasure to talk to strangers, especially to women, it +seems to me that such talk is annoying to me, at any rate at present. +When I get to your age, possibly my ideas may change. I don't for +a moment wish to judge you or others; you apparently enjoy it, +and it is a distraction from our serious work. I say simply that +it is an amusement which I do not understand. You must remember +that I entered the Order in consequence of a solemn vow of my +dead father, that I regard the profession we make as a very serious +one, and that my present intention is to devote my life entirely +to the Order and to an active fulfilment of its vows." + +"That is all right, Gervaise," Ralph said good temperedly. "Only +I think it would be a pity if you were to turn out a fanatic. +Jerusalem and Palestine are lost, and you admit that there is +really very little chance of our ever regaining them. Our duties, +therefore, are changed, and we are now an army of knights, pledged +to war against the infidels, in the same way as knights and nobles +at home are ever ready to engage in a war with France. The vow +of poverty is long since obsolete. Many of our chief officials are +men of great wealth, and indeed, a grand master, or the bailiff +of a langue, is expected to spend, and does spend, a sum vastly +exceeding his allowance from the Order. The great body of knights +are equally lax as to some of their other vows, and carry this to +a length that, as you know, has caused grave scandal. But I see not +that it is in any way incumbent on us to give up all the pleasures +of life. We are a military Order, and are all ready to fight +in defence of Rhodes, as in bygone days we were ready to fight in +defence of the Holy Sepulchre. Kings and great nobles have endowed +us with a large number of estates, in order to maintain us as +an army against Islam; and as such we do our duty. But to affect +asceticism is out of date and ridiculous." + +"I have certainly no wish to be an ascetic, Ralph. I should have +no objection to hold estates, if I had them to hold. But I think +that at present, with the great danger hanging over us, it would +be better if, in the first place, we were all to spend less time +in idleness or amusement, and to devote all our energies to the +cause. I mean not only by fighting when the time comes for fighting, +but by endeavouring in every way to ward off danger." + +"When I see danger, I will do my best to ward it off, Gervaise; but +I cannot go about with my nose in the air, snuffing danger like +a hunting dog in pursuit of game. At any rate, I will not bother +you to accompany me on my visits in future." + + + +CHAPTER IX WITH THE GALLEY SLAVES + + +Gervaise, on consideration, was obliged to own to himself that Ralph +was right in saying that he had no ground whatever for suspicion +against the Greek he had met at Signor Vrados's; and he could +see no means of following the matter up. It would not, he felt, +be honourable to go again to the merchant's house, and to avail +himself of his hospitality, while watching his guest. He determined +to dismiss the matter from his mind, and had, indeed, altogether +done so when, a week later, it suddenly recurred to his memory. + +A party of slaves, under the escort of overseers and in charge of +a knight who had been with them at their work on the fortifications, +were passing along the street on their way back to barracks. It +was already dusk, and as Gervaise was going the same way as they +were, he stood aside in a doorway to let them pass. He was on the +point of stepping out to follow them, when he saw a man, who had +been standing in the shadow of the wall, fall in with their ranks, +and, as he walked engaged in an earnest conversation with one of +the slaves. He kept beside him for a hundred yards or so, then +passed something into the slave's hand, and turned abruptly down +a side opening. There were but few people about, and in the growing +darkness the action of the man passed unobserved by the overseers. +Gervaise, thinking the occurrence a strange one, turned down the +same lane as the man. + +He slackened his pace until the latter was fifty yards ahead, so +that he would not, had he looked round, have been able to perceive +that it was a knight who was behind him. After passing through several +streets, the man turned into a refreshment house. The door stood +open, and as the place was brightly lit up, Gervaise, pausing +outside, was able to see what was going on inside. The man he had +followed was on the point of seating himself at one of the tables, +and as he did so Gervaise recognised him as the Greek he had met +at the merchant's house. He at once walked on a short distance, +and then paused to think. + +The vague suspicions he had before entertained as to the man now +recurred with double force; he was certainly in communication +with one or more of the slaves, and such communication, so secretly +effected, could be for no good purpose. So far, however, there +was nothing he could tax the man with. He would probably deny +altogether that he had spoken to any of the slaves, and Gervaise +could not point out the one he had conversed with. At any rate, +nothing could be done now, and he required time to think what steps +he could take to follow up the matter. He resolved, however, to +wait and follow the Greek when he came out. After a few minutes +he again repassed the door, and saw that the man was engaged in +earnest conversation with another. After considering for a time, +Gervaise thought that it would be best for him to follow this other +man when he left, and ascertain who he was, rather than to keep a +watch on the movements of the Greek, who, as likely as not, would +now return to the merchant's. + +He walked several times up and down the street, until at last +he saw the two men issue out together. They stopped for a moment +outside, and then, after exchanging a few words, separated, the +Greek going in the direction of the quarter in which lay the house +of Vrados, while the other walked towards Gervaise. The latter +passed him carelessly, but when the man had gone nearly to the end +of the street, he turned and followed him. He could see at once +that he was a lay brother of the Order. This class consisted of +men of an inferior social position to the knights; they filled +many of the minor offices, but were not eligible for promotion. +Following for ten minutes, Gervaise saw him approach one of the +barracks, or prisons, occupied by the slaves. He knocked at the +door, and, upon its being opened, at once entered. + +The matter had now assumed a much more serious aspect. This young +Greek, a stranger to Rhodes, was in communication not only with +some of the slaves, but with a prison official, and the matter +appeared so grave to Gervaise that, after some deliberation, he +thought it was too important for him to endeavour to follow out +alone, and that it was necessary to lay it before the bailiff. +Accordingly, after the evening meal he went up to Sir John Kendall, +and asked if he could confer with him alone on a matter over which +he was somewhat troubled. The bailiff assented at once, and Gervaise +followed him to his private apartment. + +"Now, what is this matter, Sir Gervaise?" he asked pleasantly. +"Nothing serious, I trust?" + +"I don't know, Sir John. That is a matter for your consideration; +but it seems to me of such importance that it ought to be brought +to your knowledge." + +The face of the bailiff grew more grave, and, seating himself in +a chair, he motioned to Gervaise to do the same. + +"Now, let me hear what it is," he said. + +Gervaise told his story simply. A slight smile passed across the +bailiff's face as he mentioned that he had met the Greek on the +roof of the house of Signor Vrados, and had not liked the expression +of his face. + +"Vrados has some fair daughters, has he not?" he asked. + +"Yes, sir; but I know little of them. That is the only visit that I +ever paid there, or, indeed, to the house of any one in the town." + +Sir John's face grew grave again as Gervaise recounted how he had +seen the man enter into communication with a slave; and he frowned +heavily when he heard of his meeting afterwards with one of the +prison officers. + +"In truth, Sir Gervaise," he said, after a pause, "this seems to +be a right serious matter, and you have done wisely in informing +me of what you have seen. Assuredly there is mischief of some +sort in the wind. The question is how to get to the bottom of it. +Of course, the grand master might order the arrest of this Greek +and of the prison officer, but you may be sure that neither would +commit himself unless torture were applied; and I, for one, have +no belief in what any man says under such circumstances. The most +honest man may own himself a traitor when racked with torture, +and may denounce innocent men. It is at best a clumsy device. What +think you of the matter?" + +"I have hardly thought it over yet, Sir John; and certainly no plan +has yet occurred to me." + +"Well, think it over, Sir Gervaise. It is not likely that a few +days will make any difference. But I will take measures to see +that this Greek does not sail away from the Island at present, and +will speak to the port master about it. I will myself give the +matter consideration, but as you have shown yourself so quick witted +in following up the matter so far, I rely upon you more than myself +to carry it farther. There may possibly be some simple explanation +of the matter. He may come from an island where the Turks are +masters, and has, perhaps, brought a message from some relatives +of a slave; as to the talk with the prison officer, it may be +wholly innocent. If we should find that it is so we will keep this +matter to ourselves, if possible, or we shall get finely laughed +at by our comrades for having run upon a false scent. If, on the +other hand, the matter should turn out to be serious, you will +assuredly get great credit for having discovered it. Therefore, +turn it over in your mind tonight, and see if you can arrive at +some scheme for seeing further into it before we take any steps. + +In the morning Gervaise again called upon Sir John Kendall. + +"Well, Sir Gervaise, I hope that you have hit upon some scheme for +getting to the bottom of this matter. I confess that I myself, +though I have had a sleepless night over it, have not been able to +see any method of getting to the root of the affair, save by the +application of torture." + +"I do not know whether the plan I have thought of will commend itself +to your opinion, sir, but I have worked out a scheme which will, +I think, enable us to get to the bottom of the matter. I believe +that a galley is expected back from a cruise today or tomorrow. +Now, sir, my idea is that I should go on board a small craft, under +the command of a knight upon whose discretion and silence you can +rely, such as, for example, Sir John Boswell, and that we should +intercept the galley. Before we board her I should disguise myself +as a Turkish slave, and as such Sir John should hand me over to the +officer in command of the galley, giving him a letter of private +instructions from you as to my disposal. If they have other slaves +on board I would ask that I should be kept apart from them, as +well as from the rowers of the galley. On being landed I should +be sent to the prison where I saw the officer enter last night, +and the slaves and rowers should be distributed among the other +prisons. Thus, then, the slaves I should be placed with would only +know that I had arrived in the galley with other slaves captured +by it. I have no doubt I should be able to maintain my assumed +character, and should in a short time be taken into the confidence +of the others, and should learn what is going on. It would be +well, of course, that none of the officials of the prison should +be informed as to my true character, for others, besides the one +I saw, may have been bribed to participate in whatever plot is +going on." + +"And do you mean to say, Sir Gervaise, that you, a knight of the +Order, are willing to submit to the indignity of being treated as +a slave? To keep up the disguise long enough to be taken into the +confidence of the plotters, you might have to stay there for some +time; and if the prison officials believe you to be but an ordinary +slave, you will be put to work either on the walls or in one of +the galleys." + +"I am ready to do anything for the benefit of the Order, and the +safety of Rhodes, that will meet with your approval," Gervaise +replied. "It will no doubt be unpleasant, but we did not enter the +Order to do pleasant things, but to perform certain duties, and +those duties necessarily involve a certain amount of sacrifice." + +"Do you think you would be able to maintain the character? Because +you must remember that if detected you might be torn in pieces by +the slaves, before the officers could interfere to protect you." + +"I feel sure that I can do so, Sir John." + +"What story would you tell them?" + +"I would say that I had come from Syria, and sailed from Acre in +a trader, which is perfectly true, and also that I was taken off +the ship I was on by a galley -- which would not be altogether +false, as I crossed one as I landed. I think there would be very +little questioning, for I should pretend to be in a state of sullen +despair, and give such short answers to questions that I should +soon be left alone." + +"The scheme is a good one, Sir Gervaise, though full of danger and +difficulty. If you are ready to render this great service to the +Order, I willingly accept the sacrifice you offer to make. I will +send one of my slaves down into the town to buy garments suitable +for you, and also stains for your skin. It will, of course, be +necessary for you to shave a portion of your head in Turkish +fashion. I will also see Sir John Boswell, and ask him to arrange +for a craft to be ready to start at noon. The galley is not expected +in until evening, but of course she may arrive at any moment now. +Come here again in an hour's time, and I will have the clothes +ready for you." + +"May I suggest, sir, that they should be those appropriate to a +small merchant? This might seem to account for my not being placed +with the other slaves who may be on board the galley, as it would +be supposed that I was set apart in order that I should be sent to +one of the auberges as a servant; and my afterwards being herded +with the others would be explained by its being found that there +was no opening for me in such a capacity. I should think there +would be no difficulty in obtaining such a suit, as garments of +all kinds are brought here in prizes, and are bought up by some +of the Greek merchants, who afterwards find opportunities of +despatching them by craft trading among the islands." + +Just before noon Gervaise walked down to the port with Sir John +Boswell, a servant following with a bundle. + +"It seems to me a hare brained scheme, lad," Sir John, who had just +joined him, said, as they issued from the auberge; "though I own, +from what the bailiff tells me, that there must be some treacherous +plot on hand, and when that is the case it is necessary that +it should be probed to the bottom. But for a knight to go in the +disguise of an infidel slave seems to me to be beyond all bounds." + +"If one is ready to give one's life for the Order, Sir John, +surely one need not mind a few weeks' inconvenience. I shall, at +any rate, be no worse off than you were when serving as a Turkish +slave." + +"Well, no, I don't know that you will," Sir John replied doubtfully. +"But that was from necessity, and not from choice; and it is, +moreover, an accident we are all exposed to." + +"It is surely better to do a thing of one's own free will than +because one is forced to do it, Sir John?" + +The knight was silent. He was a stout fighting man, but unused to +argument. + +"Well," he said, after a long pause, "I can only hope that it +will turn out all right, and promise that if you are strangled in +prison, I will see that every slave who had a hand in it shall be +strung up. I have told Kendall frankly that if I were in his place +I would not permit you to try such a venture. However, as I could +think of no other plan by which there would be a chance of getting +to the bottom of this matter, my words had no effect with him. I +should not have so much cared if the officers of the gaol knew who +you were; but I can see that if there is treachery at work this +would defeat your object altogether. What do you suppose this +rascal Greek can be intending?" + +"That I cannot say, Sir John. He may be trying to get an exact +plan of the fortifications, or he may be arranging some plan of +communication by which, in case of siege, news of our condition +and of the state of our defences may be conveyed to the Turkish +commander." + +By this time they had reached the port, and embarked at once on a +trading vessel belonging to one of the merchants, from whom Sir +John had readily obtained her use for a day or two. Her sails were +hoisted at once, and she rowed out from the port. Having proceeded +some three or four miles, they lowered her sails, and lay to in +the course a galley making for the port would take. A sailor was +sent up to the masthead to keep a lookout. Late in the afternoon +he called down that he could make out a black speck some twelve +miles away. She carried no sails, and he judged her to be a galley. + +"It will be dark before she comes along," Sir John Boswell said. +"You can hoist your sails, captain, and return to within half a +mile of the port, or she may pass us beyond hailing distance." + +Gervaise at once retired to the cabin that had been set aside for +their use, and proceeded to disguise himself. An hour later Sir +John came down. He looked at Gervaise critically. + +"You are all right as far as appearances go. I should take you +anywhere for a young Turk. Your clothes are not too new, and are +in accordance with the tale you are going to tell, which is that +you are the son of a Syrian trader. If, as Suleiman says, you speak +Turkish well enough to pose as a native, I think you ought to be +able to pass muster. How long will that dye last? Because if it +begins to fade they will soon suspect you." + +"It will last a fortnight; at least, so Sir John Kendall says. But +he has arranged that if at the end of ten days I have not succeeded +in finding out anything, he will send down to the prison, and under +the pretence that he wants to ask me some questions about what +ransom my father would be likely to pay for me, he will have me +up to the auberge, and there I can dye myself afresh." + +"How are you to communicate with him in case of need?" + +"His servant Ahmet, who got the things for me, is to come down +every morning, and to be near the door of the prison at the hour +when the slaves are taken out to work. If I have aught to communicate +I am to nod twice, and Sir John Kendall will send down that evening +to fetch me, instead of waiting until it is time for me to renew +my dye." + +"What is going to be said to Harcourt and the others to account +for your absence?" + +"The bailiff will merely say that he has suddenly sent me away by +ship, on a private mission. They may wonder, perhaps, but none of +them will venture to ask him its nature." + +"Well, I must say that you seem to have made all your arrangements +carefully, Tresham, and I hope it will turn out well. I was against +the scheme at first, but I own that I do not see now why it should +not succeed; and if there is any plot really on hand, you may be +able to get to the bottom of it." + +It was an hour after darkness had completely fallen when the regular +beat of oars was heard. The ship's boat was already in the water, +and Gervaise, wrapped up in his mantle, followed Sir John out of +his cabin and descended with him into the boat, which was at once +rowed towards the approaching galley. Sir John hailed it as it +came along. + +"Who is it calls?" a voice said. + +"It is I -- Sir John Boswell. Pray take me on board, Sir Almeric. +It is a somewhat special matter." + +The order was given, the galley slaves ceased rowing, and the boat +ran alongside. Gervaise unclasped his mantle and gave it to Sir +John, and then followed him on board. + +"I congratulate you on your return, and on your good fortune in +having, as your letter stated, made a prosperous voyage," Sir John +said, as he shook hands with the commander of the galley. + +"I would speak a word with you aside," he added in a low voice. + +Sir Almeric moved with him a few paces from the other knights. + +"I am sent here by our bailiff, Sir Almeric. I have a Turkish prisoner +here with me who is to be landed with those you have taken. There +are special reasons for this, which I need not now enter into. +Will you let him sit down here by the helm? My instructions are +that he is not to mingle with the other slaves; and as there are +reasons why it is wished that his coming on board in this manner +shall not be known to them, I myself am to take him up to one of +the prisons, or at least to hand him over to the officer sent down +from that prison to take up the captives allotted to it. The +matter is of more importance than it seems to be, or, as you may +imagine, I should not be charged to intercept you on such an errand." + +"Of course, I don't understand anything about it, Sir John, but +will do as you ask me." + +He went to where Gervaise had crouched down by the bulwark, +beckoned him to follow, and, walking aft, motioned to him to sit +down there. Then he returned to Sir John, and joined the other +knights, who were all too anxious to learn the latest news -- who +had left the island, and who had come to it since they sailed -- +to interest themselves in any way with the figure who had gone +aft, supposing him, indeed, to be Sir John's servant, the lantern +suspended over the poop giving too feeble a light for his costume +to be noted. + +A quarter of an hour later they anchored in the harbour. Some of +the knights at once went ashore to their respective auberges, but +Sir Almeric and a few others remained on board until relieved of +their charge in the morning, an account being sent on shore of +the number of captives that had been brought in. No thought was +given to Gervaise, who slept curled up on the poop. Sir John +Boswell passed the night on board. In the morning an officer came +off with a list of the prisons to which the slaves were to be sent. +Sir John Kendall had seen the officer charged with the distribution, +who had, at his request, not included the prison of St. Pelagius +in the list. + +A message, however, had been sent to that prison, as well as +to the others, for an officer to attend at the landing stage. In +the morning Sir John went ashore in one of the boats conveying the +slaves, of whom some forty had been captured. Gervaise followed +him into the boat, and took his seat by the others, who were too +dispirited at the fate which had befallen them to pay any attention +to him. + +When he landed, Sir John asked which was the officer from St. +Pelagius. One stepped forward. + +"This is the only slave for you," he said, pointing to Gervaise. +"He is of a better class than the rest, and in the future may be +he will do for a servitor at one of the auberges, but none have at +present occasion for one, and so he is to go to you. He says that +his father is a merchant, and will be ready to pay a ransom for +him; but they all say that, and we must not heed it overmuch. As +he seems a smart young fellow, it may be that he will be sent to +one of the auberges later on; but at present, at any rate, you can +put him with the rest, and send him out with the gangs." + +"He is a well built young fellow, Sir John," the officer remarked, +"and should make a good rower in a galley. I will put him in the +crew of the St. Elmo. Follow me," he said, in Turkish, to Gervaise, +and then led the way up to the prison. On entering he crossed a +courtyard to a door which was standing open. Within was a vaulted +room, some forty feet long by twenty wide; along each side there +were rushes strewn thickly. + +"The others have just started to their work," he said, "so that +for today you can sleep." + +After he had left, Gervaise looked with some disgust at the rushes, +that had evidently been for weeks unchanged. + +"I would rather have the bare stones, if they were clean," he +muttered to himself. "However, it can't be helped." + +He presently strolled out into the courtyard, where some other +slaves, disabled by illness or injuries, were seated in the sun. +Gervaise walked across to them, and they looked listlessly up at +him as he approached. + +"You are a newcomer," one said, as he came up. "I saw you brought +in, but it didn't need that. By the time you have been here +a week or two, your clothes will be like ours," and he pointed to +his ragged garments. "When did you arrive? Are there no others +coming up here?" + +"The galley came in last night," Gervaise said, "but they did not +land us until this morning. I wish they had killed me rather than +that I should have been brought here to work as a slave." + +"One always thinks so at first," the man said. "But somehow one +clings to life. We shall die when Allah wills it, and not before." + +"What is the matter with your foot?" Gervaise asked. + +"I was with the gang quarrying stones, and a mass of rock fell upon +it. I have been in the infirmary for weeks, and I own that the +Christian dogs treated me well. A slave has his value, you see. I +am nearly cured now, but I shall never walk well again. I expect +they will put me in one of their accursed galleys." + +"How long have you been here?" + +"Seven years; it seems a lifetime. However, there is hope yet. +They don't tell us much, but we hear things sometimes, and they +say that the sultan is going to sweep them out of Rhodes as they +were swept out of Acre. When will it be?" + +"I know not. I am from Syria, but even there they are making +preparations. The sultan has had troubles in the East, and that +has delayed him, but he will be here before long, and then we shall +see. It will be our turn then." + +"It will, indeed!" one of the others exclaimed. "Oh, to see these +dogs brought down, and suffering as we have suffered, toiling at +oars in one of our galleys, or at the fortifications of one of our +castles! It will make amends for all our suffering. Had you a hard +fight with them?" + +"No. We were but a small craft, and it was vain to attempt resistance. +I would gladly have fought, but the sailors said it would only +throw away their lives. There was but little on board, and they +allowed the vessel to go free with those of the sailors who were +too old to be made useful for hard work." + +No further questions were asked. The men seemed to have no interest +save in their own misery, and Gervaise soon left them, and, sitting +down in a shady corner, presently dropped off to sleep. + +In the evening all came in from their various work. The officer +man who had brought Gervaise in went up to the overseer of the +galley slaves and informed him that he had told off the new slave +-- pointing to Gervaise -- to his gang. + +"He was brought in by the galley that arrived last night," he said; +"he was the only slave sent up here. I hear that he had been set +aside to be appointed a servitor, but there are no vacancies, so +they sent him here till one should occur; and I was ordered to +make him useful in other ways in the meantime." + +"I am two or three hands short," the overseer said. "I wish now +I had sent in an application yesterday, for if I had done so, no +doubt they would have sent me some more men. However, this fellow +will make up an even number, and he is strong and active, though +at present he looks sulky enough under his bad fortune." + +A few of the slaves spoke to Gervaise as they were waiting for food +to be brought them, but the majority dropped upon the rushes, too +exhausted with toil and heat to feel an interest in anything. The +food consisted of rye bread, with thin broth, brought in a great +iron vessel. Each slave had a horn, which was used for soup or +water, and which, when done with, he had, by the rule enforced +among themselves, to take out to the fountain in the courtyard and +wash, before it was added to the pile in the corner of the room. + +The cool of the evening aided the meal in restoring the energies of +the slaves. Several gathered round Gervaise, and asked questions +as to what he knew of the prospects of an early invasion of Rhodes; +but as soon as the officer left the room, closing and locking the +door after him, the slaves became for the most part silent. A few +men sat in groups together, talking in undertones, but the greater +number threw themselves down on the rushes, either to sleep or +to think alone. Gervaise was struck by the manner in which most of +them lay, without making the slightest movement, so long as there +was light to enable him to make out their figures. He himself +addressed two or three of them, as they lay with their eyes wide +open, asking questions with reference to the work; but in no case +did he receive any reply. The men seemed altogether unconscious of +being addressed, being absorbed in the thought of their far distant +homes and families which they might never see again. + +Gervaise walked a few times up and down the room, and as he approached +a silence fell each time upon the groups of men talking together. +More than once a figure rose soon afterwards from the ground, and, +as he came along again, asked him a few questions about himself. +As soon as it was dark, he lay down in a vacant space on the +rushes. Shortly afterwards talking ceased altogether, and there was +quiet in the vaulted room. With the first gleam of daylight they +were astir, and, when the doors were opened, poured out into the +courtyard, where all had a wash at the fountain. Half an hour +later, a meal, precisely similar to that of the previous evening, +was served out; then the overseers called over the muster roll, +the gangs were made up, and each, under its officer, started for +its work. + +Gervaise, with the men of his room, proceeded down to the port, and +at once took their seats on the benches of the galley, one foot +being chained to a ring in the deck, the other to that of a companion +at the oar. The slaves were more cheerful now. As there was no +work to do at present, they were allowed to talk, and an occasional +laugh was heard, for the sun and brightness of the day cheered them. +Many, after years of captivity, had grown altogether reckless, and +it was among these that there was most talking; the younger men +seemed, for the most part, silent and moody. + +"You will get accustomed to it," the man next to Gervaise said +cheeringly. "When I first came here, it seemed to me that I could +not support the life for a month -- that the fate was too dreadful +to be borne, and that death would be most welcome; but, like the +rest, I became accustomed to it in time. After all, the work is +no harder than one would do at home. There is no stint of food, +and it is no worse than one would have, were one labouring in +the fields. Were it not for the loss of those we love, it would +be nothing; and in time one gets over even that. I have long ago +told myself that if they are not dead, at least they are dead to +me. They have their livings to get, and cannot be always mourning, +and I have tried to forget them, as they must have forgotten me." + +"Do you work hard?" Gervaise asked. + +"No. We who are in the galleys are regarded by the others with envy. +Sometimes -- often, indeed -- we have naught to do all day. We +bask in the sun, we talk, we sleep, we forget that we are slaves. +But, generally, we go out for an hour or two's exercise; that is +well enough, and keeps us strong and in health. Only when we are +away on voyages is the work hard. Sometimes we row from morning +to night; but it is only when they are in chase of another craft +that we have really to exert ourselves greatly. Then it is terrible. +We may be doing our best, our very best, and yet to the impatient +knights it seems that we might do more. Then they shout to the +overseer, and he lays his whip on our backs without mercy. Then +we row until sometimes we drop, senseless, off the benches. But +this, you understand, is not very often; and though the work on a +cruise is long, it is not beyond our strength. Besides, when we +are away in the galley there is always hope. The galley may meet +with four or five of our ships, and be captured, or a storm may +arise and dash her upon the shore; and though many would lose +their lives, some might escape, and each man, in thinking of it, +believes that he will be one of the fortunate ones. + +"Take my advice: always look cheerful if you can; always put your +hand on the oar when the order is given, and row as if you were +glad to be at work again; and always make a show, as if you were +working your hardest. Never complain when you are struck unjustly, +and always speak respectfully to the overseer. In that way you +will find your life much easier than you would think. You will +be chosen for small boat service; and that is a great thing, as +we are not chained in the small boats. Some men are foolish and +obstinate, but, so far from doing any good, this only brings trouble +on themselves; they come in for punishment daily, they are closely +watched, and their lives made hells for them. Even as a help to +escape it pays best to be cheerful and alert. We all think of escape, +you know, though it is seldom indeed that a chance ever comes to +any of us. It is the one thing except death to look forward to, +and there is not a man among us who does not think of it scores +of times a day; but, small as the chance is, it is greatest for +those who behave best. For instance, it is they only who man small +boats; and when a small boat rows ashore, it is always possible +that the guard may be careless -- that he will keep the boat at +the landing place, instead of pushing off at once into deep water, +as he ought to do -- and that in this way a chance will, sooner or +later, come for springing ashore and making a dash for liberty." + + + +CHAPTER X. A PLOT DISCOVERED. + + +The conversation between Gervaise and his fellow slave was +interrupted by the arrival at the side of the quay of a party of +knights. Silence instantly fell upon the slaves; all straightened +themselves up to the oars, and prepared for a start. Among the +knights who took their places on the poop Gervaise saw with amusement +his friend Ralph. He had no fear of a recognition, for the darkly +stained skin and the black hair had so completely altered him that +when he had looked at himself in a mirror, after the application +of the dye, he was surprised to find that he would not have known +it to be his own face. Ralph was in command of the party, which +consisted of young knights who had but recently arrived at Rhodes; +and as it was the first time he had been appointed as instructor, +Gervaise saw that he was greatly pleased at what he rightly regarded +as promotion. + +The galley at once pushed off from the wharf, and rowed out of the +port. The work was hard; but as the slaves were not pressed to +any extraordinary exertions, Gervaise did not find it excessive. +He congratulated himself, however, that the stain was, as he had +been assured, indelible, save by time, for after a few minutes' +exercise he was bathed in perspiration. As the galley had been taken +out only that instruction might be given to the young knights, +the work was frequently broken. + +Sometimes they went ahead at full speed for a few hundred yards, +as if to chase an adversary; then they would swerve aside, the +slaves on one side rowing, while those on the other backed, so as +to make a rapid turn. Then she lay for a minute or two immovable, +and then backed water, or turned to avoid the attack of an imaginary +foe. Then for an hour she lay quiet, while the knights, divesting +themselves of their mantles and armour, worked one of the guns on +the poop, aiming at a floating barrel moored for the purpose a mile +out at sea. At eleven o'clock they returned to the port. Bread and +water were served out to the slaves, and they were then permitted +to lie down and sleep, the galley being moored under the shadow of +the wall. + +At four o'clock another party of knights came down, and the work +was similar to that which had been performed in the morning. At +seven o'clock the slaves were taken back to their barracks. + +"Well, what do you think of your work?" one of the slaves asked +Gervaise, as they ate their evening meal. + +"It would not be so bad if it was all like that." + +"No. But I can tell you that when you have to row from sunrise +to sunset, with perhaps but one or two pauses for a few minutes, +it is a different thing altogether, especially if the galley is +carrying despatches, and speed is necessary. Then you get so worn +out and exhausted, that you can scarce move an oar through the +water, until you are wakened up by a smart as if a red hot iron +had been laid across your shoulders. It is terrible work then. The +whip cracks every minute across some one's back; you are blinded +by exhaustion and rage, and you feel that you would give the world +if you could but burst your chain, rush on your taskmasters, and +strike, if only one blow, before you are killed." + +"It must be terrible," Gervaise said. "And do you never get loose, +and fall upon them?" + +The man shook his head. + +"The chains are too strong, and the watch too vigilant," he said. +"Since I came here I have heard tales of crews having freed +themselves in the night, and fallen upon the Christians, but for +my part I do not believe in them. I have thought, as I suppose +every one of us has thought, how such a thing could be done; but +as far as I know no one has hit on a plan yet. Now and then men +have managed to become possessed of a file, and have, by long and +patient work, sawn through a chain, and have, when a galley has +been lying near our own shore, sprung overboard and escaped; but +for every attempt that succeeds there must be twenty failures, +for the chains are frequently examined, and woe be to the man who +is found to have been tampering with his. But as to a whole gang +getting free at once, it is altogether impossible, unless the key +of the pad locks could be stolen from an overseer, or the man +bribed into aiding us." + +"And that, I suppose, is impossible?" Gervaise said. + +"Certainly, impossible for us who have no money to bribe them +with, but easy enough if any one outside, with ample means, were +to set about it. These overseers are, many of them, sons of Turkish +mothers, and have no sympathy, save that caused by interest, +with one parent more than another. Of course, they are brought up +Christians, and taught to hold Moslems in abhorrence, but I think +many of them, if they had their free choice, would cross to the +mainland. Here they have no chance of ever being aught but what +they are -- overseers of slaves, or small prison officials. They +are despised by these haughty knights, and hated by us, while +were they to reach the mainland and adopt their mothers' religion, +everything would be open to them. All followers of the Prophet +have an equal chance, and one may be a soldier today, a bey tomorrow, +and a pasha a year hence, if he be brave, or astute, or capable in +any way beyond his fellows. Men like these warders would be sure +to make their way. + +"They cannot have gathered much during their service, therefore the +offer of a large sum of money would find plenty among them eager +to earn it. But, you see, they are but the inferiors. On our voyages +on board the galley, the knights inspect our fetters twice a day, +and the keys are kept in the commander's cabin. For an hour or +two, when we are not on a long passage, the padlocks are unfastened, +in order that we may jump over and bathe, and exercise our limbs; +but at this time the knights are always on guard, and as we are +without arms we are altogether powerless. It is the same thing +here. The senior warders, who all belong to the Order, although +of an inferior grade, come round, as you have seen, to examine our +fetters, and themselves lock and bar the doors. If one or two of +these could be corrupted, escape would be easy enough." + +"But is it impossible to do this?" Gervaise asked eagerly. "My +father has money, and would I know be ready, if I could communicate +with him, to pay a handsome sum, if sure that it would result in +my obtaining my freedom." + +The man nodded significantly. + +"There may be other means of doing it," he said. "Perhaps it will +not be long before you hear of it. You seem a stout fellow, and +full of spirit, but, as yet, anything that may be going on is known +but to a few, and will go no further until the time comes that all +may be told. I think not so badly of men of our faith as to believe +that any one would betray the secret for the sake of obtaining his +own freedom and a big reward; but secrets, when known by many, are +apt to leak out. A muttered word or two in sleep, or the ravings +of one down with fever, might afford ground for suspicion, and +torture would soon do the rest. I myself know nothing of the secret, +but I do know that there is something going on which, if successful, +will give us our freedom. I am content to know no more until the +time comes; but there are few, save those engaged in the matter, +that know as much as this, and you can see that it is better it +should be so. Look at that man opposite; he has been here fifteen +years; he seldom speaks; he does his work, but it is as a brute +beast -- despair has well nigh turned him into one. Think you that +if such a man as that were to know that there is hope, he would +not be so changed that even the dullest would observe it? I see you +are a brisk young fellow, and I say to you, keep up your courage. +The time is nearer than you think when you will be free from these +accursed shackles." + +Each morning, as he went out to work with his gang, Gervaise saw +the servant from the auberge standing near; but he made no sign. +He was satisfied that his suspicions had been justified, and that +he was not leading this life in vain, but he thought it better +to wait until the week passed, and he was taken away to have his +colour renewed, than to make a sign that might possibly rouse the +suspicions of his comrades. On the eighth morning, when the door +of the room was unlocked, the overseer said -- "Number 36, you will +remain here. You are wanted for other work." + +After the gang had left the prison, the overseer returned. + +"I am to take you up to the English auberge. The knight who handed +you over to me when you landed, told me that you might be wanted +as a servitor; and as it is he who has sent down, it may be that +a vacancy has occurred. If so, you are in luck, for the servitors +have a vastly better time of it than the galley slaves, and the +English auberge has the best reputation in that respect. Come along +with me." + +The English auberge was one of the most handsome of the buildings +standing in the great street of the Knights. Its architecture +was Gothic in its character, and, although the langue was one of +the smallest of those represented at Rhodes, it vied with any of +them in the splendour of its appointments. Sir John Boswell was +standing in the interior courtyard. + +"Wait here for a few minutes," he said to the overseer. "The bailiff +will himself question the slave as to his accomplishments; but I +fancy he will not be considered of sufficient age for the post that +is vacant. However, if this should not be so, I shall no doubt +find a post to fit him ere long, for he seems a smart young fellow, +and, what is better, a willing one, and bears himself well under +his misfortunes." + +Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow him to the bailiff's +apartments. + +"Well, Sir Gervaise," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, as the door closed +behind him, "have you found aught to justify this cruel penance +you have undertaken?" + +"As to the penance, Sir John, it has been nothing unsupportable. +The exercise is hard enough, but none too hard for one in good +health and strength, and, save for the filth of the chamber in +which we are shut up at night, and the foul state of the rushes +on which we lie, I should have naught to complain of. No, I have +as yet heard nothing of a surety -- and yet enough to show me that +my suspicions were justified, and that there is a plot of some +sort on foot," and he related to the two knights the conversation +he had had with the galley slave. + +"By St. George!" the bailiff said, "you have indeed been justified +in your surmises, and I am glad that I attached sufficient importance +to your suspicions to let you undertake this strange enterprise. +What think you, Sir John Boswell?" + +"I think with you, that Sir Gervaise has fully justified his +insistence in this matter, which I own I considered to be hare +brained folly. What is to be done next, Sir Gervaise?" + +"That is what I have been turning over in my mind. You see, I may +have little warning of what is going to take place. I may not hear +of it until we are locked up for the night and the affair is on +the point of taking place, and it will, of course, be most needful +that I shall be able to communicate with you speedily." + +"That, of course, is of vital importance," the bailiff said. "But +how is it to be managed?" + +"That is what I cannot exactly see, Sir John. An armed guard remains in +our room all night. But, in the first place, he might be himself +in the plot, and if not, the slaves would almost certainly overpower +him and kill him, as a preliminary to the work of knocking off +their chains." + +"Is there a window to the room? At least, of course there is a +window, but is it within your reach?" + +"There are six small loopholes -- one on each side of the door, +and two in each of the side walls; they are but four inches across +and three feet in length, and there are two crossbars to each; they +are four feet from the floor." + +"At any rate, they are large enough for your arm to pass through, +Sir Gervaise, and you might drop a strip of cloth out." + +"Certainly I could, Sir John. I could easily hide a piece of white +cotton a yard or so long in my clothes, scanty as these are, and +could certainly manage, unobserved, to drop it outside the window." + +"Then the rest is for us to contrive, Boswell. We must have some +one posted in the yard of the prison, with instructions to go +every ten minutes throughout the night to see if a strip of white +cotton has been dropped out. When he finds it he must go at once +to William Neave, the governor. He is a sturdy Englishman, and +there is no fear of his having been bribed to turn traitor; but it +were well to take no one into our confidence. I think we cannot +do better than employ Ahmet on this business, as he already knows +that Sir Gervaise is masquerading there. We will have William +Neave up here presently. Tell him that for certain reasons we wish +Ahmet to pass the night for the present in the prison, and arrange +with him on what excuse we can best bestow him there without +exciting suspicion. At any rate, Sir Gervaise, that is our affair." + +He went to a closet and took out a white mantle, tore a strip off +the bottom, and gave it to Gervaise. + +"It would be best not to keep you here any longer," he said, "so +renew your stain while I speak. As soon as you learn the details +of the plot, you will drop this out from the loophole on the right +hand side of the door; that is to say, the one on your right, +standing inside. If the affair is not to come off at once, it were +best for you to proceed as before. Ahmet will be outside when you +go out with your gang, and on your nodding to him we will make some +excuse to take you away on your return. I say this because if you +see that the affair, whatever it is, is not imminent, you might +think it better to remain with them longer, so as to learn their +plans more fully, instead of having the thing put a stop to at +once." + +"I understand, Sir John; but, as I have said, I do not think we +should all be told until the blow is ready to be struck, as they +would be afraid that some one might inform against them, if time +and opportunity were granted them." + +"I think so too, Sir Gervaise. This afternoon we will call upon the +grand master, for we have no means of knowing how serious or how +extended this plot may be; it may include only the crew of a single +galley, and, on the other hand, the whole of the slaves may be +implicated in it. It is evident, therefore, that the matter is +too serious to be kept any longer from his knowledge." + +Three more days passed. On the third evening, after the allowance +of broth and bread had been consumed, and the door was closed and +locked upon them for the night, three or four of the galley slaves, +after talking eagerly together, beckoned to the others to gather +round them at the end of the room farthest from the door. Two +of them took up arms full of the bedding, and stuffed it into the +side windows. Gervaise saw, in the dim light, a look of intense +excitement on the faces of the slaves. It had been vaguely known +among them that a plot was in hand, although but few had been +admitted into the confidence of the leaders. Hitherto all had +feared that it concerned only a small number, but the preparations +now made to insure that they should not be overheard, showed that, +whatever the plan might be, all were to share in it. + +"Thanks be to Allah, the All Powerful," one of the men began, "my +lips are unsealed, and I can tell you the great news that our hour +for escape from bondage is at hand! We need not fear the warder +there," he went on, as several eyes were turned apprehensively +towards the guard, who, with his spear beside him, was leaning +carelessly against the wall at the farther end, looking through +the window into the courtyard; "he is with us. You must know that +for the last two months an agent from Constantinople has been on +the Island, and has been engaged in arranging this affair. Two of +our taskmasters belonging to the Order have been bribed by large +sums of money, and several of the overseers, who are half of our +blood, have eagerly embraced the prospect of returning to their +mothers' country, and of avowing openly their belief in our religion. +These, again, have bought over many of the guards, ours included, +and tonight all will be ready for action. Those not of our party +will be killed without ceremony. Duplicate keys have been made of +all the padlocks of the fetters; the guards who are with us have +each one of them, the others will have been slipped into the +hands of one man in each gang as they returned tonight from work. +The overseers who are in the plot will, at midnight, go quietly +round and unlock the doors, and remove the bars from the outside. +We have, therefore, only to overcome the eight or ten men who +patrol the prison; and as we shall have the arms of the guards, +some thirty in number, we shall make quick work of them. + +"The two guards at the outside gates must, of course, be killed. +Duplicates of the keys have been made, and will be hidden in a +spot known to some of our party, close to the gate. Thus we have +but to issue out and rush down, in a body, to the port. I and +another are to take the arms of our guard, and two others are told +off in each room to do the same. That will give us sixty armed men. +We shall make very short work of the guards at the gate leading +into the port. Then twenty of us are to run along the mole to Fort +St. Nicholas, twenty to the Tower of St. Michael, and twenty to +that of St. John. There will be, at the most, but three or four +men keeping watch at each fort, and thus we shall have in our +possession the three forts commanding the entrance to the harbour. +There are, as you know, six galleys manned by crews from our prison +there. The crew of each galley will embark upon it, and man the +oars; the rest will divide themselves among the galleys. Before +starting, we shall seize and set fire to all other galleys and +ships in the port. The gangs in four of the rooms have been told +off specially for this duty. Before firing them, they are to take +out such provisions as they may find, and transport them to the +galleys. We who take the forts are provided with hammers and long +nails, to drive down the vent holes of the cannon; when we have +done this, we are to wait until one of the galleys fetches us off. +Ten minutes should be ample time for all there is to be done, and +even if the alarm is given at once, we shall be away long before +the knights can be aroused from sleep, buckle on their armour, +and get down to the port." + +Exclamations of delight and approbation burst from his hearers. + +"Then it is only we of this prison who are in the plot?" one said. + +"Yes. In the first place, it would have been too dangerous to attempt +to free all. In the second, the galleys would not carry them; we +shall be closely packed as it is, for there are over a thousand +here. I hear that there was a talk of freeing all, and that we, +instead of embarking at first, should make for the other prisons, +burst open the doors, and rescue the others; but by the time we +could do so the knights would be all in arms, and our enterprise +would fail altogether, for as but a small proportion of us can +obtain weapons, we could not hope to overcome them. Were it not +for the strong wall that separates their quarter from the town, +we might make straight for their houses and slay them before the +alarm could be given. As it is, that would be impossible, and +therefore the plan will be carried out as I have told you. The +loss of all their galleys and of over one thousand slaves will +be a heavy blow for them. Great pains have been taken to prevent +confusion when we reach the port. The men in each room have been +instructed as to the galleys on which they are to embark. As for +you, you know precisely what is to be done; you will simply take +your places, and then wait until all are on board. No galley is +to push out from the wharf until the last man of those employed +in burning the ships has returned, with the provisions found in +them. Then the order will be given by the man who has arranged +all this, and the six galleys will put out together. + +One is to row to each of the forts to carry off the party that +will have been engaged in silencing its cannon. Our galley is to +row to St. Nicholas, and take off the twenty men I shall lead there. +There is no possibility of failure. Everything has, you see, been +arranged. One of the overseers who is in the plot walked by my +side as we returned from the port, and gave me the instructions, +and all the others will have been told in the same way, or else +by the guards in charge of them." The gang now broke up into little +groups, talking excitedly over the unlooked for news, and exulting +over the speedy advent of liberty. Gervaise strolled carelessly +to the window, and dropped out the white strip of stuff. It was now +quite dark, and there was no fear of any one observing the movement. +Then he joined the others. After an hour and a half had passed he +heard footsteps approaching the door. There was a pause; then the +outside bars were taken down, and a key turned in the lock. A deep +silence fell on the slaves. Then a voice called, "Number 36!" + +"What is it?" replied Gervaise, without raising himself from his +seat on the bedding. "I have done my share of work today, and +earned my night's sleep." + +"It is a knight from the English auberge; he has come to fetch you. +It seems that you are to go there as a servitor." + +"What a cursed fortune," Gervaise muttered, in Turkish, "just when +a road to freedom is open! I have a good mind to say I am ill, +and cannot go till the morning." + +"No, no!" one of the others exclaimed. "They would only drag you +out, and when they saw that there was naught the matter with you, +would suspect that there must be some reason why you did not want +to go, when, as every one knows, the position of the servitors is +in every way preferable to ours." + +"Now then, why are you delaying?" a voice said sharply, and a +warder entered with a lighted torch. "Get up, you lazy hound! It +will be worse for you if I have to speak again." + +"I am coming," Gervaise grumbled. "I was just asleep." + +He rose, as if reluctantly, and went forward. The warder gave him +an angry push, followed him out, and locked and barred the door +after him. + +"I suppose this is the right man?" Sir John Boswell said. + +"This is Number 36, Sir Knight, the same who was taken over to your +auberge the other day," and he held the light close to Gervaise's +face. + +"Yes, that is the man. Follow me," he added, in Turkish. The gate +of the courtyard was unbarred, and they passed out unquestioned. +Sir John strolled on ahead. Gervaise followed him a pace or two +behind. Not until they had passed through the gate of the castle +did Sir John turn. + +"I have not spoken to you," he said, "as we may have been watched. +Keep your news until we reach the auberge." + +Upon entering it they went up at once to Sir John Kendall's +apartments. + +"Well, Sir Gervaise, the strip of cotton was brought to us safely. +What is your news?" + +"It is very serious, Sir John, and I have been in terrible anxiety +since I dropped it out, lest it should not come to hand in time. +As it is, you have till midnight to make your preparations." He +then repeated the statement made by the galley slave. + +"By my faith," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, "this is a pretty plot +indeed! And had it succeeded, as it certainly would have done but +for your vigilance, it would have been a heavy blow to us. The +burning of all our galleys would have crippled us sorely, and +the loss of over a thousand slaves would have been a serious one +indeed, when we so urgently require them for completing our defences. +Get rid of those clothes at once, Sir Gervaise, and don your own. +We must go straight to the grand master. You will find your clothes +and armour in the next room. I had them taken there as soon as +your token was brought me." + +In a few minutes Gervaise returned in his usual attire, and with +his armour buckled on. The two knights were already in their coats +of mail, and leaving the auberge they went to the grand master's +palace. A servitor had already been sent to D'Aubusson to inform +him that they were coming, and he advanced to meet them as they +entered. + +"Welcome, Sir Gervaise!" he said. "Whether your news be good or bad, +whether you have found that it is a general rising of the slaves +that is intended, or a plot by which a handful of slaves may seize +a boat and escape, the gratitude of the Order is no less due to +you for the hardships and humiliations you have undergone on its +behalf." + +"It concerns but one prison: that of St. Pelagius." + +"The largest of them," the grand master put in. + +"The whole of the slaves there are to be liberated at twelve +o'clock tonight, are to seize the three water towers and to spike +the guns, to burn all the shipping in the harbour, to make off with +six galleys, and destroy the rest." + +"By St. John!" D'Aubusson exclaimed, "this is indeed a serious +matter. But tell me all about it. There must be treachery indeed +at work for such a scheme to be carried out. + +Gervaise now told him all the details he had learned. + +"So two of the Order, though but of the inferior grade, are in the +plot?" the grand master said; "and several of the overseers? One +of the villains is, of course, the man you saw this Greek talking +with. We must get hold of the other if we can. As to the slaves, +now that we have warning, there is an end of the matter, though +without such warning they would surely have succeeded, for the +plans are well laid, and they would have been at sea before we +could have gathered in any force at the port. If it were not that +it would cost the lives of many of the warders and of the prison +guards, I should say we ought to take post outside the gate, for +we should then catch the traitors who are to accompany them. As it +is, we must be beforehand with them. A hundred men will be more +than ample for our purpose. Do you take fifty of your knights, +Sir John Kendall, and I will draw fifty of those of Auvergne. +At eleven o'clock we will meet at the gate leading down into the +town, and will march to the private entrance of the governor's +house. I will go in first with a few of you, tell him what we +have discovered, and post guards to prevent any one from leaving +his house. Then, having admitted the others, we will go quietly +out and place a party at each door of the overseers' house, with +orders to seize any who may come out. The rest, in small parties, +will then go round the prison, and, entering each room, show the +slaves that their plot has been discovered. This we must do to +save the lives of the guards who may be faithful to their trust. +As to the higher officials engaged in the affair, we must obtain +their names from the overseers or slaves. It is not likely that +the two traitors will quit their houses, as they will leave the +matter in the hands of the overseers, who, as you say, intend to +first open the doors, and then to accompany the slaves in their +escape. Do not warn the knights until it is nearly time to start, +Sir John. The less stir made the better, for no one can say whether +they may not have suborned some of the servitors to send instant +news of any unusual movements in any of the auberges." + +At half past ten Sir John Kendall went round among the knights +and bade fifty of them arm themselves quietly, and proceed, one +by one, down to the gate, and there await orders. Up to this time +Gervaise had remained in the bailiff's room, so as to avoid the +questioning that would take place, and he went down to the gate +with the bailiff and Sir John Boswell. + +The knights assembled rapidly. None were aware of the reason for +which they had been called out at such an hour, and there was a +buzz of talk and conjecture until Sir John Kendall arrived. He was +followed by four of the servants, who at once lighted the torches +they carried, when he proceeded to go through the roll, and found +that the muster was complete. Many of the knights had gazed in some +surprise at Gervaise, whose dark complexion altogether concealed +his identity, and it was supposed that he must be some newly arrived +knight, though none had heard that any ship had entered the harbour +that day. + +Two or three minutes later fifty knights of the langue of Auvergne +came down, headed by the grand master himself, whose appearance +greatly heightened the surprise of the English knights. The +torches were now extinguished, the gate thrown open, and the party +descended into the town. Gervaise had purposely fallen in by the +side of Harcourt. + +"You are but newly arrived, Sir Knight?" the latter said, as they +moved off. + +"Not so very newly, Ralph," Gervaise replied. + +"What! is it you, Gervaise?" Harcourt exclaimed, with a start of +surprise. "Why, I did not know you, though I looked hard at you +in the torch light. What have you done with yourself? Where have +you been? Do you know what all this is about?" + +"I cannot tell you now, Ralph. You must be content to know that I +have been in prison, and working in the galleys." + +"The saints defend us! Why, what on earth had you done to entail +such punishment as that? It is an outrage. The grand master and +the council have the right to expel a knight from the Order after +due trial and investigation, but not to condemn him to such +penalties as the galleys. It is an outrage upon the whole Order, +and I would say so to the grand master himself." + +"There was no outrage in it, Ralph. Wait until you hear the whole +story. That I have not disgraced you, you may judge from the fact +that I am in the armour and mantle of the Order, and that, as you +saw, I came down with Sir John Kendall himself." + +There were no people about in the streets, though the lights still +burned on a few of the roofs. For a short distance the knights +marched down towards the port, and then turned down a street to +the right. After a few minutes' marching they halted under a high +wall which all knew to be that of the prison of St. Pelagius. Six +knights were posted at the main entrance, with orders that none +should be allowed to leave the prison, and that any persons who +came up to the gate were to be at once seized and made prisoners. + +The rest marched on to a small door leading into the governor's +house. Here they were halted, and told to wait till called in; +six knights of England, and as many of Auvergne, being told off to +accompany the grand master and Sir John Kendall. A note had been +sent to the governor, informing him that the grand master intended +to visit the prison at eleven o'clock, but that the matter was to +be kept an absolute secret; and that the governor himself was to +be down at the gate to admit him. + + + +CHAPTER XI IN COMMAND OF A GALLEY + + +William Neave, the governor of the prison, looked astonished indeed +when, upon his opening the door, the grand master and the bailiff +of the English langue, with the twelve knights behind them, entered. +He had been puzzled when, four days before, he had received an +order from the grand master that Ahmet, a servitor in the auberge +of the English langue, should be permitted to pass the night in +his house, with authority to move freely and without question, at +any hour, in the courtyard of the gaol, and to depart at any hour, +secretly and without observation, by the private gate. Still more +had he been surprised when he received the message that the grand +master would pay him a secret visit at eleven o'clock at night. + +"Let no word be spoken until we are in your apartments," D'Aubusson +said in a low voice, as he entered. "But first lead four of +these knights and post them so that none can enter the gaol from +the house. If there are more than four doors or windows on that +side, you must post a larger number. It is imperative that there +shall be no communication whatever between your servants and the +gaol." + +As soon as this was done, the rest of the party were taken to the +governor's rooms. + +"I can now explain to you all," the grand master said, "the reason +of our presence here. I have learned that at twelve tonight there +will be a general rising of the slaves in this prison, and that, +aided by treachery, they will free themselves from their fetters, +overpower and slay such of the guards in their rooms as have not +been bribed, throw open the gates, make their way down to the port, +burn all the shipping there, and make off in the six galleys manned +by them, having first overpowered the sentries in the three forts +commanding the entrance, and spiked the guns." + +Exclamations of astonishment burst from the knights, who now, for +the first time, learnt the reason of their being called out. The +governor listened with an expression of stupefaction. + +"With all deference to your Highness," he said hesitatingly, "it +seems to me that some one must have been deceiving you with this +tale. It is altogether incredible that such a plot should have +been hatched without a whisper of the matter coming to my ears. +It could only be possible were there, not one but many, traitors +among the officials; if this is so, then indeed am I a dull ass, +and unfit for my duty here, of which I shall pray you to relieve +me, and to order such punishment as the council may deem just to +be allotted to me for having so signally been hoodwinked." + +"My news is sure," the grand master said; "but I deem not that you +are in any way to blame in the matter. The plot has been matured, +not as a consequence of any laxity of discipline in the prison, +but from deliberate treachery, against which no mortal being can +guard. The traitors are two of the officials who, being members +of the Order, none would suspect of connivance in such a deed. +With them are several -- I know not how many -- under officials, +warders, and guards; all these have been bribed by an emissary from +Constantinople, now in the town, and who is doubtless furnished +with large means. It is well, indeed, for the Order, that this +terrible act of treachery has been discovered in time to prevent +the plot from coming to a head, for the loss of all our galleys, +to say nothing of the disgrace of having been thus bearded by +slaves, would be a very heavy blow to it. + +"Now that the house is safely guarded, William Neave, you can admit +the rest of the knights, who are waiting outside. Then you will, +in the first place, conduct a party, and post them so that they +may arrest, as they come out to perform their share of the work, +all officials, warders, and guards, of whatever rank. When you +have posted knights to carry out this -- and I need not say that +the operation must be performed as silently as possible, for it +is above all things necessary that the men concerned shall have no +suspicion that their plot has been discovered -- you will conduct +other parties to the various rooms occupied by the slaves. The +guards on duty inside will be made prisoners. The doors will then +be locked and barred as before. The appearance of the knights +and the arrest of the guards will be sufficient to show the slaves +that their plot has been discovered, and there will be no fear of +their making any attempt to carry it into execution. I will myself +post the main body of the knights in the courtyard. The arrest of +the guards is to be carried out at once, as all those not concerned +in the plot would be killed when the hour comes for the rising. +Therefore this part of the business must be carried out immediately. +I should not, however, lead the guards away to a cell, for the less +tramping of feet the better. Therefore I shall place two knights +in each room, and beg them to remain inside in charge until the +traitors outside are secured." + +The knights outside were now marched up. The grand master ordered +half those of Auvergne to go round to the main gate, which would +be opened for them by the governor; they were to enter quietly, and +remain in a body close to it until they received further orders. +Sir John Kendall told off the rest of the knights to the various +duties of watching the houses occupied by the officials and warders, +and of entering the prison rooms and remaining in them on guard. +The governor, with his private servants, bearing a supply of torches, +was to lead them to the various cells, and unlock the doors. The +knights were enjoined to move as noiselessly as possible, and to +avoid all clashing of arms against armour. + +The governor produced a number of cloths intended to be served out +to the slaves. Strips of these were cut off and wrapped round the +feet of the English knights, so as to deaden the sound of their +boots on the stone pavement. Then, accompanied by the grand master +and Sir John Kendall, he went the round of the cells. + +In some of these the slaves were found standing up in an attitude +of eager expectation, which, as the door opened, and the light of +the torches showed a party of knights, changed into one of terror +and consternation. Scarce a word was spoken. The guard was ordered +to lay down his arms, and to take one of the torches. Two knights +placed themselves, one on each side of him, with drawn swords. The +door was again locked and barred, and the party proceeded to the +next cell. In less than a quarter of an hour this part of the work +was finished, and D'Aubusson, Sir John Kendall, and the governor, +then took up their station with a party of knights who, concealed +behind a buttress, were watching the doors of the officials' houses. + +Ten minutes later one of these doors was heard to open, and five +dark figures came noiselessly out. They were allowed to go a short +distance, in order to see if any others followed; but as no others +came out, the governor stepped forward. + +"Whither are you going, at this time of night?" he asked. There +was a momentary pause, a few hasty words were exchanged, then the +five men rushed towards him with bared swords or knives; but before +they reached him the knights poured out from their hiding place. + +"We are betrayed," one of the men shouted in Turkish. "Fight to +the last. Better be killed than tortured and executed." With a +yell of fury and despair, they rushed upon the knights. So desperate +was their attack that the latter were forced to use their swords, +which indeed, burning with rage at the treachery of these men, +they were not backward in doing, and in less than a minute the five +traitors lay, with cloven heads, dead on the pavement. + +"It is as well so," D'Aubusson said, looking sternly down upon them; +"perhaps better so, since it has saved us the scandal of their +trial. We might have learned more from them, but we have learnt +enough, since, doubtless, they have no accomplices among the +warders, or they would have been with them. Now we will deal with +the arch traitors. There is no need for further concealment; the +noise of this fray will assuredly have been heard by them, for they +will be listening for the sounds that would tell them the slaves +had been liberated." + +Followed by the knights, he went to the door of the house occupied +by the overseers, all of whom were members of the lower branch +of the Order. It was indeed evident that an alarm had been given +there, for lights appeared at the windows. As they opened the +door and entered the hall, several half-dressed men rushed down +the stairs with drawn swords, two of them carrying torches in their +left hands. As the light fell upon the figures of the grand master +and the knights, they paused in astonishment. + +"There is treachery at work in the prison," D'Aubusson said quietly. +"I pray you to collect your comrades and to assemble here at once." + +In a minute or two some twenty officials were gathered in the hall. + +"Are all here?" D'Aubusson asked the governor. + +The latter counted the men. + +"There are two short," he said -- "Pietro Romano and Karl Schumann. +They occupy the same room. Go and fetch them down, four of you." + +The four men nearest to the stairs at once went up with two torches. +They returned in a minute. + +"The door is fastened on the inside, and we can obtain no response." + +"Fetch an axe and break it in," the grand master ordered. "Sir John +Boswell, do you, with some other knights, take post without; they +may attempt to escape by the window, though, as we hold the gates, +it would avail them little. Sir Gervaise Tresham, do you follow +us." + +Gervaise, who had been placed with the party watching the house, +followed the grand master and governor upstairs. A few blows with +an axe splintered the door; its fastenings gave way, and they entered +the room. The window was open, and two figures lay prostrate on +the ground near it. + +"I half expected this," the grand master said. "They were listening +there. The conflict in the yard told them that the plot had been +discovered, and as they saw us approaching the house, they dared +not meet the punishment of their crimes, and have fallen by their +own daggers. Put a torch close to their faces. Sir Gervaise, +do you recognise in either of these men the official you saw in +conversation with the Greek?" + +Gervaise stepped forward and examined the men's faces. + +"This is the man," he said, pointing to one of them. "I marked him +so closely that I cannot be mistaken." + +"That is Pietro Romano," the governor said; "he was an able officer, +but discontented with his position and given to quarrelling with +his comrades." + +"Have a hole dug and bury them in the prison," D'Aubusson said; +"they have been false to their vows, and false to their religion. +They have chosen their own mode of death; let them be buried like +dogs, as they are. But let a careful search be made of their +garments and of this room. It may be that they have some documents +concealed which may be of use to us." + +The grand master then descended to the hall. + +"Members of the Order," he said to the overseers, "your guilty +companions have met death by their own hands, as the others concerned +in this plot have met theirs by the swords of the knights. It were +well that this matter were not spoken of outside the prison. The +attempt has been detected, and has failed; but were it talked of, +it might incite others to repeat the attempt, and possibly with +better success. Now," he went on, turning to the governor, "our +work is done here. Call up the other warders. Let them take the +men now prisoners in the rooms, and place them in a dungeon. Let +fresh men be placed on guard, and let all the knights gather in +the courtyard." + +When this was done, and all the knights again assembled, D'Aubusson +said, "Our work is nearly done, brothers. The traitors are all +dead, and the revolt is at an end. It remains but to capture the +author of this attempt; but I believe he is already in our hands. +I have given an accurate description of him to Da Veschi, who +has taken four knights with him, and they probably will catch him +down at the port; if not, he will be arrested the first thing in +the morning. As to the slaves, they will be so utterly cowed by +the discovery, that there will be no fear of their repeating the +attempt. I have ordered the officials of the prison to say naught +in the town of what has taken place. There can, however, be no +concealment among ourselves. I shall, of course, lay the whole +matter before the council. The fact that a strong body of knights +has, at so late an hour, started on some unknown mission is, of +course, already known in the auberges of Auvergne and England. +No concealment of the facts is therefore possible. It is the most +serious attempt at a revolt of the slaves that has ever taken place, +and will be a warning to us that more vigilance must be exercised. +As it is, we have only been saved from the loss of our galleys +and slaves by the acuteness of one of the youngest of our knights, +who, in the first place, noted a suspicious occurrence which would +have been passed by without attracting a moment's thought by +ninety-nine out of a hundred men. He laid the matter before his +bailiff, Sir John Kendall, who accepted his offer to disguise +himself as a slave, to enter the prison under circumstances that +would excite no suspicions among the others, and to live and work +among them in order to ascertain whether there was any plot on +hand. This task -- a painful one, as you may imagine -- he carried +out, and for two weeks he rowed as a galley slave. His lot was as +hard as that of the others, for, as he had reason to believe that +some of the officials were concerned in the plot, it was necessary +that all should be kept in ignorance that he was other than he +seemed to be. Thanks to his perfect knowledge of Turkish, he was +able to carry his mission through with complete success, and to +obtain full particulars of the plot we have tonight crushed. The +knight who has performed this inestimable service is Sir Gervaise +Tresham, of the English langue. The action he has performed will +be noted in the annals of the Order as an example of intelligence +and of the extreme of self sacrifice, as well as of courage; +for his life would have been assuredly forfeited had the slaves +entertained the slightest suspicion of his real character." + +There was a murmur of acclamation among the knights. Not one of +them but would have freely risked his life in the service of the +Order, but there were few who would not have shrunk from the idea +of living as a slave among the slaves, sharing their tasks, and +subject to the orders of men of inferior rank and often brutal +manners. + +The knights now returned to their auberges. It was past midnight, +but at the English house the lamps and flambeaux were lighted in +the great hall. The servitors were called up, wine placed on the +table, and the knights discussed the incidents of the evening. + +When the meal had concluded, Sir John Kendall said, "Brother knights, +When the grand master bestowed the honour of secular knighthood +upon this young comrade of ours, he predicted that he would rise +to high distinction in the Order. I think you will all agree with +me that the prediction is already in a fair way of being fulfilled, +and that the services he has rendered to the Order justify us, his +comrades of the English langue, in feeling proud of him. I drink, +brothers, to his health." + +A loud shout rose from the assembled knights, for upon the return +of the party who had been away, the rest of those at the auberge +had hastily robed themselves and descended to the hall to gather +the news. When the shout had died away, and the wine cups were +emptied, Gervaise, who was sitting on Sir John Kendall's right +hand, would gladly have retained his seat, but the bailiff told him +that he must say a few words, and after standing in embarrassed +silence for a minute he said, "Sir John Kendall, and brother knights, +I can only say that I am very sensible of the kindness with which +you have been pleased to regard what seems to me after all to +have been a very ordinary affair. I saw a man, whom I knew to be a +stranger in the Island, speaking surreptitiously to a slave, and +afterwards saw him conversing with a prison officer. That naturally +struck me as curious, and I followed the officer, to see to which +prison he belonged. Any one would have thought, as I did, that such +a thing was strange, if not suspicious, and the only way to find +out whether there was anything in it was to mix with the slaves; +as I spoke Turkish well enough to do so I asked Sir John Kendall's +permission to disguise myself. He gave me every assistance, and I +shared their lot for a fortnight. There was no very great hardship +in that -- certainly nothing to merit the praise that Sir John +Kendall has been kind enough to bestow on me. Nevertheless, I am +very glad to have gained your good opinion and very grateful to +him and to you for drinking to my health." + +Then he sat down abruptly. + +Sir John Kendall now rose, and the knights, following his example, +betook themselves to their dormitories. + +The next morning notices were sent by the grand master to the +bailiffs of the auberges, and the knights of the grand cross who +happened to be in the Island, to assemble in council. Messages were +also sent to Gervaise, requesting him to repair at the same hour +to the palace, as the council would probably require his attendance. + +"Oh dear! I wish this was all over," he said to Ralph, as the latter +assisted him to buckle on his armour. + +"I don't see anything to sigh about," Ralph said. "I think that +you are the most fortunate fellow in the world. I do not say that +you have not well deserved it, because it is the tremendous way +you worked at Turkish and gave up everything else that has enabled +you to do this. Still, there was luck in your noticing that villain +talking to the galley slaves, and then to one of the officers of +the prison. Of course, as the grand master said last night, it +isn't one in a thousand who would have thought anything more about +it, and I am sure I shouldn't; so that, and all the rest, is +entirely your own doing. Still, it was a piece of luck that you +noticed him talking with a slave. Don't think I envy you, Gervaise; +I don't a bit, and I feel as much as any one that you have well +deserved the honour you have obtained. Still, you know, it is a +sort of consolation to me that luck had a little -- just a little +-- to do with it." + +"In my opinion luck had everything to do with it," Gervaise said +heartily, "and I feel downright ashamed at there being such a +fuss made over it. It was bad enough before, merely because I had +hit on a plan for our escape from those pirates, but this is worse, +and I feel horribly nervous at the thought of having to appear +before the grand master and the council." + +"Well, that brown dye will hide your blushes, Gervaise. I can only +say I wish that I was in your place. By-the-bye, have you heard +that they caught that rascal Greek last night?" + +"No, I have not heard anything about it." + +"Yes. The knights hid themselves behind a pile of goods on the +wharf. There was no one about, so far as they could see, but soon +after twelve they saw a figure come up on to the deck of a fishing +boat moored by the quay. It was the Greek; he stood there for +a minute or two listening, and then went down again; he did this +five or six times, and at one o'clock they saw him throw up his +arms, as if in despair; he stepped ashore, and was about to make +his way up into the town when they rushed out and seized him. +There is no doubt as to what his fate will be. I am sorry to say +that I hear my friend Vrados has been arrested; but there can be no +doubt about his loyalty, and he will assuredly be able to explain +to the satisfaction of the council how this man became a resident +at his house." + +"I am sorry I met him there, Ralph. It is a very unpleasant thing +to have gone to a house, to have been received kindly, and then +to be the means of bringing trouble upon it." + +"Yes. I feel that a little myself, because I took you there; and +yet I cannot regret it, for if you had not seen him and taken an +objection to him, you might not have noticed him particularly when +he spoke to one of the galley slaves. It is certainly curious that +you should have doubted the man, for I have met him there several +times, and even after your visit with me I could see nothing in +him to justify your dislike." + +Gervaise went up to the palace, and while waiting in the great +hall until summoned before the council he was warmly accosted by +several knights, -- some of whom were quite strangers to him, -- +who all joined in congratulating him on the immense service he had +done to the Order. It was upwards of an hour before he was called +in. + +"The council have received, Sir Gervaise Tresham," the grand master +said, "full details from Sir John Kendall of the manner in which +you first discovered, and have since followed up the daring plot +by which the slaves at St. Pelagius were to have risen, slain the +guards who were faithful, spiked the cannon in the three water +forts, burnt the merchant shipping, carried off six galleys and +burnt the rest, and in their name I thank you for having saved +the Order from a great calamity. The members of the council agree +with me that you have shown an amount of discernment of the highest +kind, and that you are worthy of exceptional favour and reward +for your conduct. I therefore in my own name appoint you to the +commandery of our manor of Maltby in Lincolnshire, which, having +fallen vacant, is in my gift; and I release it from the usual payment +of the first year's revenue. Knowing that you desire to establish +yourself here, the council have, at my request, decided to make +an exception to the general rule that a knight, on promotion to a +commandery, must return and take charge of it in two years from +the time the grant is made to him. The commandery will therefore +be administered by the senior of the knights attached to it. + +"The council, on their part, have requested the bailiff of Auvergne, +as grand master of the Fleet, to appoint you to the command of +the galley now building, and approaching completion. This he has +consented to do, feeling, as we all feel, that although such an +appointment is unprecedented for a young knight, yet in the present +case such an exception may well be made. I may add that the Admiral +has -- in order that no knight greatly your senior should be placed +under your command -- determined that he will appoint to it only +young knights, who will, we are assured, gladly serve under one +who has so distinguished himself, feeling certain that, under his +command, they will have ample opportunities against the infidels +to prove themselves worthy of the Order. I may add, also, that +the bailiffs of all the langues promise that they will select +from among the young knights such as may seem best fitted for +such service, by their skill in warlike exercises, by their ready +obedience to orders, and good conduct. And I foresee that the +spirit of emulation, and the desire to show that, though still +but professed knights, they are capable of performing as valiant +deeds as their elders, will make the galley under your command one +of the most successful in the Order. + +"As you are aware, it is a stringent rule, which even in so +exceptional a case we should not be justified in breaking, that a +knight must reside in the Island for five years previous to being +promoted to a commandery. It is now two months more than that time +since you were received as page to the late grand master, and in +promoting you to a commandery I have not, therefore, broken the +rule. You may retire, Sir Gervaise." + +Gervaise, overwhelmed by the unlooked for honours thus bestowed +upon him, bowed deeply to the grand master and the members of the +council, and then retired from the chamber. He passed out of the +palace by a side door, so as to avoid being accosted by the knights +in the great hall, and took his way out on to the ramparts, where +he walked up and down for a considerable time before returning to +the auberge. He felt no hilarity at his promotion. He had never +entertained any ambition for rising to high office in the Order, +but had hoped only to perform his duty as a true knight, to fight +against the infidels, and some day, if need be, to die for the +Order. The commandery was, he knew, a rich one, and as its chief he +would draw a considerable revenue from the estate. This afforded +him no pleasure whatever, except inasmuch as it would enable him, +in his new command of the galley, to keep a handsome table, and to +entertain well the knights who served under him. + +It seemed to him, however, that the reward and honours were so +far beyond his deserts that he felt almost humiliated by their +bestowal. The responsibility, too, was great. Would these young +knights, the youngest of whom could be but a year his junior, +serve willingly under his orders? And, above all, would they be +able to emulate the deeds of experienced warriors, and would the +galley worthily maintain the fame of the Order? + +At the end of two hours he was joined by Ralph Harcourt. + +"I have been looking for you everywhere, Gervaise. You seemed +to have disappeared mysteriously. None had marked you leave the +council chamber, or knew where you had gone; and after searching +everywhere I remembered your fondness for walks upon the walls, +so I climbed to the top of St. John's tower and thence espied you. +Well, I congratulate you most heartily on the honours that have +fallen to your share, especially that of the command of a new +galley." + +"It is too much altogether, Ralph. I feel ashamed at being thus +thrust into a post that ought to be given to a knight of age and +experience. How can I expect a number of young knights, of whom +well nigh all must be my seniors in age, to obey me as they would +an older man?" + +"What has age to do with it?" Ralph said. "You have shown that you +have a head to think, and, as you before proved, you have an arm +to strike. Why, every young knight in the Order must feel proud +that one of their own age has gained such honour. It raises them +all in their own esteem, and you will see that you will get the +pick among all the professed knights, and of a good many who have +finished their profession, and are serving here in the hope of +some day getting promotion to a commandery. Not such an one as you +have got; that, in the ordinary course of things, does not fall +to a knight until he is well on in years, and has served in many +commanderies of smaller value. I can tell you, directly Sir John +Kendall came back and told us that you had been appointed commander +of the new galley, and that it was to be manned wholly by young +knights, there was not one of those serving their profession in +the auberge who did not beg Sir John to put down his name for it; +and ten or twelve others, myself among them, who have obtained full +knighthood also." + +"You don't mean to say that you have put down your name to serve +under me, Ralph? It would be monstrous." + +"I see nothing monstrous in it, Gervaise. As I said just now, years +have nothing to do with it, and, putting aside our friendship, I +would rather serve under you than under many knights old enough to +be your father. I don't know whether I shall have the luck to be +one of the chosen, as Sir John said that there were to be only +seven from each langue, which will make forty-nine -- with yourself +fifty. If I am chosen -- and, knowing our friendship, I hope that +the bailiff will let me go with you -- it is likely enough I may be +named your lieutenant, as I shall be the only one beside yourself +who is a secular knight, and am, therefore, superior in rank to +the rest." + +"That would be pleasant indeed, Ralph, though I would rather that +you had been made commander and I lieutenant; but at any rate, +with you to support me, I shall feel less oppressed by the thought +of my responsibility." + +As Ralph had declared would be the case, the young knights in the +other auberges were as anxious as those of England to be enrolled +among the crew of the new galley, and the bailiffs had some trouble +in choosing among the aspirants. Very few were selected outside +the rank of professed knights, and as great pains were taken to +comply with the grand master's wishes that only young knights of +good conduct and disposition, and distinguished by their proficiency +in warlike exercises, should be chosen, the crew was in every way a +picked one. Most of them had made one or two of the three months' +voyages in the galleys, though comparatively few had had the good +fortune to be absolutely engaged with the Moslem pirates. + +To the great satisfaction of himself and Gervaise, Ralph Harcourt +was nominated lieutenant of the galley. The fact that so many had +volunteered impressed all those who were chosen with the sense that +it was at once an honour and a piece of good fortune to be selected, +and all were determined that the boy galley, as the elder knights +laughingly termed it, should do honour to the Order. + +It was a fortnight before she was launched. Gervaise had heard, +with great satisfaction, that it had been decided by the council +that no punishment should be inflicted upon the slaves for their +share in the intended rising at St. Pelagius. All were guilty, +and there was no means of saying who had taken prominent parts in +the plot. The council felt that it was but natural that they should +grasp at the prospect of freedom, for they themselves would have +done the same had they been captives of the infidels. Even the +warders and guards were allowed to go unpunished, although their +offence was a much more serious one. Those who could have named +the men who had accepted bribes were dead, and the lesson had been +so severe a one that there was no probability of any again turning +traitors. The author of the rising had been publicly executed. +Seeing the hopelessness of denial, he had boldly avowed his share +in the matter, and had acknowledged that he was acting as agent for +the sultan, and had been supplied with ample funds before leaving +Constantinople. + +He declared that he was absolutely unable to give any names whatever +of those concerned in the plot, save those of the two overseers, +as these had undertaken the work of suborning the warders and +guards, though he admitted that he had on several occasions spoken +to slaves as the gangs were on their way back to the prison, and +had told them to be prepared to take part in a plan that was on +foot for their rescue from slavery. The torture had not been, as +was then the usual custom, applied to extort information; partly +because his story was probable, still more because the grand master +and council did not wish that more publicity should be given to +the affair, and were glad that it should be allowed to drop without +any further trial of the delinquents. In the city generally it +was only known that a plot had been discovered for the liberation +and escape of some of the slaves; and, outside the members of the +Order, none were aware of its extent and dangerous character. To +the satisfaction of Gervaise and Ralph, Vrados was able to produce +letters and documents that satisfied the council that he had been +deceived as to the character of the Greek, and was wholly innocent +in the matter. + + + +CHAPTER XII THE BOY GALLEY + + +Among those most pleased at the appointment of Gervaise to the command +of the galley was Sir John Boswell. Ever since the adventure with +the pirates, the knight had exhibited an almost fatherly interest +in him; had encouraged him in his studies, ridden with him on such +occasions as he had permitted himself a short holiday, and had, +whenever they were together, related to him stories of war, sieges, +battles, and escapes, from which he thought the young knight might +gain lessons for his future guidance. + +"I doubt, Gervaise," he said one day, as they were riding quietly +along the road, "whether our plan of life is altogether the +best. We were founded, you know, simply as a body of monks, bound +to devote ourselves solely to the care of the sick, and to give +hospitality to pilgrims in Palestine. Now this was monkish work, +and men who devoted themselves solely to such a life of charity as +that in our Hospital at Jerusalem, might well renounce all human +pleasures; but when the great change was made by Master Raymond du +Puy, and from a nursing body we became a brotherhood in arms, it +seems to me that the vows of celibacy were no longer needful or +desirable. The crusaders were, many of them, married men, but they +fought no worse for that. It would have been far better, methinks, +had we been converted into an Order pledged to resist the infidel, +but without the vows of poverty and of celibacy, which have never +been seriously regarded. + +"The garrison here might be composed, as indeed it is now, principally of +young knights, of those who have not cared to marry, and of the +officers of the Order whose wives and families might dwell here with +them. This would have many advantages. Among others, the presence +of so many ladies of rank would have the excellent effect of +discountenancing and repressing extravagances and dissolute habits, +which are but too common, and are a shame to the Order. Knights +possessing commanderies throughout Europe would be no worse +stewards for being married men, and scandals, such as contributed +largely to the downfall of the Templars, would be avoided. + +"The sole vow necessary, so far as I can see, would be that knights +should remain unmarried and disposable at all times for service +until ten years after making their profession, and that afterwards +they should ever be ready to obey the summons to arms, on occasions +when the safety of Rhodes, or the invasion of any Christian country +by the Moslems, rendered their services needful, when they would +come out just as the knights of Richard the Lion Heart went out +as crusaders. I have spent half my life since I joined the Order +in commanderies at home, and a dull life it was, and I was glad +enough to resign my last command and come out here. Had I been +able to marry, I might now have had a son of your age, whose career +I could watch and feel a pride in. My life would have been far +happier in England, and in all respects I should be a better man +than I am now. Methinks it would strengthen rather than weaken +the Order. As a fighting body we should be in no way inferior +to what we are now, and we should be more liked and more respected +throughout Europe, for naturally the sight of so many men leading +a luxurious life in commanderies causes a feeling against them." + +"But I suppose, Sir John, that there is no great difficulty in +obtaining a dispensation from our vows?" + +"In this, as in all other matters, everything depends upon interest +or money. Of course, dispensations are not common; but doubtless +any knight when he had served his term of active service could, +especially if his request were backed by the grand master, obtain +from the Pope a dispensation of his vows. If he had a commandery +it would make a vacancy, and give the grand prior, or the grand +master, or the council, in whosoever's gift it might be, an +opportunity of rewarding services or of gratifying some powerful +family." + +"I agree with you that it would have been much better, Sir John. +I can understand that monks, ever living a quiet life apart from +the world, should be content so to continue; but among a body +of warlike knights there must be many who, in time, must come to +regret the vows they took when boys. The cadet of a noble family +might, by the death of elder brothers, come to be the head of +a great family, the ruler over wide domains. Surely it would be +desirable that such a man should be able to marry and have heirs." + +"Doubtless it could be managed in such cases, Gervaise, but it +is a pity that it should have to be managed. I can see no reason +in the world why a knight, after doing ten years of service here, +should not be free to marry, providing he takes a vow to render +full service to the Order whenever called upon to do so. Already +the vow of poverty is everywhere broken. Already, in defiance +of their oaths, too many knights lead idle and dissolute lives. +Already, knights, when in their own countries, disregard the rule +that they shall draw sword in no cause save that of the Holy +Sepulchre, and, like other knights and nobles, take part in civil +strife or foreign wars. All this is a scandal, and it were better +by far to do away with all oaths, save that of obedience and +willingness to war with the infidel, than to make vows that all +men know are constantly and shamelessly broken. + +"I am fond of you, Gervaise. I am proud of you, as one who has +brought honour to our langue, and who, in time, will bring more +honour. I am glad that, so far as there can be between a young +knight and one of middle age, there is a friendship between us. +But see what greater pleasure it would give to my life were you +my son, for whom I could lay by such funds as I could well spare, +instead of spending all my appointments on myself, and having +neither kith nor kin to give a sigh of regret when the news comes +that I have fallen in some engagement with the infidels. I often +think of all these things, and sometimes talk them over with +comrades, and there are few who do not hold, with me, that it would +be far better that we should become a purely military Order, like +some of the military Orders in the courts of the European sovereigns, +than remain as we are, half monk, half soldier -- a mixture that, +so far as I can see, accords but badly with either morality or +public repute. + +"However, I see no chance of such a change coming, and we must be +content to observe our vows as well as may be, so long as we are +willing to remain monks and try to obtain dispensation from our +vows should we desire to alter our mode of life. We ought either +to have remained monks pure and simple, spending our lives in +deeds of charity, a life which suits many men, and against which +I should be the last to say anything, or else soldiers pure and +simple, as were the crusaders, who wrested the Holy Sepulchre from +the hands of the infidels. At present, Gervaise, your vocation +lies wholly in the way of fighting, but it may be that the time +will come when you may have other aims and ambitions, and when the +vows of the Order will gall you." + +"I hope not, Sir John," Gervaise said earnestly. + +"You are young yet," the knight replied, with an indulgent smile. +"Some day you may think differently. Now," he went on, changing +the subject abruptly, "when will your galley be ready?" + +"This is my last ride, Sir John. The shipwrights will have finished +tomorrow, and the next day we shall take possession of her, and +begin to practise, so that each man shall know his duties, and the +galley slaves learn to row well, before we have orders to sail. +I wish you were going with us, Sir John." + +"I should like it, lad, in many respects. It does one good to see +the enthusiasm of young men, and doubtless you will be a merry party. +But, on the other hand, unless I mistake, you will be undertaking +wild adventures, and my time for these is well nigh passed. When +the Turk comes here, if he ever comes -- and of that I have little +doubt -- I shall be ready to take my full share of the fighting; +but I shall seek adventures no longer, and shall go no more to +sea. Next only to the bailiff, I am the senior of our auberge, +and -- but this is between ourselves, lad -- am like to succeed +to the grand priory of England when it becomes vacant, and if not +I shall, as the grand master has told me, have the offer of the +next high office vacant in the palace." + +Two days later Gervaise and his company of young knights went down +to the port to take part in the launch of the new galley. This +was the occasion of a solemn ceremony, the grand master and a large +number of knights being present. A religious service first took +place on her poop, and she was named by the grand master the +Santa Barbara. When the ceremony was over, Gervaise was solemnly +invested with the command of the galley by the grand marshal of +the navy; then the shores were struck away, and the galley glided +into the water, amid the firing of guns, the blowing of trumpets, +and the cheers of the spectators who had gathered at the port to +witness the ceremony. + +The next morning a gang of galley slaves were marched down. A third +of these had been drawn from the crews of other galleys, their +places being supplied by new hands. The remainder were taken from +the men employed on the fortifications. Three weeks were occupied +in teaching the rowers their work, and getting them well together. +They were a fine crew, for the governor of St. Pelagius, grateful to +Gervaise for the discovery of the plot, had ordered the overseers +to pick out from the various gangs men specially suited by age +and strength for the work. + +The dye by this time had entirely worn off his face, and although +his hair was still several shades darker than of old, it differed +even more widely from the ebon hue that it had been when he was in +prison. Thus, although he recognised three or four men upon the +benches who had been fellow occupants of his cell, he had no fear +whatever of their detecting in the commander of the galley their +late companion in misfortune. + +Only a portion of the knights had been out each day while the crew +were learning to row, as there was but little for them to learn. +The galley carried no sails, and the knights were soldiers rather +than sailors, and fought on the deck of their ship, as if defending +a breach, or storming one held by the enemy. Moreover, as all of +them had already made one or more voyages, they were accustomed to +such duties as they would have to discharge on board. + +All were glad when an order was published for the galley to sail. +On the eve of departure Gervaise was sent for by the grand master. +The general of the galleys was with him when Gervaise entered the +room. The bailiff of Auvergne always held the position of grand +marshal, and the bailiff of Italy that of second in command, with +the title of grand admiral. These officials, however, as heads of +their respective langues, had many other duties to perform, and +it was only on great occasions that they took any practical share +in the work of which they were nominally heads. The real control +in all naval questions rested with the general of the galleys, +who was elected by the council, but on the nomination of the grand +master. + +His power when at sea with the fleet was absolute. He could suspend +any officer from duty, and had unquestioned power of life and +death over the crews. He had been frequently on board the galley +since she had been launched, and had been pleased with the attention +paid by Gervaise to his duties, and with the ready manner in which +the young knights carried out his orders. + +"Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said, "it is usual, as you know, to +appoint each galley to a certain cruising ground, to which it is +confined during its three months' absence. At present there is +a galley on each of these stations, and as the last relief took +place but a month since, it is better that they should remain at +the stations allotted to them. I have therefore, after consultation +with his Highness the grand master, decided to give you a free +hand. You are as likely to meet with pirates in one quarter as in +another, and you will pick up from vessels you may overhaul news +of their doings, which will enable you to direct your course to +the point where you will be most useful." + +"In the first place, however, you will proceed to the coast of +Tunis. Visconti's galley is already there, but the coast swarms with +corsairs, and we have had many complaints as to their depredations. +The Court of Spain has twice represented to us lately that the +pirates have grown so bold that vessels have been carried off, +even when coasting from one Spanish port to another. Visconti is +specially watching the coast near Tunis, and you will therefore +perhaps do better to proceed farther west, for every village from +Tunis to Tangier is little better than a nest of pirates. I should +imagine that you will find ample employment there during your +three months' cruise. When I say that you are free to choose your +own cruising ground, I do not mean that you should go up the +Levant, or to the east of the Mediterranean, but that you are not +bound to keep close along the African coast, but may, should you +obtain any information to warrant your doing so, seek the pirates +along the shores of Spain, Sardinia, Corsica, or Sicily. + +"I need not warn you to act with prudence as well as courage, for +you have proved that you possess both qualities. Do not allow +yourself to be carried away by the impetuosity of your knights; it +is more often the duty of a commander to restrain than to encourage +his crew, and with such young blood as you have under your command +the necessity will be greater than usual. Be kind to your slaves, +but be ever watchful; yet this I need not tell you. Maintain +a strict but not over severe discipline. You are all knights and +comrades of the Order, and equals when on shore, but on board you +are the captain and they are your soldiers. I have this afternoon +had a meeting of your knights, and have urged upon them very strongly +that, having volunteered to serve under you, they must obey your +orders as promptly and willingly as if you were the senior knight +of the Order, and that it behooves them specially upon the present +occasion, when the crew is composed entirely of young knights, +to show themselves worthy of the honour that has been done to them +by entrusting a galley of the Order to their charge. I told them +I should regard your report of their individual conduct with the +same attention and respect with which I should that of any other +commander, and that they might greatly make or mar their future +prospects in the Order by their conduct during the cruise. I +am convinced, from what I know of you, that you will exercise no +undue harshness, but will act with tact and discretion, as well +as firmness." + +"I will try to do so, your Excellency. I feel that it is a heavy +responsibility and will spare no pains to justify the unmerited +honour that has been bestowed upon me." + +"You have seen that the taking in of stores is complete, and that +nothing is wanting for the voyage?" + +"Yes, sir. I stood by while the overseer of stores checked off every +sack and barrel as it came on board. The water is to be brought +off this evening, and as I was unable to be present, Sir Ralph +Harcourt is there to count the barrels and see that all are full." + +"Goodbye, Sir Gervaise," the grand master said, as the interview +terminated. + +"Hitherto you have given me, from the time you reached the Island, +naught but reason for satisfaction at my nomination of you as +page, and I have no fear that you will fail this time. Remember +that valour, however great, cannot prevail against overpowering +odds. You had a lesson of that when you served under Ricord, though +finally the affair turned out well. I do not say, don't attempt +desperate undertakings, but don't attempt impossible ones. Be +careful of the lives of your knights. Remember that ere long every +sword may be of the utmost consequence in the defence of Rhodes, +and that even the capture of pirates may be too dearly purchased; +but that, at the same time, the honour of the flag of the Order +must be upheld at all hazards. Ah!" he broke off, seeing a slight +smile on the young knight's face, "you think my orders contradictory? +It may be so; but you know what I mean, and I fear not that you +will blunder in carrying them out. Be prudent, and yet not over +prudent. I mean, be not rash, unless there are such benefits to be +obtained as would justify great risk in obtaining them." + +On returning to the auberge, Gervaise had a long chat with Ralph. + +"I think the admiral's talk with us this afternoon had an excellent +effect, Gervaise. I do not say that every one was not before +disposed to obey you in all things, willingly and cheerfully; but +he put it so strongly to them that they had volunteered specially +for service in this galley, knowing well who was to be its commander, +and the circumstance that the crew was to consist solely of young +knights, and had therefore specially pledged their honour so +to act that the enterprise should be in all respects a successful +one. To render it so, obedience was even a greater necessity than +valour. This was the most important of all the vows taken by the +knights of the Order, and it was only by the strictest and most +unquestioning obedience on the part of all to the orders of their +superiors, that the work of a vast community could be carried on. +Passing over the fact that you were their superior in rank, both +as being a secular knight and a knight commander of the Order, +you had been specially appointed by the grand master and council, +as well as by himself, and that they bestowed upon you while at +sea, and in the absence of any officers of superior rank, their +full powers and authority. You were, in fact, their representative +and agent, and therefore to be regarded with the same deference +and respect that would be due to the oldest knight similarly placed. +'Lastly,' he said, in a less serious tone, 'you must remember that +this is an experiment, and, as some think, a somewhat rash one. +Never before did a galley, manned entirely from among the youngest +of our knights, put to sea; and you may be sure that, unless +successful, the experiment is not likely to be ever repeated. You +have been selected from among many other candidates, and you have +not only to justify the choice, but to uphold the reputation and +honour of the young knights of your Order, by all of whom your doings +will be regarded with special interest, as reflecting credit not +only upon yourselves individually, but as representatives and +champions of them all.' + +"I could see that his words had a great effect. He had placed me +beside him, and I marked their faces as he spoke. Each face lit +up at his appeal, and I do not think there was one but silently +registered a vow to do all in his power to prove himself worthy +of the confidence placed in him and his companions by the grand +master and admiral. I had before no shadow of fear that everything +would not go well. I knew almost all of them personally, and if +I myself had had the selection from among the whole body of knights +in the convent, I could not have made a choice that would have +suited me better. It seems to me that in each auberge the bailiff has +endeavoured to pick out the seven young knights whom he considered +would most worthily support the honour of the langue. Still, +confident as I was before, I feel more so now, after the admiral's +address to us." + +"I had no fear either, Ralph, though doubtless the admiral's words +will carry great weight with them. It was thoughtlessness rather +than anything else that I dreaded; but now that the admiral himself +has spoken to them, there is no fear that anything will occur to +give us trouble. I have particularly noticed that when we have +been on board, and have been laughing and chatting together before +we got under way, their manner changed directly the first order +was given, and that all the commands were carried out with as much +goodwill and alacrity as if they were under Ricord himself." + +On the following morning the knights all went on board the Santa +Barbara. Their baggage was carried down by slaves, and by the +personal servants from each auberge who were to go as their attendants +during the voyage. The grand master had advanced Gervaise a sum +equal to half a year's income of his commandery, and with this he +had purchased a stock of the best wines, and various other luxuries, +to supplement the rations supplied from the funds of the Order to +knights when at sea. Gervaise had to go round early to the admiral +to sign the receipt for stores and to receive his final orders in +writing. All were, therefore, on board before him and, when he +arrived, were drawn up in military order to receive him. + +Every knight was in full armour, and as, at a word from Ralph, +they drew their swords and saluted the young commander, Gervaise +felt with a thrill of pleasure and of confidence that with such +a following he need not fear any encounter with a pirate force, +unless in overwhelming numbers. + +The young knights were all, with the exception only of Ralph Harcourt, +between the ages of seventeen and nineteen, and their young faces, +free in most cases even from the suspicion of a moustache, looked +almost those of boys. But there was no mistaking the ardour and +enthusiasm in their faces, and the lack of breadth and weight, +that years alone would give to them, was compensated by skill in +their weapons, acquired by long and severe training, and by the +activity and tireless energy of youth. + +"Knights and comrades," Gervaise said as, after walking through +the double line to the end of the poop he turned and faced them, +"I am proud indeed to command so gallant a body of knights. The +success of our expedition depends upon you rather than upon me, +and as I feel assured of your warm cooperation I have no fear as +to what the result will be, if Dame Fortune will but favour us by +throwing in our way some of those scourges of the sea in search of +whom we are about to set out. Many of us have already encountered +them, and, fighting side by side with older knights, have borne our +share of the work, while those who have not done so will, I am +sure, do equally well when the opportunity arrives. We shall not +this voyage have the encouragement and confidence inspired by the +presence of those who have long and valiantly borne the standard +of the Order; but, on the other hand, we have to show that we are +worthy of the confidence reposed in us, and that the young knights +of the Order can be trusted to emulate the deeds of those who have +rendered the name of the Hospitallers a terror to the infidel." + +A shout of approbation greeted the close of his address. Gervaise +then walked forward to the end of the poop, and looked down upon +the slaves, who, with their oars out, were awaiting the order to +row. + +"Men," he said in Turkish, "it is my desire that, while it is necessary +that you should do your work, your lot shall be no heavier than +can be avoided. You will not be taxed beyond your powers, save +when the enemy is in sight, or there is supreme need for haste, +but then you must be called upon for your utmost exertions. I wish +your work to be willing. I abhor the use of the lash, and so long +as each man does his fair quota of work, I have given the strictest +orders that it shall never be used. I have, at my own cost, made +provision that your daily rations shall be improved while under +my command. Meat will be served out to you daily, when it can be +obtained, and for those of you who hold that the strict tenets of +your religion may be relaxed while engaged in such severe labour, +a ration of wine will also be served out; and such other indulgences +as are compatible with the discipline and safety of the ship, will +also be granted to you." + +There was a murmur of gratitude among the slaves. Gervaise then +gave the order to row, and the galley started on her voyage. The +knights had now fallen out from their ranks, and were soon laughing +and talking gaily. Being all of noble families and knightly rank, +there was, except when on actual duty, a tone of perfect equality +and good fellowship prevailing among them. French was the common +language, for as the Order was of French foundation, and three +of the seven langues belonged to that country, most of the high +dignitaries being chosen from their ranks, it was natural that +the French language should be the general medium of communication +between them. + +Until noon the slaves rowed steadily and well. Work was then stopped, +for there was scarce a breath of wind stirring the water. Even +under the awning that had, as the sun gained power, been erected +over the poop, the heat was oppressive. The knights had all divested +themselves of their armour, and most of them retired below for +a siesta. As soon as the slaves stopped rowing, an awning, which +Gervaise had purchased, and which was rolled up under the break +of the poop, was, to their astonishment, drawn over them. + +"Don't you think you are spoiling your slaves, Sir Gervaise?" one +of the Spanish knights asked doubtfully. + +"On the contrary, Sir Pedro, I hope that I am improving them. You +have not worked as a galley slave, but I have, and I can assure +you that I used to feel the hours when we were lying broiling in +the sun, doing nothing, much more trying than those during which +I was at work. I used to be quite giddy and sick with the heat, +and on getting out the oars again had scarce strength to work them. +But this is not the most important point. In port the slaves always +sleep in the prison, but at sea they must rest on their benches; +and to do so with clothes soaked with the heavy dew must be a +severe trial, and most prejudicial to the health. The awning cost +but a few ducats, and I reckon that, putting aside the comfort to +the slaves, it will be very speedily repaid by their better health +and capacity for labour. When away in the galley with Sir Louis +Ricord, I used to feel the greatest pity for the unfortunate wretches +when at daybreak, in their drenched clothes, and shivering with +cold and wet, they rose to commence their work. I then took a vow +that if ever I should come to command a galley I would provide an +awning for the slaves." + +Two or three of the knights standing by expressed their warm approval of +what Gervaise said. There was, in those days, but little of that +sentiment of humanity that is now prevalent, and slaves were everywhere +regarded as mere beasts of burden rather than as human beings. +When, however, they had the question put to them, as Gervaise had +done, they were ready to give a hearty agreement, although it was +the utilitarian rather than the humanitarian side of the question +that recommended it to them. After three hours' rest the journey +was renewed, and just at nightfall the galley anchored off an islet +lying to the north of Carpathos. + +While the servants were laying the tables along the poop for +the evening meal, Gervaise went down to see that his orders were +carried out regarding the food for the slaves. They were already +eating their bread and meat with an air of satisfaction that showed +how warmly they appreciated the unusual indulgence, while there +were few indeed who did not hold up their drinking horns as a servant +passed along between the benches with a skin of wine. Gervaise +spoke to many of them. + +"Ah, my lord," one of them said, "if we were always treated like +this, slavery would be endurable. For ten years have I rowed in +Christian galleys, but never before has an awning been spread to +keep off the sun or the dew. We shall not forget your kindness, +my lord, and will row our hardest right cheerfully when you call +upon us for an effort." + +There was a murmur of assent from the galley slaves around. + +"May Allah be merciful to you, as you are merciful to us!" another +slave exclaimed. "The blessing of those whom you regard as infidels +can at least do you no harm." + +"On the contrary, it can do me good," Gervaise said. "The God you +Moslems and we Christians worship is, I believe, the same, though +under another name." + +Gervaise had, indeed, during his long conversations with Suleiman +Ali, often discussed with him the matter of his faith, and had +come, in consequence, to regard it in a very different light to that +in which it was viewed by his companions. There was faith in one +God at the bottom of both Mohammedanism and Christianity. The +Mohammedans held in reverence the lawgivers and prophets of the Old +Testament, and even regarded Christ Himself as being a prophet. +They had been grievously led away by Mahomet, whom Gervaise regarded +as a false teacher; but as he had seen innumerable instances of the +fidelity of the Moslems to their creed, and the punctuality and +devotion with which the slaves said their daily prayers, exposed +though they were to the scorn and even the anger of their taskmasters, +he had quite lost, during his nine months of constant association +with Suleiman Ali, the bigoted hatred of Mohammedanism so universal +at the time. He regarded Moslems as foes to be opposed to the death; +but he felt that it was unfair to hate them for being hostile to +Christianity, of which they knew nothing. + + + +CHAPTER XIII THE FIRST PRIZES + + +After leaving the slaves, Gervaise joined his companions on the +poop. They were engaged in an animated discussion as to whether it +was advisable to grant indulgences to slaves. The majority approved +of the steps Gervaise had taken, but some asserted that these +concessions would only lead them to look for more, and would create +discontent among the crews of other galleys not so favoured. + +"Well, comrades," said Gervaise, "I think that so far I am better +qualified than any of you to give an opinion; but it may be that +it will fall to the lot of some of you to be a slave in Turkish +hands. In that case, I can affirm with certainty, that you will +keenly appreciate any alleviation, however small, of your lot. You +must remember that the one feeling of the slave is dull despair. +Death is the only relief he has to look forward to. Do you think +that a man so feeling can do his best, either at an oar or at any +other kind of work? I am sure it would not be so in my case. But +if you brighten his life a little, and show him that he is not +regarded as merely a brute beast, and that you take some interest +in him, he will work in a different spirit. Even viewed from +a merely monetary point of view it must pay well to render him +as content as possible with his lot. You know how great is the +mortality among the slaves -- how they pine away and die from no +material malady that can be detected, but simply from hopelessness +and weariness of life, aided, undoubtedly, in the case of the +galley slaves, by sleeping in the damp night air after an exposure +all day to the full heat of the sun. This brings an answer to your +second objection. Undoubtedly it might cause discontent among +the slaves of other galleys when they hear that others are treated +better than themselves. But I hope that if, on our return, we bring +back all our slaves in good condition and health, the contrast +between their appearance and that of the slaves in most other +galleys will be so marked that the admiral may consider it would +be well to order awnings to be fixed to all the vessels of the Order, +and even to grant to all slaves, when away on voyages, the little +indulgences I have given them here. The expense would be very +trifling, and it would certainly add a great deal to the average +life of a slave, and would render him capable of better work. +There is another advantage. If the Turks learn that their countrymen +in our hands are treated with a certain amount of kindness and +consideration, it might lead them to act similarly to those of +our Order who may be unfortunate enough to fall into their hands." + +"There is a great deal in what you say, Sir Gervaise," one of the +knights, who had before taken the opposite point of view, said. +"There is no reason why our galley should not be a model one, +and though, like enough, the seniors will laugh at our making +innovations, D'Aubusson is a reformer, and will certainly support +anything that he sees to be beneficial, from whatever quarter it +comes." + +Supper was now served, and the young knights were well pleased with +the entertainment provided for them. It was the principal meal of +the day. Their fast was broken by a glass of wine, a manchet of +bread, and fruit soon after rising. At eleven o'clock they sat +down to a more substantial meal; but in that climate the heat was +at that hour considerable, and as there were duties to be performed, +there was no sitting long at table. At supper the day's work was +over, their appetite was sharpened by the cool evening breeze, and +the meal was hearty and prolonged. After it was concluded, several +of the knights brought up from below viols and other instruments +of music; for the ability to accompany the voice with such an +instrument was considered an essential part of the education of +a knight. + +For some hours the songs and romances, so popular at the time, +were sung in the various languages represented on board; then the +knights, one by one, went down to their sleeping places, until only +the seven knights of the langue of Auvergne, who were to watch the +first night, remained on deck. Five of these wrapped themselves +in their mantles and lay down on the benches. One of the others +descended to the waist, walked along the plank between the lines +of sleeping slaves, and took up his place in the bow, while the +other paced up and down the poop, the fall of his footsteps being +the only sound to break the silence that reigned throughout the +ship. + +In the morning, as soon as the knights had all taken a plunge in +the sea, the oars were got out, and the galley proceeded on her +way. Passing through the islands and skirting the southern shore of +Greece, she continued her course west. Malta was sighted, but they +did not put in there. Pantellaria was passed, and in a fortnight +after leaving Rhodes, Cape Bon, at the entrance to the bay of +Tunis, was sighted. Until Greece was left behind them, the nights +had generally been spent in small ports, where supplies of fresh +meat, fish, and fruit, were obtainable. So far no incident had +marked the voyage. The weather had continued fine, and they had +heard nothing, from ships they had fallen in with, of any Moslem +pirates having been seen. A few hours, however, after sighting +the coast of Africa, a dark object was seen ahead. + +"It is a ship of some sort," Ralph said; "but her masts have gone. +It may be that she is a merchantman that has been captured and +sacked by the Moorish pirates." + +Orders were given to the rowers to quicken their pace, and in little +over an hour they were alongside the hull. As soon as the vessels +were close enough for those on the poop of the galley to look +down on to the deck of the other craft, it was seen that Ralph's +suppositions were correct. Two bodies lay stretched upon it. One +was crushed under the fallen mast; the other lay huddled up in a +heap, a cannon ball having almost torn him asunder. The knights +leapt on to the deck as soon as the galley ran alongside. Gervaise +made first for the man lying beneath the mast; as he came up to +him, the sailor opened his eyes and murmured, "Water!" Gervaise +called out to one of the servants to bring water from the galley, +and, as soon as it came, poured some between the man's lips, and +the knights by their united efforts lifted the mast from across +his body. It was evident, however, that he had but a short time +to live, and the dew of death was on his face. After a few minutes +he rallied a little, and looked gratefully at his rescuers. + +"You have been attacked by pirates," Gervaise said. "Was there +one galley, or two?" + +"Three galleys," the man replied in a faint whisper. + +"Do you know where they were from?" + +"Tripoli." + +"How long ago?" + +"It was about three hours after sunrise when we saw them coming +up," the man said, his voice gaining in strength, as some wine +they gave him took effect. "It was useless to fight, and I hauled +down our flag, but in spite of that one of the pirates fired a +broadside, and one of the shot hit the mast and brought it down, +and I was crushed under it. They boarded us, took off all the crew +as captives, and emptied the hold; I knew that I was done for, +and begged them to kill me; but they paid no attention. I know a +little of their language, and as I lay there I caught something of +what they were saying; they are bound for the Island of Sardinia, +where they have a rendezvous, and are to join a great gathering +of their consorts. I don't know the name of the place, but it is +on the east coast. More water!" + +Gervaise knelt to pour some water between his lips, when he gave +a sudden cry, a shudder ran through his frame, and he was dead. + +"Let us return on board, gentlemen," Gervaise said, rising to his +feet. "We can do nothing here." + +As soon as he regained the deck of the galley, he signed to Ralph +to follow him below. + +"Now, Ralph," he said, "this is one of those cases in which we have +to decide whether we ought or ought not to be prudent. From what +that poor fellow said, the pirates have about five hours' start +of us, and as they can have no idea that they are pursued, we can +doubtless overtake them before they reach Sardinia. The question +is, ought we to pursue them at once, or ought we to coast along +until we find Visconti's galley? Three of these Tripoli pirates, +crowded as they always are with men, would prove serious opponents, +yet we might engage them with a fair hope of victory. But we +may be seriously disabled in the fight, and should be, perhaps, +unable to carry the news to Genoa that there are many pirate ships +gathering on the coast of Sardinia to prey upon their commerce." + +"We might be days, or even weeks, before we light upon Visconti's +galley, Gervaise, and even when we found it, he might not consider +himself justified in leaving the coast where he is stationed. Besides, +while we are spending our time looking for him, the pirates will +be committing terrible depredations. It must be a big expedition, +under some notorious pirate, or they would never venture so far +north." + +"Then you think that I should be justified in pursuing them alone. +It is a fearful responsibility to have to decide." + +"I think so, Gervaise. There is no saying what misfortunes might +happen if we did not venture to do so." + +"Very well then, so be it. But before deciding finally on so grave +a matter, I will lay it before the company." + +"There is no doubt as to what their decision will be," Ralph said, +with a smile. + +"Perhaps not, Ralph; but as they will be called upon to risk their +lives in a dangerous enterprise, it is as well that they should +have a say in the matter." + +When they returned on to the poop, there was an expression of +eagerness and excitement on the faces of the young knights which +showed how anxiously they had been awaiting the result of the +conference below. Gervaise stepped on to a bench, and motioned to +them to close up round him. + +"Comrades," he said, "although the responsibility of whatever +course may be taken must rest upon my shoulders, yet I think it +but right that, as a general before a battle often calls a council +of war to assist him with its advice, so I should lay before you +the two courses open to us, and ask your opinion upon them. Sir +Ralph Harcourt and I are of one mind in the matter, but as the +decision is a grave one we should be loath to act upon it without +your concurrence." + +He then repeated the alternatives as he had laid them before Ralph. +"Now," he went on, "as you see, there is grave danger, and much +risk in the one course; but if successful its advantages are obvious. +On the other hand, the second plan is more sure, more prudent, and +more in accordance with the instructions I have received. I ask +you to let me know frankly your opinion on the subject. If your +view agrees with ours, although it will not relieve me from the +responsibility of deciding, it will at least, in the event of things +turning out badly, be a satisfaction to know that the course had +your approval, and that it was your desire, as well as ours, that +we should undertake it. First, then, let all who are in favour of +following the pirates go to the starboard side of the deck, while +those who are in favour of joining Visconti, and laying this serious +matter we have discovered before him, move to the larboard side." + +There was a rush of the knights to the right, and not one moved to +the other side. + +"Your decision is the same as ours," Gervaise said. "To the north, +then! If there is great peril in the adventure, there is also +great honour to be gained." + +The knights gave a shout of satisfaction at finding that their +choice was also that of the officers. + +"Lay her head to the north," Gervaise said to the pilot. Then he +went to the end of the poop, and ordered the slaves to row on. "Row +a long, steady stroke, such as you can maintain for many hours. We +have a long journey before us, and there is need for haste. Now +is the time for willing work." + +The oars dipped into the water, and the galley was soon moving +along at a much faster pace than that at which they had performed +the journey from Rhodes. The slaves had not, from their benches, +been able to see what had passed on board the dismantled vessel, +but from the order and the change of course, they had no doubt +that the knights had obtained some clue to the direction taken by +the corsairs who had captured and sacked the ship. + +"There is but little wind," Gervaise said to Ralph, "and their +sails will be of slight use to them; therefore we shall go fully +three feet to their two. It is quite possible that we may not catch +sight of them, for we cannot tell exactly the course they will +take. We shall steer for Cape Carbonara, which is some hundred +and thirty miles distant. If we do not see them by the time we +get there, we shall be sure that we have passed them on the way, +unless, indeed, a strong wind should spring up from the south. +However, I hope that we shall catch sight of them before that, +for we shall be able from our lookout to discover their masts and +sails some eight or ten miles away, while they will not be able +to see us until we are within half that distance. They cannot be +more than twenty miles away now, for the light breeze will aid them +but little, and as they will see no occasion for haste, they will +not be rowing at their full power, with so long a passage before +them." + +Already, indeed, one of the knights had perched himself on the seat +at the top of a low mast some fifteen feet above the poop, that +served as a lookout. + +"You can see nothing yet, I suppose, Cairoli?" + +"No; the line of sea is clear all round." + +It was indeed some four hours before the knight on the lookout cried +that he could make out three dark specks on the horizon. Gervaise +at once ascended to the lookout, by the ladder that was fixed +against the post. + +"They are making to the left of the course we are taking. Turn +her head rather more to the west. That will do. They are directly +ahead now." He then came down to the deck again. "I would that we +had seven or eight more hours of daylight, Ralph, instead of but +three at the outside. However, as we know the course they are +taking, we are not likely to miss them, for as we shall not be near +enough for them to make us out before the sun sets, there will +be no chance of their changing it. Do you think they will row all +night?" + +"I should not think so. If the land were nearer they might keep on +until they make it, but as they have had no wind since daylight, +they will lie on their oars until morning. You see, at sunset +they will still be some eighty miles from Cape Carbonara, and the +slaves could not possibly row that distance without rest; so that +if we keep on we may take them by surprise." + +"That is what I have been thinking, Ralph, but it would be well +not to attack them until nearly daybreak. We should capture one +galley easily enough; but the others, being ignorant of our force, +might make off in different directions, and we might lose both of +them. If, on the other hand, we could fall upon them a short time +before daylight, we should be able to keep them in sight, and, +even if they separated, they would soon come together and continue +their course, or, as I hope, when they see that we are alone, bear +up and fight us. I think that our best plan will be to row on +until it is dark, then give the slaves six hours' rest, and after +that go on quietly. If we can make them out, which we may do if +they have lights on board, we will stop, and wait until it is the +hour to attack them. If we miss them, we will row on to Sardinia +and lie up, as we proposed, until they come along." + +"I think that will be a very good plan, Gervaise." + +Before sunset the three pirate ships could be clearly made out from +the deck, but the pilot judged them to be fully ten miles away. +Half an hour later the slaves were told to cease rowing. Gervaise +had ordered the cooks to prepare them a good meal, and this was +at once served, together with a full ration of wine. As soon as +they had consumed it, they were told to lie down and sleep, as at +one o'clock the galley would be again under way. + +The knights' supper was served below, as lights on the poop might +be made out, should a lookout be placed by the corsairs in their +tops. + +"We had better follow the example of the galley slaves," Gervaise +said, rising as soon as the meal was finished, "and, with the +exception of Spain, who is on watch, turn in to sleep till we are +off again. All of you will, of course, don your armour on rising." + +At the appointed hour the galley was again under way. There was +not a breath of air, and before starting, pieces of cloth were +wrapped round the oars at the rowlocks to deaden the sound, which +might otherwise have been heard at a considerable distance on so +still a night. After an hour and a half's rowing, the knight on +the lookout said that he could see a light some distance ahead. +The pilot, an experienced old sailor, joined him, and speedily +descended to the poop again. + +"It is a ship's light," he said. "I should say that it was a lantern +on board the ship of the captain of the expedition, and is shown +to enable the other two to keep near him. I cannot say how far it +is away, for I do not know at what height it hangs above the water; +but I should imagine, from the feebleness of the light, that it +must be some two miles distant." + +As soon as the light had been noticed, the slaves had been ordered +to cease rowing, and they were now told that they would not be +required again for fully two hours. When the first gleam of dawn +appeared in the east they were called to their work again. The +lantern was still burning, and, in a quarter of an hour, the knights +on the poop were able, in the broadening light, to make out three +shadowy forms some two miles ahead of them. They decreased this +distance by more than half before they could discern any signs of +life or motion on board. Then a sudden stir was apparent; they +could hear shouts from one vessel to another, oars were thrust +out, and an effort made to get the heads of the ships in the same +direction, so as to catch the light breeze that had just sprung +up. + +The moment he saw that the galley was discovered, Gervaise shouted +down to the slaves to row their hardest, and told the pilot +to steer for the ship farthest to the east. She was some four or +five hundred yards from her nearest consort, and the same distance +separated that vessel from the third craft. + +"We shall have time to carry her, Ralph, before the others come +to her assistance, and they will only arrive one at a time. If we +were to lie alongside the middle craft, which is probably that of +the chief, as it is she that has the light burning, we might have +the other two upon us before we had done with her, for she is +evidently the largest, and most likely the strongest handed, of +them." + +The leader of the pirates evidently saw that there was no chance +of evading the fight. A flag was run up to the masthead of his +ship, and the three vessels began to endeavour to turn, so as to +meet the galley. The operation, however, took some time. In the +confusion, orders were misunderstood, and instead of all the slaves +on one side rowing whilst those on the other side backed, all order +was lost, and long before the craft for which the galley was making +had got round, the latter was upon her. + +"Shall I ram her, Sir Gervaise?" the pilot asked. + +"No; we might damage ourselves; besides, I do not want to sink her. +Sheer away the oars on one side!" + +The galley carried eight guns -- three on each side of the poop, +and two forward; and these had been loaded with small pieces of +iron. A few shots had been fired by the pirates, but, owing to the +confusion that prevailed on board, the guns were discharged so +hurriedly that the shot either flew overhead or passed wide of +the galley. Excited as the young knights were, and eager for the +fray, a general laugh broke out as the galley swept along by the +pirate ship, breaking many of her oars, and hurling all the slaves +who manned them backwards off their benches. A moment later the +guns poured their iron contents among the pirates who clustered +thickly on the forecastle and poop, and as the vessels grated +together the knights sprang on board the corsair. + +The members of the English langue had each been provided with short +pieces of rope, and before joining their companions in the fray +they lashed the vessels together, side by side. The fight was a +very short one. France and Auvergne, led by Ralph Harcourt, boarded +at the bow, the other five langues at the poop; and so impetuous +was their onset that the pirates, who had still scarce recovered +from their surprise at being hastily aroused from sleep to repel +the attack of the foe who had so suddenly sprung out from the +darkness upon them, offered but a feeble resistance. Many threw +themselves overboard, and swam to the ship nearest to them; others +were cut down; and the rest flung away their arms, and cried for +quarter. + +All who did so were, without the loss of a minute's time, thrown +down into the hold of their ship, and the hatches secured over them. +It had before been arranged that Ralph should take the command of +the corsair, having with him France, Auvergne, and Germany. As +soon, therefore, as the captives were fastened below, Gervaise +called the knights of the other four langues back to the deck of +the galley. The lashings were cast off, she was pushed from the +side of the prize, and the oars were got out. There was no time +to be lost, for the largest of the three pirate ships, which had, +directly it was seen that her consort was captured, poured two +heavy broadsides into the prize, was now approaching -- rowing but +slowly, however, for the third vessel to come up. + +She was but a hundred yards away when the galley swept round the +bow of the prize and advanced to meet her. As she did so, Ralph +discharged the eight guns of the prize, which he had at once +reloaded, into the bow of the corsair, the shot raking the crowded +deck from end to end. When but a few yards distant, the two bow +guns of the galley poured in a shower of missiles, and a moment +later she ran alongside the pirate, the poop guns, as before, +preparing the way for the boarders. But no sooner had they leapt +on deck than they were met by the pirates, headed by their captain. + +Gervaise had specially charged the knights not to allow themselves +to be carried away by their ardour. "We are sure to be greatly +outnumbered, and, when we first spring on board, we must cut our +way across the deck, and then form ourselves in a double or treble +line across it, and, so fighting, gradually force them before us." + +This, in spite of the efforts of the pirates, was accomplished, +and, once formed, the corsairs strove in vain to break through +the wall of steel. For a time, however, no forward movement could +be made, so furious were the attacks upon them, led by the pirate +chief. Several times breaches were made in the front rank, but +the knights behind each time bore back the assault, and restored +the line. The knights had won their way half along the poop when +a yell of exultation rose from the corsairs as the third of their +vessels rowed up on the other side of the galley, and her crew +sprang on board it. Gervaise called the knights of the second line +from their places, and ranged them along the bulwark, to prevent +the Moors from boarding from the poop of the galley. + +Then for a moment he looked round. The prize was creeping up, and +was a length or two away, coming up alongside. Its approach was +also noticed by the pirates, who, with wild shouts, flung themselves +upon their opponents. Gervaise sprang forward to take the place +of a young Italian knight, who staggered back, with his helmet +cleft by a heavy blow from the keen yataghan of the pirate captain. +The corsair, shouting his war cry of "Allah!" sprang with the bound +of a wild cat upon Gervaise; his weapon descended on his uplifted +guard, and shore right through the stout blade. With a shout of +triumph, the corsair raised his arm to repeat the blow; but Gervaise +in turn sprang forward, and struck with all his force with the +pommel of his sword on the forehead of his opponent. The latter +fell as if shot, his weapon dropping from his hand beside him. + +Dismayed at the fall of their leader, his followers recoiled for +a moment. Another tall pirate sprang forward to take his place, +and, shouting to them to follow, was about to throw himself upon +Gervaise, when a gun crashed out close alongside. A storm of iron +swept away the front line of Moors, and the shout of "St. John!" +"St. John!" rose above the din. It was one of the bow guns of the +prize, and as she swept along gun after gun poured its contents +among the pirates. + +"Do you clear the galley, Ralph. We can manage here now," Gervaise +said, as Ralph leapt on board. The latter, followed by his party +of knights, rushed across the poop, and sprang on to the galley +among the pirates, who had been striving in vain to break through +the line of defenders. Gervaise called to his party to follow him, +and, taking the offensive, fell upon the remnant of the corsairs +who still held the forward end of the poop. + +The discharge of the cannon at such close quarters had wrought +terrible havoc among them, and the pirates, with but slight +resistance, turned, and either ran down the ladder or leapt into +the water. The knights followed them forward among the benches +of the rowers, who cheered loudly in many tongues as they passed +them. At the forecastle the Moors made another stand, but the +knights forced their way up, and in two minutes all was over. + +"Now to the aid of our comrades!" Gervaise shouted, as the last of +the corsairs was struck down. + +Ralph's party had indeed cleared the poop of the galley, but they +in vain endeavoured to climb up on to that of the third pirate +ship, whose superior height gave a great advantage to its defenders. +Gervaise leapt down on to the bow of the galley, followed by the +knights, and then ran aft until he could climb into the waist of +the pirate. So intent were the corsairs upon defending the poop +that they did not see what was going on elsewhere, and Gervaise +had obtained a fair footing before he was noticed. Then a number of +men ran down and attacked his party. But it was too late, for the +whole of the knights had, by this time, leaped on board. Their +assailants were forced back, and, pressing close upon them, the +knights gained the poop before the main body of the pirates were +aware of their coming. + +Warned by the shouts and shrieks of their comrades that they had +been taken in the rear, the Moslems who were defending the side +of the poop wavered for a moment. Ralph took advantage of their +hesitation, and sprang on board, his companions pouring in after +him. There was a stern and desperate fight. The Moslems fought +with the fury of despair, disdaining to ask or accept quarter. A +few leapt overboard, preferring death by drowning to that by the +swords of the Christians; but the great majority died fighting to +the last. A shout of triumph rose from the knights as the last of +the Moslems fell. + +The first impulse of all of them was to take off their helmets in +order to breathe the fresh air, and for a while they all stood +panting from their exertions. + +"Nobly and gallantly done, comrades!" Gervaise exclaimed. "This is +indeed a victory of which we have all a right to be proud. Now, +the first thing is to free the slaves of their shackles; there +are many white faces among them. Let our langue look after the +wounded, while the released captives clear the decks of the bodies +of the fallen pirates." + +It took an hour's hard work to knock off the chains of the slaves. +The greater portion of them were Christians -- Greeks, Italians, +Spaniards, and French, who had been captured in various raids by +the corsairs; and among them were the crew of the ship that had +been overhauled by the galley on the previous day. Besides these, +there were a few Moslems who had been sentenced to labour in the +galleys for various crimes. + +Among the Christians, the joy at their liberation was intense. Some +laughed, some cried, others were too overcome to speak coherently. +Among the rest were found, to the intense pleasure of their rescuers, +three knights of the Order who had for years been missing. They +had been taken prisoners on an island at which the galley to which +they belonged had touched. Many of the knights had landed, and three +of them, all belonging to the langue of Italy, had wandered away +from the rest, and had not returned. A search had been made for +them, and it was discovered that a struggle had taken place. As there +were no marks of blood, it was supposed that they were suddenly +pounced upon by a party of hidden marauders, who had been watching +them from some hiding place, and had thrown themselves upon the +knights before they had had time to draw their swords. Following +the trail by bushes broken down, and plants crushed under foot, +it was found to lead to a creek on the other side of the island. +Here there were signs that a craft had been anchored, as there +were the ashes of fires, fragments of food, and other matters, +scattered about on the shore. Hours had passed before the knights +had been missed, and therefore the craft in which they had been +carried off was long out of sight. Letters were written by the +grand master to the Pasha of Syria, to the Emperor of Egypt, and +to the Bey of Tunis, offering to ransom the knights, but all replied +that they were unaware of any such captives having been landed. + +An attempt had then been made to ascertain whether they had been +carried to Tripoli; but the bey had little authority over the +various tribesmen along the coast, and only replied that no such +captives had been sold in the city. Thus all hope of ransoming +them had died away, and their names were inscribed in the list of +those who had fallen into the hands of the infidels, but of whose +subsequent fate no clue could be obtained. + +All were greatly emaciated, and their faces showed signs of the +sufferings they had undergone. The young knights were all familiar +with their names, but personally none had known them, for they had +been carried off two or three months before Gervaise and Ralph +Harcourt had arrived at Rhodes. + +All three had struggled desperately to break their chains while the +fight was going on, and had, as soon as the contest was decided, +risen to their feet and shouted the battle cry of the Order; then, +overcome by their emotions, they sank down upon their benches, +and remained as if in a stupor until the knights, who had hurried +first to them, struck off their fetters. Then the three men grasped +each other's hands, while tears streamed down their cheeks. + +"It is no dream, comrades," one of them said, in a hoarse voice. +"We are free again. Let us first return thanks to God for our +release, and then we can thank these our brothers." + +The three knights knelt at the benches where they had toiled and +suffered, and hid their faces in their hands. No sounds came from +their lips, but their stifled sobs and the heaving of their naked +shoulders, seamed and scarred by the strokes of their taskmasters' +whips, told the young knights, who stood unhelmeted and silent +around, how deep was their emotion. Then they rose. + +"I am Fabricius Caretto," one said; "this is Giacomo Da Vinci; this +Pietro Forzi: all knight commanders of the Order, and now for six +years prisoners in the hands of these corsairs. Assuredly no one +would know us, so changed are we." He looked round inquiringly +for a familiar face. "Your commander must surely be a comrade of +ours?" + +"We know all your names," Gervaise said, coming forward, "though +none of us reached the convent until after your capture. I have +the honour to command this galley. My name is Gervaise Tresham, +and I have for my lieutenant Sir Ralph Harcourt. All of us, glad +as we are at the capture we have effected of these three corsairs, +are still more pleased that we should have been the means of rescuing +three noble knights of our Order from captivity. Now, I pray you +first of all to accompany me on board the galley, where we will do +all we can to make you forget the sufferings you have gone through. +After you have bathed, and reclad yourselves, I will present to +you the knights my comrades, amongst whom are seven of your own +langue. Three of these I will tell off to see to your comfort, for, +as you will understand, I have my hands full indeed at present." + +"First, before all things, Sir Knight, let me express to you all +our deep gratitude and our admiration of the gallant deed that you +have accomplished in thus, single handed, capturing three vessels +belonging to the fiercest and most dreaded of the corsairs of +Tripoli. God bless you all, sirs" -- and his voice broke again -- +"for the deed you have done, and for bringing us out of this living +hell!" + +Gervaise called to three of the Italian knights, and, followed by +them and the released captives, led the way to the galley. Here +he left them in charge of their countrymen. "Give them each a +draught of old Cyprus, and something to eat," he said aside to one +of the knights; "they sorely need refreshment before aught else, +for, as you see, they are well nigh dazed with this unlooked for +change. I will put out clothes enough for one of them; the others +you must supply for the present from your stores. Now I must be +off." + +There was indeed much to be done. Four of the knights were told +off to attend upon the most urgent cases among their own wounded. +Only two of their number had been killed outright, but there were +four serious cases among the wounded, while eight or ten others +had received wounds that required bandaging and attending to. As +fast as the slaves' fetters were struck off, food and wine were +given to them, together with such garments as could be found +at the moment. Then the bodies of the fallen pirates were thrown +overboard, while the wounded were attended to, and the released +Christians were divided equally between the three prizes. To +each of these the knights of one of the langues were told off, the +seniors being appointed to the command. There were in all some +ninety Christian captives on board the three ships. Thus each +vessel had a complement of seven knights and thirty Christians, and +to these were added ten of the thirty Moslems found at the oars, +and fifteen of the pirates to whom quarter had been given. + +It was past noon before all these arrangements had been made, and +during the time so occupied, the ships lay idly side by side, +drifting slowly before the wind, the sails having been lowered as +soon as the struggle was over. Up to this time, the knights had +been too busily engaged to think of food, but they were right glad +when they were summoned to a meal on board the galley. + +Gervaise found the three knights in the cabin, dressed in the usual +attire of the Order. They presented a very different appearance, +indeed, to that which they wore when he had first seen them. They +had bathed, and combed their matted hair, which was alone sufficient +to transform them, but the feeling that they were once more free +men, and knights of an honoured Order, had done even more to effect +the change; and although they looked thin and worn, the martial +bearing had come back naturally as they donned their knightly robes +and buckled on swords. + +"I am glad to see that you are better," Gervaise said, as he went +up to greet them. "Twenty years seem to have dropped off your +shoulders since this morning." + +"We are not the same men, Sir Gervaise. We were slaves, and are +now free. We were Christian dogs; now we are Christian knights. +We were subject to scoffs and blows; now, thank God, we have swords +to strike with, and though as yet our arms may not have regained +their full strength, we could at least bear a share in a fray. +Our comrades have been telling us somewhat of how this wonderful +thing has come about, and have been explaining what at first +filled us with surprise, that a galley should be manned solely by +young knights, of whom their commander is one of the youngest. We +can testify, at least, that had the grand master been himself in +command, and his crew composed of veteran knights, he could have +done no better." + +"We were fortunate in taking them so much by surprise that the first +of their ships fell into our hands before her consorts could come +to her assistance; and her guns did us good service in our struggle +with the others." + +"The matter was well arranged, as well as gallantly fought," one of +the other knights said. "Had you first fallen foul of the chief's +galley, it would have gone hard with you, for his crew were so +strong that you could scarce have overcome them before the other +two vessels came up to his assistance." + +"Now let us to our meal," Gervaise said. + +The three knights were placed at the head of the table by him, and +it was pleasant to see how they enjoyed their food. + +"I can scarce persuade myself that I am not dreaming," Caretto +said. "Sometimes, when lying at night, wet through with the damp +air, I have wondered to myself whether I could ever have lived +thus, and whether I should ever exchange my hard bread and water +for what seemed to me fabulous luxuries, though at the time one +had taken them as a matter of course. You cannot tell how strange +it feels to me to come back to the old life again." + +"You will soon be accustomed to it," Gervaise said, with a smile, +"and then you will look upon your captivity as a dream, just as +you then regarded your past life." + +"I suppose, Sir Gervaise," Pietro Forzi said, "that you will sail +direct for Rhodes with your prizes?" + +"No indeed," Gervaise replied. "At the same time that we learned, +from a dying man left on board the ship the pirates captured +yesterday, of the course they had taken, and were so enabled to +follow them, we also learned that they were on their way to join +a corsair fleet that was collecting at some point on the eastern +side of Sardinia, with the intention of sweeping the coast of Italy. +It was this, rather than the capture of these three vessels, that +induced us to disobey the general instructions we had been given +to cruise along the northern coast of Africa, and determined us +to push north to give warning along the coast from Naples to Genoa +of the danger that threatened, and, if possible, to enable Genoa +to fit out her galleys to encounter the corsairs. That duty has +still to be fulfilled, though I fear that Genoa will be able to do +little, for of late she has been engaged in a long civil struggle +between her great families, and has taken but a small part in +maritime affairs. However, we can at least warn her, as well as +Naples, Pisa, and other towns, and may possibly find some opportunity +for ourselves striking another blow against the pirates." + +"If so, certainly we shall be glad to accompany you, if you will +allow us to serve under you; for nothing would please us so much +as the opportunity of paying off a small share of the vengeance +we owe them. But of course, if you would rather, we will sail for +Rhodes in the prizes." + +"I am not thinking of sending them to Rhodes at present," Gervaise +said. "It seems to me that we may be able, in some way, to utilise +them to advantage. They have their sails, and rowers for the oars. +There will be, in each, besides seven knights of the Order, thirty +men who, like yourselves, must feel willing to strike a blow at +their late oppressors. I need hardly say that I shall be glad indeed +to have the company and aid of three such well known knights of +the Order, and would, could I do so, gladly resign my command into +your experienced hands. But this I cannot do, and, anticipating +that you would be willing to join us in this expedition, I have +been thinking how I could best utilise your aid. I have thought +that, if you would accept the positions, I would appoint one of +you to each of the prizes, to act, not as its commander, but as the +leader of the band of released captives. Most of them are sailors, +of course, and with them you could work the guns and give effective +aid to the little party of knights in any actual fight." + +The three knights all exclaimed that they would gladly accept the +posts he offered them. + +"The idea is a capital one, Sir Gervaise; and, as long as it does +not come to close fighting, the three ships should be able to +render efficient aid to your galley in any encounter. They will +be, at any rate, a match for their own number of pirate ships," +Caretto said. + +As soon as the meal concluded, the Moslem captives were questioned +one by one as to the rendezvous at which the pirate fleet was to +assemble; all, however, protested that the place was known only to +the three commanders, all of whom had fallen in the fight. + + + +CHAPTER XIV THE CORSAIR FLEET + + +An hour later all was ready for a start. The knights of the langues +of France, Germany, and Spain went on board their respective ships, +as did the three parties of released captives, with the knights +who were to command them, while the rowers took their seats on +the benches, shackled with the chains that had recently held the +Christians. The wind was from the south, and with sails and oars +the prizes were able to keep fairly abreast of the galley. With +a few short intervals of rest, the slaves continued their work all +night, until, shortly before daybreak, land was seen ahead, and +the pilot at once pronounced it to be Cape Carbonara. + +"A good landfall, Gervaise," Ralph said. "The pilot has done right +well. I suppose you mean to anchor when you get there?" + +"Certainly, Ralph. The slaves will have rowed nearly eighteen hours, +with only two hours' rest. They must have some hours, at least, +of sleep before we go on. As you and I have been up all night, we +will turn in also. We will send a boat ashore to try and find out +from the natives they may come across whether any vessels, bearing +the appearance of Moorish corsairs, have been seen passing up the +coast, and also to find out what bays and inlets there are where +they would be likely to anchor. Some of the Italian knights had +best go with the boat, for though I believe these people speak a +different dialect to those of the mainland, they would have more +chance of understanding them than any of the others." + +The sun had risen when the little fleet came to an anchor close to +the cape. A boat was at once prepared to go ashore, and Gervaise +begged Fabricius Caretto, the senior of the rescued Italian knights, +to endeavour to find out whether a swift sailing craft of some +kind could be hired. If so, he was to secure her on any terms, and +come off in her at once to the galley. + +Gervaise had already talked the matter over with Ralph, and they +agreed that a strongly manned craft of this kind would go faster +than any of those they had taken, and that, moreover, it would be +a pity to weaken their force by sending one of the prizes away. +Having seen them off, Gervaise retired to the cabin and threw +himself down for a short sleep, leaving the knights who had been +off watch during the night, to see that all went well. In two +hours he was roused. A native craft had come alongside with Sir +Fabricius Caretto. + +"I think she is just the craft for us," the knight said, as Gervaise +came on deck. "She belongs to a large fishing village just round +the point to the left. There were several boats there, but the +villagers all said that this was the speediest vessel anywhere +along the coast. She belongs to two brothers, who, with four men, +constitute her regular crew; but I have arranged for twelve others +to go in her, in order that they may row her along at a good pace +if the wind falls light." + +"Are your companions come off yet?" + +"No; but we can hoist a flag for their recall." + +"Do so. I shall be greatly obliged if you will undertake this mission +to the seaports. It needs one of name and rank to speak with the +nobles and officials authoritatively." + +"I will gladly do so, Sir Gervaise. Give me your instructions, and +you can rely upon my carrying them out." + +"I thank you greatly, Sir Fabricius, and shall be glad if you +will take with you any two of the knights you may select. I have +to write letters for you to deliver to the authorities at Naples, +Pisa, and Genoa. I shall write but briefly, and leave you to explain +matters more fully. I shall merely say that I have intelligence of +the arrival here of a fleet of Moorish corsairs, of whose strength +I am ignorant, but that assuredly their intention is to make a raid +on the commerce of the coast, and perhaps to land at unprotected +places. At Ostia, after warning the authorities to send orders +along the coast for the inhabitants to be on their guard, pray +them to carry word at once to Rome, and request his Holiness the +Pope to order some armed galleys to put to sea as soon as possible. +Beg them at Naples and Pisa to do the same thing. But of course +it is from Genoa that we must hope for the most assistance. + +"In each place you will, if possible, see the syndic himself, and +such of his council as can be got quickly together. The moment +you have done all you can at Genoa sail for the Island of Madalena, +which lies off the northeastern point of the island. There you +will either find us, or a boat with a message where to direct your +course. I think perhaps it will be best to omit Naples -- it will +save you fully a day, if not two, to do so. Pray them at Ostia to +send off news down the coast, or to request the papal authorities +to despatch mounted messengers. 'Tis likely that, at first, at +any rate, the corsairs will try the narrower waters to the north. +From here to Ostia is nigh two hundred miles, and if the wind is +brisk you may arrive there tomorrow afternoon, and start again at +night, arriving at Pisa before noon on the following day; while, +allowing for four or five hours to ascend the river there, you +may be at Genoa next morning. + +"Three hours should suffice to gather from the authorities what +force they can despatch, and as soon as you have learned this, +embark again and sail south. You may reach Madalena in two days. +Thus, at the earliest, it must be from six to seven days before +you can bring us the news there; if you meet with calms or foul +winds you may be well nigh double that time. If at Ostia you can +get a faster craft than this, hire it, or take a relay of fresh +rowers. I will furnish you with means when I give you the letters." + +In less than half an hour Gervaise was on deck again. The boat +had returned with the other Italian knights. An ample store of +provisions had been placed on board the Sperondra, both for the +crew and for the three knights, and, without a minute's delay, +these took their places on board, the great sails were hoisted, +and the craft glided rapidly away. + +"The villagers spoke truly as to her speed," Ralph said, as they +looked after her. "Even with this light wind, she is running fully +six miles an hour, and as, by the look of the sky, there will be +more of it soon, she will make the run to Ostia well within the +time we calculated." + +Gervaise now questioned the other Italian knights as to what +information they had gained. + +They said the peasants had told them that several strange craft, +using both oars and sails, had been noticed passing northwards, +and that so strong was the opinion that these were either Algerines +or Tunisians that, for the last three or four days, none of the +fishing craft had ventured to put to sea. They were able to tell +but little as to the bays along the coastline, which they described +as very rugged and precipitous. Five or six little streams ran, +they knew, down from the mountains. They thought the most likely +places for corsairs to rendezvous would be in a deep indentation +north of Cape Bellavista, or behind Cape Comino. If not at these +places, they might meet in the great bay at whose entrance stands +Tavolara Island, and that beyond, there were several deep inlets +on the northeastern coast of the Island. Gervaise had a consultation +with Ralph. + +"The first thing is to find out where these corsairs have their +meeting place, Ralph; and this must be done without their catching +sight of the galley or of the prizes, which some of them would be +sure to recognise." + +Ralph nodded. + +"It is a difficult question, Gervaise. Of course, if we had a +boat speedy enough to row away from the corsairs it would be easy +enough; but with wind and oars they go so fast that no boat could +escape them." + +"That is quite certain, Ralph; and therefore, if it is done by a +boat, it must be by one so small and insignificant that they would +pay but little attention to it if they caught sight of it. My idea +is that we should take our own little boat, which is a fast one, +paint it black, to give it the appearance of a fisherman's boat, +and hire a couple of good rowers from the village. This, with one +knight dressed as a fisherman, should go ahead of us, and explore +every inlet where ships could be sheltered. We would follow ten +miles behind. When we get near the places where the natives think +the fleet is likely to be, the boat must go on at night, while we +anchor. In that way they ought to be able to discover the corsairs, +while themselves unseen, and to gain some idea of their numbers and +the position in which they are anchored, and bring us back news." + +"Shall I go myself, Gervaise?" + +"I could not spare you, Ralph. The risk of capture does not seem +to me to be great, but there certainly is a risk, and I dare not +part with you. It had better be an Italian, because there will +doubtless be an opportunity of landing at villages and questioning +the inhabitants, therefore we will send Fosco. If there are some +eight or ten corsairs gathered in any of these bays the news is +sure to travel along the shore, and we may get some tidings in +that way. The first thing is to send off to the village again to +fetch two young fishermen; they must be active fellows, strong, +and possessed of some courage. I will ask da Vinci to go himself +and select them. While he is away we will paint our boat black, +and make ready for her to start at once; the sooner she is off +the better." + +The Italian knight at once undertook the mission, and started for +the shore. Fosco, who had been chosen principally because he was +light of frame, as well as very shrewd and intelligent, was then +called up, and his mission explained to him. He was delighted at +having been selected. Gervaise took him down to the cabin, and +they consulted the maps with which the galley was furnished. + +"You will row on to Muravera; it is some twenty miles from here. +You see, the village lies at the mouth of a river. As soon as +you arrive there, you will land and find out whether there is any +report of Moorish pirates having been seen along the coast. We +shall be there this evening, and you will come on board and report. +Next day you will get to Lunasei, which is about five miles on +this side of Cape Bellavista, and they will certainly know there +if the pirates are lying behind the cape. If they are so, you will +row back to meet us; if they are not, you will remain there until +we come up in the evening. Remember that, should you on either +day be seen and chased, and you find they are overtaking you, you +will make for the shore, land, and conceal yourselves. We shall +keep along near the coast, and as we pass you can come down to the +water's edge and signal to us to take you off. Now you had better +disguise yourself, so as to be in readiness to start as soon as +da Vinci comes off with the men. You will only need to take a small +stock of provisions, as each night you can replenish them here." + +An hour later da Vinci came off with two stalwart young fishermen. +The little boat had already been painted, and it was lowered at +once; Fosco stepped into it, and started. + +Two hours later the prizes got up sail, and, accompanied by the +galley, coasted quietly along the shore, arriving, late in the +afternoon, at Muravera. Fosco at once came on board. + +"There is no news here beyond that which we gained this morning, +Sir Gervaise," he said. "Strange ships have certainly been seen +sailing north, but they did not approach the coast." + +A similar report was given at Lunasei; there were certainly no +corsairs lying behind Cape Bellavista, or news would assuredly +have reached the village. At Orosei, next day, the report was the +same; there were no strange ships at Cape Comino. They had been +warned overnight that the coast beyond the cape was so precipitous, +that there would be no villages at which to make inquiries, and +arranged with Fosco that the ships should anchor north of the +cape, and that he should go on at once to inspect the next bay. If +he found ships there, he was to return at once; if not, he was, at +daybreak, to land at one of the villages in the bay, and to make +inquiries. + +No news was brought in by him during the night. + +"It is evident the pirates are not in the bay, Gervaise," Ralph +said, as they came on deck at daybreak. + +"Yes; and I am glad of it. It is a large bay, and if the Genoese +send half a dozen galleys, some of the pirates might still escape, +while the next bays are deeper and narrower, and it would be more +easy to entrap them all. I have all along thought it most probable +that they would rendezvous there. The maps show no villages for +many miles round, and they might lie there for weeks without so +much as a shepherd getting sight of them from the cliffs. Moreover, +it is the nearest point for cutting off ships coming down between +Corsica and the mainland, and they can, besides, snap up those +proceeding from the south to Marseilles, as these, for the most +part, pass between Sardinia and Corsica." + +At eight o'clock the boat was seen coming round the point. + +"Any news, Fosco?" Gervaise asked, as it approached the galley. + +"None, Sir Gervaise. They have heard nothing of pirates, nor seen +anything of them." + +Exclamations of disappointment broke from the knights. + +"That makes it all the more likely," Gervaise said, "that they are +lying in one of the inlets to the north. You see, lower down they +kept comparatively close to the shore, being careless who might +notice them; but as they approached their rendezvous, they would +be more careful, and might either pass along at night, or keep far +out. If they had not been anxious to conceal their near presence, +they would have been likely to put into this bay in search of plunder +and captives; for Tempe, one of the largest of the Sardinian towns, +lies but a short distance away, and there must be a considerable +amount of traffic." + +"There are four or five small craft lying there," Fosco, who had +by this time stepped on board, put in, "and a considerable number +of fishing boats. When I came upon the ships in the dark, I thought +at first that I had lighted on the pirates, but on letting the +boat drift closely by them I soon saw they were not corsair galleys." + +"Shall we get up anchor and go into the bay?" Ralph asked. + +"It were safer not to do so, Ralph. Possibly one of the craft lying +there might be presently captured by them, and they might learn +from her crew of the presence of a galley of the Order there. +Therefore I think it best to remain where we are till nightfall, +and then to proceed and anchor on the north side of the Island of +Madalena, if we can find a sheltered cove where we could not be +seen either from the land or by passing ships." + +During the day there was a good deal of discussion among the +knights as to whether the corsairs might not already have sailed +away. It was evident that if all their ships had arrived, there +would be no motive for delay. Three ships they knew would never +join them, and others might have been detained, from some cause +or another. There could be no doubt that the pirates had already +ample force for capturing as many merchant vessels as they might +come across. But it might be intended to carry out some more daring +project -- to sack and burn towns along the coast, carry off the +leading people for ransom, and fill the vessels with slaves -- +the attack being made simultaneously on several unprotected towns. +A vast amount of plunder could thus be reaped, together with +captives of even greater money value. Were this their plan, they +would doubtless delay until all those who had promised to join +in the expedition had arrived. The balance of opinion, then, was +that the corsairs were still in hiding. + +By daybreak next morning they were moored in a sheltered little bay +to the north of Madalena, the galley lying inside the prizes, so +as to be concealed as much as possible from view of any craft that +might happen to pass the mouth of the bay. Fosco started as soon +as darkness fell in the evening, and returned early in the morning. + +"They are there," he shouted, as he neared the galley, "hidden in +a deep inlet that runs into one of the narrow bays." + +"How many are there of them?" + +"Seventeen or eighteen, I could not say which. They are all moored +side by side." + +By this time Fosco's boat had reached the galley. + +"You have done well indeed," Gervaise said, as the young knight +ascended to the poop. "Now give us a full account of what you have +seen." + +"As you know, Sir Gervaise, the bay opposite this island splits +up into two, running a long way inland, like the fangs of a great +tooth. I had, of course, no difficulty in finding the entrance to +the bay itself, as it is but a short distance across the strait. I +steered first for the left hand shore, and kept close along under +the shadow of the cliffs, which, in many cases, rise almost straight +out from the water. We rowed very quietly, fearing to run against +a rock; for although it was light enough to see across the water, +and to make out any craft that might be anchored there, it was very +dark along the foot of the cliffs. There was no need for haste, as +I knew I had plenty of time to explore both arms of the bay, and +to be back here before day began to break. + +"We rowed up to the end of the inlet, and then, having assured +ourselves that it was empty, came down the other side, and turned +up the western arm. We had got some distance along when I fancied +I heard voices, and so let the boat drift along, only dipping the +oars in the water occasionally. I could make out no signs whatever +of the corsairs, when suddenly we came upon a break in the cliffs. +It was only some fifty yards across, and here a creek came in at +right angles to the shore. I could have given a shout of pleasure +as I looked up it, for there a score of lights were burning above +a dark mass, and we could hear the sound of talking and laughter. +It was but a glimpse I caught, for the men at once backed water, +and we were soon round the corner again. + +"Up till then the fishermen had been ready enough to go where I +wanted, but the sight of that clump of galleys regularly scared +them, and they wanted to row straight away; but of course I pointed +out to them that they had taken pay to do this thing, and that +they had to do it. They said that if caught they would be either +killed or made slaves of, and I could not contradict them, but said +that, in the first place, as I was ready to run the risk, there +was no reason why they shouldn't do so, and in the second, there +was no chance whatever of their being taken, as, if discovered, +we should get so long a start that we could either escape them +altogether or run the boat ashore at some point where the trees +came down to the water's edge, carry the boat up and hide it, and +then move up into the hills until the corsairs had gone. + +"We waited there three or four hours, looking round the point +occasionally. At the end of that time all was quiet. Two or three +of the lanterns still burned, but there was no sign of life or +movement on their decks. After waiting another half hour to ensure +the crews being asleep, we rowed quietly up the creek, keeping +within an oar's length of the rocks. There was not much to see; the +galleys lay two abreast, and as there was no space between them, +I supposed the whole were lashed together. There were eight of them +on the side we went along, but I think there were only seven on +the other side. As I thought it did not much matter whether there +were fifteen or sixteen, and as the men were in a state of horrible +fright, we turned and went back again, and I own I felt very glad +myself when we got round the point without an alarm being given. +We came quietly out, and it was fortunate we did so, for we had +not gone a quarter of a mile when we heard the sound of oars, and, +lying silently under the cliff, we saw two large galleys row past +us." + +"It is a strong force, Gervaise," Ralph said, as they paced up and +down the poop together. "Probably in each of those galleys are +eighty or a hundred men, in addition to the rowers. It is evident +that unless Genoa sends us help we shall not be able to interfere +with their plans." + +"I don't know, Ralph. I think we may injure them sorely, though we +might not be able to defeat them altogether. I want you tonight +to take one of the prizes, and row round to the bay we passed, +and there to buy three coasting vessels and six or eight fishing +boats. Get as much pitch, oil, and other combustibles, as you can +purchase in the villages on the shore. If you can engage a score of +fishermen to man them, all the better. My idea is that if Caretto +returns with news that the Genoese have no galleys ready for sea, +we must do what we can to injure these corsairs. If we smear +these craft you are going to fetch with pitch and oil, and fill +the holds with combustibles, and so turn them into fire ships, we +may at least do the pirates a tremendous lot of harm. When we get +to the mouth of this inlet, we could have the fire ships rowed in +by three or four men in each, they having a boat behind in which +to escape as soon as the boats are lighted. The sight of a dozen +craft coming down on them in flames would cause a terrific panic, +for, moored closely together, as they are, if one took fire there +would be little chance of the others escaping. Of course, we should +add to the confusion by opening a fire with all our guns, and could +hope to capture some at least of them as they tried to make their +way out." + +"It is a grand idea, Gervaise; a splendid idea! It would be a +terrific blow to the Moors, and would make the sea safe from them +for a long time." + +"When you buy the other things, Ralph, get a quantity of black +cloth -- it matters not how coarse, or of what material; and also +some white. As soon as you come back with it, all hands shall set +to work to make the stuff up into mantles of the Order, with the +white cross. We will put these on to the Christians in the prizes, +and the Moors will suppose that they are attacked by four of the +galleys of the Order. If you can get some more arms and some iron +headpieces, all the better." + +"I will do what I can, Gervaise; the arms will certainly be wanted, +for those we found on the decks were sufficient only to arm half +the Christians. As to the steel caps, that will not matter so much, +as in the darkness and confusion the sight of the mantles will be +quite enough to convince the corsairs that we are all knights of +the Order. By the way, Gervaise, we have not yet looked into the +holds of the prizes." + +"That is so, Ralph; we knew, of course, that as the ships had but +just started we should find nothing in them save the cargo of that +unfortunate craft they captured." + +On searching they found, as they had expected, that the cargo of +the captured ship had been of no great value. It consisted of +wine, olive oil, and grain. These were all useful, for the number of +mouths to be fed was considerable, and heavy inroads had already +been made on the stores of the galley. The rowers of the four +vessels were at once set to work to crush the grain between flat +stones brought from the shore, and an ample supply of coarse flour +for their use for at least a fortnight was obtained before sunset. + +As soon as darkness fell, Ralph and two of the French knights started +in one of the prizes. Late on the following afternoon a sail was +seen coming from the north, and before the sun set they were able +to make her out to be the craft in which Caretto had sailed. The +anchor of the galley was at once got up, and she rowed out to meet +the boat and conduct her into the little bay. It was almost dark +when they came within hailing distance. + +"What news do you bring, Sir Fabricius?" + +"Bad news, I regret to say. I do not think that Genoa will be able +to send out any galleys for at least a fortnight. There have +been civil dissensions, and fighting between rival factions, and in +consequence her ships are all dismantled and laid up. Crews will +have to be collected for them, repairs executed, and officers +chosen; a fortnight will be the earliest time in which they can +be here. Pisa has no war galleys, and unless the Pope sends some +out directly he gets the news, the corsairs will have it their own +way. Have you discovered them?" + +"Yes; they lie but a few miles from here. There were fifteen +or sixteen of them two days ago, and two others joined them that +night. You have lost no time indeed. We had scarce begun to expect +you, Sir Fabricius," he added, as the knight and his two comrades +stepped on board. + +"I have done my best," the knight said angrily. "But I am in a rage +with my ill success. All I have accomplished is that no merchant +vessels will put to sea at present. At Ostia they would only send +off a message to Rome, to ask for orders. At Pisa the authorities +at first treated my story as a fiction, and, I believe, took me for +an impostor; but on the news spreading, some knights came forward +and recognised me. Then we had a meeting of the council. All +talked, wrangled, and protested. They said that it was absurd to +suppose that they could, at a moment's notice, fit out ships +to cope with a fleet of corsairs; and their sole idea was to man +the forts, and to repel an attack. However, mounted messengers +were sent off at once, up and down the coast, to give warning to +the inhabitants of the towns to put themselves into a posture of +defence, and to the villagers to fly with their wives and families +into the interior as soon as they saw galleys of doubtful appearance +approaching. I was there but four hours, and then started for +Genoa." + +"There was almost a panic there too, as the members of the council +were mostly merchants, and were filled with dismay for the safety +of their ships and goods at sea. Of course, there was no thought that +the corsairs, however strong, would venture an attack upon Genoa +itself. I told them that you had captured three of the corsairs +with a single galley, and that if they could send you ten others you +would probably be able to make head against the pirates; but, as +I have told you, Genoa is at peace with all the world; her war galleys +are laid up, and most of them would need repair and recaulking +before they would be fit to send to sea. Although they maintained +that no more than a week should elapse before they would be ready +to sail I am right sure that it will be double that time before +they are fitted out. + +"Of course, in Genoa I was well known, though my family estates +lie near Mantua, and my acquaintances flocked round me and urged +me to stay until the galleys were ready for sea. This I would not +hear of, and, six hours after my arrival, started again. We made +the voyage to Corsica at a good speed, but since then we have had +the oars constantly out to help the sails. The men have well earned +their pay, I can assure you. It is enough to make one mad with +rage to think that these pirates will be able to harry the coast +of Italy at their pleasure; for there can be little chance that +they will abide quiet much longer at this rendezvous." + +"It is annoying, indeed," Gervaise agreed; and a murmur of +disappointment ran round the assembled knights. "However, we have +the consolation that we have done all we could, and I am sure that +we shall do so in the future." + +Gervaise had charged Ralph to say nothing about the object of +his mission, and the general supposition was that he had sailed +to endeavour to purchase some bullocks, as the supply of meat was +nearly exhausted. Ralph himself had let drop a few words to this +effect, and had indeed been charged by Gervaise to bring off a +few oxen if they could be obtained without loss of time. Gervaise +was on deck at midnight, and soon afterwards the beat of oars +was heard. It was a still night, and one of the knights on watch +remarked to him, "It seems to me, Sir Gervaise, that the sound +is a confused one, and that there must be several vessels rowing. +Shall I call up our companions? It may be that it is the pirate +fleet coming out." + +"You need not do that," Gervaise replied. "I am expecting Sir Ralph +to bring back with him some fishing boats, for which I think I +can find a use. We should have heard before this if the corsairs +had been putting out. Fosco is in his boat watching the mouth of +the inlet, and would have started with the news had there been +any stir on board their galleys." + +It was a quarter of an hour before a number of dark objects entered +the little bay. As soon as they did so, they ceased rowing, and +the splashes of the anchors as they fell into the water were heard. +Then came the sound of a boat's oars, and Ralph was soon alongside. + +"I see that you have succeeded, Ralph." + +"There is no fear of failing when one is ready to pay the full +value of what one wants to get. I have bought three coasters and +eight fishing boats, and have a sufficient store of pitch and oil, +with plenty of straw and faggots. There was no difficulty in +getting men to come with me. As soon as they heard that a fleet +of eighteen Moorish galleys was in the next bay, they were ready +enough to aid in any plan for their destruction, for they knew +well enough that some of them would be sure to make raids all along +the coast, sacking and burning, and carrying off men, women, and +children, as slaves. I said I only wanted two men for each craft, +but so many were willing to come that I have some thirty more than +the number I asked for, and we can divide these among us. They +are strong, active looking fellows." + +"We will keep them here then, Ralph. You see, there are one-and-twenty +of our knights in the three prizes, and as we lost two in the +capture, and four others are not fit to put on armour, we have but +six-and-twenty, and the addition will be very welcome. What are +they armed with?" + +"They have bows and arrows, and long pikes and axes." + +"Good. Have you managed to collect any more arms?" + +"Yes. The people are all charcoal burners and woodmen in winter, +and I was therefore able to get together some thirty or forty axes +and hatchets, which will be ample, with the arms we took from the +Moors, to equip the ninety Christians." + +"I think we can depend upon these for fighting, Ralph." + +"I don't think there is any doubt about that. A few of them +are pretty well worn out with labour and suffering, but all have +gained strength and spirits greatly in the past week, and you may +be sure that they will fight to the death rather than run the risk +of another turn in the galleys." + +"And have you got the stuff to make the mantles?" + +"Yes. There was plenty of the coarse black cloth which they wear +in summer -- in winter, of course, they are clad in sheepskins; +and I have sufficient white cotton cloth to make the crosses." + +"We have only one thing to wish for now, Ralph, and that is, that +the corsairs may not take it into their heads to sail tomorrow. +Fosco will bring me news at daybreak, and we will at once send +another boat off to watch the mouth of the bay when he leaves +it. If they sail, we cannot venture to attack them as long as they +keep together, the odds are far too heavy, and our only plan will +be to follow them at a distance, when we can just keep their upper +sails in sight, and then to attack any detachment that may separate +from the main body." + +"I hope it will not come to that, Gervaise. It would be hard +indeed, when you have devised such a splendid plan, and we have +got everything ready to carry it out, if they were to give us the +slip. Do the others know anything about it yet?" + +"No. I thought it better to keep silence till tomorrow. No doubt +some of the galley slaves understand enough of one or other of our +languages to gather what is on foot. Besides, their late captives +might, in their satisfaction at the thought of revenge, say +enough to them to let them know that an attack on their fleet was +intended, and one of them might, in some way, free himself from his +irons and swim ashore. We know there is a small fishing village +across the island, and there would be no difficulty in stealing a +boat and making off with the news. I do not say that the risk is +great; still, it were better not to throw away even a chance. The +knights have all turned in in a very gloomy mood, for Caretto has +returned with news that there is no hope of assistance from Genoa +for a fortnight, and it seemed, therefore, that all our pains had +been thrown away. And now we may as well turn in until daylight." + + + +CHAPTER XV A SPLENDID EXPLOIT + + +Gervaise was up again at dawn. He was amused at the wonder of the +knights, as they came up one by one, at the sight of the little +fleet anchored outside them. As soon as it was fairly daylight, he +sent off to the three prizes to request all the knights to come +on board the galley. When all were assembled there he said, "You +are all aware, comrades, that Sir Fabricius Caretto has brought +news that the galleys at Genoa are all laid up, and that it will +be a fortnight before they can put to sea. Long before that, the +corsairs will assuredly be ravaging all the villages and small +towns along the coast of Italy, unless we can prevent their doing +so. It would be simple madness to try to attack them at sea; of +that I feel sure you are all conscious. It would be only throwing +away our lives and our galley." + +There was a murmur of assent among the knights. They were ready +for any encounter in which there was a chance, however faint, of +success; but all saw that for a single galley to attack one of the +largest corsair fleets that had ever set out, would be nothing +short of insanity. Their leader's words, however, seemed to show +that he had some plan in his mind by which he hoped to strike a +blow at the enemy, and all listened eagerly for what was coming. + +"We have heard from our comrade Fosco that their ships lie moored +in two lines, side by side in a narrow inlet. He has returned +this morning with the news that they are still there. He thinks +that three or four more have arrived during the last two days, and +it is probable they are waiting for the three we captured to join +them. Tonight it is my intention to attack them, but not by rowing +in and boarding them, for that would be hopeless. Yesterday Sir +Ralph Harcourt went, as you are aware, to fetch provisions. But +this was a part only of the object of his trip. He has, as you +see, brought back eleven craft with him; these, I may tell you, +are laden with combustibles -- pitch, oil, straw, and faggots. +They will be rowed and towed to the inlet tonight, set on fire, +and launched against the pirates." + +An enthusiastic cheer broke from the knights. They saw at once +that, lying as the corsairs were, side by side, the destruction +of many of them was certain. + +"He has also brought fishermen," Gervaise went on, "two or three +of whom will go in each fire ship, having a boat towing behind, +in which they will escape as soon as the craft are alongside the +galleys. The galley and the three prizes will take their post +at the mouth of the inlet. The fire of our guns will add to the +confusion among the pirates, and we shall endeavour to fall upon +any galleys that may extricate themselves from the mass, and try +to make their escape. Sir Ralph has brought back materials for +making ninety mantles of the Order, for the Christians on board +the three prizes, and thirty fishermen to bring the crew of our +galley up to its full strength. The light of the flames will suffice +to show the pirates that, as they will believe, four vessels, manned +by knights of the Order, are barring the entrance. Many will, we +may calculate, jump overboard and swim ashore rather than face +us, and we shall be able, at any rate, to capture three or four of +their craft, for, as they come out, one by one, we can all close +round them; and with nearly fifty knights, ninety released captives, +burning for vengeance, and some fifty or sixty fishermen, for those +from the fire ships will, of course, join us -- we shall make short +work of them, and may even hope to entirely destroy their fleet." + +Again a joyous shout rose from the knights. This would indeed be +an exploit that all might be proud to share in, and, breaking the +ranks in which they had stood while Gervaise addressed them, they +crowded round him with exclamations of enthusiasm and devotion. + +"Now," he said, as soon as silence was a little restored, "the +knights of the langues on board the prizes will send at once to +the coaster on the left of the other two. Sir Ralph will go there +now, and supply each with materials for making the mantles for +the Christians; he has brought thread, and fish bone needles. You +will see that the stuff is cut up into suitable lengths, and handed +over to your crews, and that each man makes up his mantle. There +can be but little sewing required for these sleeveless gowns, +nor need it be carefully done. The great thing is that the white +crosses shall be conspicuous. As soon as you have set them to +work, you will examine the state of the arms, see how many more +are needed to complete the list, and then send off to Sir Ralph, +who will furnish as many as are required: the fishermen have brought +their own weapons. See that the slaves are all well fed today, +and, before evening, inspect well their fetters, so that you may +be free from all anxiety as to an attempt by them to escape during +the conflict. + +"The rest of you will go on board these native craft, and see that +the combustibles are fairly distributed among them, the wood and +straw soaked with pitch and oil, as also the sails and ropes, and +that the decks are well coated; this is a most important duty. Get +some torches made also, so that there shall be two on board each +craft; these are to be lighted the last thing before we get to the +point, and will be thrown down into the straw and faggots in the +hold, by the fishermen when they get close to the corsairs. All this +can be prepared before our morning meal, and when you assemble here +I hope to receive your reports that everything is in readiness. +One of the other coasters has some bullocks on board. Sir Ralph will +send one to each of the prizes, and one to us. They had better be +killed and cut up at once, in order that the crews may have two +good meals today of fresh meat. See that the galley slaves have +their share." + +No time was lost in carrying out the orders. Ralph, as soon as +the cloth, arms, and meat were distributed, went round in a boat +to see that the combustibles were properly laid for firing, and +everything done to insure that the flames should spread rapidly. +The Sards shared in the work, and rations and wine were distributed +to them; and when the knights sat down to their meal on board the +galley, they were able to report that everything was in perfect +readiness, and that the work of sewing the mantles was making good +progress. + +The day passed slowly to the young knights, all of whom were burning +with excitement at the thought of the coming fray. The released +Christians were no less exultant at the prospect of taking vengeance +for the sufferings they had so long endured, and the scene on +board all four ships was most animated. + +After talking it over with Ralph, Gervaise told off three more of +the knights to each of the prizes, so that there should be ten +on board each. This reduced the strength on board the galley to +seventeen; but as they would have the assistance of a strong band +of Sards they considered this to be ample, under the circumstances. +It was arranged that the galley, with one of the prizes, should +close with the first corsair that came out, and that the other two +prizes should attack the second. After capturing these, they were +to assist each other as circumstances might dictate. Gervaise +strongly impressed upon the knights in command of each prize that +they were not, single handed, to attack a corsair unless one of +their consorts was near, and free to give assistance. + +"We must run no risk of a reverse," he said. "We are certain of +destroying many of their vessels and of breaking up their fleet, +and it is far better that a few should escape than that we should +run the risk of losing ten of our number, to say nothing of those +we have rescued from captivity. In the excitement of the fight this +order must be strictly borne in mind. Our victory must be marred +by no misfortune brought on by headstrong rashness. The corsairs +are bound to be very strongly manned, and ten knights, even aided +by such assistance as they may get from the Christians, might find +themselves altogether over matched against a crowd of desperate +men." + +As soon as it was dusk the anchors were drawn up, and the fleet +got under way. They proceeded but slowly, for the wind was light, +and the fishing boats moved heavily through the water. There was, +however, no occasion for speed, for Gervaise did not wish to +commence the attack until past midnight. The guns had all been +loaded before starting, and a pile of ammunition was placed near +each. Presently the wind nearly died out, and the galley and prizes +then took the coasters and fishing craft in tow. It was nearly one +o'clock when they got within half a mile of the inlet. The tow +ropes were then thrown off, the fishermen got out sweeps, and +the galley led the way, the fire ships followed in a body, and the +three prizes brought up the rear. The oars had all been muffled, +and slowly they made their way, until Fosco, who was standing next +to Gervaise on board the galley, said that the point just ahead +marked the entrance to the inlet. They then stopped rowing until +the fire ships were all close up. + +These were, as had previously been arranged, in two lines. Five +fishing boats, each manned by four men and having its small boat +in tow behind it, formed the first line; the three coasters, each +with six men at the oars, and the three other fishing boats, formed +the second. The torches were now lighted. Ralph took his place in +the centre boat of the first line; Gervaise went on board one of +the coasters, and the order was given to the men to row. What wind +there was was favourable, blowing from the northwest, and therefore +right into the inlet. Scarcely had the first boats reached the +entrance when a shout was heard. + +"Row, men, your hardest now!" Ralph shouted; the Sards bent to their +oars, and the five boats advanced rapidly towards the corsairs. +As they did so, a babel of shouts and cries rose from the dark +mass of ships, which swelled into a tumult of alarm as on Ralph's +order, "Throw your torches into the straw!" a flash of flame leapt +up from each boat. Five more strokes, and they were alongside +the two outside ships. As they crashed heavily into them, the men +leapt from their seats and sprang over into the small boats, threw +off the painters, and rowed astern, opening on either hand to +allow the second line of fire ships to pass. These, by Gervaise's +directions, divided, and three bore along on either side of the +corsairs, and then ran in among them, throwing grapnels to fasten +the fire ships alongside. Then, as the flames sprang up from the +holds, the crews betook themselves to their boats, and rowed out +of the inlet. + +By the time they reached the galley and prizes, the eleven fire +ships were a mass of flame, which was spreading to the corsairs. +Lying packed together as these were, the confusion was terrible. +Numbers of men endeavoured to push off the fire ships, but it was +too late; others tried to extricate their galleys from the mass, +throwing off the hawsers, and striving with hand and oar to push +their vessels out of the line. As soon as the boats were alongside +the galley, the guns of the four vessels opened fire with grape +into the crowded ships, now lit up by the flames as clearly as +at noontide, while the battle cry of the Order sounded high above +the din. + +"Nothing can save the ships near this end of the line," Ralph said, +"but some of those behind may make their way out between the others +and the rocks. I can see that some of them there are lowering their +yards and sails to prevent their catching fire as they pass." + +The knights distributed among the guns worked them incessantly, +directing their fire chiefly against the outside ships, so as +to hinder the crews in their endeavours to arrest the progress of +the flames; but they were soon able to fire impartially into the +mass. As the heat of the flames drove the pirates back, scores of +men leapt overboard, and made for the shore. Presently, two or +three ships were seen making their way along the narrow line of +water on either side of the flaming group in front. As the first +advanced, the galley and one of the prizes rowed a short distance +forward to meet it. Its deck was crowded with men, among whom a +discharge of the cannon from both ships created terrible slaughter. + +A moment afterwards they closed with it, one on either side, and +the knights, the released captives, and the Sards, sprang down +on to its deck. The fight lasted but a minute. Appalled by the +disaster that had befallen them, by the terrible effect of the +broadsides, poured in at a few yards' distance, and by the sight of +so many of the dreaded warriors of the Cross, some of the corsairs +threw down their arms and flung themselves on the deck or into +the hold, crying for quarter; those who resisted fell either under +the swords of the knights, the vengeful axes of the late captives, +or the pikes of the Sards; but the great bulk, leaping from the +bow or stern, swam ashore. + +"Back to your ships!" Gervaise shouted, the moment resistance +ceased. "Leave her floating here; she will help to block the way." + +Six vessels alone managed to make their escape from the blazing mass +of ships, and all of these were captured almost as easily as the +first had been. As soon as it seemed that all the remainder were +involved in the flames, boats were lowered and sent on board the +prizes to take possession. Save for the wounded on the decks, they +were entirely deserted by their crews, as those who had run below, +as soon as they found that their captors had left the vessels, +dropped into the water, and made their way, either by swimming or +with the assistance of oars, to the shore. There remained only the +slaves, chained to their benches. A few of these had been killed +by the broadsides; but the guns had been aimed at the poops +and forecastles, where the corsairs were clustered together, +and consequently the number of galley slaves who had fallen was +comparatively small. + +In none of the galleys was the proportion of Christians anything +like so large as that in the three prizes first taken, the +greater portion being men of inland tribes who had been captured in +warfare, or malefactors who, instead of being executed, had been +sold to the corsairs. Nevertheless, in the six galleys some seventy +Christians were found, and at once freed. It was terrible to think +that in the galleys that had been destroyed a large number of +Christians must have perished in the flames, and Gervaise expressed +bitter regret that he had not considered that his attack by fire +ships must necessarily involve the loss of so many Christian lives. + +"It can't be helped," Ralph said, as Gervaise poured out his feelings +to him. "To very many of them death must have been welcome, and if +we had not attacked them as we did, and they had sailed for Italy, +hundreds, if not thousands, of Christians would have been killed, +and as many more carried away into captivity; so, you see, the +balance is all in favour of the course we adopted." + +Gervaise admitted this, but nevertheless his regret at the fate +of so many unfortunate captives quite overpowered for the time +his satisfaction at the complete success that had been achieved. +The victory had been almost a bloodless one on the part of the +assailants. A few of the knights had received wounds. Two among +the Christian crews had been killed, and four Sards; while two score +had received wounds more or less serious, as, unlike the knights, +they had no defensive armour. While waiting for daylight to appear, +all their wounds were dressed and bandaged by the knights. + +In the morning the captured galleys were towed out, and anchored +a short distance away, and then Gervaise rowed up to the head of +the inlet, followed by the other three ships. They found that eleven +of the corsairs had been burnt, and to their satisfaction, they +discovered four uninjured galleys lying there, deserted, save by +the slaves. + +Seeing the fate of their comrades who had first issued out, the +commanders had, instead of trying to escape, rowed quietly to +the head of the inlet, the movement being covered by the flame and +smoke, and had there landed, having laden themselves with stores +for their support on shore. This was a great satisfaction to the +knights, for not only did it swell the list of prizes, but it reduced +by over thirty the number of Christian slaves who had perished +in the flames. Taking the galleys in tow, they rowed out of the +inlet, whose banks were strewn with half charred timbers, oars, +and relics of the fight. + +As soon as they had anchored by the side of their first prizes, +a council was held on board the Santa Barbara. It was clearly +impossible to take thirteen prizes to Rhodes, for there would be +but three or four knights to each, and were they to fall in with +but one Moorish pirate, they might suffer great disaster, while, +should they meet with a storm, they would fare badly indeed, as they +could not depend upon the rescued Christians for the management +of the sails and oars in heavy weather. At the same time, all were +most anxious that the prizes should be carried to Rhodes. Never, +save as the result of some great battle, had such a fleet of +captured galleys been brought in, and the knights were prepared +to endure all dangers rather than part with one of them. Finally, +after much discussion, it was determined that they should make for +Genoa. From thence the rescued captives would be able to find their +way to their homes. The great majority were Italians and Spaniards; +the former could proceed by land or sea to their respective homes, +while the Spaniards would have no long time to wait before a vessel +of their own nationality entered the port, even if one were not +lying there when they arrived. Moreover, in any case it would be +necessary to despatch a vessel to Genoa, in order that it might +be known that the danger was averted, and that there was no longer +any necessity for getting the galleys ready for sea. + +The chief ostensible reason, however, for going to Genoa was that +there would be no difficulty in engaging as many sailors as might +be necessary to take the prizes to Rhodes. Underlying all the +arguments was another reason which Ralph laughingly stated. + +"It is all very well to bring forward one argument after another, +but not one of you has the courage to say what I am sure all of +you have at the bottom of your hearts. You know very well that you +want to go to Genoa to enjoy a triumph. The Rhodians are all very +well, but there are very many more fair faces at Genoa. Fie, Sir +Knights! Such a spirit is little in accordance with the vows of the +Order. Are we not bound to humility? And here you are all longing +for the plaudits of the nobles and ladies of Genoa!" + +Some of the young knights laughed, others coloured hotly. + +"They need not be ashamed of the feeling," Caretto said. "Is it not +the ardent desire of all true knights to do gallant deeds, and do +they not value above all things the guerdon of applause from the +fair eyes of ladies. Your comrades have performed the gallant +deeds, and well deserve the reward. Now, Sir Gervaise, if not for +this reason, at any rate for the others that have been brought +forward, I suppose we are all agreed that we sail for Genoa. For +our part we are heartily glad that such is your decision. We, and +the young knights of our langue, have many friends there, and in +their name I am sure I can promise you a reception as hearty and +sincere as that which we shall ourselves receive." + +It was settled that the rescued captives should be divided equally +among the thirteen prizes, and that three knights should go in +each. The Moorish captives were also divided equally among them, to +aid with the sails, and to row a few oars, in case of a dead calm +setting in. The commands were distributed according to seniority, +the three rescued Italian knights remaining on board the Santa +Barbara with Gervaise. + +The Sards were anxious to return to their villages, in order to +carry the news that several hundreds of Moorish pirates had landed. + +"We shall have great trouble with them," one of the young fishermen, +who spoke a little Italian, said to Gervaise. "There are always +a great number of swine, and herds of goats, up among the forests +on the hills. We must send up and drive in as many of these as +possible, and of course we shall send messengers to Tempe; but it +will need a very large force to combat these pirates, who will be +able to come down and plunder and destroy, and then retire to the +hills, whence it will be hard to dislodge them." + +"I am sorry indeed that such trouble should have been caused to +you," Gervaise replied; "but I am afraid that I can give you no +assistance." + +"We shall hunt them down in time," the Sard said confidently. + +"There are many villages scattered about Tempe, and what with us +fishermen, and the woodmen and charcoal burners, we shall soon get +a strong body together. Besides, we know the mountains, and they +do not." + +"I should say that you had best avoid a pitched battle with them, +but keep on harassing them by night and day, cutting off all who +separate themselves from the main body, until at last they are +completely worn out." + +"We shall deal with them, Sir Knight. We are all hunters, for there +are wild boars and stags in the forest, and wolves too, and wild +sheep on the higher mountains. Every man among us can use his +bow skillfully, and wield pike and hatchet. The hunt will not be +unprofitable, either, for we can get a good price for all we take +alive, to work in the mines." + +An hour later one of the galleys started with the Sards for their +villages in the bay of Tempe. After landing them, she was to rejoin +the rest of the fleet at their former anchorage at Madalena. By +nightfall all were gathered there, and the next morning they set +out for Genoa. The wind was light; but in their anxiety to return +home as soon as possible the released captives all volunteered +to take their former places on the benches, and the vessels were +kept going at a fair rate of speed. Two days' rowing took them to +Bastia, where their approach created unbounded excitement until the +banner of the Order was seen floating from the stern of the Santa +Barbara, while smaller flags, that had been hastily manufactured, +flew from the mastheads of the thirteen prizes. Even then the +inhabitants feared to put out, believing that the flags were but +a ruse, and numbers of them fled at once, with their families and +valuables, to the mountains. It was not until a boat was lowered, +and Ralph, accompanied by three or four other knights, rowed ashore, +that the panic was allayed. + +As soon as it was understood that the galley of the knights had +not only captured the thirteen corsairs, but had destroyed eleven +others, and had thus annihilated a fleet that was intended to prey +upon the commerce of Italy, and ravage the western coast, the +alarm was succeeded by the wildest enthusiasm. By the time Ralph +had obtained the fresh meat and stores he came ashore to purchase, +the greater part of the population were gathered on the shore, +and a flotilla of boats put out with him, filled with picturesquely +dressed men and women. Some carried flags, others green boughs, +while the ladies had bouquets and baskets of fruit. The galley was +the first attraction, and, mounting her sides, the ladies presented +their offerings of fruit, while the men cheered, and waved their +hats; many musicians came out in the boats, and these played on +bagpipes and three-reeded flutes a succession of airs peculiar to +the island. + +Gervaise received his visitors on the poop. These were at first +altogether incredulous when told that it was the lad before them +who had commanded the galley, had performed such a remarkable +feat, and had freed them from a terrible danger. The youth of the +knights of the Order no less surprised them, and had not Gervaise +assured them that it was altogether contrary to the rules of the +Order for a knight to allow himself to be embraced, many of the +ladies would have taken this form of showing their enthusiasm and +gratitude. The next morning the fleet started for Genoa. The +wind was much stronger than it had been on the previous day, and +it was therefore unnecessary for the oars to be put out, except, +indeed, on board the galley. There, at nightfall, the Christians +relieved the slaves for some hours at their benches, and the next +morning the circle of hills round Genoa, with the city nestling at +their feet on the water's edge, and climbing for some distance up +their slopes, was in view. Caretto at once suggested that it would +be well to signal to the fleet to lie to. + +"If we do not do so," he said, "they will assuredly think that +it is the corsair fleet advancing to attack and burn the vessels +in port, and you may be saluted as you approach by a shower of +cannonballs. If you will permit me, Sir Gervaise, I will go forward +in one of the prizes and explain matters, and will return here in +a short time." + +"Thank you, Sir Fabricius. As such mischance as you mention might +indeed very well occur, we will lower sail and lie here until you +return." + +While Caretto was away, the knights and crews breakfasted, and the +former put on their armour and gayest attire, in readiness for the +landing. Gervaise, although with much inward vexation, considered +it necessary to do the same. + +"I do wish," he said to Ralph, who was smiling at his rueful +face, "that you could for today take my place, and let me pass as +lieutenant." + +"I should not mind at all, Gervaise. But you must put up with the +disagreeables as well as the advantages of being commander, and +must submit to be honoured and feted here, as well as getting no +end of credit at Rhodes. You will have the satisfaction of well +deserving it, for I am sure the plan of attacking them with fire +ships would never have occurred to any one else, and if it had +not been for that, we should have had the mortification of seeing +them sail off without being able to move a finger to interfere with +them." + +"If one were fighting for fame and honour, all that would be true +enough; but members of an Order, whose sole object is to defend +Christendom from the Moslems, should strive only to do their duty, +and care nothing for such things as honour and glory." + +"Human nature is human nature, and I don't see any reason why +one should despise honour and glory when they come to one in the +course of duty. I fancy you will think so too, Gervaise, in course +of time. I am quite sure that among the fifty knights, there is +not one who does not feel well content that he has not only done +his duty to the Order, but has gained a share in the credit and +honour that will certainly be given to all who have taken a part +in so crushing a defeat of the corsairs. As for myself, I do not +for a moment pretend that I am not sensible of the fact that, as +second in command of the galley, my chances of obtaining promotion +in the Order are very greatly improved." + +It was nearly two hours before Caretto returned. + +"It was well indeed that I went in," he said to Gervaise, "for I +found the city in an uproar. The alarm bells of the churches were +calling all citizens to arms, and troops were being hurried down +to the forts and batteries. Rumour had of course exaggerated the +strength of the fleet, and half the population believed that the +safety of the city itself was menaced by the approach of a mighty +squadron. As soon as my news was bruited abroad, and they learned +that the fleet consisted solely of prizes captured from the Moors +by a galley of the Order, alarm quickly changed into delight, the +sharp, angry clang of the bells was succeeded by peals of gladness, +and the joy of the citizens at being relieved from the cloud +of anxiety that had hung over the city since my last visit, was +unbounded. I went at once to the council chamber, where I found many +of the leading citizens already assembled, having been summoned in +hot haste as soon as our approach was made out. At first they were +almost incredulous when I told them that every ship of the pirate +fleet had been either destroyed or captured, and that the fleet +in the offing consisted entirely of your galley and the thirteen +corsairs she had captured. As soon as they really grasped the fact, +they sent off messengers to the churches to order the joy bells to +be rung, and to the dockyard to arrest all work upon the galleys. +Then I had to give them a short account of the surprise and +destruction of the corsair fleet, and finally they begged me to +ask you to delay your entry to the port for a couple of hours, in +order that they might have time to prepare a suitable reception +for you." + +"I suppose there is no help for it," Gervaise said. "Is there +anything that we ought to do?" + +"I should decorate the galley with all the flags on board: should +set every one to work to make great flags with the cross of +the Order to hoist to the masthead of the prizes, instead of the +little things that are now flying; and under them we will hoist +the flags of the corsairs, among which are those of Tripoli, Tunis, +and Algiers. I do not know that there is aught else we can do." + + + +CHAPTER XVI FESTIVITIES + + +At last the fleet, headed by the galley, to which all the knights +had returned, rowed towards the port. A gun flashed out from the +fort at its entrance, and at once those from all the other batteries +responded; bells pealed out again, and a confused roar of cheering +broke from the crowds occupying every spot from which a view of the +harbour could be obtained. The ships in the port were all decked +with flags, and the front windows and balconies of every house +were hung with tapestries and bright curtains. As soon as the galley +entered the port, a state barge, flying the flag of the Republic, +advanced to meet her from the wharf. As she approached, Ralph gave +orders for the oars to be laid in, and the barge was soon alongside. +The knights were already ranged along the poop, and, accompanied +by Ralph and Caretto, Gervaise moved to the gangway to receive +the visitors. At their head was Battista Fragoso, the doge, in his +robe of state, and following him were a body of the highest nobles +of Genoa, all brilliant in gala costume. + +"This, my lord duke," Caretto said, "is Sir Gervaise Tresham, a +knight commander of our Order, and the commander of this, their +galley. He has before, as you may well believe from his appointment +to so honourable a post, highly distinguished himself, but what he +has before accomplished is far surpassed by the brilliant action +that he has now achieved. He has won a victory that not only reflects +the highest honour upon the Order, but is an inestimable service +to Italy, and has freed her from a corsair fleet that would have +been a scourge to her, both at sea and to the towns and villages +along the coast. Not only has he, with the brave knights under +his orders, annihilated the corsair fleet, burning eleven of their +galleys, and capturing thirteen others, but he has restored to +freedom no less than two hundred Christian captives, among them +the cavaliers Giacomo da Vinci, Pietro Forzi, and myself." + +"In the name of the Republic, Sir Gervaise Tresham, and I may say +in that of all Italy, I thank you most heartily for the splendid +service that you have rendered us. It would have seemed to me well +nigh incredible that a single galley, even if commanded and manned +by the most famous knights of your great Order, should have +accomplished so extraordinary a feat. Still more strange is it that +it should have been performed by so young a knight, with a crew +composed, as Sir Fabricius Caretto has told us, of knights chosen +from among the youngest of the Order." + +"You give far more credit to us, your Highness, than we deserve," +Gervaise replied. "Three of the ships were indeed captured in fair +fight, but we caught the rest asleep and massed together as to be +incapable of successful resistance, and they fell easy victims to +the fire ships we launched against them. Any credit that is due to +me is shared equally by my subcommander here, Sir Ralph Harcourt, +and indeed by every knight of my company." + +"This, doubtless, may be so, Sir Gervaise," the doge said, with a +slight smile, "but it is to the head that plans, rather than to the +hand that strikes, that such success as you have achieved is due; +and the credit of this night attack is, as the cavalier Caretto +tells me, wholly yours, for until you issued your final orders it +seemed to him, and to the two good knights his companions, that +there was naught to do but to remain in port and watch this corsair +fleet sail away to carry out its work of destruction." + +By this time they had reached the poop of the galley. Gervaise +now called forward the knights one by one, and presented them to +the doge, who expressed to them all the gratitude felt by himself +and the whole of the citizens of Genoa for the service they had +rendered to the Republic. This ceremony being over, the knights +broke up their ranks and conversed for a few minutes with those who +had come on board with the doge. The latter then took his place +in the barge with his companions, inviting Gervaise and Ralph to +accompany him. As the barge left the side of the galley, which +followed closely behind her, the guns again thundered out their +welcome, and a roar of greeting rose from the inhabitants. On +landing, the party waited until the knights had joined them, and +then proceeded up the street to the ducal palace, amidst enthusiastic +cheering from the crowd that lined the road, occupied the windows +and balconies, and even scrambled on the housetops, the ladies +waving their handkerchiefs and scarves. + +At the palace were assembled all the municipal authorities, and +the congratulations given on board were here repeated. After this +there was a great banquet, at which Gervaise was placed on the right +hand of the doge, who, at the conclusion of the feast, called upon +the assembled guests to drink to the health of the knights of St. +John, who had saved the commerce and seacoast of Italy from the +greatest danger that had menaced them since the days when the +Northern rovers had desolated the shores of the Mediterranean. The +toast was drunk with enthusiasm, and Gervaise then replied with a +few words of thanks for the honour done to himself and his comrades. + +The party then left the banqueting hall for the great reception +rooms, where the wives and daughters of all the nobles and principal +citizens of Genoa were assembled. Most of the young knights, +belonging as they did to noble families, and accustomed from +childhood to courtly ceremonies and festivities, were quite at home +here. Caretto, his two companions, and their six Italian comrades, +speedily introduced them, and each was soon surrounded by a group +of ladies, anxious to hear from his lips the details of the exploits +of the galley. + +"But how is it that you are all so young, Sir Ralph?" one of the +ladies, to whom Harcourt had been introduced as the second in +command, asked him, when he had finished his account of the capture +of the galleys. "We heard from those who met you on landing, that +all your comrades were young, but we were filled with surprise +when you entered the room, for many of them are but lads." + +"You may say that all of us are but lads, Countess. I am the oldest +of the party, and am but little over twenty-two, but few of the +others are over nineteen; they are all professed knights of the +Order, who, as you doubtless know, come out to Rhodes when only +sixteen. Some, of course, do not join until later, but I think that +all here entered at the earliest age permitted, and almost all had +served in two or three voyages in the galleys before they were +appointed to the Santa Barbara. The reason why so young a crew was +chosen was that our commander was also young. He had done such +exceptional service to the Order that he was appointed to the +command of a galley, and he has, as all will allow, well justified +the choice. It was because it was deemed inexpedient to place knights +many years his senior under his command, and partly, perhaps, to +encourage the younger knights, by giving them an exceptional +opportunity of distinguishing themselves, that the crew was chosen +entirely from their ranks. I was selected as second in command +because Gervaise and I had been special friends when we came out +from England in the same ship, and had before fought side by side +against the Moslems." + +"I see that you wear gilded spurs, Sir Ralph," another lady said; +"you must therefore be a dubbed knight?" + +"Yes; I had the good fortune to be knighted by D'Aubusson himself, +at the same time that Sir Gervaise was also so honoured. It was +for an affair with the Turkish pirates. It was Gervaise who really +won the honour, for I had no share in the affair, save that of +doing my best in the fight." + +"And who could do more?" the countess queried. + +"Gervaise could do more, Countess, as was shown in that attack on +the corsairs by means of fire ships. He has a head to plan, and, +in the case I speak of, a happy thought of his not only saved the +lives of ourselves and Sir John Boswell, but, indirectly, was +the means of preventing two of our galleys being captured by the +corsairs." + +"Which is Sir Gervaise?" one of the ladies asked. + +Ralph smiled. + +"Look round the hall, signoras, and see if any of you can pick him +out from the rest of us." + +The ladies looked round the hall. + +"There are only about twenty here; the rest are in the other rooms. +Do not set us to work guessing, if he is not in sight, Sir Ralph." + +"Oh yes, he is in sight. Now do each of you fix on the one you think +most accords with your ideas of what a knight, brave in action +and wise and prudent in council, would be like." + +The six ladies each fixed on one of the young knights. + +"You are all wrong," said Ralph. + +"How can we choose?" the countess said laughingly, "when none of +them resemble our ideal hero? Most of them are pleasant and courtly +looking youths, but as yet there is scarce a vestige of hair on +their faces, and one could not fancy any of them as the destroyer +of the fleet of corsairs." + +"Do you see the one speaking to the elderly lady in the recess?" + +"Yes; she is the wife of Fragoso. You do not mean to say that that +lad is the commander of the galley? Why, he looks the youngest of +you all." + +"He is between seventeen and eighteen, and there are several others +who are no older. Yes, that is Sir Gervaise, Knight Commander of +the Order of St. John." + +"But how can he possibly have served his time as a professed knight?" + +"He was one of the grand master's pages, and his time in that service +counted just as it would have done had he entered as a professed +knight; and at fifteen, therefore, he stood in the same position +as those three or four years older than himself. He speaks Turkish +as well as our own tongue, and, as I told you, we received the +accolade at the hands of the grand master, a year and a half ago. +He is now a knight commander, and will assuredly one day occupy +one of the highest posts in the Order." + +"You do not speak as if you were jealous, Sir Ralph; and yet +methinks it cannot be pleasant for you all to have one younger +than yourselves placed at your head." + +"I do not think there is one of us who so feels," Ralph said earnestly. +"In the first place, he has performed excellent service; in the +next place, even those who did not know him before, have felt, +since we started, that he is a born leader. Then, too, we regard +with pride one who has brought credit upon the younger members +of the Order. Moreover, we all owe our posts in the galley to the +fact that he was chosen for its command. It is a difficult position +for him to fill, but he has managed so that, while all obey his +orders as cheerfully and willingly as if he were a veteran, when +off duty we regard him as one of ourselves." + +"You are a staunch friend, Sir Ralph." + +"I am a staunch friend of Sir Gervaise, Countess, for the more I +know of him the more I care for him. He well deserves the promotion +and honour that have fallen to his share." + +"Will you bring him across here to us, Sir Ralph? I want to talk +to this hero of yours, and I am sure that my daughter is longing +to be introduced to him." + +Ralph waited until Gervaise was disengaged, and then brought him +across, and, after introducing him, moved away at once, leaving +Gervaise to be interrogated by the ladies. + +"You must be accustomed to festivities, Sir Gervaise, for we have +just heard that you were one of the grand master's pages?" + +"I am accustomed to them, signora; but that is not at all the same +thing as liking them." + +The reply was given so earnestly that all the ladies smiled. + +"Your taste is quite exceptional. Do you mean to say that you would +rather be on board your galley than here?" + +"It would not be polite," Gervaise said, with a laugh, "if I were +to say that I would infinitely rather be on board; but indeed I have +not, like most of my comrades, been brought up in court or castle. +Until the day I joined the Order, we led the lives of exiles. My +father belonged to the defeated party in England, and, save for a +few months when the cause to which he was attached was triumphant, +we lived quietly on the estates he had recovered, our life being +one of care and anxiety. So, you see, I had no training in gaiety +and pleasure. At Rhodes there are state receptions and religious +pageants, but a meeting such as this, is, of course, impossible +in a convent; and since I was eleven years old I think I have only +once spoken to a woman. So you can well understand, signora, that +I feel awkward in speech, and I pray you to make allowance for my +ignorance of the language of courtesy, such as would naturally be +expected in a knight, even though belonging to a religious Order." + +"There is naught to make allowance for," the countess said gently. +"Women can appreciate simple truth, and are not, as men seem to +think, always yearning for compliments. Those who are most proficient +in turning phrases are not often among those foremost in battle, +or wisest in council, and I can tell you that we women value deeds +far higher than words. Sir Fabricius Caretto is a cousin of mine, +and has this afternoon been speaking so highly of you to me and my +young daughter here, that I am glad indeed to make your acquaintance. +How long do you intend to stay in Genoa?" + +"No longer than it will take me to engage men to carry the prizes +to Rhodes. I am afraid that sounds rude," he broke off, as he +noticed a smile on the faces of the ladies. + +"Not rude," said the countess; "though most knights would have put +it differently, and said that their duty compelled them to leave +as soon as the prizes could be manned. But it comes to the same +thing. Of course, you will remain the guest of the doge as long +as you are here; otherwise, it would have given us the greatest +pleasure to have entertained you. My cousin is, of course, staying +with us, and you see we all feel a very deep obligation to you. He +has been so long a slave among the Moors, that we had almost come +to hope death had freed him from his fetters; so you may imagine +our pleasure when he arrived here so suddenly ten days ago. We +were expecting that he would remain with us for some time, but he +says that he must first go back to Rhodes, after which he will +ask for leave, and return here. We have a banquet tomorrow evening +to celebrate his return, and earnestly hoped that you would be +present, but, since you say that you do not care for such gaieties, +we shall, if you prefer it, be glad if you will come to join us at +our family meal at twelve." + +"Thank you, countess, I should very greatly prefer it, and it will +give me real pleasure to come." + +"Your friend, Sir Ralph Harcourt, has been telling us how you have +destroyed the corsair fleet that has been so alarming us. He, too, +is an Englishman, though he speaks Italian well." + +"Yes, he speaks it a great deal better than I do," Gervaise said. +"He is a dear friend of mine, and it is, indeed, chiefly owing +to his support and influence that I have been able to manage so +pleasantly and well in the command of a body of young knights, +most of whom are my seniors." + +"He tells us that you speak Turkish?" + +"Yes; I thought that it would be very useful, and spent nearly a +year in acquiring it, the bailiff of my langue being kind enough +to relieve me of all other duties. I was fortunate enough to find +in one of the servants of the auberge a well educated and widely +informed Turk, who was a very pleasant companion, as well as an +excellent instructor, and I learnt much from him besides his language. +The knowledge of Turkish has already proved to me most useful, and +was indeed the means by which I obtained both my commandery and +my appointment as captain of the galley." + +"Perhaps you will tell us the story tomorrow; that is, if it is +too long to tell us now?" + +"It is indeed much too long; but if it will interest you I shall +be glad to recount it tomorrow." + +The next day Gervaise went to the palace of the Countess Da Forli. +She was a widow with no children, except Claudia, the young daughter +who had accompanied her to the fete the evening before. Caretto, +and four or five relations of the family, were the only guests +beside himself. It was a quiet and sociable meal, and served with +less ceremony than usual, as the countess wished to place Gervaise +as much as possible at his ease. During the meal but little was +said about the affair with the pirates, Caretto telling them some +of his experiences as a captive. + +"It is well, Claudia," he said, laughing, "that you did not see +me at the time I was rescued, for I was such a scarecrow that you +would never have been able to regard me with due and proper respect +afterwards. I was so thin that my bones almost came through my +skin." + +"You are thin enough now, cousin," the girl said. + +"I have gained so much weight during the last ten days that I +begin to fear that I shall, ere long, get too fat to buckle on my +armour. But, bad as the thinness was, it was nothing to the dirt. +Moreover, I was coming near to losing my voice. There was nothing +for us to talk about in our misery, and often days passed without +a word being exchanged between Da Vinci, Forzi, and myself. Do you +know I felt almost more thankful for the bath and perfumes than +I did for my liberty. I was able at once to enjoy the comfort of +the one, while it was some time before I could really assure myself +that my slavery was over, and that I was a free man again." + +"And now, Sir Gervaise," the countess said, when the meal was over, +"it is your turn. Claudia is longing to hear your story, and to +know how you came to be in command of a galley." + +"And I am almost as anxious," Caretto said. "I did not like to ask +the question on board the galley, and have been looking forward +to learning it when I got to Rhodes. I did, indeed, ask the two +knights who accompanied me on my mission here, but they would +only tell me that every one knew you had performed some very great +service to the Order, and that it concerned some intended rising +among the slaves, the details being known to only a few, who had +been, they understood, told that it was not to be repeated." + +"It was a very simple matter," Gervaise said, "and although the +grand master and council were pleased to take a very favourable +view of it, it was, in fact, a question of luck, just as was the +surprise of the corsairs. There is really no secret about it -- +at least, except in Rhodes: there it was thought best not to speak +of it, because the fact that the attempt among the slaves was +almost successful, might, if generally known, encourage others to +try to escape, and perhaps with greater success. I told you last +night, Countess, that I had only once before in the last six or +seven years spoken to a woman, and it was on that occasion that +the adventure, so far as I was concerned, had its commencement." + +He then, beginning at his visit with Ralph Harcourt to the Greek +merchant and his family on the roof of the house, recounted +the suspicions he had entertained, the manner in which they were +confirmed, and the method by which he had discovered the plot for +the rising. He was interrupted several times when he attempted to +abbreviate the story, or to omit some of the details, and there were +exclamations of surprise at his proposal to personate a Turkish +prisoner, and to share the lot of the slaves in their prison, and +on the benches of the galley. + +"I had no idea, Sir Gervaise," Caretto said, when he had concluded, +"that you too had been a galley slave, and I understand now the care +you showed to render the lot of the rowers as easy as possible. It +was a splendid scheme, and well carried out. Indeed, I no longer +wonder that you were appointed to the command of a galley, and +received a rich commandery in England at the hands of the grand +master himself. What think you, Countess; did I speak too highly +in his favour?" + +"Not one jot, cousin. Why, Sir Gervaise, it seems to me that you +have been born two centuries too late, and that you should have +been a knight errant, instead of being sworn to obey orders, and +bound to celibacy. Do you wear no lady's favour in your helm? I +know that not a few of your Order do so." + +"As I have said, Countess, I know no ladies who would bestow favours +upon me; in the second place, I am but eighteen, and it would be +ridiculous for me to think of such matters; lastly, it seems to me +that, being vowed to the Order, I can desire no other mistress." + +Claudia, who had listened with rapt attention to the story, whispered +in her mother's ear. The latter smiled. + +"It seems to me, Sir Gervaise," she went on, "that after what you +have done for Italy there are many fair maidens who would feel it +an honour that their colours should be borne by one who has shown +himself so valiant a knight. You see, a gage of this kind does +not necessarily mean that there is any deep feeling between the +knight who bears it and the lady who bestows it; it shows only that +she, on her part, feels it an honour that her gage should be worn +by a distinguished knight, and, on his part, that he considers it +as somewhat more than a compliment, and wears it as a proof of +regard on the part of one whose good opinion at least he values. +It is true that among secular knights it may mean even more than +this, but it ought not to mean more among knights of an Order like +yours, pledged to devote their lives to a lofty and holy aim. My +daughter Claudia whispers to me that she would deem it an honour +indeed if you would wear her token, accepting it in the spirit in +which I have spoken. She is fourteen now, and, as you know, a maid +of fourteen here is as old as one of sixteen or seventeen in your +country." + +Gervaise turned to the girl, who was standing by her mother's chair, +looking earnestly at him. He had noticed her the evening before; +she had asked no questions, but had listened so intently that he +had felt almost embarrassed. Claudia's was a very bright face, +and yet marked by firmness and strength. He turned his eyes again +to the countess. + +"I never thought of wearing a woman's favour," he said; "but if +your daughter will bestow one upon me, I shall be proud to wear +it, and trust that I may carry it unstained. I shall feel honoured +indeed that one so fair, and, as I am sure by her face, so +deserving of all the devotion that a knight of our Order can give, +has thought me worthy of being one of those on whom she could +bestow so high a favour, with the confidence that it would be ever +borne with credit and honour." + +"What shall I give him, mother?" Claudia asked the countess, without +a shadow of the embarrassment with which Gervaise had spoken. + +"Not a kerchief, Claudia. In the rough work of the knights, it +could not be kept without spot or stain. Moreover, if I judge +Sir Gervaise rightly, methinks he would prefer some token that he +could wear without exciting attention and remark from his comrades. +Go, fetch him any of your jewels you may think fit." + +"Then I will give him this," the girl said; and unfastening a thin +gold chain she wore round her neck, she pulled up a heart shaped +ornament, in pink coral set in gold and pearls. + +Her mother uttered a low exclamation of dissent. + +"I know, mother; it was your last gift, and I prize it far beyond +anything I have; therefore, it is all the more fit to be my token." +Then she turned to Gervaise, and went on, without the slightest +tremor in her voice, or accession of colour in her cheeks. "Sir +Gervaise Tresham, I bestow upon you this my favour, and shall deem +it an honour indeed to know that it is borne by one so brave and +worthy. You said that you would be glad to be one of those who +bore my favours. You will be more than that, for I vow to you that +while you live no other knight shall wear a favour of mine." + +"Claudia!" her mother said disapprovingly. + +"I know what I am saying, mother. I have often wondered why maidens +should so carelessly bestow their favours upon every knight who +begged for them, and have said to myself that when my time came I +would grant it but once, and only then to one whom I deemed worthy +of it in all ways -- one in whose loyalty and honour I could trust +implicitly, and who would regard it as something sacred, deeming it +an honour to wear it, as being the pledge of my trust and esteem. +Kneel, Sir Gervaise, while I fasten this round your neck." + +Gervaise took out the small brooch, that fastened the collar of +his silken doublet, and then knelt on one knee. The girl fastened +the clasp round his neck, and as he rose he hid the heart beneath +the doublet, and fastened the collar. + +"Lady Claudia," he said earnestly, "I accept your favour in the +spirit in which you bestow it. So long as I live I shall prize +and value it beyond any honour I may gain, and as I feel it next +to my heart, it will ever recall to me that you gave it me as a +pledge of your esteem and trust, and I will strive to the utmost +so to bear myself that I may be worthy of the gift." + +None of the others spoke while the little ceremony was being +performed. Caretto glanced at the countess with an amused smile, +but the latter looked grave, and somewhat vexed. However, she made +an effort to dispel the cloud on her face, and, when Gervaise ceased +speaking, said, "This has been a somewhat more serious business +than I intended, Sir Gervaise. But do not think that I regret in +any way the course it has taken; 'tis well for a maiden on the +threshold of womanhood that she should place before herself a lofty +ideal, and that she should entertain a warm feeling of friendship +for one worthy of it. So also it is good for a young knight to +know that he has the trust and confidence of a pure and innocent +maiden; such a knowledge will aid him to be in all ways true to +the vows he has taken, and to remember always that he is bound to +be not only a valiant knight of his Order, but a sincere soldier +of the Cross." + +Then she went on more lightly. "Have you heard, Sir Gervaise, that +there is a question of making you a noble of Genoa?" + +"No, indeed," Gervaise replied, in great surprise; "such an idea +never entered into my thoughts." + +"Nevertheless, I know that it was spoken of last night, and although +it has not yet been finally settled, and will not be until the +council meet this afternoon, I should not tell you if I did not +think that it was as good as agreed upon; and I am pleased to +be the first to whisper to you that it is intended to bestow upon +you an honour that is jealously guarded and seldom granted, even +to crowned heads, unless as a token of gratitude for some signal +service done to the Republic." + +"I should feel most honoured and most grateful, Countess, for so +extraordinary a favour, did I feel that I had done any extraordinary +action to merit it. There can be no doubt that the destruction +of the corsairs has saved Genoa and all the maritime towns from +immense loss by damage to their trade, and by the raids that would +have been made at various points on the coast. But I cannot see +that the mere fact that we have destroyed their fleet merits any +marked honour. They were caught in a trap, and half of them burned, +and this might have been done equally as well by the Sardinian +fishermen, unarmed, and without our aid. As to the fighting, it +was of small account. The first three craft we captured offered +a much stouter resistance, and we lost two of our number; but in +the other affair no knight was killed, or even seriously wounded, +and believe me, Countess, I feel absolutely ashamed at the fuss +that is made over it. It seems to me that I am a sort of impostor, +obtaining credit under false pretences." + +"No man is a fair judge of his own actions, Sir Gervaise," Caretto +said. "A man may believe himself a Solon, or a Roland; others may +consider him as a fool, or an empty braggart; and it must be taken +that the general opinion of the public is the judgment from which +there is no appeal. It is not the mob of Genoa only who regard +the services that you have rendered as extraordinary, but it is +the opinion of the councillors and authorities of the Republic, +and of those who, like myself, have borne our share in warfare, that +not only is the service great, but that it is due to the singular +ability with which you, in command of only a single galley, have +wholly destroyed or captured the fleet that threatened our commerce. +As our councillors, therefore, all competent judges, are unanimous +in their opinion that you have deserved the highest honours that +Genoa can bestow upon you, it is useless for you to set up your own +opinion to the contrary. Take the good things that fall to you, +Sir Gervaise, and be thankful. It is seldom that men obtain more +honours than they deserve, while it very often happens that they +deserve far more than they obtain. Fortune has doubtless some +share in every man's career; but when it is not once, but several +times, that a knight gains special credit for deeds he has performed, +we may be sure that fortune has less to do with the matter than +his personal merits. Three times have you earned special credit; +upon the first occasion, the grand master -- no mean judge of +conduct and character -- deemed you worthy of secular knighthood, +an honour which has not, in my memory, been bestowed at Rhodes upon +any young knight; on the second, you were promoted to the command +of a galley, though never before has such a command been given to +any, save knights of long experience; and now, for the third time, +the councillors of one of the greatest of Italian cities are about +to do you honour. It is good to be modest, Sir Gervaise, and it +is better to underestimate than to overrate one's own merits, but +it is not well to carry the feeling to an extreme. I am quite sure +that in your case your disclaimer is wholly sincere and unaffected; +but take my advice, accept the honours the world may pay you as +not undeserved, determining only in your mind that if you deem them +excessive, you will at least do all in your power to show that +they are not ill bestowed. You will not, I trust, take my counsel +amiss." + +"On the contrary, Sir Fabricius," Gervaise said warmly. "I am really +but a boy yet, though by good fortune pushed strangely forward, +and I am glad indeed to receive council from a knight of vastly +greater experience than myself and, in future, however much I may +be conscious in my own mind that anything I have done is greatly +overrated, I will at least abstain from protest. And now, Countess, +I must pray you to excuse me. I know that Sir Ralph Harcourt is, +before this, down at the dockyard waiting my coming to engage +sailors." + +"You will come tomorrow at the same time, I hope, Sir Gervaise. As +Claudia's sworn knight we have now a claim upon you, and for the +short time that you remain here you must regard this as your home, +although you must necessarily remain the guest of the doge." + +"He is a fine young fellow, indeed," Caretto said, after Gervaise +had left. "There is no affectation about his modesty, and he really +considers that this success he has gained is solely a stroke of +good fortune. Of course, I have been asking many questions about +him of the young knights of his own langue, Harcourt among them. +They tell me that he is always in earnest in everything he undertakes. +He is without a rival among the younger knights of the convent in +his skill in arms, and for strength and activity in all exercises; +he seems to care nothing for the ordinary amusements in which they +join at Rhodes, and for nine months was scarcely ever seen by those +in the auberge, save when they gathered for meals, so continuously +did he work to acquire a perfect command of Turkish. How thoroughly +he succeeded is evident from the fact that he was able to live +among the galley slaves without exciting any suspicions in their +minds that he was other than he pretended to be, a Syrian captive. +That he is brave goes without saying, though perhaps no braver than +the majority of his companions. The extraordinary thing about him +is that although, as he himself says, little more than a boy, he +has the coolness to plan, and the head to carry out, schemes that +would do credit to the most experienced captain. He is already a +credit to the Order, and, should he live, will assuredly rise to +the highest offices in it, and may even die its grand master. In the +stormy times that are coming on, there will be ample opportunities +for him still further to distinguish himself, and to fulfil the +singular promise of his youth. That he possesses great tact, as +well as other qualities, is shown by the enthusiasm with which +his companions regard him. In no case, among those to whom I have +spoken, have I discerned the smallest jealousy of him. The tact +that is needed to stand thus among fifty young knights, almost all +his seniors in age, will assuredly enable him later on to command +the confidence and affection of older men." + +When the other guests had left, and Caretto only remained, the +countess turned to Claudia. "You went too far, Claudia. I was +willing enough, when you asked me, that you should bestow a favour +upon him. Most young knights wear such a favour, which may be +a sign of devotion, but which far more frequently is a piece of +gallantry. In the case of a knight hospitaller it can only be the +latter; it is in his case merely a sign that he has so distinguished +himself that some maiden feels a pride that her gift should be +carried into battle by him, and, on his part, that he too is proud +of the gift so bestowed by one whose goodwill he prizes. In that +way I was willing that you should grant him your favour. But the +manner in which you gave it was far more serious than the occasion +warranted, and your promise to grant no similar favour to another +as long as he lived, surprised, and, I may almost say, shocked me. +You are, according to our custom here, considered almost a woman, +and had not Sir Gervaise belonged to a religious Order, and were he +of a presuming disposition, he might well have gathered a meaning +from your words far beyond what you intended, and have even +entertained a presumptuous hope that you were not indifferent to +his merits. In the present case, of course, no harm is done; still, +methinks that it would be far better had the words been unspoken. +Your cousin here will, I am sure, agree with me." + +Caretto did not speak, but stood playing with his moustache, waiting +for Claudia's reply. The girl had stood with downcast eyes while +her mother was speaking. + +"I only expressed what I felt, mother," she said, after a pause, "and +I do not think that Sir Gervaise Tresham is likely to misunderstand +me. It seems to me that never among those whom I have met have I +seen one so worthy. No praises can be higher than those with which +my cousin has spoken of him. He has rescued him, whom we dearly +love, from slavery; he has saved Genoa from great disaster, and +many towns and villages from plunder and ruin. I do indeed feel +proud that such a knight should wear my gage, and, were there no +other reason, I should be unwilling that, so long as he carried +it, another should possess a similar one from me. I am sure that +Sir Gervaise will have felt that this was the meaning of my words; +I wished him to see that it was not a favour lightly given by a girl +who might, a few weeks hence, bestow a similar one upon another, +but was a gage seriously given of the honour in which I held him." + +"Very well said, Claudia," Caretto broke in, before the countess +could reply. "I warrant me the young knight will not misunderstand +your gift, and that he will prize it highly and carry it nobly. +He is not one of those who will boast of a favour and display it +all times, and, except perhaps to his friend Sir Ralph Harcourt, +I will wager he never tells a soul who was its donor." + +When Claudia shortly afterwards left the room, he said to the +countess, "Excuse me for breaking in, Agatha, but I felt that it +was much better to agree with her, and not to make overmuch of the +matter; she is just of an age to make some one a hero, and she +could hardly have chosen a better subject for her worship. In +the first place, he is a knight of St. John; in the second, he is +going away in a few days, perhaps tomorrow, and may never cross +her path again. The thought of him will prevent her fancy from +straying for a time, and keep her heart whole until you decide on +a suitor for her hand." + +"Nevertheless, I would rather that it had not been so. Claudia +is not given to change, and this may last long enough to cause +trouble when I bring forward the suitor you speak of." + +"Well, in any case it might be worse," Caretto said philosophically. +And then, with a smile in answer to her look of inquiry, "Knights +of the Order have, ere now, obtained release from their vows." + +"Fabricius!" the countess exclaimed, in a shocked voice. + +"Yes, I know, Agatha, that the child is one of the richest heiresses +in Italy, but for that very reason it needs not that her husband +should have wide possessions. In all other respects you could wish +for no better. He will assuredly be a famous knight; he is the +sort of man to make her perfectly happy; and, lastly, you know I +cannot forget that I owe my liberation from slavery to him. At any +rate, Agatha, as I said before, he may never cross her path again, +and you may, a year or two hence, find her perfectly amenable to +your wishes." + + + +CHAPTER XVII CAPTURED + + +Upon the following day the doge requested Gervaise to accompany +him to a meeting of the council. Upon entering the grand hall he +found not only the members of the council assembled in their robes +of office, but a large gathering of the nobles and principal +citizens of Genoa, together with the knights of the galley whom, +under Ralph Harcourt's orders, Gervaise found, to his surprise, drawn +up in order across the Hall. Here, in the name of the Republic, +Battista Fragoso announced to him that, by the unanimous decision +of the council, he had been elected a noble of Genoa; an honour, +he added, on only one or two previous occasions in the history of +the Republic bestowed upon any but of princely rank, but which he +had nobly earned by the great service he had rendered to the State. +His name was then inscribed in the book containing the names and +titles of the nobles of Genoa. Next, Battista Fragoso presented +him with a superb suit of Milanese armour, as his own personal +gift, and then with a casket of very valuable jewels, as the gift +of the city of Genoa. Each presentation was accompanied by the +plaudits of the assembly, and by the no less warm acclamations +of the knights. Ralph was then called forward, and presented with +a suit of armour but little inferior to that given to Gervaise, and +each knight received a heavy gold chain of the finest workmanship +of Genoa. + +Two days later the preparations for departure were complete, and +a sufficient number of men were engaged to man the prizes. This +charge, also, Genoa took upon itself, and put on board much stronger +crews than Gervaise deemed necessary for the navigation of the +ships. The weather was fine and the wind favourable, and a quick +passage was made to Rhodes. When the harbour was in sight, the +ships were ordered to proceed in single file, the galley leading +the way with a huge banner of the Order floating from her stern, +and smaller flags on staffs at each side. It was not until they +passed by the two forts guarding the entrance that the flags +fluttering at the mastheads of the prizes afforded to those on +shore an intimation of the event that had taken place, and even +then none supposed that this fleet of prizes had been taken by the +one galley that headed them. + +As the Santa Barbara slowly rowed up the harbour, the State barge +of the grand master put off to meet it, and D'Aubusson, with a +party of knights, soon stepped on board. + +"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise! although I little expected to see +you return so soon. What is the meaning of this procession that +follows you? By their rig and appearance they are Moors, but how +they come to be thus sailing in your wake is a mystery to us all." + +"They are Moors, your Excellency; they form part of an expedition +fitted out by the corsairs of Algiers, Tripoli, Tunis, and other +piratical strongholds, for the purpose of destroying the commerce +and ravaging the coasts of Western Italy. Fortunately, we fell +in with a ship that had been plundered by three of them on their +way north, and learned from the dying captain, who was the only +one of her crew left with life on board, the direction they were +taking, and something of the nature of the expedition. We pursued +the three galleys, came up with them, had the good fortune to capture +them, and then had the delight of finding among their rowers the +noble knights, Fabricius Caretto, Giacomo Da Vinci, and Pietro +Forzi." + +The grand master, and the knights with him, uttered an exclamation +of joy, and, as the three knights named stepped forward, embraced +them with the liveliest pleasure. + +"My dear Caretto," the grand master exclaimed, "it is almost a +resurrection, for we have all long mourned you as dead; and your +return to us at the present time is indeed fortunate; for upon +whose judgment and aid could I better rely than those of my old +comrade in arms?" Then, turning to Gervaise, he went on: "It was +a daring and brilliant exploit indeed, Sir Gervaise, and in due +time honour shall be paid to you and your brave companions, to +whom and to you I now tender the thanks of the Order. But tell me +the rest briefly, for I would fain hear from these noble knights +and old friends the story of what has befallen them." + +"My tale is a very brief one, your Highness. The Cavalier Caretto +sailed at once in a swift craft from the south of Sardinia, to +carry warnings to the cities on the coast of Italy of the danger +that threatened them, and in order that some war galleys might be +despatched by Genoa to meet the corsair fleet. During his absence +we discovered the little inlet in which the pirates lay hidden, +waiting doubtless the arrival of the three ships we had captured, +to commence operations. On the return of the knight with the news +that it would be at least a fortnight before Genoa could fit out +any galleys, and fearing that the pirates might at any moment put +to sea, we procured some small Sardinian craft, and fitted them +as fire ships; with the captives we had rescued, and some Sard +fishermen, we manned the three prizes, distributing the knights +between them, and at night launched the fire ships against the +corsairs, whose ships were crowded together. Eleven of them were +burnt; six we captured as they endeavoured to make their way out, +and took possession of four others whose crews had run them ashore +and deserted them. None escaped." + +Exclamations of astonishment and almost of incredulity broke from +the knights. + +"And is it possible, Sir Gervaise, that these thirteen vessels that +follow you are all prizes captured by your galley alone?" + +"It is, as I have the honour to tell your Highness. But their +capture, except in the case of the first three, was due almost +solely to good fortune and to the position in which we found them, +almost incapable of defence." + +"What think you, knights and comrades?" the grand master said +to his companions. "There were some of you who deemed it rash to +entrust a galley to so young a commander and so youthful a crew. +What say you now? Never in the annals of the Order has such +a sight been witnessed as that of thirteen prizes being brought +in by a single galley, to say naught of eleven others destroyed. +Caretto, you and your comrades must have had some share in this +marvellous victory." + +"By no means," the Italian replied; "beyond having the honour +of aiding to carry out the orders of Sir Gervaise Tresham, the +commander of the galley. The plan was wholly of his own devising, +its execution solely due to his arrangement of the details, and +that without the slightest suggestion on the part of myself or my +comrades. I will presently narrate to you the whole story; it will +come better from my lips than from those of Sir Gervaise, whose +disposition is to wholly underestimate the merit of the action he has +performed. But I must also bear testimony, not only to the bravery +displayed by Sir Gervaise, Sir Ralph Harcourt, his lieutenant, and +every one of the knights his crew, but to the admirable discipline, +order, and good fellowship on board the galley, which would have +done credit to the most experienced commander and to the most +veteran knights of the Order." + +The grand master paused a moment, and then said in a loud voice, +"Sir Gervaise Tresham, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and knights of the +seven langues of the Order -- As yet I can hardly appreciate the +full extent of the service that you have rendered. I thanked you +but now for the capture of three corsairs; but what can I say when +I learn that you have destroyed or taken a whole fleet? I invite +you all to a banquet that I shall hold tonight, where the Cavalier +Caretto will relate to us all the details of this marvellous +exploit." + +Within a few minutes after the return of the grand master and his +party ashore, the flags of the Order were run up to the flagstaffs +of every fort and bastion: the bells of the churches chimed out a +triumphant peal, and a salute was fired from the guns of the three +water forts, while along the wall facing the port, the townspeople +waved numberless gay flags as a welcome to the galley. Most of the +knights went ashore at once, but Gervaise, under the excuse that +he wished to see that everything was in order before landing, +remained on board until it was time to go to the banquet, being sure +that by that time the knights would have fully told the story at +their respective auberges, and that there would be no more questions +to answer. The banquet differed but little from that at Genoa, +and Gervaise was heartily glad when it was over. + +The next day the grand master sent for him. + +"If I judge rightly, Sir Gervaise, the thing that will best please +you at present, is an order to put to sea again at once, to conclude +the usual period of service of the galley." + +"It is indeed," Gervaise replied earnestly. "But I should be glad, +sir, if you will allow that the time should begin to count afresh +from our present start. We have really had but a short period of +service, for we wasted a week at Genoa, and ten days on our journey +back here, so that we have had really no more than a month's active +service." + +"Yes, if you count only by time," D'Aubusson said, with a smile. +"Reckoning by results, you have done a good five years' cruise. +However, so small a request can certainly be granted. The places of +the two knights who were killed, and of four others whose wounds +are reported to me as being too severe for them to be fit for +service for some time, shall be filled up at once from the langues +to which each belonged. You will cruise among the Western islands, +whence complaints have reached us of a corsair who has been plundering +and burning. Sometimes he is heard of as far north as Negropont, +at others he is off the south of the Morea; then, again, we hear +of him among the Cyclades. We have been unwilling to despatch +another galley, for there is ample employment for every one here. +After the blow you have struck on the Moorish corsairs, they are +likely to be quiet for a little. You had best, therefore, try for +a time if you cannot come across this pirate. You must let me know +how much you paid for the vessels you used as fire ships, and to +the Sards; this is an expense chargeable to the general service. +I may tell you that to me it is due that no recognition of your +exploits, such as that which Genoa bestowed upon you, will be made. +At the council this morning it was urged that some signal mark +of honour should be granted; but I interposed, saying that you +had already received exceptional promotion, and that it would not +be for your good, or that of the Order, for so young a knight to +be raised to an official position of a character usually held by +seniors, and that I was perfectly sure you would prefer remaining +in command of your galley to any promotion whatever that would +retain you on the Island." + +"Indeed I should, your Highness. I wish to gain experience and to +do service to the Order, and so far from pleasing me, promotion +would trouble and distress me, and, could it have been done, I +would most gladly have sent home the prizes, instead of going to +Genoa, and would myself have continued the cruise." + +"So the Cavalier Caretto told me," the grand master replied. "Very +well, then. In three days you shall set out again. The admiral +tells me that never before has a galley returned with the slaves +in such good health and condition, and that unquestionably your +plan of erecting an awning to shelter them from the midday heat and +the night dews has had a most beneficial effect on their health; +he has recommended its general adoption." + +Three days later the Santa Barbara again left port, and was soon +upon her station. For some weeks she cruised backwards and forwards +along the coast and among the islands. They often heard of the +pirate ship, but all their efforts to find her were unavailing. + +One evening there were signs of a change of weather, and by morning +it was blowing a furious gale from the north; in spite of the +efforts of the rowers, the galley narrowly escaped being driven +ashore; but she at last gained the shelter of an island, and anchored +under its lee, the slaves being utterly worn out by continuous +exertion. As soon as the gale abated they again put to sea, and, +after proceeding for some miles, saw a ship cast up on shore. +Some people could be made out on board of her, and a white flag +was raised. + +"She must have been driven ashore during the gale," Gervaise said. +"We will row in to within a quarter of a mile of her and see what +we can do for them." + +As soon as the anchor was dropped a boat was lowered. + +"I will go myself, Ralph, for I shall be glad to set my foot on +shore again. There must be people on the island; I wonder none +of them have come to the aid of those poor fellows. I suppose the +villages are on the other side of the island, and they have not +yet heard of the wreck." + +Gervaise asked three of the knights to accompany him, and the boat, +rowed by galley slaves, was soon on its way. All were glad at +the change afforded to the monotony of their life on board, and at +the prospect of a scamper on shore. + +There were but five or six men to be seen on the deck of the wreck, +and these had, as the boat approached, come down to the rocks as +if to meet those who came to their aid; but as the knights leapt +out, they threw themselves suddenly upon them with knives and +scimitars that had hitherto been concealed beneath their garments, +while at the same moment a crowd of men appeared on the deck of +the ship, and, leaping down, ran forward with drawn swords. Two +of the knights fell dead before they had time to draw their weapons. +The third shook off his two assailants, and for a minute kept them +both at bay; but others, rushing up, cut him down. + +Gervaise had received a slight wound before he realised what was +happening. He snatched his dagger from its sheath, and struck down +one assailant; but ere he could raise it to strike again, another +leapt on to his back, and clung there until the rest rushed up, +when he shouted, "Take him alive! take him alive!" and, throwing +down their weapons, half a dozen of the pirates flung themselves +upon Gervaise, and strove to pull him to the ground, until at last, +in spite of his desperate resistance, they succeeded in doing so. +His armour was hastily stripped off, his hands and feet bound, +and then at the orders of the pirate who had leapt on his back, +and who was evidently the captain, half a dozen men lifted him +on to their shoulders. As they did so four guns from the galley +flashed out, and the balls flew overhead. The pirates, who had +already begun to quarrel over the armour and arms of the fallen +knights, at once took to their heels, followed by the galley slaves +from the boat. + +"Make haste," the captain said to the men carrying Gervaise. + +"They are lowering their boats; we must be under way before they +come up." + +In a minute or two Gervaise was set down on his feet, the cords +round his legs were cut, and he was made to hurry along with his +captors. In a short time an inlet was reached, and here Gervaise +saw, to his mortification, the pirate craft for which the Santa +Barbara had in vain been searching. As soon as the party were +all on board, the ropes by which she was moored to two trees were +thrown off; the great sails hoisted, and she sailed boldly out. +Although the gale had entirely abated, there was still a brisk wind +blowing, and it was evident to the captain of the corsair that +under such circumstances he could outsail the galley that had long +been searching for him; when, therefore, the Santa Barbara came in +sight, just as he and his crew had finished stripping the wreck +of its contents, the idea had occurred to him to attempt to entice +some of the knights to land. + +As soon as the vessel was under way he abused his followers hotly +for not having obeyed his orders to capture the knights without +bloodshed; but they pleaded that it was as much as they had been +able to do to capture Gervaise in that way, and that they could +never have overcome the four together, before the boats would have +had time to come from the ship. + +Gervaise had been told to sit down with his back to a mast and +in this position he could, when the vessel heeled over to the +breeze, obtain a view of the sea. It was with a feeling of bitter +mortification and rage that he saw the galley lying but half a +mile away, as the corsair issued from the inlet. A moment later he +heard a gun fired, and saw the signal hoisted to recall the boats. + +"If the wind had been favourable," the captain said to his mate, +"we would have borne down upon her, and could have reached and +captured her before the boats got back, for you may be sure that +they have landed almost all their men. However, we can't get there +against the wind, and we will now say goodbye to them." + +Gervaise knew well that at the pace they were running through the +water the galley would have no chance whatever of overtaking her, +and that, ere the knights came on board again, she would be already +two or three miles away. A point of land soon concealed the galley +from view, and when he caught sight of her, as she rounded the +point, she was but a speck in the distance. + +They passed several islands in the course of the day, changing +their direction to a right angle to that which they had at first +pursued, as soon as they were hidden from the sight of the galley by +an intervening island. As night came on they anchored in a little +bay on the coast of the Morea. The sails being furled, the sailors +made a division of the booty they had captured on the island, and +of the portable property found on board the wreck. A gourd full of +water was placed to Gervaise's lips by one of the men of a kinder +disposition than the rest. He drank it thankfully, for he was +parched with thirst excited by the pain caused by the tightness +with which he had been bound. + +He slept where he sat. All night four men remained on guard, although +from what he heard they had no fear whatever of being overtaken. +In the morning his arms were unbound, and they stripped off his +tunic and shirt. They had evidently respect for his strength, for +before loosing his arms they tightly fastened his ankles together. +The removal of his shirt exposed Claudia's gift to view. + +"Take that from him and give it to me," the captain said. As the +two men approached, Gervaise seized one in each hand, dashed them +against each other, and hurled them on the deck. But the exertion +upset his equilibrium, and after making a vain effort to recover +it, he fell heavily across them. The captain stooped over him, +and, before he could recover himself, snatched the chain from his +neck. + +"You are a stout fellow," he said, laughing, "and will make a fine +slave. What have you got here that you are ready to risk your life +for?" He looked at the little chain and its pendant with an air of +disappointment. "'Tis worth but little," he said, showing it to +his mate. "I would not give five ducats for it in the market. It +must be a charm, or a knight would never carry it about with him and +prize it so highly. It may be to things like this the Christians +owe their luck." + +"It has not brought him luck this time," the mate observed with a +laugh. + +"Even a charm cannot always bring good luck, but at any rate I will +try it; " and he put it round his neck just as Gervaise had worn +it. The latter was now unbound, and permitted to move about the +deck. The strength he had shown in the struggle on shore, and +the manner in which he had hurled, bound as he was, two of their +comrades to the deck, had won for him the respect of his captors, +and he was therefore allowed privileges not granted to the seamen +of the vessel that had had the ill fortune to be cast on shore so +close to the spot where the corsair was hiding. These had been +seized, driven to the ship, and having been stripped of the greater +portion of their clothes, shut down in the hold. + +Although angry that but one out of the four who landed had been +captured, the captain was in a good humour at having tricked his +redoubtable foes, and was disposed to treat Gervaise with more +consideration than was generally given to captives. The latter +had not spoken a word of Turkish from the time he was captured, +and had shaken his head when first addressed in that language. No +suspicion was therefore entertained that he had any knowledge of +it, and the Turks conversed freely before him. + +"Where think you we had better sell him?" the mate asked the captain, +when Gervaise was leaning against the bulwark watching the land, +a short quarter of a mile away. "He ought to fetch a good ransom." + +"Ay, but who would get it? You know how it was with one that Ibrahim +took two years ago. First there were months of delay, then, when +the ransom was settled, the pasha took four-fifths of it for himself, +and Ibrahim got far less than he would have done had he sold him +as a slave. The pashas here, and the sultans of the Moors, are all +alike; if they once meddle in an affair they take all the profit, +and think they do well by giving you a tithe of it. There are +plenty of wealthy Moors who are ready to pay well for a Christian +slave, especially when he is a good looking young fellow such +as this. He will fetch as much as all those eight sailors below. +They are only worth their labour, while this youngster will command +a fancy price. I know a dozen rich Moors in Tripoli or Tunis who +would be glad to have him; and we agreed that we would run down to +the African coast for awhile, for that galley has been altogether +too busy of late for our comfort, and will be all the more active +after this little affair; besides, people in these islands have +got so scared that one can't get within ten miles of any of them +now without seeing their signal smokes rising on the hills, and +finding, when they land, the villages deserted and stripped of +everything worth carrying away." + +This news was a disappointment to Gervaise. He had calculated that +he would be sold at one of the Levant ports, and had thought that +with his knowledge of Turkish he should have no great difficulty +in escaping from any master into whose hands he might fall, and +taking his chance of either seizing a fishing boat, or of making +his way in a trading ship to some district where the population was +a mixed one, and where trade was winked at between the merchants +there, and those at some of the Greek towns. To escape from Tunis +or Tripoli would be far more difficult; there, too, he would be +beyond the reach of the good offices of Suleiman Ali, who would, +he was sure, have done all in his power to bring about his release. +Of one thing he was determined: he would not return to Rhodes +without making every possible effort to recover Claudia's gage, as +he considered it absolutely incumbent on him as a knight to guard, +as something sacred, a gift so bestowed. The fancy of the corsair +to retain the jewel as a charm he regarded as a piece of the +greatest good fortune. Had it been thrown among the common spoil, +he would never have known to which of the crew it had fallen at +the division, still less have traced what became of it afterwards; +whereas now, for some time, at any rate, it was likely to remain +in the captain's possession. + +Had it not been for that, he would have attempted to escape at +the first opportunity, and such an opportunity could not fail to +present itself ere long, for he had but to manage to possess himself +of Moslem garments to be able to move about unquestioned in any +Turkish town. When it became dark he was shut up in the hold, which +was, he found, crowded with captives, as, in addition to the crew +of the wreck, between forty and fifty Greeks, for the most part boys +and young girls, had been carried off from the villages plundered. +It was pitch dark below, although the scuttle had been left open +in order to allow a certain amount of air to reach the captives; +Gervaise, therefore, felt his way about cautiously, and lay down as +soon as he found a clear space. Save an occasional moan or curse, +and the panting of those suffering from the heat and closeness of +the crowded hold, all was still. The majority of the captives had +been some time in their floating prison, and their first poignant +grief had settled down into a dull and despairing acceptance of +their fate; the sailors, newly captured, had for hours raved and +cursed, but, worn out by their struggle with the elements, and +their rage and grief, they had now fallen asleep. + +It was long before Gervaise dozed off. He was furious with himself +for having fallen into the trap; if he had, as he said to himself, +lain off the beach in the boat, and questioned the supposed +shipwrecked sailors, their inability to reply to him would have +at once put him on his guard; as it was, he had walked into the +snare as carelessly and confidently as a child might have done. +Even more than his own captivity, he regretted the death of his +three comrades, which he attributed to his own want of care. The +next morning he was again allowed on deck. The vessel was under +way, and her head was pointing south. To his surprise some of the +crew gave him a friendly greeting; he was unable to understand a +manner so at variance with their hatred to the Christians, until +one of them said to him in a mixture of Greek and Italian, "We have +heard from our countrymen who were in the boat with you, that they +received much kindness at your hands, and that of all the Christians +they had served under, you were the kindest master. Therefore, +it is but right now Allah has decreed that you in turn should be +a slave to the true believers, that you should receive the same +mercy you gave to Moslems when they were in your power." + +The captain came up as the man was speaking. He talked for a time +to the sailor, who then turned again to Gervaise. "The captain +says that he is told you were the commander of that galley; he has +questioned the eight men separately, and they all tell the same +story: and yet he cannot understand how so young a man should +command a galley manned by warriors famous for their deeds of arms, +even among us who are their foes." + +"This galley was an exception," Gervaise replied; "the knights on +board were all young, as they could be better spared than those +more experienced, at a time when your sultan is known to be preparing +for an attack on Rhodes." + +The captain was silent for a minute when this was interpreted to +him; he had at the time noticed and wondered at the youth of the +four knights, and the explanation seemed to him a reasonable one. + +"I wish I had known it," he said after a pause; "for had I done +so, I would have fought and captured her yesterday; I have half +a mind to go back and seek her now." + +He called up one of the ex slaves who was a native of Tripoli, and +who had now taken his place as a member of the crew, and asked +him a number of questions. Gervaise felt uncomfortable while the +man was answering. Fortunately, his rowers had agreed to say +nothing whatever of the destruction of the corsair fleet, of which +no word had as yet reached the pirates, deeming that, in their +anger at the news, the pirates might turn upon them for the part +that they had, however involuntarily, borne in it. + +As soon as he perceived that the captain entertained the idea of +returning to engage the galley, the man felt that if he were to +avoid a return into captivity he must deter him from taking such a +step. He therefore, in answer to his questions as to the strength +of the crew of the galley and the fighting powers of the knights, +reported the capture of the three vessels. The captain listened +almost incredulously to his statement, and, calling up another +two of the men, questioned them also as to the occurrence. Having +heard them, he turned away and paced the deck, in evident anger; +however, he gave no instructions for a change of course, and, to +the great satisfaction of the eight rescued slaves, the vessel +continued her course southward. + +As they neared the African coast, Gervaise kept an eager lookout, in +hopes that Visconti's galley might appear in sight. The captain's +temper had not recovered from the effect of the news of the capture +of three Moorish vessels by the galley commanded by Gervaise, +and the latter, seeing the mood he was in, kept forward so as to +avoid coming in contact with him. He had early taken the opportunity +of saying to one of the released galley slaves, "I pray you, if you +have any feeling of kindness towards me for the efforts I made to +alleviate your condition, say no word of my knowledge of Turkish, +and ask the others also to remain silent on this point." + +The man had nodded, and the request was observed by them all. + +The captain's irritation showed itself in his treatment of the other +captives. These were brought up every day from the hold, and kept +on deck until dark, as the price they would fetch in the slave market +in Tripoli would depend greatly upon their health and appearance; +but when the captain came near them he several times struck them +brutally, if they happened to be in his way. Gervaise had the +greatest difficulty in restraining his indignation, and, indeed, +only did so because he felt that his interference would but make +things worse for them. When at last the ship cast anchor off Tripoli, +the captain ordered the boats to be lowered. As he walked towards +the gangway, he happened to push against one of the captives, a +Greek girl of some ten years of age. With an angry exclamation he +struck her to the deck. Gervaise sprang forward. + +"You brute!" he exclaimed in English. "I have a good mind to throw +you overboard, and will do so the next time you strike one of +these children without cause." + +Infuriated by Gervaise's interference and threatening attitude, the +corsair drew his long knife; but before he could strike, Gervaise +caught his wrist; the knife fell from his hand, and Gervaise kicked +it through the open gangway into the sea. The captain shouted to +his men to seize the Christian, but the young knight's blood was +up now. The first man who came at him he seized by the sash round +his waist, and threw overboard; the two next he stretched on the +deck with blows from his clenched fist. Some of the others now +drew their weapons, but the captain shouted to them to sheath them. + +"Fools!" he yelled. "Is it not enough that your cowardice has +already cost us the lives of three knights, whose capture would +have brought us a big sum? Throw him down and bind him. What! are +fifty of you afraid of one unarmed man? No wonder these Christians +capture our ships, if this is the mettle of our crews!" + +Goaded by his words, the men made a general rush upon Gervaise, +and, in spite of his desperate efforts, threw him on to the deck +and bound him; then the captain, seizing a heavy stick in his left +hand, his right being still powerless, showered blows upon him +until Gervaise almost lost consciousness. "Throw some water over +the dog," the corsair said, as he threw down the stick, panting +with his exertions; and then, without waiting to see if his order +was obeyed, he took his place in the boat, and was rowed ashore. + +As soon as he had left, three or four of the ex galley slaves +carried Gervaise into the shade of the sail. The sailors, several +of whom bore signs of the late struggle, looked on sullenly, but +offered no opposition when the men took off the ropes and raised +him into a sitting posture against the mast. He had not entirely +lost consciousness, and was now fast recovering himself. + +"Is there anything we can do for you?" one of the men asked in +Italian. + +"No I shall soon be all right again, although I am bruised all +over, and shall be stiff for a day or two. You had best leave me +now, or you will incur the enmity of these fellows." + +Gervaise was indeed bruised from his neck to his heels. Even in +his passion the pirate had avoided striking him on the head, as +a disfiguring mark on the face would diminish his value. Sitting +there, he congratulated himself that he had been beaten with a stick +and not with a whip; a stick is a weapon, and he did not feel the +same sense of dishonour that he would have experienced had he been +beaten with a whip. That such might be his lot in slavery he +recognised. The backs of Caretto and his two companions were seamed +with the marks inflicted by the gang master's whip, and he could +scarce hope to escape the same treatment; but at present he hardly +felt a slave. There was another reflection that to some extent +mitigated the pain of his bruises; the pirate captain held his +treasured gage, and it was his fixed determination to recover it. +The man had at first in a rough way treated him fairly, and had +allowed him more liberty than the other captives, and he would +have felt reluctant to take extreme measure against him to recover +the gage. Now he was not only free from any sense of obligation, +but had a heavy score to settle with him. + +After a time he got up and walked stiffly and painfully up and +down the deck, knowing that this was the best plan to prevent the +limbs from stiffening. The corsair did not return until night set +in; he was accompanied by an Arab, whose dress and appearance +showed that he was a person of importance. The other slaves had +all been sent below, but Gervaise still remained on deck, as the +mate had not cared to risk another conflict by giving him orders +in the absence of the captain. As the pirate stepped on deck he +ordered some torches to be brought. + +"This is the Christian I spoke of," he said to the Arab, pointing +to Gervaise, who was leaning carelessly against the bulwark. + +"He is, as you see, capable of hard work of any kind; his strength +is prodigious, for it took ten of my best men to bind him this +morning." + +"Why did you wish to bind him?" the Arab asked coldly; "you told me +that although so strong he was of a quiet disposition, and would +make a good household slave." + +"I struck a slave girl who stood in my way," the captain said, +"and he came at me so suddenly that I had to call upon the men to +bind him. He threw one of them overboard, and with his naked hands +knocked down two others; and, as I have told you, it took all the +efforts of eight or ten more before they could overcome him." + +The Arab took a torch from one of the sailors, walked across to +Gervaise, who was naked from the waist upwards, his upper garments +having been torn into shreds in the struggle, and examined him +closely. + +"And then you beat him," he said, turning to the captain. + +"Certainly I beat him. Do you think that a slave is to mutiny on +board my ship, and escape unpunished?" + +The Arab, without replying, again inspected Gervaise. + +"You ask a large sum for him," he said. + +"I should ask twice as much," the captain replied, "if it were +not for the regulation that one slave from each cargo brought in +belongs to the sultan, and his officers would as a matter of course +choose this fellow, for the others are merely such as are sold +in the market every day. This man is one of the accursed Order of +Rhodes, and would fetch a ransom many times greater than the sum +I ask for him, only I have not the time to wait for months until +the affair could be arranged." + +"And, moreover, Hassan," the Arab said grimly, "it has doubtless +not escaped you that as the Sultan of Turkey is fitting out an +expedition to destroy the community of Rhodes, the chance of their +ransoming their comrade is a very slight one." + +"Threatened men live long," the captain said. "The sultan has been +talking of attacking them for years, and something has always +happened to prevent his carrying out his intention. It may be the +same again." + +"I will take him," the Arab said shortly. "Here is a purse with the +sum you named; count it, and see that it is right." As he stood +apart while the pirate counted out the money, the eight released +slaves came up in a body, and one of them, bowing low before the +merchant, said, + +"My lord, we have long been slaves of the Christian knights +at Rhodes, and have worked in their galleys. We were rescued the +other day when this knight was taken prisoner. Our life has been +a hard one. We have borne toil, and hardship, and blows, the heat +of the sun by day, and the damp by night, but we would humbly +represent to you that since we were placed in the galley commanded +by this knight our lot has been made bearable by his humanity and +kindness. He erected an awning to shade us from the sun's rays, +and to shelter us from the night dews. He provided good food for +us. He saw that we were not worked beyond our strength, and he +forbade us being struck, unless for good cause. Therefore, my lord, +now that misfortune has fallen upon him, we venture to represent +to you the kindness with which he has treated us, in the hope that +it may please you to show him such mercy as he showed to us." + +"You have done well," the Arab said, "and your words shall not be +forgotten. When you land tomorrow, inquire for the house of Isaac +Ben Ibyn. You are doubtless penniless, and I may be able to obtain +employment for those of you who may stop at Tripoli, and to assist +those who desire to take passage to their homes elsewhere. We are +commanded to be grateful to those who befriend us, and as you have +shown yourselves to be so, it is right that I, an humble servant +of the Great One, should in His name reward you." + +Motioning to Gervaise to follow him, the Arab stepped into his +boat. Gervaise turned to the men, and said in Italian, "Thanks, +my friends, you have well discharged any debt that you may think +you owe me. Will you tell that villain" -- and he pointed to the +captain threateningly -- "I warn him that some day I will kill him +like a dog!" Then, turning, he stepped into the bow of the boat, +and the two men who rowed it at once pushed off. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII A KIND MASTER + + +When the boat reached the shore the Arab handed a long bernouse to +Gervaise, signed to him to pull the hood well over his head, and +then led the way through the streets until he stopped at a large +house, standing in a quiet quarter of the town. He struck on the +door with his hand, and it was at once opened by a black slave. + +"Call Muley," the Arab said. + +The slave hurried away, and returned in a minute with a man somewhat +past middle age, and dressed in a style that indicated that he +was a trusted servant. + +"Muley," his master said, "I have bought this Christian who has +been brought in by Hassan the corsair. He is one of the knights +who are the terrors of our coasts, but is, from what I hear, of a +kind and humane disposition. I am told that he was a commander of +one of their galleys, and though I should not have believed it +had I only Hassan's word, I have heard from others that it was so. +My wife has long desired to have a Christian slave, and as Allah +has blessed my efforts it was but right that I should gratify her, +though in truth I do not know what work I shall set him to do +at present. Let him first have a bath, and see that he is clad +decently, then let him have a good meal. I doubt if he has had one +since he was captured. He has been sorely beaten by the corsair, +and from no fault of his own, but only because he opposed the man's +brutality to a child slave. If any of his wounds need ointment, +see that he has it. When all is ready, bring him to the door +of my apartments, in order that I may show to my wife that I have +gratified her whim." + +Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow Muley, who was the head +of his household. Gervaise resisted the impulse to thank his new +master, and followed in silence. + +He was first taken to a bathroom, furnished with an abundance of +hot and cold water. Muley uttered an exclamation as, on Gervaise +throwing off his bernouse, he saw that his flesh was a mass of +bruises. After filling the bath with hot water, he motioned to +Gervaise to get in, and lie there until he returned. It was some +time before he came back, bringing a pot of ointment and some +bandages. It was only on the body that the wounds needed dressing, +for here the blows had fallen on the naked skin. When he had dressed +them, Muley went out and returned with some Turkish garments, +consisting of a pair of baggy trousers of yellow cotton, a white +shirt of the same material, and a sleeveless jacket of blue cloth +embroidered with yellow trimming; a pair of yellow slippers completed +the costume. Muley now took him into another room, where he set +before him a dish of rice with a meat gravy, a large piece of bread, +and a wooden spoon. + +Gervaise ate the food with a deep feeling of thankfulness for the +fate that had thrown him into such good hands. Then, after taking +a long draught of water, he rose to his feet and followed Muley into +the entrance hall. The latter stopped at a door on the opposite +side, knocked at it, and then motioned to Gervaise to take off +his slippers. The door was opened by the Arab himself. + +"Enter," he said courteously, and led Gervaise into an apartment +where a lady and two girls were sitting on a divan. They were +slightly veiled; but, as Gervaise afterwards learnt, Ben Ibyn was +not a Moor, but a Berber, a people who do not keep their women +in close confinement as do the Moors, but allow them to go abroad +freely without being entirely muffled up. + +"Khadja," the merchant said, "this is the Christian slave I purchased +today. You have for a long time desired one, but not until now +have I found one who would, I thought, satisfy your expectations. +What think you of him?" + +"He is a noble looking youth truly, Isaac, with his fair, wavy hair, +his grey eyes, and white skin; truly, all my neighbours will envy +me such a possession. I have often seen Christian slaves before, but +they have always been broken down and dejected looking creatures; +this one bears himself like a warrior rather than a slave." + +"He is a warrior; he is one of those terrible knights of Rhodes +whose very name is a terror to the Turks, and whose galleys are +feared even by our boldest corsairs. He must be of approved valour, +for he was commander of one of these galleys." + +The girls looked with amazement at Gervaise. They had often heard +tales of the capture of ships that had sailed from Tripoli, by +the galleys of the Christian knights, and had pictured those fierce +warriors as of almost supernatural strength and valour. That this +youth, whose upper lip was but shaded with a slight moustache, +should be one of them, struck them as being almost incredible. + +"He does not look ferocious, father," one of them said. "He looks +pleasant and good tempered, as if he could injure no one." + +"And yet this morning, daughter, he braved, unarmed, the anger +of Hassan the corsair, on the deck of his own ship; and when the +pirate called upon his men to seize him he threw one overboard, +struck two more on to the deck, and it needed eight men to overpower +him." + +"I hope he won't get angry with us!" the younger girl exclaimed. +Gervaise could not suppress a laugh, and then, turning to +the merchant, said in Turkish, "I must ask your pardon for having +concealed from you my knowledge of your tongue. I kept the secret +from all on board the corsair, and meant to have done the same +here, deeming that if none knew that I spoke the language it would +greatly aid me should I ever see an opportunity of making my +escape; but, Ben Ibyn, you have behaved so kindly to me that I feel +it would not be honourable to keep it a secret from you, and to +allow you and the ladies to talk freely before me, thinking that +I was altogether ignorant of what you were saying." + +"You have acted well and honourably," Ben Ibyn said, putting a +hand on his shoulder kindly. "We have heard much of the character +of the Order, and that though valiant in battle, your knights +are courteous and chivalrous, deeming a deceitful action to be +unworthy of them, and binding themselves by their vows to succour +the distressed and to be pitiful to the weak. We have heard that +our wounded are tended by them in your hospitals with as much care +as men of their own race and religion, and that in many things the +knights were to be admired even by those who were their foes. I +see now that these reports were true, and that although, as you +say, it might be of advantage to you that none should know you +speak Arabic, yet it is from a spirit of honourable courtesy you +have now told us that you do so. + +"I did not tell you, wife," he went on, turning to her, "that +the reason why he bearded Hassan today was because the corsair +brutally struck a little female captive; thus, you see, he, at the +risk of his life, and when himself a captive, carried out his vows +to protect the defenceless. And now, wife, there is one thing you +must know. For some time, at any rate, you must abandon the idea +of exciting the envy of your friends by exhibiting your Christian +captive to them. As you are aware, the sultan has the choice of any +one slave he may select from each batch brought in, and assuredly +he would choose this one, did it come to his ears, or to the ears +of one of his officers, that a Christian knight had been landed. +For this reason Hassan sold him to me for a less sum than he +would otherwise have demanded, and we must for some time keep his +presence here a secret. My idea is that he shall remain indoors +until we move next week into our country house, where he will be +comparatively free from observation." + +"Certainly, Isaac. I would not on any account that he should be +handed over to the sultan, for he would either be put into the +galleys or have to labour in the streets." + +"I will tell Muley to order the other slaves to say nothing outside +of the fresh arrival, so for the present there is no fear of its +being talked about in the town. Hassan will, for his own sake, keep +silent on the matter. I have not yet asked your name," he went +on, turning to Gervaise. + +"My name is Gervaise Tresham; but it will be easier for you to call +me by my first name only." + +"Then, Gervaise, it were well that you retired to rest at once, +for I am sure that you sorely need it." He touched a bell on the +table, and told Muley, when he appeared, to conduct Gervaise to the +place where he was to sleep, which was, he had already ordered, +apart from the quarters of the other slaves. + +"The young fellow is a mass of bruises," Ben Ibyn said to his +wife, when the door closed behind Gervaise. "Hassan beat him so +savagely, after they had overpowered and bound him, that he well +nigh killed him." + +An exclamation of indignation burst from the wife and daughters. + +"Muley has seen to his wounds," he went on, "and he will doubtless +be cured in a few days. And now, wife, that your wish is gratified, +and I have purchased a Christian slave for you, may I ask what you +are going to do with him?" + +"I am sure I do not know," she said in a tone of perplexity. "I had +thought of having him to hand round coffee when my friends call, +and perhaps to work in the garden, but I did not think that he +would be anything like this." + +"That is no reason why he should not do so," Ben Ibyn said. "These +Christians, I hear, treat their women as if they were superior +beings, and feel it no dishonour to wait upon them; I think you +cannot do better than carry out your plan. It is certain there is +no sort of work that he would prefer to it; therefore, let it be +understood that he is to be your own personal attendant, and that +when you have no occasion for his services, he will work in the +garden. Only do not for the present let any of your friends see +him; they would spread the news like wildfire, and in a week every +soul in the town would know that you had a good looking Christian +slave, and the sultan's officer would be sending for me to ask how +I obtained him. We must put a turban on him. Any one who caught a +glimpse of that hair of his, however far distant, would know that +he was a Frank." + +"We might stain his face and hands with walnut juice," Khadja said, +"he would pass as a Nubian. Some of them are tall and strong." + +"A very good thought, wife; it would be an excellent disguise. So +shall it be." He touched the bell again. "Tell Muley I would speak +with him. Muley," he went on, when the steward appeared, "have you +said aught to any of the servants touching the Christian?" + +"No, my lord; you gave me no instructions about it, and I thought +it better to wait until the morning, when I could ask you." + +"You did well. We have determined to stain his skin, and at present +he will pass as a Nubian. This will avoid all questions and talk." + +"But, my lord, they will wonder that he cannot speak their tongue." + +"He must pass among them as a mute; but indeed he speaks Arabic as +well as we do, Muley." + +The man uttered an exclamation of surprise. + +"He had intended to conceal his knowledge," Ben Ibyn went on, "which +would have been politic; but when he found that my intentions +were kind, he told us that he knew our tongue, and now revealed +his knowledge, as he thought it would be dishonourable to listen +to our talk, leaving us under the impression that he could not +understand us." + +"Truly these Christians are strange men," Muley said. "This +youth, who has not yet grown the hair on his face, is nevertheless +commander of a war galley. He is ready to risk his life on behalf +of a slave, and can strike down men with his unarmed hand; he is +as gentle in his manner as a woman; and now it seems he can talk +Arabic, and although it was in his power to keep this secret he +tells it rather than overhear words that are not meant for his +ear. Truly they are strange people, the Franks. I will prepare some +stain in the morning, my lord, and complete his disguise before +any of the others see him." + +The next morning Muley told Gervaise that his master thought that +it would be safer and more convenient for him to pass as a dumb +Nubian slave. Gervaise thought the plan an excellent one; and he +was soon transformed, Muley shaving that part of the hair that +would have shown below the turban, and then staining him a deep +brownish black, from the waist upwards, together with his feet and +his legs up to his knee, and darkening his eyebrows, eyelashes, +and moustache. + +"Save that your lips lack the thickness, and your nose is straighter +than those of Nubians, no one would doubt but that you were one +of that race; and this is of little consequence, as many of them +are of mixed blood, and, though retaining their dark colour, have +features that in their outline resemble those of the Arabs. Now I +will take you to Ben Ibyn, so that he may judge whether any further +change is required before the servants and slaves see you." + +"That is excellent," the merchant said, when he had carefully +inspected Gervaise, "I should pass you myself without recognizing +you. Now you can take him into the servants' quarters, Muley, and +tell them that he is a new slave whom I have purchased, and that +henceforth it will be his duty to wait upon my wife, to whom I have +presented him as her special attendant, and that he will accompany +her and my daughters when they go abroad to make their purchases +or visit their friends. Give some reason, if you can think of one, +why you have bestowed him in a chamber separate from the rest." + +Gervaise at once took up his new duties, and an hour later, carrying +a basket, followed them into the town. It was strange to him thus +to be walking among the fanatical Moors, who, had they known the +damage that he had inflicted upon their galleys, would have torn +him in pieces. None gave him, however, more than a passing look. +Nubian slaves were no uncommon sight in the town, and in wealthy +Moorish families were commonly employed in places of trust, and +especially as attendants in the harems. The ladies were now as +closely veiled as the Moorish women, it being only in the house +that they followed the Berber customs. Gervaise had learnt from +Muley that Ben Ibyn was one of the richest merchants in Tripoli, +trading direct with Egypt, Syria, and Constantinople, besides +carrying on a large trade with the Berber tribes in the interior. +He returned to the house with his basket full of provisions, +and having handed these over to the cook, he went to the private +apartments, as Khadja had requested him to do. Here she and +her daughters asked him innumerable questions as to his country +and its customs, and then about Rhodes and the Order to which he +belonged. Their surprise was great when they heard that the knights +were bound to celibacy. + +"But why should they not marry if they like? Why should they not +have wives, children, and homes like other people?" Khadja asked. + +"It is that they may devote their whole lives to their work. Their +home is the convent at Rhodes, or at one of the commanderies +scattered over Europe, where they take charge of the estates of +the Order." + +"But why should they not marry then, Gervaise? At Rhodes there might +be danger for women and children, but when they return to Europe +to take charge of the estates, surely they would do their duty no +worse for having wives?" + +Gervaise smiled. + +"I did not make the rules of the Order, lady, but I have thought +myself that although, so long as they are doing military work at +the convent, it is well that they should not marry, yet there is +no good reason why, when established in commanderies at home, they +should not, like other knights and nobles, marry if it so pleases +them." + +In the evening the merchant returned from his stores, which +were situated down by the port. Soon after he came in he sent +for Gervaise. "There is a question I had intended to ask you last +night," he said, "but it escaped me. More than two months since +there sailed from this port and others many vessels -- not the +ships of the State, but corsairs. In all, more than twenty ships +started, with the intention of making a great raid upon the coast +of Italy. No word has since been received of them, and their friends +here are becoming very uneasy, the more so as we hear that neither +at Tunis nor Algiers has any news been received. Have you heard at +Rhodes of a Moorish fleet having been ravaging the coast of Italy?" + +"Have you any friends on board the ships that sailed from here, or +any interest in the venture, Ben Ibyn?" + +The merchant shook his head. "We Berbers," he said, "are not like +the Moors, and have but little to do with the sea, save by the +way of trade. For myself, I regret that these corsair ships are +constantly putting out. Were it not for them and their doings we +might trade with the ports of France, of Spain, and Italy, and be +on good terms with all. There is no reason why, because our faiths +are different, we should be constantly fighting. It is true that +the Turks threaten Europe, and are even now preparing to capture +Rhodes; but this is no question of religion. The Turks are warlike +and ambitious; they have conquered Syria, and war with Egypt and +Persia; but the Moorish states are small, they have no thought of +conquest, and might live peaceably with Europe were it not for +the hatred excited against them by the corsairs." + +"In that case I can tell you the truth. Thirteen of those ships +were taken into Rhodes as prizes; the other eleven were burnt. +Not one of the fleet escaped." + +Exclamations of surprise broke from Ben Ibyn, his wife, and daughters. + +"I am astonished, indeed," the merchant said. "It was reported +here that the Genoese galleys were all laid up, and it was thought +that they would be able to sweep the seas without opposition, and +to bring home vast spoil and many captives, both from the ships +they took and from many of the villages and small towns of the +coast. How came such a misfortune to happen to them? It will create +consternation here when it is known, for although it was not a +state enterprise, the sultan himself and almost all the rich Moors +embarked money in the fitting out of the ships, and were to have +shares in the spoil taken. How happened it that so strong a fleet +was all taken or destroyed, without even one vessel being able to +get away to carry home the news of the disaster?" + +"Fortune was against them," Gervaise said. "Three ships on their +way up were captured by a galley of our Order, and her commander +having obtained news of the whereabouts of the spot where the +corsairs were to rendezvous, found them all lying together in a +small inlet, and launched against them a number of fishing boats +fitted out as fire ships. The corsairs, packed closely together, +were unable to avoid them, and, as I told you, eleven of their +ships were burnt, four were run ashore to avoid the flames, while +six, trying to make their way out, were captured by the galley, +aided by the three prizes that were taken and which the knights +had caused to be manned by Sards." + +"The ways of Allah the All Seeing are wonderful," the merchant said. +"It was indeed a marvellous feat for one galley thus to destroy +a great fleet." + +"It was the result of good fortune rather than skill and valour," +Gervaise said. + +"Nay, nay; let praise be given where it is due. It was a marvellous +feat; and although there is good or bad fortune in every event, +such a deed could not have been performed, and would not even have +been thought of, save by a great commander. Who was the knight +who thus with one galley alone destroyed a strongly manned fleet, +from which great things had been looked for?" + +Gervaise hesitated. "It was a young knight," he said, "of but +little standing in the Order, and whose name is entirely unknown +outside its ranks." + +"By this time it must be well known," Ben Ibyn said; "and it will +soon be known throughout Christendom, and will be dreaded by every +Moor. What was it?" + +Gervaise again hesitated. + +"I would not have told you the story at all, Ben Ibyn, had I supposed +you would have cared to inquire into the matter. Of course, I will +tell you the name if you insist upon it, but I would much rather +you did not ask." + +"But why?" the merchant asked, in surprise. "If I hear it not from +you, I shall assuredly hear it ere long from others, for it will +be brought by traders who are in communication with Italy. I cannot +understand why you should thus hesitate about telling me the name +of this commander. When known it will doubtless be cursed by +thousands of Moorish wives and mothers; but we Berbers are another +race. None of our friends or kindred were on board the fleet; and +we traders have rather reason to rejoice, for, in the first place, +so severe a lesson will keep the corsairs in their ports for a +long time; and in the second, had the fleet succeeded according +to general expectation, so great a store of European goods would +have been brought home that the market would have been glutted, +and the goods in our storehouses would have lost all their value. +What reason, then, can you possibly have in refusing to tell me +the name of the commander who has won for himself such credit and +glory?" + +Gervaise saw that Ben Ibyn was seriously annoyed at what he deemed +his unaccountable obstinacy. + +"I will tell you, Ben Ibyn, rather than excite your displeasure, +though I would much have preferred not to do so, for you speak +so much more highly of the affair than it merits. I had myself the +honour of being in command of that galley." + +The ladies broke into exclamations of surprise, while the merchant +regarded him with grave displeasure. + +"I had thought you truthful," he said; "but this passes all belief. +Dost tell me that a beardless youth could with one galley overcome +a great fleet, commanded by the most noted captains on our coast?" + +"I thought that you would not believe me," Gervaise said quietly; +"and, therefore, would have much preferred to keep silence, knowing +that I had no means of supporting my claim. That was not the only +reason; the other was, that already a great deal too much has been +said about an affair in which, as I have told you, I owed everything +to good fortune, and am heartily sick of receiving what I consider +altogether undue praise. Ah!" he exclaimed suddenly, "the thought has +just occurred to me of a way by which you can obtain confirmation +of my story; and, as I value your good opinion and would not +be regarded as a boaster and a liar, I entreat you to take it. I +heard you tell the eight men who were rowers in my boat when I was +captured, to call upon you today, that you might do something for +them." + +"They came this morning to my store," the merchant said. "They told +me their wishes. I promised them that I would make inquiry about +ships sailing East; and they are to come to me again tomorrow." + +"Then, sir, I beseech you to suffer me to go down with you to your +stores and meet them there. The galley of which I was in command +at the time I was captured is the same as that in which a few weeks +before I fought the corsairs, and these eight men were with me +at that time. I begged them for my sake to maintain an absolute +silence as to that affair, and I have no doubt that they have done +so, for in the fury the news would excite, they might fall victims +to the first outburst, though, of course, wholly innocent of any +share in the misfortune. Did you question them without my being +present, they might still keep silent, fearing to injure me. But +if, before you begin to do so, I tell them that they can speak +the truth with reference to me, they will, I am sure. confirm my +story, incredible as it may now appear to you." + +"That is a fair offer," the merchant said gravely, "and I accept +it, for it may be that I have been too hasty, and I trust it may +prove so. I would rather find myself to be in fault than that the +esteem with which you have inspired me should prove to be misplaced. +We will speak no further on the subject now. I have not yet asked +you how it is that you come to speak our language so well." + +Gervaise related how he had studied with Suleiman Ali, and had +escorted him to Syria and received his ransom. + +"I had hoped," he said, "that the corsair would have taken me +to Syria, for there I could have communicated with Suleiman, who +would, I am sure, have given me such shelter and aid as he was +able, in the event of my making my escape from slavery and finding +myself unable to leave by sea." + +The next day Gervaise went with Ben Ibyn to his stores. The eight +men arrived shortly afterwards, and the merchant, in the presence +of Gervaise, questioned them as to whether they knew anything of +a misfortune that was said to have befallen some ships that had +sailed for the coast of Italy. The men, surprised at the question, +glanced at Gervaise, who said, "Tell Ben Ibyn the truth; it will +do neither you nor me any harm, and will be mentioned by him to +no one else." + +Accordingly the story was told. Ben Ibyn listened gravely. + +"It was the will of Allah," he said, when it was concluded. "I +have wronged you, Gervaise, but your tale seemed too marvellous +to be true. + +"Do not speak of this to others;" he went on to the eight men. +"Now as to yourselves. For the four of you who desire to return +to Syria I have taken passage in a trader that sails tomorrow and +will touch at Joppa and Acre. Here is money to provide yourselves +with garments and to carry you to your homes. For you," he said +to two who were natives of the town, "I can myself find employment +here, and if your conduct is good, you will have no reason to +regret taking service with me. The two of you who desire to go to +Smyrna I will give passage there in a ship which will sail next +week; in the meantime, here is money for your present wants." + +Two days later the merchant's family moved to his house two miles +outside the town, and here Gervaise remained for six months. His +life was not an unpleasant one; he was treated with great kindness +by the merchant and his wife, his duties were but slight, and he +had no more labour to perform in the garden than he cared to do. +Nevertheless, he felt that he would rather have fallen into the +hands of a less kind master, for it seemed to him that it would +be an act almost of treachery to escape from those who treated him +as a friend; moreover, at the country house he was not in a position +to frame any plans for escape, had he decided upon attempting it, +nor could he have found out when Hassan made one of his occasional +visits to the port. + +One evening the merchant returned from the town accompanied by one +of the sultan's officers and four soldiers. Ben Ibyn was evidently +much depressed and disturbed; he told Muley as he entered, to fetch +Gervaise. When the latter, in obedience to the order, came in from +the garden, the officer said in Italian, "It having come to the +ears of the sultan my master that the merchant Ben Ibyn has ventured, +contrary to the law, to purchase a Christian slave brought secretly +into the town, he has declared the slave to be forfeited and I am +commanded to take him at once to the slaves' quarter." + +"I am at the sultan's orders," Gervaise said, bowing his head. +"My master has been a kind one, and I am grateful to him for his +treatment of me." + +Gervaise, although taken aback by this sudden change in his fortunes, +was not so cast down as he might otherwise have been; he would +now be free to carry out any plan for escape that he might devise, +and by his being addressed in Italian it was evident to him that +his knowledge of Turkish was unsuspected. When among the other +slaves he had always maintained his character of a mute; and it was +only when alone in his master's family that he had spoken at all. +He had no doubt that his betrayal was due to one of the gardeners, +who had several times shown him signs of ill will, being doubtless +jealous of the immunity he enjoyed from hard labour, and who must, +he thought, have crept up and overheard some conversation; but in +that case it was singular that the fact of his knowledge of Turkish +had not been mentioned. Gervaise afterwards learned that Ben Ibyn +had been fined a heavy sum for his breach of the regulations. + +He was now placed between the soldiers, and marched down to the +town, without being allowed to exchange a word with the merchant. +On his arrival there he was taken to the slaves' quarter; here his +clothes were stripped from him, and he was given in their place a +ragged shirt and trousers, and then turned into a room where some +fifty slaves were lying. Of these about half were Europeans, the +rest malefactors who had been condemned to labour. + +The appearance of all was miserable in the extreme; they were +clothed in rags, and the faces of the Europeans had a dull, hopeless +look that told alike of their misery and of their despair of any +escape from it. They looked up listlessly as he entered, and then +an Italian said, "Cospetto, comrade; but I know not whether your +place is with us, or with the Moslems across there. As far as colour +goes I should put you down as a Nubian; but your hair is of a hue +that consorts but badly with that of your flesh." + +"I am an Englishman," Gervaise replied; "but I have been passing +under a disguise which has unfortunately been detected, so you +see here I am." + +The mystery explained, his questioner had no further interest in +the matter, and Gervaise, picking out a vacant place on the stone +floor, sat down and looked round him. The room, although large, +was roughly built, and had doubtless been erected with a view to +its present purpose. There were only a few windows; and these +were small, strongly barred, and twelve feet above the floor. + +"Not easy to get out of them," Gervaise said to himself "at least, +not easy without aid; and with these Moslems here it is clear that +nothing can be done." + +They were roused at daybreak next morning, and were taken out +to their work under the guard of six armed Moors, two overseers, +provided with long whips, accompanied them. The work consisted of +cleaning the streets and working on the roads, and at times of +carrying stones for the use of the masons employed in building +an addition to the palace of the sultan. This was the work to which +the gang was set that morning, and it was not long before the +vigour with which Gervaise worked, and the strength he displayed in +moving the heavy stones, attracted the attention of the overseers +and of the head of the masons. + +"That is a rare good fellow you have got there, that black with +the curious hair," the latter said. "What is the man? I never +saw one like him." + +"He is a Christian," one of the overseers said. "He was smuggled +into the town and sold to Ben Ibyn the Berber, who, to conceal +the matter, dyed him black; but it got to the ears of the sultan, +and he had him taken from the Berber, and brought here; I have no +doubt the merchant has been squeezed rarely." + +"Well, that is a good fellow to work," the other said. "He has +just moved a stone, single handed, that it would have taken half +a dozen of the others to lift. I wish you would put him regularly +on this job; any one will do to sweep the streets; but a fellow +like that will be of real use here, especially when the wall rises +a bit higher." + +"It makes no difference to me," the overseer said. "I will give +orders when I go down that he shall be always sent up with whichever +gang comes here." + +The head mason, who was the chief official of the work, soon saw +that Gervaise not only possessed strength, but knowledge of the +manner in which the work should be done. + +Accustomed as he had been to direct the slaves at work on the +fortifications at Rhodes, he had learned the best methods of moving +massive stones, and setting them in the places that they were to +occupy. At the end of the day the head mason told one of the slaves +who spoke Italian to inquire of Gervaise whether he had ever been +employed on such work before. Gervaise replied that he had been +engaged in the construction of large buildings. + +"I thought so," the officer said to the overseer; "the way he uses +his lever shows that he knows what he is doing. Most of the +slaves are worth nothing; but I can see that this fellow will prove +a treasure to us." + +Gervaise returned to the prison well satisfied with his day's +work. The labour, hard though it was, was an absolute pleasure to +him. There was, moreover, nothing degrading in it, and while the +overseers had plied their whips freely on the backs of many of his +companions, he had not only escaped, but had, he felt, succeeded +in pleasing his masters. The next morning when the gangs were +drawn up in the yard before starting for work, he was surprised +at being ordered to leave the one to which he belonged and to fall +in with another, and was greatly pleased when he found that this +took its way to the spot at which they were at work on the previous +day. + +At the end of the week, when the work of the day was finished, the +head mason came down to the prison and spoke to the governor; a +few minutes afterwards Gervaise was called out. The governor was +standing in the courtyard with an interpreter. + +"This officer tells me that you are skilled in masonry," the governor +said, "and has desired that you shall be appointed overseer of the +gang whose duty it is to move the stones, saying he is sure that +with half the slaves now employed you would get as much work done +as at present. Have you anything to say?" + +"I thank you, my lord, and this officer," Gervaise replied. "I will +do my best; but I would submit to you that it would be better if +I could have the same slaves always with me, instead of their being +changed every day; I could then instruct them in their work. I +would also submit that it were well to pick men with some strength +for this labour, for many are so weak that they are well nigh useless +in the moving of heavy weights; and lastly, I would humbly submit +to you that if men are to do good work they must be fed. This +work is as heavy as that in the galleys, and the men there employed +receive extra rations to strengthen them; and I could assuredly +obtain far better results if the gang employed upon this labour +were to receive a somewhat larger supply of food." + +"The fellow speaks boldly," the governor said to the head mason, +when the reply was translated. + +"There is reason in what he says, my lord. Many of the slaves, +though fit for the light labour of cleaning the streets, are of +very little use to us, and even the whip of the drivers cannot get +more than a momentary effort from them. If you can save twenty-five +men's labour for other work, it will pay to give more food to the +other twenty-five. I should let this man pick out his gang. He has +worked in turn with all of them, and must know what each can do; +besides, it is necessary that he should have men who can understand +his orders." + +Gervaise accordingly was allowed to pick out his gang; and he chose +those whom he had observed to be the strongest and most handy at +the work. + +"You will be responsible," the governor said to him, "for the masons +being supplied with stone, and if you fail you will be punished +and put to other labour." + +So far from there being any falling off in the work, the head mason +found that, even though the walls began to rise and the labour of +transporting the stones into their positions became greater, the +masons were never kept standing. The men, finding their position +improved, both in the matter of food and in the immunity they +enjoyed from blows, worked cheerfully and well. Gervaise did not +content himself with giving orders, but worked at the heaviest +jobs, and, little by little, introduced many of the appliances +used by the skilled masons of Rhodes in transporting and lifting +heavy stones. Gradually his own position improved: he was treated +as an overseer, and was permitted to sleep under an arcade that +ran along one side of the yard, instead of being confined in the +close and stifling cell. His dye had long since worn off. + +One day as he was going up with his gang under charge of the usual +guards to the building, he saw Hassan, who grinned maliciously. + +"Ah, ah, Christian dog!" he said; "you threatened me, and I have +not forgotten it. The last time I was here I made it known to an +officer of the sultan that Ben Ibyn had a Christian slave who had +been smuggled in; and here you are. I hope you like the change. +Look, I have still got your amulet, and it has brought me better +luck than it did you. I have been fortunate ever since, and no +money could buy it from me." + +He had been walking close to Gervaise as he spoke, and one of the +guards pushed him roughly aside. + +Time passed on. One day on his return from work a well dressed Moor +met him as the gang broke up in the courtyard. + +"I have permission to speak to you," he said to Gervaise, and drew +him aside. "Know, 0 Christian, that I have received a letter from +Suleiman Ali, of Syria. He tells me that he has heard from Ben Ibyn, +the Berber, that you are a slave, and has asked me to inquire of +the sultan the price that he will take for your ransom, expressing +his willingness to pay whatever may be demanded, and charging me +to defray the sum and to make arrangements by which you may return +to Europe. This I am willing to do, knowing Suleiman Ali by report +as a wealthy man and an honourable one. I saw the sultan yesterday. +He told me that I should have an answer this morning as to the +ransom that he would take. When I went to him again today, he said +that he had learnt from the governor of the prison and from the +head mason that you were almost beyond price, that you had been +raised to the position of superintendent of the slaves employed in +the building of his palace, and that you were a man of such skill +that he would not part with you at any price until the work was +finished. After that he would sell you; but he named a price threefold +that at which the very best white slave in Tripoli would be valued. +However, from the way in which Suleiman Ali wrote, I doubt not that +he would pay it, great as it is, for he speaks of you in terms +of affection, and I would pay the money could you be released at +once. As it is, however, I shall write to him, and there will be +ample time for an answer to be received from him before the building +is finished." + +"Truly I am deeply thankful to my good friend, Suleiman Ali; but for +reasons of my own I am not desirous of being ransomed at present, +especially at such a cost, which I should feel bound in honour to +repay to him; therefore, I pray you to write to him, saying that +while I thank him from my heart for his kindness, I am not able +to avail myself of it. In the first place, I am well treated +here, and my position is not an unpleasant one; secondly, the sum +required for ransom is altogether preposterous; thirdly, I am not +without hopes that I may some day find other means of freeing +myself without so great a sacrifice; and lastly, that I have a +reason which I cannot mention, why, at present, I would not quit +Tripoli, even were I free tomorrow. You can tell him that this is +the reason which, most of all, weighs with me. Do not, however, I +pray you, let the sultan know that I have refused to be ransomed, +for he might think I was meditating an escape, and would order +extra precautions to be taken to prevent my doing so. Will you also +see Ben Ibyn, and thank him from me for having written to Suleiman +Ali on my behalf?" + + + +CHAPTER XIX ESCAPE + + +Gradually a greater amount of liberty was given to Gervaise. Escape +from Tripoli was deemed impossible, especially as he was supposed +to be entirely ignorant of Arabic. He was, indeed, scarcely regarded +now as a slave by the head mason, and instead of being clad in +rags was dressed like other overseers. He was no longer obliged to +walk with the gang to and from the palace, and was at last granted +permission to go into the town for an hour or two after his work +was over, instead of returning direct to the prison. The first time +this permission was given to him he placed himself on the road by +which Ben Ibyn would leave the town, choosing a quiet spot where +the meeting would not be observed. Gervaise had for some time taken +to staining his face, hands, and legs with walnut juice, beginning +with a weak solution, and very gradually increasing the strength +until he had reached a shade approximating to that of the lighter +coloured portion of the population. The head mason had on one +occasion noticed it, and said, "The sun is darkening your skin, +Gervaise, until you might verily pass as a Moor." + +Gervaise detected an expression of doubt in the tone the officer +had spoken to the interpreter, and replied at once, "It is not +altogether the sun. Since I have obtained permission to come to my +work alone, I have taken to slightly darkening my skin, in order +to go to and fro unmolested, and free from the insults that the +boys and beggars hurl at Christians." + +The master mason nodded approvingly when the answer was translated +to him. + +"It is a wise step," he said; "for truly the hatred of Christians +is very strong among the lower classes, especially since it became +known that the galleys that sailed from here nearly two years ago +were, with all the fleet from which so much was expected, utterly +destroyed. It is well, then, that you should pass unnoticed, for +were there a tumult in the street you might lose your life, and I +should lose the best labour overseer I have ever had." + +Thus, then, as Gervaise walked through the streets on the first +occasion of obtaining his liberty, he attracted no attention +whatever. When he saw Ben Ibyn approaching he stepped out to meet +him. The merchant looked in his face, but for a moment failed to +recognise him, then he exclaimed suddenly, "It is Gervaise! Ah, +my son, I am indeed rejoiced to see you. We have spoken of you +so often at home, and sorely did my wife and daughters grieve +when you were torn from us. I did not dare to send any message to +you, for the sultan pretended great anger against me, and used +the opportunity to squeeze me hardly; but I have frequently made +inquiries about you, and was glad indeed to find that even in prison +you received promotion; had it been otherwise -- had I found that +you were in misery -- I would have endeavoured, whatever the risk, +to aid you to escape." + +"I have indeed nothing to complain of, and was sorry to learn that +you had suffered on my account. Have you ever learned how it came +about that I was denounced?" + +"No, indeed; I would have given much to know, and assuredly the +dog, whoever he was, should have been made to suffer." + +"It was Hassan. The villain met me when I was with the gang, and +boasted that it was he who had sent me there. He had told the news +to some official, who had, of course, repeated it to the sultan; +doubtless he concealed his own share in the matter, otherwise he +too would, next time he returned here, have had to pay for his +part in it." + +"I will make him pay more heavily than the sultan would," Ben Ibyn +said sternly; "I will speak to my friends among the merchants, and +henceforth no Berber will buy aught from him; and we have hitherto +been his best customers. But let us not waste our time in speaking +of this wretch. How comes it that you are walking freely in the +streets of Tripoli? I can see that your face is stained, although +you are no longer a Nubian." + +Gervaise told him how it was that he was free to walk in the city +after his work was done. + +"I shall now," he went on, "be able to carry out any plan of escape +that may occur to me; but before I leave, as I shall certainly do +ere long, I mean to settle my score with Hassan, and I pray you to +send one of the men who were with me in the galley, and whom you +took into your employment, directly you hear that his ship is +in harbour. Do not give him either a note or a message: bid him +simply place himself in the road between the prison gate and the +palace, and look fixedly at me as I pass. I shall know it is a +signal that Hassan is in the port." + +"Can I aid you in your flight? I will willingly do so." + +"All that I shall need is the garb of a peasant," Gervaise said. +"I might buy one unnoticed; but, in the first place, I have no +money, and in the second, when it is known that I have escaped, +the trader might recall the fact that one of the slave overseers +had purchased a suit of him." + +"The dress of an Arab would be the best," the merchant said. "That +I will procure and hold in readiness for you. On the day when I +send you word that Hassan is here, I will see that the gate of my +garden is unbarred at night, and will place the garments down just +behind it. You mean, I suppose, to travel by land?" + +"I shall do so for some distance. Were I to steal a boat from the +port, it would be missed in the morning, and I be overtaken. I +shall therefore go along the coast for some distance and get a boat +at one of the villages, choosing my time when there is a brisk +wind, and when I may be able to get well beyond any risk of being +overtaken. Now, Ben Ibyn, I will leave you; it were better that +we should not meet again, lest some suspicion might fall upon you +of having aided in my escape. I cannot thank you too much for all +your past kindness, and shall ever bear a grateful remembrance of +yourself and your family." + +"Perhaps it were better so," Ben Ibyn said; "for if the Moors can +find any excuse for plundering us, they do so. Have you heard +the news that the Sultan of Turkey's expedition for the capture of +Rhodes is all but complete, and will assuredly sail before many +weeks have passed?" + +"I have not heard it," Gervaise replied; "and trust that I may be +in time to bear my share in the defence. However, the blow has +been so often threatened that it may be some time before it falls." + +"May Allah bless you, my son, and take you safely back to your +friends! Be assured that you shall have notice as soon as I know +that Hassan has returned, and you shall have the bundle with all +that is needful, behind my gate." + +Another two months passed. Gervaise looked in vain for Ben Ibyn's +messenger as he went to and from the palace, and chafed terribly +at the delay, when, for aught he knew, the Turkish fleet might +already have brought Mahomet's army to Rhodes. At last, as he came +back from work, he saw with intense satisfaction one of the men, +whose face he recognised, leaning carelessly against the wall. The +man gave no sign of recognition, but looked at him earnestly for +a minute, and then sauntered off up the street. Gervaise went up +into the town as usual, walked about until it became quite dark, +and then went to the gate that led into the merchant's garden. +He found that it was unfastened, and, opening it, he went in and +closed it behind him. As he did so he started, for a voice close +by said, + +"Master, it is I, the messenger whom you saw two hours since. Ben +Ibyn bade me say that he thought you might require some service, +and, knowing that I could be trusted, bade me wait for you here. +He thought that you might possibly need a messenger to Hassan." + +"The very thing," Gervaise exclaimed. "I have been puzzling myself +in vain as to how I could get speech with him in some quiet place; +but with your assistance that will be easy; but first let me put +on this disguise." + +This was easily effected, even in the dark. A loose flowing robe +of white cotton, girt in at the waist, a long bernouse with hood +to cover the head, a sash with a dagger, and a scimitar, completed +the disguise. + +"Here is a pouch," the man said, "with money for your journey, and +a long sword, which he says you can hang at your back beneath your +bernouse." + +Gervaise gave an exclamation of pleasure. By its length and weight +he was sure that the weapon must have been the property of a +Christian knight. + +"Shall I carry the message this evening?" the man asked. "It is +early still, and it were best that you should not linger in the +city, where there is sure to be a strict search for you in the +morning." + +"But perhaps he may recognise your face?" + +"It is blackened, my lord, and I am dressed as you were when with +Ben Ibyn." + +"Let us settle our plans, then, before we sally out from here; +we could not find a safer place for talking. What message, think +you, would be the most likely to tempt Hassan to come ashore? You +do not know what spoil he has brought?" + +"No; besides, if a merchant wanted to buy he would go on board to +inspect Hassan's wares. We must have something to sell. It must +be something tempting, and something that must be disposed of +secretly. I might tell him that my employer -- and I would mention +some merchant whose name would carry weight with him -- has received +from the interior a large consignment of slaves, among whom are +three or four girls, who would fetch high prices in Egypt, and as +he believes they have been captured from a tribe within the limits +of the sultan's territory, he is anxious to get rid of them, and +will either dispose of them all cheaply in a lot, or will hand them +over to him to take to Egypt to sell, giving him a large commission +for carrying them there and disposing of them." + +"I do not like tempting even an enemy by stories that are untrue," +Gervaise said doubtfully. + +"I have no scruples that way," the man said, with a laugh; "and it +is I who shall tell the story, and not you." + +Gervaise shook his head. + +"Could you not say that you came from one who owes him a heavy debt +and desires to pay him?" + +"I do not think that would bring him ashore. Hassan doubtless trades +for ready money, and must be well aware that no one here can be +greatly in his debt. No, my lord; leave the matter in my hands. I +will think of some story before I go on board that will fetch him +ashore. But first we must settle where I am to bring him; there +are some deserted spots near the wall on the east side of the town." + +"I know where you mean," Gervaise agreed; "let us go in that +direction at once, for the sooner you are off the better." + +In half an hour a spot was fixed on, near some huts that had fallen +into ruin. Here Gervaise seated himself on a sand heap, while the +man hurried away. The moon had just risen, it being but three days +since it was at its full. The night was quiet; sounds of music, +laughter, and occasional shouts came faintly from the town. Seated +where he was, Gervaise could see the port and the ships lying there. +Half an hour later he saw a boat row off to one of them, which +he had already singled out, from its size and general appearance, +as being that of Hassan; ten minutes later he saw it returning. +At that distance separate figures could not be made out, but it +seemed to him that it loomed larger than before, and he thought +that certainly one, if not more, persons, were returning with his +messenger. Presently he heard men approaching; then Hassan's voice +came distinctly to his ears. + +"How much farther are you going to take me? Remember, I warned +you that unless I found that my journey repaid me, it would be +bad for you." + +"It is but a few yards farther, my lord. There is my master the +sheik of the Beni Kalis awaiting you." + +Gervaise rose to his feet as Hassan and two of his crew came up. + +"Now," the former said roughly, "where have you bestowed these +captives you want to sell me?" + +"Will you please to follow me into this courtyard?" Gervaise said. +He had, while waiting, reconnoitred the neighbourhood, and found +an enclosure with the walls still perfect, and had determined to +bring Hassan there, in order to prevent him from taking to flight. +Hassan entered it unsuspectingly, followed by his two men. Gervaise +fell back a little, so as to place himself between them and the +entrance. Then he threw back the hood of his bernouse. + +"Do you recognise me, Hassan?" he said sternly. "I am the captive +whom you beat almost to death. I told you that some day I would +kill you; but even now I am willing to forgive you and to allow you +to depart in peace, if you will restore the amulet you took from +me." + +The corsair gave a howl of rage. + +"Christian dog!" he exclaimed. "You thought to lead me into a trap, +but you have fallen into one yourself. You reckoned that I should +come alone; but I suspected there was something hidden behind the +story of that black, and so brought two of my crew with me. Upon +him, men! Cut him down!" So saying, he drew his scimitar, and +sprang furiously upon Gervaise. The latter stepped back into the +centre of the gateway, so as to prevent the men, who had also drawn +their swords, passing to attack him from behind. He had undone +the clasp of his bernouse, and allowed it to fall to the ground as +he addressed Hassan, and his long sword flashed in the moonlight +as the corsair sprang forward. + +Hassan was a good swordsman, and his ferocious bravery had rendered +him one of the most dreaded of the Moorish rovers. Inferior in +strength to Gervaise, he was as active as a cat, and he leapt back +with the spring of a panther, avoiding the sweeping blow with +which Gervaise had hoped to finish the conflict at once; the latter +found himself therefore engaged in a desperate fight with his three +assailants. So furiously did they attack him that, foot by foot, +he was forced to give ground. As he stepped through the gateway one +of the pirates sprang past him, but as he did so, a figure leapt +out from beyond the wall, and plunged a dagger into his back, +while at the same moment, by cutting down another pirate, Gervaise +rid himself of one of his assailants in front; but as he did so, +he himself received a severe wound on the left shoulder from Hassan, +who, before he could again raise his weapon, sprang upon him, and +tried to hurl him to the ground. + +Gervaise's superior weight saved him from falling, though he +staggered back some paces; then his heel caught against a stone, +and he fell, dragging Hassan to the ground with him. Tightly +clasped in each other's arms, they rolled over and over. Gervaise +succeeded at last in getting the upper hand, but as he did so Hassan +twisted his right arm free, snatched the dagger from Gervaise's +girdle, and struck furiously at him. Gervaise, who had half risen +to his knees, was unable to avoid the blow, but threw himself +forward, his weight partly pinning the corsair s shoulders to the +ground, and the blow passed behind him, inflicting but a slight +wound in the back; then, with his right hand, which was now free, +he grasped Hassan by the throat with a grip of iron. The pirate +struggled convulsively for a moment, then his left hand released +his grasp of his opponent's wrist. A minute later Gervaise rose +to his feet: the pirate was dead. + +Gervaise stooped and raised the fallen man's head from the ground, +felt for the chain, pulled up Claudia's gage, and placed it round +his own neck; then he turned to his guide. + +"I have to thank you for my life," he said, holding out his hand to +him. "It would have gone hard with me if that fellow had attacked +me from behind. I had not bargained for three of them." + +"I could not help it, my lord. It was not until Hassan had stepped +down into the boat that I knew he was going to take any one with +him; then he suddenly told two of his men to take their places by +him, saying to me, as he did so, 'I know not whether this message +is a snare; but mind, if I see any signs of treachery, your life +at any rate will pay the forfeit.' I knew not what to do, and indeed +could do nothing; but, knowing my lord's valour, I thought that, +even against these odds, you might conquer with such poor aid as +I could give you." + +"It was not poor aid at all," Gervaise said heartily. "Greatly +am I indebted to you, and sorry indeed am I, that I am unable to +reward you now for the great service that you have rendered me." + +"Do not trouble about that, my lord. I am greatly mistaken if I +do not find in the sashes of these three villains sufficient to +repay me amply for my share in this evening's work. And now, my +lord, I pray you to linger not a moment. The gates of the town +shut at ten o'clock, and it cannot be long from that hour now. +But first, I pray you, let me bind up your shoulder; your garment +is soaked with blood." + +"Fortunately my bernouse will hide that; but it were certainly best +to staunch the blood before I start, for it would be hard for me +to get at the wound myself." + +The man took one of the sashes of the corsairs, tore it into strips, +and bandaged the wound; then with another he made a sling for the +arm. As he took off the sashes a leather bag dropped from each, +and there was a chink of metal. He placed them in his girdle, +saying, "I shall have time to count them when I get back." + +Gervaise sheathed his sword, and put on the bernouse, pulling the +hood well over his head; then, with a few more words of thanks, +started for the gate, leaving the man to search Hassan's girdle. + +The gate was a quarter of a mile distant. Gervaise passed through +with the usual Arabic salutation to the sentry, and with difficulty +repressed a shout of exultation as he left Tripoli behind him. + +Following the coast road he walked till daylight; then he left +it and lay down among the sand hills for five or six hours. He +calculated that no pursuit would be begun until midday. His absence +was not likely to be noticed until the gangs began work in the +morning, when an alarm would be given. The sentries at the gates +on the previous evening would be questioned, and when it was found +that no one answering to his description had passed out before +these were closed, there would be a rigid search throughout the +city and port. The vessels would all be examined, and the boatmen +questioned as to whether any craft was missing. Not until the +search proved absolutely fruitless would it be seriously suspected +that he had, either by passing through the gates in disguise, +or by scaling the walls, made for the interior. None knew that he +could speak Arabic, and it would be so hopeless an undertaking for +any one unacquainted with the language to traverse the country +without being detected, that the Moors would be slow to believe that +he had embarked upon such adventure. However, when all search for +him in the town and in the vessels in the port proved fruitless, +doubtless mounted men would be despatched in all directions; some +would take the coast roads, while others would ride into the interior +to warn the head men of the villages to be on the lookout for an +escaped slave. + +After a sleep of five hours, Gervaise pursued his journey. He had +walked for eight hours, and calculated that he must be fully thirty +miles from Tripoli, and that not until evening would searchers +overtake him. After walking four miles he came to a large village. +There he purchased a bag of dates, sat down on a stone bench by +the roadside to eat them, and entered into conversation with two +or three Moors who sauntered up. To these he represented that he +belonged to a party of his tribe who had encamped for the day at +a short distance from the village in order to rest their horses +before riding into Tripoli, whither they were proceeding to exchange +skins of animals taken in the chase, and some young horses, for +cotton clothes, knives, and other articles of barter with the +tribes beyond them. + +After quenching his thirst at a well in front of the mosque, he +retraced his steps until beyond the village, then struck out into +the country, made a detour, came down into the road again, and +continued his journey eastward. He walked until nightfall, and +then again lay down. + +He was now fully fifty miles from Tripoli, and hoped that he was +beyond the point to which horsemen from that town would think of +pursuing their search. It was likely that they would not have gone +beyond the village at which he had halted on the previous day; for +when they learned from the inhabitants that no stranger, save an +Arab, had entered it, they would content themselves with warning +the head man to be on the watch for any stranger unable to speak +their tongue, and would not consider it necessary to push their +steps farther. + +For four days Gervaise continued his journey. At each village +through which he passed he added to his stock of dates, until he +had as many as he could carry under his bernouse without attracting +observation. He also purchased a large water bottle, which he +slung round his neck. + +All this time the sea lay to his left like a sheet of glass, and +he knew that until a change of weather occurred, it was useless +for him to attempt to escape by boat. On the fifth day there were +signs of a change. He saw a dark line far out at sea; it came +across the water rapidly, and presently a gentle breeze began to +blow from the northwest; it gradually increased in strength, and +when, in the afternoon, he stopped at a village, the waves were +breaking upon the shore. + +After repeating his usual story, he sauntered down to the water's +edge. There were several boats hauled up, and a hundred yards out +two or three larger craft were lying at anchor. He entered into +conversation with some of the fishermen, and his questions as to +the boats led them to believe him altogether ignorant of the sea. +The craft were, they told him, used sometimes for fishing, but they +often made voyages to towns along the coast with dates and other +produce. Each boat carried a single short mast, to the top of which +was attached a long tapering spar, on which the sail was furled. + +Gervaise knew that these small feluccas were generally fast sailors +and fair sea boats, and resolved to seize one of them, trusting +that when once the sail was shaken out he would be able to manage +it single handed. Accustomed to boats, he picked out that which +he thought would be the fastest, and then walked away for half a +mile, and lay down to sleep until the village was silent for the +night. He had with him some oaten cakes he had bought there, a +string of fish he had purchased from the boatmen, and with these +and the dates he thought he could manage for four or five days +at least. As to water, he could only hope that he should find a +supply on board the boat. When he judged it to be about ten o'clock +he went down to the shore again, took off his clothes and made +them into a bundle; then, wading out into the water to within fifty +yards of the felucca, swam off to it, towing the bundle behind +him. + +He had no difficulty in climbing on board, and after dressing himself +in the clothes he had worn at Tripoli, and had kept on underneath +the Arab attire, he pulled the head rope until the craft was nearly +over the anchor. He then loosened the line that brailed up the +sail, got the stone that served as an anchor on board, hauled the +sheet aft, and took his place at the tiller. The wind had dropped +a good deal with the sun, but there was still sufficient air to +send the light craft fast through the water. He steered out for +a time, and then, when he thought himself a good mile from the +shore, headed east. By the appearance of the water as it glanced +past, he thought that he must be making from five to six miles an +hour, and when the sun rose at five o'clock, believed that he was +nearly forty miles on his way. He now fastened the tiller with a +rope and proceeded to overhaul the craft. + +It was decked over forward only, and he crept into the cabin, which +was little more than three feet high. The first thing his eye lit +on was a bulky object hanging against the side, and covered with +a thick black blanket of Arab manufacture. Lifting this, he saw, +as he expected, that the object beneath it was a large waterskin +well filled; the blanket had evidently been placed over it to keep +it cool when the sun streamed down on the deck above it. There +was also a large bag of dates, and another of flat cakes, and he +guessed that these had all been put on board the evening before, +in readiness for a start in the morning. This relieved him of +his chief anxiety, for he had been unable to think of any plan for +replenishing his supply, or to concoct a likely tale that, were +he obliged to go on shore, would account for his being alone in a +craft of that size. + +The wind increased again after sunrise, and being unable to reef +the sail single handed he managed partially to brail it up. All +day the craft flew along with the wind on the quarter, making six +or seven miles an hour; and he felt that by morning he would be +well beyond pursuit. On the run he passed several craft engaged in +fishing, but these gave him no uneasiness. He had in the morning, +with some old sails he found, constructed three rough imitations +of human figures, one with the Arab dress and another with the +bernouse, and had placed them against the bulwarks, so that at a +short distance it would appear that there were three men on board. +Feeling confident that the deception would not be noticed, he kept +his course without swerving, and passed some of the fishing boats +within hailing distance, waving his hand and shouting the usual +Arab salutation to their crews. + +During the day he contented himself with eating some dates and an +oatmeal cake or two; but at sunset he added to this two or three +fish that he had split open and hung up to dry in the sun and wind. +There was charcoal on board, and a flat stone served as a hearth +in the bottom of the boat, but he had no means of lighting a fire, +for this the fishermen would have brought off when they came on +board in the morning. After he had finished his meal and taken his +place again at the tiller he altered his course. Hitherto he had +been steering to the south of east, following the line of coast, but +he now saw before him the projecting promontory of Cape Mezurata, +which marks the western entrance of the great Gulf of Sydra; and he +now directed his course two points north of east, so as to strike +the opposite promontory, known as Grenna, more than a hundred +miles away. The wind fell much lighter, and he shook out the sail +to its full extent. All night he kept at his post, but finding +the wind perfectly steady he lashed the tiller so as to keep the +boat's head in the direction in which he was steering, and dozed +for some hours, waking up occasionally to assure himself that she +was keeping her course. + +At sunrise he indulged in a wash in sea water, and felt freshened +and revived. He now kept a sharp lookout for distant sails, for +he was out of the ordinary course a coaster would take, and would +have attracted the attention of any corsair coming out from the +land; the sea, however, remained clear of ships. All day the felucca +made rapid progress, for although the wind freshened, Gervaise did +not lessen sail as before, being now accustomed to the boat and +confident of her powers. As soon as the wind died away again after +sunset, he lay down for a good sleep, feeling this was an absolute +necessity, and knowing that before morning he should be obliged +to keep a sharp lookout for land. He slept longer than he had +intended, for the day was breaking when he opened his eyes. He +sprang to his feet, and saw the land stretching ahead of him at a +distance, as he thought, of some fifteen miles, and at once put +the helm down and bore more to the north. + +He judged, from what he had heard on the coast, that he must be +nearly off Cape Tejones, behind which lies the town of Bengasi, +and was confirmed in the belief on finding half an hour later that +the coast, which had run nearly north and south, trended sharply +away to the northeast. All day long he kept about the same distance +from the land, and at night, instead of keeping on his course, +brailed up the sail entirely, and allowed the vessel to drift, as +he knew that before morning he should lose the coast if he continued +as he was going. He slept without moving until daylight, and then +saw, to his satisfaction, by means of landmarks he had noticed the +evening before, that the boat had drifted but a few miles during +the night. As the day went on, he saw that the coastline was now +east and west, and felt that he must be off the most northerly +point of the promontory; he accordingly laid his course to the +northeast, which would take him close to Cape Saloman, the most +easterly point of Crete, and from two hundred and fifty to three +hundred miles distant. + +For twenty-four hours he sailed quietly on, the wind dropping lighter +and lighter; then it suddenly died out altogether; for some hours +there was not a breath to stir the surface of the water, and the +heat was stifling. Gervaise slept for some time; when he awoke the +same stillness reigned, but there was a change in the appearance +of the sky; its brightness was dulled by a faint mist, while, although +the sea was of a glassy smoothness, there was an imperceptible +swell that caused the felucca to sway uneasily. Gervaise had +sufficient experience of the Levant to know that these signs were +ominous of a change, and he at once set to work to prepare for +it. Although he saw that it would be difficult for him unaided to +hoist the long spar back into its place, he decided to lower it. +This was not difficult, as its weight brought it down on to the +deck as soon as he slackened the halliards; he unhooked it from the +block, and then lashed the sail securely to it. When he had done +this he looked round. A bank of dark clouds lay across the horizon +to the northwest, and in a short time he could see that this was +rising rapidly. + +Before taking down the spar and sail, he had deliberated as to whether +it would be better to run before the coming gale or to lie to, and +had decided on the latter alternative, as, were it to continue to +blow long, he might be driven on to the Egyptian coast. Moreover, +the felucca's bow was much higher out of water than the stern, and +he thought that she would ride over the waves with greater safety +than she would did they sweep down upon her stern. + +He had heard that the Greeks, when caught in a sudden gale in small +boats, often lashed the oars together, threw them overboard with +a rope attached, and rode to them safely through a sea that would +otherwise have overwhelmed them. After much consideration as to +what had best be done, he took the anchor rope, which was some +sixty yards in length, fastened one end to each end of the spar, +and then lashed the middle of the rope to the bow of the felucca; +then, using an oar as a lever, he with great labour managed to +launch the spar over the bow, with the sail still attached to it. + +When he had completed this, he looked round at the state of the +weather. The clouds had risen so fast that their edge was nearly +overhead, spanning the sky like a great arch. Ahead of him it +seemed almost as black as night. He had not been out in many of the +gales that at times sweep the eastern waters of the Mediterranean +with terrible violence, but had seen enough of them to know that +it was no ordinary one that he was about to encounter. He looked +over the bow; the spar at present was lying in contact with the +stem. With an oar he pushed it across so as to be at right angles +with the craft, and then, there being nothing else to do, sat +down and waited for the storm to burst. In a short time he heard a +dull moaning sound, a puff of wind struck the boat, but in a few +seconds died out; it was sufficient to give the light craft stern +way, and she drifted backwards, the rope tightening, until the +spar lay across her bows, and some twenty yards away. + +The dull moaning had grown louder; and now ahead of him he saw +a white line. It approached with extraordinary rapidity. Knowing +the fury with which it would burst upon him, he leapt down, and stood +at the entrance to the cabin, with his head just above the deck. +With a deafening roar the wind struck the boat, which staggered +as if she had on her full course struck on a rock, while a shower +of spray flew over her. Half blinded and deafened, Gervaise crawled +into the cabin, closed the door, and lay down there; whatever +happened, there was nothing he could do. He was soon conscious +that the spar and sail were doing their work, for the boat still +lay head to wind. The noise overhead and around was deafening; above +the howl of the wind could be heard the creaking of the timbers, +and the boat seemed to shiver as each fresh gust struck her. + +In half an hour he looked out again. There was, as yet, but little +sea; the force of the wind seemed to flatten the water, and the +instant a wave lifted its head it was cut off as if by a knife, +and carried away in spray. The boat herself was moving rapidly +through the water, dragging the spar behind her, and Gervaise almost +trembled at the thought of the speed at which she would have flown +along had it not been for the restraint of the floating anchor. +Gradually the sea got up, but the light craft rode easily over +it, and Gervaise, after commending his safety to God, lay down, +and was soon fast asleep. In spite of the motion of the vessel, he +slept soundly for many hours. When he awoke he opened the cabin +door and looked out. A tremendous sea was running, but he thought +the wind, although so strong that he could scarce lift his head +above the shelter of the bulwark, was less violent than it had +been when it first broke upon him. He saw to his satisfaction that +the felucca breasted the waves lightly, and that although enveloped +in spray she took no green water over the bows. + +The spar and sail acted not only as a floating anchor, but as a +breakwater, and the white crested waves, which came on as if they +would break upon the boat, seemed robbed of half their violence +by the obstruction to their course, and passed under the felucca +without breaking. For forty-eight hours the gale continued; at +the end of that time it ceased almost as suddenly as it had begun. +The sun shone brightly out, the clouds cleared entirely away. It +was some hours before the sea went down sufficiently for Gervaise +to attempt to get the spar on deck again. It was a heavy task, +taxing his strength to the utmost, but after a deal of labour it +was got on board, and then raised to its position at the masthead; +the sail was shaken out, and the felucca again put on her course. + + + +CHAPTER XX BELEAGUERED + + +One morning towards the end of May, 1480, Sir John Boswell was +standing with some other knights on St. Stephen's Hill, near the +city, having hurried up as soon as a column of smoke from a bonfire +lighted by the lookout there, gave the news that the Turkish fleet +was at last in sight. A similar warning had been given a month +previously, but the fleet had sailed past the island, being bound for +Phineka, which was the rendezvous where Mahomet's great armament +was to assemble. There could be but little doubt that the long +expected storm was this time about to burst. The fleet now seen +approaching numbered a hundred and sixty large ships, besides a +great number of small craft, conveying a force variously estimated +at from seventy to a hundred thousand men. + +"'Tis a mighty fleet," Sir John said; "and the worst of it is that +we know there are more to follow; still, I doubt not we shall +send them back defeated. Our defences are all complete; our recent +peace with Egypt has enabled us to fill up our magazines with +provisions of all kinds; the inhabitants of the Island have had +ample warning to move into the town, carrying with them everything +of value; so the Turks will obtain but little plunder, and will +be able to gather no means of subsistence on the island, as every +animal has been driven within the walls, and even the unripe corn +has been reaped and brought in. However long the siege lasts, we +need be in no fear of being reduced to sore straits for food. Look +over there. There is a small craft under sail, and it comes not +from the direction of Phineka. See! one of the Turkish galleys +has separated from the rest and is making off in that direction. +It may be that the little craft contains one or two of our comrades +who are late in coming to join us." + +"It may well be so, Sir John, for they have been straggling in by +twos and threes for the last month." + +"I will get the grand master's leave to put out in one of the +galleys," Sir John said, "for, by the way they are bearing, the +Turks will cut the little craft off before she can gain the port." + +He hurried to D'Aubusson, who was standing a short distance apart +from the others, gazing at the Turkish fleet. A minute later +he was running down the hill to the town, accompanied by three or +four other knights; they made direct for the outer port, where +two galleys were lying in readiness, leapt on board one of them, +which already contained its quota of knights, and at once rowed out +of the port. Just as they did so the Turkish galley fired a gun. + +"I fear we shall be too late," Sir John said; "the Turk is gaining +fast on the other craft, whatever she may be. There goes another +gun. Row your hardest!" he shouted down to the slaves. + +The Turkish ship did not fire again; the wind was light, and they +were going two feet through the water to every one sailed by the +other craft. The galley from Rhodes was still half a mile away when +the Turk was close to the boat that was trying to escape. Sir John +and the knights chafed as they saw they would be too late. + +"I can't make out why the boat did not use her oars," the former +said. "Of course, she could not have kept away from the galley, +but if she had rowed it would have made some difference, and we +might have been nearly up." + +"I can only see one man on board of her, Sir John," one of the +younger knights said; and two or three others murmured that they +were of the same opinion. + +"The others must be lying down; she cannot have less than from +fifteen to twenty men. The Turk is close alongside. They still +hold on. There! She has gone about and escaped the attempt to run +her down. Now she is heading for us again! Brave fellows! brave +fellows!" Sir John exclaimed, while a cheer broke from those around +him; "but they have done for themselves. They must have seen us +coming out, and if they had surrendered might have hoped to have +been retaken. Their chance of getting quarter was truly not great, +for expecting -- as the Turks do -- to carry off both us and all +the inhabitants of the Island, a dozen fishermen would have seemed +to them scarcely worth keeping. However, by holding on they have +thrown away any chance they may have had. The Turks are alongside; +they are leaping down into the little craft. Ah! Two more galleys +have just left their fleet, and are heading here." + +"See, Sir John," one of the knights exclaimed, "there is a single +man standing in the bow of that craft: he is facing the Moors +alone. See how they crowd there; you can see the weapons flashing +in the sun. They have to press past the mast to get at him, and +as yet he seems to hold them all at bay." + +"He has chosen his post well, D'Urville. The number of his assailants +prevents the archers on the Turkish craft using their bows. Fire +those bow guns!" he shouted to the knights forward: "Take steady +aim at the galley. It will distract their attention." + +"Nobly done indeed!" one of the other knights shouted. "I have seen +him strike down four of the Turks." + +"Row, men, row! 'Tis useless!" Sir John muttered, as he clenched +the hilt of his sword. "Useless! A Roland could not long maintain +so unequal a fight." + +A groan broke from those around him as suddenly the dark mass +of the assailants made a forward move, and the single figure was +lost to sight. It was but for an instant; a moment later the crowd +separated, and a man was seen to spring overboard. + +"They will riddle him with their spears when he comes up; we shall +have nothing to do but to avenge him. To your stations, comrades! +It is our turn now, and we have no time to lose, for the other two +Turks will be up in twenty minutes, and I had orders not to fight +if it could be avoided: but we must take this fellow." + +Five minutes later the galley ran alongside the Turk, to which those +who had captured the boat had already hastily returned. The ships +discharged their guns into each other, and then, as the galley ran +alongside, the knights tried to leap on board of her. They were +opposed by a dense mass of Turks, for in addition to her usual +crew the Moslem was crowded with troops. For three or four minutes +the knights tried, but in vain, to get a footing on board; then +Sir John shouted to them to forbear, and gave orders to the rowers +at once to push off. A cloud of arrows swept across the poop as +they did so; but for the most part these fell harmless from the +armour of the knights. For a time the cannon on both sides continued +to fire, but as the Christians increased their distance it gradually +ceased. + +They had gone but a hundred yards from the Turk when a head appeared +over the stern railing of the poop, and a figure swung itself +on to the deck. The man was attired in Turkish garments, but his +head was bare, and the exclamation, "A Christian!" broke from the +knights. + +The man strode up to Sir John Boswell. + +"You used to say you would make matters even with me some day, Sir +John, and you have more than kept your word." + +Sir John fell back a pace in astonishment, and then with a shout, +"By St. George, it is Tresham!" threw his arms round Gervaise's neck, +while the knights thronged round with exclamations of satisfaction. + +"And it was you whom we saw keep the Turks at bay for three good +minutes single handed," Sir John said, holding Gervaise at arm's +length to gaze into his face. "Truly it seemed well nigh impossible +that any one who was like to be on that craft could have performed +so doughty a deed. And how did you escape?" + +"It was simple enough," Gervaise replied. "As soon as I dived +I turned and swam along under the boat and came up by the stern, +and then held on by the rudder, sheltered from their sight. I saw +that the galley would be up in five minutes, and had no fear of +their wasting time to look for me. Directly you came alongside her +I dived again, and rose under your stern. I did not think that you +would be able to take her, for all their craft are crowded with +troops; so I contented myself with holding on until you were out +of reach of their arrows, and then I climbed up." + +"I am delighted to see you again, Gervaise. I was feeling very +sore at the moment, and I know the others felt the same, at being +obliged to sheer off without making a capture; but the grand master's +orders were strict. We noted your craft pursued by the Turks, and +I asked leave to take out a galley to cut her off. He said, 'Take +one, Sir John, but do not adventure an attack against the Turk unless +she is likely to fall an easy prize to you. Her capture would be +of little benefit to us, and would be dearly purchased at the cost +of a knight's life. Therefore, as soon as we engaged her, and I +found that she was full of troops and could not be captured without +heavy loss, and that two of her consorts might arrive before we +accomplished it, it was plainly my duty to abandon the attempt, +although, you may guess, it went sorely against the grain to give +the order, especially as I knew that a host would be looking on +from St. Stephen's Hill. However, your rescue more than makes up +for our failure; and thankful indeed am I that I made the suggestion +that we should put out to save that little craft, though I thought +it contained but a few fishermen or some coasting sailors, who had, +in ignorance that the Turks were at hand, tried to enter Rhodes. +One of those looking on with me did, indeed, suggest that she +might have on board a knight or two coming to join us, but I did +not give the matter a second thought." + +"And how go things, Sir John? And how are old friends?" + +"Ralph Harcourt and, I think, all your comrades in the Santa Barbara, +except the three who fell by your side when you were captured, +are well, and at present on the Island, as, for the last two years, +none have been allowed to depart. As to other matters, they go +not so well as one could wish. The commanderies have not responded +to our call for aid as they should have done. For this, however, they +are not altogether to blame, for we have been so often threatened +with attack, and have so frequently applied for aid in money or +men, that they must have begun to doubt whether the danger was +really imminent. In other respects we are well prepared. We have +obtained large stores of provisions from Egypt, and shall have no +ground for uneasiness on that score. The defences have been greatly +strengthened, and no one fears that we shall not be able to beat +off an attack. We have destroyed the principal buildings outside +the walls, though it would have been better could we have gone +much further in this direction. And now let us have your adventures +and escape." + +"'Tis a long story, Sir John, and I must pray you to let me defer +it for a time. In the first place, I have two or three wounds that +I shall be glad to have bandaged." + +"Why did you not say so at once?" Sir John exclaimed. "In those +dark clothes, soaked with water as they are, I did not see the +bloodstains; but I ought to have looked for them, for surely no +one could have gone through that fight -- altogether unprotected +with armour too -- without being wounded. Come below, and we will +attend to them." + +"Also order me some wine and food, Sir John; I have touched nothing +save water for twenty-four hours, and before that fasted somewhat +strictly." + +By the time Gervaise's wounds, which were not severe, had been +bandaged, and he had eaten a hasty meal, the galley was alongside +the mole, between the two harbours. + +He was provided with some clothes, and went with Sir John straight +to the English auberge, where the knight insisted that he should +at once lie down. + +"I will report your return to D'Aubusson, and will tell him it is +by my orders that you are resting. Your wounds are not very deep, +but you must have lost a good deal of blood, and were you to exert +yourself now, and be pestered with questions, it would probably +bring on an attack of fever. There is nothing to do at present, +for it must be some days before they can land and bring up their +guns." + +Gervaise obeyed the orders not unwillingly, for he felt that he was +really weak, and was greatly worn out by want of sleep. Sir John +Kendall, at Boswell's request, issued orders that he was on no +account whatever to be disturbed, and that no one was to enter his +room unless he sounded the bell placed by the bedside. Gervaise +indeed, falling off to sleep a few minutes after he had lain down, +did not awake until the following morning. Having no idea that +he had slept more than two or three hours, he sounded the bell in +order to inquire whether Ralph had returned to the auberge. He was +surprised to find his friend had just risen, and that he himself +had been asleep some eighteen hours! + +A few minutes later Ralph hurried into the room. + +"Thank God that you are back again, Gervaise!" he said, as he +grasped the hand of his friend. "I did not return until late in +the evening, having been at work with a large body of slaves at +the fortifications; and you may guess what joy I felt at the news. +You are changed a good deal." + +"I don't suppose you will think so at the end of a day or two, +Ralph. I lost a good deal of blood yesterday, and have been on +short rations; but I shall very soon pick up again." + +"They will bring you some broth and wine directly, Gervaise. Early +as it is, the grand master has already sent down to inquire as to +your health." + +"I will reply in person as soon as I have had a meal and dressed." + +"And I suppose we must all wait to hear what you have been doing +until you return, Gervaise?" + +"I suppose so, Ralph. Of course it is a long story; but I must +tell you at once that there is nothing very exciting in it, and +that it differed little from that of others who have been prisoners +among the Moors, save that I was strangely fortunate, and suffered +no hardships whatever. And now I want to ask you about clothes. +Have my things been sold, or are they still in the store?" + +"No; the question was raised but a short time since. It was mooted, +by the way, by that old enemy of yours, Robert Rivers, who returned +here some three months ago with a batch of knights from the English +commanderies. Sir John Boswell answered him roundly, I can tell +you, and said that they should be kept, were it for another fifty +years, for that he would wager his life that you would sooner or +later make your escape." + +"I am sorry that fellow has returned, Ralph. Has he got a commandery +yet?" + +"No; I believe that Sir John Kendall sent home so bad a report of +him, that even the great influence of his family has not sufficed +to obtain his appointment, and that he has been merely the assistant +at one of the smaller manors. Sir John Boswell told me in confidence +that he understood that Rivers did not at first volunteer to come +out in response to the appeal of the grand master, but that the +grand prior informed him that unless he took this opportunity of +retrieving his character, he might give up all hope of ever obtaining +advancement. Ah, here is your breakfast." + +An hour later Gervaise presented himself at the palace, clothed in +the suit of armour that had been given to him by Genoa. Although +he was engaged with several members of the council at the time, +the grand master ordered him to be at once admitted as soon as he +heard that he was in attendance. + +"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said warmly, as he entered. +"We all rejoice greatly at your return, and I consider it a happy +omen for the success of our defence that so brave and distinguished +a knight should at the last moment have arrived to take a share +in it." + +The others present all shook Gervaise cordially by the hand, and +congratulated him on his return. + +"You must dine with me this evening," D'Aubusson went on, "and +tell us the story of your captivity and escape. At present, as +you may suppose, we have too many matters on hand to spare time +for aught that is not pressing and important. You will need a +few days' rest before you are fit for active service, and by that +time we will settle as to what post will best suit you." + +Twice that day had Gervaise to recount his adventures, the first +time to Sir John Kendall and the knights of his auberge, the second +to the grand master. Most of the leading members of the Order were +assembled at the palace, and, among others, he was introduced to +the Viscount de Monteuil, the elder brother of D'Aubusson, one +of the most famous leaders of the day. He had brought with him a +considerable body of retainers, and, although not a member of the +Order, had offered his services in defence of the town. The council +had gratefully accepted the offer, and had unanimously named him +Commander of the Forces. Many other knights and soldiers had +come from different parts of Europe, animated alike by the desire +to aid in the defence of Christendom against the advance of the +Moslems, and to gain credit and honour by taking part in a siege +that was sure to be a desperate one. + +"My brother has already spoken of you to me, Sir Gervaise," +the viscount said, when the young knight was presented to him; +"although indeed there was no occasion for him to do so, since the +name of the knight who two years ago saved the commerce of Italy +from ruin, and with a single galley destroyed or captured a great +fleet of over twenty Barbary pirates, and thus for a time put a stop +to the depredations of the infidels, is known throughout Europe. +By the way, I am the bearer of a message to you. I took ship at +Genoa on my way hither, and stayed two or three days there while +she was being got ready for sea. Knowing that I was bound hither, +a certain very beautiful young lady of noble family, to whom I +had the honour of being introduced, prayed me that if you should +by any chance have escaped from captivity -- and she said that +she was convinced that you would, when you heard that Rhodes was +threatened, assuredly endeavour to escape and to come hither to +take a share in the defence -- I was to tell you that she trusted +you still bore her gage, and that she, on her part, had held fast +to the promise she made you." + +"I still have her gage, Viscount; for though I was for a long +time deprived of it, I succeeded in regaining it when I made my +escape," Gervaise said quietly; and De Monteuil at once turned the +conversation to another topic. + +Gervaise found that no attempt was to be made to take the offensive +against the Turks, and that they were to be permitted to advance +against the city without interference. Many of the more fiery +spirits among the knights chafed at this prohibition. The records +of the past showed that armies as large as that of Mahomet had +suffered defeat at the hands of bodies of knights no stronger than +that gathered for the defence of Rhodes. D'Aubusson, however, knew +that between the undisciplined hordes that gathered in countless +numbers to oppose the crusaders, and the troops of Mahomet, +well trained in warfare, who had borne his standard victoriously +in numerous battles, there was but little comparison. They were +commanded, too, by Paleologus, a general of great capacity. Under +such circumstances, although victory might be possible, the chances +of defeat would be far greater, and while victory could be only +won at a great sacrifice of life, defeat would mean annihilation +to the garrison, and the loss of the city upon whose fortifications +such an enormous amount of money and labour had been expended. + +On the other hand, he felt perfectly confident that the city could +be successfully defended, and that at a cost of life far less than +would be attained by a victory in the open field, while the blow +that would be inflicted upon the prestige and power of the enemy, +by being ignominiously compelled to retire to their ships, after +the failure of all their attacks, would be as great as if their +army had been defeated in the field. Therefore the grand master, +with the full assent of his leaders, turned a deaf ear to the +entreaties of the younger knights, that they might be allowed +to make a sortie. He calmly waited behind the formidable defences +he had for the past ten years been occupied in perfecting, in +anticipation of the assault of the Moslem host. + +Accordingly, after disembarking at their leisure, the Turkish army +moved forward, and took their post upon St. Stephen's Hill. From +this eminence they commanded a full view of the town, the hills +sloping gently down to the foot of the walls. In later times the +first care of a general commanding the defence would have been +to construct formidable works upon this commanding position. But +the cannon of that period were so cumbrous and slowly worked, +and so inaccurate in their aim, that the advantage of occupying a +position that would prevent an enemy from firing down into a town +was considered to be more than counterbalanced by the weakening +of the garrison by the abstraction of the force required to man +the detached work, and by the risk of their being surrounded and +cut off without the garrison of the town being able to aid them. + +That the defence of St. Stephen's Hill was considered unnecessary +for the safety of Rhodes is shown by the fact that no attempt had +been made to fortify it when, forty years later, the Moslems again +besieged the city. + +There was no shadow of apprehension felt by the garrison of Rhodes +as the great array of their foes was seen moving on to the hill, +and preparing to pitch its camp. On the summit was the great tent +of the pasha; round this were the marquees of the other commanders, +while the encampments of the troops stretched far away along the +upper slopes of the hill. + +Previous to the despatch of the expedition, the sultan had made +preparations for aiding his arms by treachery. The agent he +had sent to propose a temporary truce had, during his stay on the +Island, made himself thoroughly acquainted with the outline of the +works. A very accurate plan of them had also been obtained from +an inhabitant of Rhodes, who had abandoned Christianity and taken +service with the Turks. + +In addition to this he had arranged with a renegade German, known +as Maitre Georges, a man of very great ability as an artilleryman +and engineer, to desert to the city, and there do all in his power +to assist the besiegers, both by affording them information and +by giving bad advice to the besieged. On the day after Paleologus, +who was himself a renegade Greek, had established his camp, he +sent in a herald to summon the city to surrender, at the same time +making lavish promises that the lives and property of the native +population should be respected, and that they should be allowed +to continue to reside there, to enjoy the full exercise of their +religion and of all other rights they possessed. The pasha had no +real hope that the knights would obey the summons, but he thought +that he might excite a spirit of disaffection among the townspeople +that would, when the crisis came, greatly hamper the efforts of +the defenders. + +The Rhodians, however, were well satisfied with the rule of the +Order. The knights, although belonging to the Catholic Church, +had allowed the natives of the Island, who were of the Greek faith, +perfect freedom in the exercise of their religion, and their +rule, generally, had been fair and just. The wealth and prosperity +of the Island had increased enormously since their establishment +there, and the population had no inclination whatever to change +their rule for that of the Turks. The summons to surrender being +refused, the enemy made a reconnaissance towards the walls. + +D'Aubusson had no longer any reason for checking the ardour of the +knights, and a strong body of horsemen, under the command of De +Monteuil, sallied out and drove the Turks back to their camp. + +Maitre Georges, who was acting as the military adviser of the +pasha, saw at once that the weakest point of the defence was Fort +St. Nicholas, at the extremity of the mole along the neck of land +dividing the outer from the inner port. At a short distance away, +on the opposite side of the port, stood the church of St. Anthony, +and in the gardens of the church a battery was at once erected. +The garden was but three hundred yards from St. Nicholas, and the +danger that would arise from the construction of the battery was +at once perceived, and an incessant fire opened upon it from the +guns on the wall round the grand master's palace. Numbers of the +workmen were killed, but the erection of the battery was pushed on +night and day, and ere long three of the immense cannon that had +been brought from Constantinople, -- where sixteen of them had +been cast under the direction of Maitre Georges -- were placed in +position. These cannon were eighteen feet in length, and carried +stone balls of some twenty-six inches in diameter. + +Before these were ready to open fire, Gervaise had entirely regained +his health and strength. The grand master, being unwilling to +appoint him to a separate command over the heads of knights many +years his senior, had attached him to his person in the capacity +of what would now be called an aide-de-camp. + +"I know, Gervaise, that I can rely upon your coolness and discretion. +I cannot be everywhere myself, and I want you to act as my eyes +in places where I cannot be. I know that the knights, so far as +bravery and devotion are concerned, will each and every one do +his best, and will die at their posts before yielding a foot; but +while fighting like paladins they will think of naught else, and, +however hardly pressed, will omit to send to me for reinforcements. +Nay, even did they think of it, they probably would not send, +deeming that to do so would be derogatory, and might be taken as +an act of cowardice. Now, it is this service that I shall specially +look for from you. When a post is attacked, I shall, when my +presence is required elsewhere, send you to represent me. I do not, +of course, wish you to interfere in any way in the conduct of the +defence, in which you will take such share as you can; but you +are specially to observe how matters go, and if you see that the +knights are pressed and in sore need of assistance to enable them +to hold the post, you will at once bring the news to me, and I +will hurry there with reinforcements." + +No post could have been more in accordance with the desire +of Gervaise, for the portion of the wall defended by the English +langue was far removed from the point selected by the Turks for their +first attack, the sea front being defended half by the langue of +Italy, and half by that of Castile. Fort St. Nicholas was under +the command of the Cavalier Caretto, and as soon as the Turkish +battery was completed, Gervaise went down there with an order from +the grand master that he was for the present to consider himself as +forming part of the garrison. This was pleasant for both Caretto and +himself, for the Italian knight had conceived a strong friendship +for the young Englishman, and had rejoiced greatly at his return +from captivity, but had been so much occupied with his duty of +placing the castle in all respects in a state of defence, that he +had had no opportunity for a private conversation with him since +his return to Rhodes. + +Gervaise, on his part, was no less pleased. Caretto had shown so +much tact after his release from the Moors, and had so willingly +aided him in any capacity allotted to him, without in the slightest +degree interposing his council unasked, that Gervaise had come to +like him greatly, even before their arrival at Genoa. Circumstances +there had brought them closely together, and their friendship had +been cemented during their voyage to Rhodes. Caretto had gone back +to Italy, where he had a commandery, a few days after Gervaise had +sailed on his last voyage, and had only returned to Rhodes three +months before Gervaise escaped from captivity. + +"This is turning the tables," Caretto said, with a laugh, when +Gervaise presented the grand master's order. "I was under your +command last time, and now it seems that you are to be under mine. +I suppose you applied to come here, in order to have a fresh +opportunity of distinguishing yourself. I heard that you had been +placed on D'Aubusson's own staff." + +"Yes, and am on it still; and it is by his orders and not by my own +solicitation that I am here. I will tell you what my duties are. +The grand master knows the commanders of posts have their hands so +full that they will have no time for sending complete reports to +him, and he considers, moreover, that they might, in some cases, +however pressed, hesitate to ask for aid until too late for +reinforcements to be brought up. My duty will be to let the grand +master know how matters are going, and to send to him at once if +it seems to me that help is needed. I should, of course, always +send for reinforcements, at the request of a commander; but it is +only in the event of his being too busy in the heat of the fray to +think of aught but resisting an attack, that I should exercise my +own judgment in the matter." + +Caretto nodded. + +"It is a good thought of D'Aubusson's. When one is in the thick +of a fight in a breach, with the Moslems swarming round, it does +not occur to one to draw out of the fray to send off messages. For +myself, I shall be glad indeed to have that matter off my mind, +though it is not every one I should care to trust with such a +responsibility. Some might send off for aid when it was not needed, +others might delay so long that help might come too late; but with +one so cool headed as yourself I should not fear any contingency. +And now, as I am not busy at present, let us have a comfortable +talk as to what has happened since we met last. I was at the +banquet at the grand master's on the night when you related your +adventures. You had certainly much to tell, but it seems to me +for some reason or other you cut short certain details, and I could +not see why, as there seemed no prospect of escape open to you, +you did not accept the offer of Suleiman Ali to ransom you." + +"I saw no chance of escape at the moment, but I did not doubt that +I could get away from the town whenever I chose, although it was +not clear how I should proceed afterwards. It was for this opportunity +I was waiting, and I felt sure that, with my knowledge of the +language, it would come sooner or later. In the next place, my +captors had fixed an exorbitant sum for my ransom, and I did not +wish to impose upon the generosity of Suleiman. There was another +reason -- a private one." + +"You don't mean to say that you had fallen in love with a Moorish +damsel, Sir Gervaise?" Caretto laughed. + +"For shame, Cavalier! As if a Christian knight would care for a +Moslem maiden, even were she as fair as the houris of their creed!" + +"Christian knights have done so before now," Caretto laughed, +greatly amused at the young knight's indignation, "and doubtless +will do so again. Well, I suppose I must not ask what the private +matter was, though it must have been something grave indeed to lead +you, a slave, to reject the offer of freedom. I know that when I +was rowing in their galleys, no matter of private business that I +can conceive would have stood in my way for a single moment, had +a chance of freedom presented itself." + +"It was a matter of honour," Gervaise said gravely, "and one of +which I should speak to no one else; but as you were present at +the time, there can, I think, be no harm in doing so. At the time +that I was captured, I was stripped of everything that I had upon +me, and, of course, with the rest, of the gage which the Lady Claudia +had given me, and which hung round my neck where she had placed +it. It was taken possession of by the captain of the pirates, who, +seeing that it bore no Christian emblem, looked upon it as a sort +of amulet. I understood what he was saying, but, as I was desirous +that my knowledge of Turkish should not be suspected, I said +nothing. I was very glad that he so regarded it, for had he taken +it to be an ordinary trinket, he might have parted with it, and I +should never have been able to obtain a clue as to the person to +whom he sold it. As it was, he put it round his neck, with the +remark that it might bring him better luck than had befallen me. +He told me jeeringly months afterwards that it had done so, and +that he would never part with it. Given me as it was, I felt that +my honour was concerned in its recovery, and that, should I ever +meet Lady Claudia again, I should feel disgraced indeed, if, when +she asked whether I still bore her gage, I had to confess that it +was lost." + +"But lost from no fault of your own," Caretto put in. + +"The losing was not indeed from any fault of my own, and had the +pirate thrown it into the sea I should have held myself free from +disgrace; but as it was still in existence, and I knew its possessor, +I was bound in honour to recover it. At the time Suleiman Ali's +messenger arrived the corsair was away, and there was no saying +when his ship would return; therefore, I decided at once not to +accept the offer of freedom. Had it not been for that, I own that +I should have done so, for I knew that I could repay Suleiman from +the revenues of my commandery, which would have accumulated in my +absence; but if I had had to wait ten years longer to regain the +gage, I felt that I was in honour bound to do so. It was, in fact, +some six months before the corsair put into that port again. The +moment he did so I carried out the plans I had long before determined +upon. I obtained a disguise from Ben Ibyn, and by a ruse succeeded +in inducing the pirate to meet me outside the town, believing that +I was an Arab chief who wished to dispose of some valuable slave +girls he had brought in. I had with me one of my old galley slaves, +who had been taken into Ben Ibyn's employment; and when the pirate +came up with two of his crew, and furiously attacked me as soon as +I threw off my disguise, it would have gone hard with me had he +not stood by me, and killed one of them who was about to attack +me in the rear. I slew the other and Hassan, and the gage is in +its place again." + + + +CHAPTER XXI THE FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS + + +Well, you have proved indeed," Caretto said, when Gervaise finished +his story, "that you are worthy of the bestowal of a gage by a +fair damsel. I do not think that many knights, however true they +might be to the donor, would have suffered months of slavery +in order to regain a token, lost by no fault or carelessness of +their own; and no lady could have blamed or held them in any way +dishonoured by the loss." + +"I had a message by the Viscount De Monteuil from Lady Claudia +the other day, saying that she trusted I had kept her gage. I can +assure you that the six months of slavery were cheaply purchased +by the pleasure I felt that I still possessed it; and I was glad, +too, to learn that I had not been forgotten by her." + +"Of that you may well assure yourself, Tresham; my commandery is not +far from Genoa, and I was frequently with her, but never without +her drawing me aside and asking me if I had heard any news of you, +and talking over with me the chances there might be of your escape. +I can tell you that there are not a few young nobles of Genoa +who would give much to be allowed as you are to carry her gage, or +wear her colours. You should see her now; you would scarce know +her again, so altered and improved is she; there is no fairer face +in all Italy." + +"I hope some day to meet her again, " Gervaise replied; "although +I own to knowing it were better that I should not do so. Until she +gave me her gage I had scarcely noticed her. I have, as you know, +no experience of women, and had so much on my mind at the time, +what with the fuss they were making about us, and the question of +getting the prizes here, that in truth I paid but slight attention +to the fair faces of the dames of Genoa. But the gracious and +earnest way in which, though scarce more than a child, she gave +me her gage, and vowed that no other knight should possess one so +long as I lived, struck me so greatly that I own I gave the matter +much more thought than was right or becoming in one of our Order. +The incident was much more gratifying to me than all the honour +paid me by the Republic, and during the long months of my captivity +it has recurred to me so frequently that I have in vain endeavoured +to chase it from my thoughts, as sinful thus to allow myself +constantly to think of any woman. Do not mistake me, Sir Fabricius. +I am speaking to you as to a confessor, and just as I have kept +her amulet hidden from all, so is the thought of her a secret +I would not part with for my life. I do not for a moment deceive +myself with the thought that, beyond the fact that her gift has +made her feel an interest in me and my fate, she has any sentiment +in the matter: probably, indeed, she looks back upon the gift as +a foolish act of girlish enthusiasm that led her into making a +promise that she now cannot but find unpleasantly binding; for it +is but natural that among the young nobles of her own rank and +country there must be some whom she would see with pleasure wearing +her colours." + +Caretto looked at him with some amusement. + +"Were you not bound by your vows as a knight of the Order, how +would you feel in the matter?" + +"I should feel worse," Gervaise said, without hesitation. "I have +oftentimes thought that over, and I see that it is good for me I +am so bound. It does not decrease my chances, for, as I know, there +are no chances; but it renders it more easy for me to know that +it is so." + +"But why should you say that you have no chances, Tresham?" + +"Because it is easy to see that it is so. I am, save for my +commandery and prospects in the Order, a penniless young knight, +without home or estate, without even a place in my country, and +that country not hers. I know that it is not only sinful, but mad, +for me to think so frequently of her, but at least I am not mad +enough to think that I can either win the heart or aspire to the +hand of one who is, you say, so beautiful, and who is, moreover, +as I know, the heiress to wide estates." + +"'There was a squire of low degree, Loved the king's daughter of +Hungarie,'" Caretto sang, with a laugh. "You are not of low degree, +but of noble family, Gervaise. You are not a squire, but a knight, +and already a very distinguished one; nor is the young lady, though +she be a rich heiress, a king's daughter." + +"At any rate, the squire was not vowed to celibacy. No, no, Sir +Fabricius, it is a dream, and a pleasant one; but I know perfectly +well that it is but a dream, and one that will do me no harm so +long as I ever bear in mind that it is so. Many a knight of the +Order before me has borne a lady's gage, and carried it valiantly +in many a fight, and has been no less true to his vows for doing +so." + +"Upon the contrary, he has been all the better a knight, Gervaise; +it is always good for a knight, whether he belongs to the Order +or not, to prize one woman above all others, and to try to make +himself worthy of his ideal. As to the vow of celibacy, you know +that ere now knights have been absolved from their vows, and methinks +that, after the service you have rendered to Italy by ridding the +sea of those corsairs, his Holiness would make no difficulty in +granting any request that you might make him in that or any other +direction. I don't know whether you are aware that, after you +sailed from here, letters came from Rome as well as from Pisa, +Florence, and Naples, expressive of the gratitude felt for the +services that you had rendered, and of their admiration for the +splendid exploit that you had performed." + +"No; the grand master has had his hands so full of other matters +that doubtless an affair so old escaped his memory. Indeed, he +may have forgotten that I sailed before the letters arrived." + +"Do not forget to jog his memory on the subject, for I can tell you +that the letters did not come alone, but were each accompanied by +presents worthy of the service you rendered. But as to the vows?" + +"As to the vows, I feel as I said just now, that I would not free +myself of them if I could, for, being bound by them, I can the +more easily and pleasantly enjoy my dream. Besides, what should I +do if I left the Order without home, country, or means, and with +naught to do but to sell my sword to some warlike monarch? Besides, +Caretto, I love the Order, and deem it the highest privilege to +fight against the Moslems, and to uphold the banner of the Cross." + +"As to that, you could, like De Monteuil and many other knights +here, always come out to aid the Order in time of need. As to the +vows, I am not foolish enough to suppose that you would ask to be +relieved from them, until you had assured yourself that Claudia +was also desirous that you should be free." + +"It is absurd," Gervaise said, almost impatiently. "Do not let us +talk any more about it, Caretto, or it will end by turning my head +and making me presumptuous enough to imagine that the Lady Claudia, +who only saw me for three or four days, and that while she was +still but a girl, has been thinking of me seriously since." + +"I do not know Claudia's thoughts," Caretto remarked drily, "but I +do know that last year she refused to listen to at least a score +of excellent offers for her hand, including one from a son of +the doge himself, and that without any reasonable cause assigned +by her, to the great wonderment of all, seeing that she does not +appear to have any leaning whatever towards a life in a nunnery. +At any rate, if at some future time you should pluck up heart of +grace to tell her you love her, and she refuses you, you will at +least have the consolation of knowing that you are not the only +one, by a long way, whose suit has been rejected. And now as to +our affairs here. Methinks that tomorrow that battery will open +fire upon us. It seems completed." + +"Yes, I think they are nearly ready," Gervaise said, turning his +mind resolutely from the subject they had been discussing. "From +the palace wall I saw, before I came down here, large numbers of +men rolling huge stones down towards the church. Our guns were +firing steadily; but could they load them ten times as fast as +they do, they would hardly be able to stop the work, so numerous +are those engaged upon it." + +"Yes we shall soon learn something of the quality of their artillery. +The tower is strong enough to resist ordinary guns, but it will +soon crumble under the blows of such enormous missiles. Never have +I seen or heard in Europe of cannon of such size; but indeed, in +this matter the Turks are far ahead of us, and have, ever since +cannon were first cast, made them of much larger size than we in +Europe have done. However, there is one comfort; they may destroy +this fort, but they have still to cross the water, and this under +the fire of the guns on the palace walls; when they once land, +their great battery must cease firing, and we shall be able to +meet them on equal terms in the breach. Fight as hard as they may, +I think we can hold our own, especially as reinforcements can come +down to us more quickly than they can be brought across the water." + +The next morning, at daybreak, the deep boom of a gun announced to +the city that the great battering cannon had begun their work. In +the fort the sleeping knights sprang to their feet at the concussion +that seemed to shake it to its centre. They would have rushed to +the walls, but Caretto at once issued orders that no one should +show himself on the battlements unless under special orders. + +"There is nothing whatever to be done until the Turks have breached +the wall, and are ready to advance to attack us. Every sword will +be needed when that hour comes, and each man owes it to the Order +to run no useless risk, until the hour when he is required to do +his share of the fighting." + +The time required to reload the great cannon was considerable, but +at regular intervals they hurled their heavy missiles against the +wall, the distance being so short that every ball struck it. After +some twenty shots had been fired, Caretto, accompanied by Gervaise, +went out by a small gate on the eastern side of the tower, and +made their way round by the foot of the wall to see what effect +the shots had produced on the solid masonry. + +Caretto shook his head. + +"It is as I feared," he said. "No stones ever quarried by man could +long resist such tremendous blows. In some places, you see, the +stones are starred and cracked, in others the shock seems to have +pulverised the spot where it struck; but, worse, still, the whole +face of the wall is shaken. There are cracks between the stones, +and some of these are partly bulged out and partly driven in. +It may take some time before a breach is effected, but sooner or +later the wall will surely be demolished." + +"I will go up and make my report to the grand master." + +"Do so, Gervaise. I almost wonder that he has not himself come down +to see how the wall is resisting." + +Gervaise, on reaching the palace, heard that D'Aubusson was at +present engaged in examining no less a person than Maitre Georges, +the right hand of Paleologus, who had soon after daybreak presented +himself before the wall on the other side of the town, declaring +that he had left the Turkish service, and craving to be admitted. +News had been sent at once to D'Aubusson, who despatched two of +the senior knights, with orders to admit him and receive him with +all honour. This had been done, and the grand master, with some of +his council, were now closeted with the newcomer. Several of the +knights were gathered in the courtyard, discussing the event. +There was no question that if the renegade came in good faith, his +defection would be a serious blow to the assailants, and that his +well known skill and experience would greatly benefit the defenders. + +"For my part," Sir John Boswell, who formed one of the detachment +which the English langue, as well as all the others, contributed +to form the garrison of the palace said, "I would have hung the +fellow up by the neck over the gateway, and he should never have +set foot within the walls. Think you that a man who has denied +his faith and taken service with his enemies is to be trusted, +whatever oaths he may take?" + +"You must remember, Boswell," another said, "that hitherto Georges +has not fought against Christians, but has served Mahomet in his +wars with other infidels. I am not saying a word in defence of his +having become a renegade; yet even a renegade may have some sort +of heart, and now that he has been called upon to fight against +Christians he may well have repented of his faults, and determined +to sacrifice his position and prospects rather than aid in the +attack on the city." + +"We shall see. As for me, I regard a renegade as the most contemptible +of wretches, and have no belief that they have either a heart or +conscience." + +When Maitre Georges came out from the palace, laughing and talking +with the two knights who had entered with him, it was evident +that he was well pleased with his reception by the grand master, +who had assigned to him a suite of apartments in the guest house. +In reality, however, D'Aubusson had no doubt that his object was +a treacherous one, and that, like Demetrius, who had come under +the pretence of bringing about a truce, his object was to find out +the weak points and to supply the Turks with information. Georges +had, in his conversation with him, laid great stress on the strength +of the Turkish army, the excellent quality of the troops, and the +enormous battering train that had been prepared. But every word he +spoke but added to the grand master's suspicions; for if the man +considered that the capture of the city was morally certain, it +would be simply throwing away his life to enter it as a deserter. + +The grand master was, however, too politic to betray any doubt of +Georges' sincerity. Were he treated as a traitor, Paleologus might +find another agent to do the work. It was, therefore, better to +feign a belief in his story, to obtain all the information possible +from him, and at the same time to prevent his gaining any knowledge +of affairs that would be of the slightest use to the Turks. +Instructions were therefore given to the two knights that, while +Georges was to be treated with all courtesy, he was to be strictly +watched, though in such a manner that he should be in ignorance +of it, and that, whenever he turned his steps in the direction of +those parts of the defences where fresh works had been recently +added and preparations made of which it was desirable the Turks +should be kept in ignorance, he was to be met, as if by accident, +by one of the knights told off for the purpose, and his steps +diverted in another direction. + +Georges soon made himself popular among many of the knights, who had +no suspicions of his real character. He was a man of exceptional +figure, tall, strong, splendidly proportioned, with a handsome +face and gallant bearing. He was extremely well informed on all +subjects, had travelled widely, had seen many adventures, was full +of anecdote, and among the younger knights, therefore, he was soon +regarded as a charming companion. His very popularity among them +aided D'Aubusson's plans, as Georges was generally the centre of +a group of listeners, and so had but few opportunities of getting +away quietly to obtain the information he sought. Gervaise delivered +his report to the grand master. + +"I am free now," D'Aubusson said, "and will accompany you to St. +Nicholas. I have been detained by the coming of this man Georges. +He is a clever knave, and, I doubt not, has come as a spy. However, +I have taken measures that he shall learn nothing that can harm +us. No lives have been lost at the tower, I hope?" + +"No, sir; Caretto has forbidden any to show themselves on the +walls." + +"He has done well. This is no time for rash exposure, and where +there is naught to be gained, it is a grave fault to run risks." + +On arriving at the end of the mole, D'Aubusson, accompanied by +Caretto, made an investigation of the effect of the Turks' fire. + +"'Tis worse than I expected," he said. "When we laid out our +fortifications the thought that such guns as these would be used +against them never entered our minds. Against ordinary artillery +the walls would stand a long battering; but it is clear that we +shall have to depend more upon our swords than upon our walls for +our defence. Fortunately, although the Turks have indeed chosen +the spot where our walls are most open to the assaults of their +battery, they have to cross the water to attack the breach when it +is made, and will have to fight under heavy disadvantage." + +"Tresham was last night saying to me, that it seemed to him it +would not be a difficult matter for one who spoke Turkish well, +to issue at night on the other side of the town, and to make his +way round to the battery, disguised of course as a Turkish soldier, +and then, mixing with the artillery men, to drive a spike into +one of the touch holes. He said that he would gladly volunteer +for the task." + +D'Aubusson shook his head decidedly. "It would be too dangerous; +and even were a spike driven in, the Turks would have no great +difficulty in extracting it, for the tubes are so big that a man +might crawl in and drive the spike up from the inside. Moreover, +could one or more of the guns be disabled permanently, others would +be brought down and set in their place, so that nothing would be +gained but a very short delay, which would be of no advantage to +us, and certainly would in no way justify the risking of the life +of so distinguished a young knight." + +The bombardment of St. Nicholas continued for some days. A breach +was fast forming in the wall, and a slope composed of the fallen +rubbish extended from the front of the breach to the water's edge. +The grand master was frequently on the spot, and as this was at +present the sole object of attack, the garrison was strengthened +by as many knights as could be sheltered within its walls. At night +the shattered masonry that had fallen inside was carried out, and +with it a new work thrown up across the mole, to strengthen the +defence on that side, should the enemy land between the town and +the fort. Small batteries were planted wherever they could sweep +the approaches to the breach, and planks studded with nails were +sunk in the shallow water of the harbour, to impede the progress +of those who might attempt to swim or wade across. For the time, +therefore, the functions of Gervaise were in abeyance, and he +laboured with the rest of the garrison at the defences. + +At daybreak on the 9th of June, a great number of vessels and +boats, crowded with soldiers, bore down on St. Nicholas. As they +approached, every gun on the fortifications that could be brought +to bear upon them opened fire; but in a dense mass they advanced. +Some made their way to the rocks and landed the soldiers there; +others got alongside the mole; but the majority grounded in the +shallow water of the harbour, and the troops, leaping out, waded +to the foot of the breach. On its crest D'Aubusson himself had +taken up his station. Beside him stood Caretto, and around them +the most distinguished knights of the Order. With wild shouts +the Turks rushed up the breach, and swarmed thickly up the ruined +masonry until, at its summit, they encountered the steel clad +line of the defenders. For hours the terrible struggle continued. +As fast as the head of the Turkish column broke and melted +away against the obstacle they tried in vain to penetrate, fresh +reinforcements took the place of those who had fallen, and in +point of valour and devotion the Moslem showed himself a worthy +antagonist of the Christian. It was not only at the breach that +the conflict raged. At other points the Turks, well provided with +ladders, fixed them against the walls, and desperately strove to +obtain a footing there. From the breach clouds of dust rose from +under the feet of the combatants, mingling with the smoke of the +cannon on the ramparts, the fort, and Turkish ships, and at times +entirely hid from the sight of the anxious spectators on the walls +of the town and fortress, and of the still more numerous throng of +Turks on St. Stephen's Hill, the terrible struggle that continued +without a moment's intermission. + +The combatants now fought in comparative silence. The knights, +exhausted and worn out by their long efforts beneath the blazing +sun, still showed an unbroken front; but it was only occasionally +that the battle cry of the Order rose in the air, as a fresh body +of assailants climbed up the corpse strewn breach. The yell of +the Moslems rose less frequently; they sacrificed their lives as +freely and devotedly as those who led the first onset had done; +but as the hours wore on, the assurance of victory died out, and a +doubt as to whether it was possible to break through the line of +their terrible foes gained ground. D'Aubusson himself, although, in +spite of the remonstrances of the knights, always in the thickest +of the fray, was yet ever watchful, and quickly perceived where the +defenders were hotly pressed, and where support was most needed. +Gervaise fought by his side, so that, when necessary, he could +carry his orders to a little body of knights, drawn up in reserve, +and despatch them to any point where aid was needed. The cannon +still continued their fire on both sides. A fragment of one of +the stone balls from a basilisk struck off D'Aubusson's helmet. +He selected another from among the fallen knights, and resumed +his place in the line. Still the contest showed no signs of +terminating. The Turkish galleys ever brought up reinforcements, +while the defenders grew fewer, and more exhausted. During a +momentary pause, while a fresh body of Turks were landing, Gervaise +said to the grand master, + +"If you will give me leave, sir, I will go out at the watergate, +swim up the inner harbour, and in a very short time turn a few +of the craft lying there into fire ships, and tow them out with a +couple of galleys. At any rate, we can fire all these craft that +have grounded, and create a panic among the others." + +"Well thought of, Gervaise! I will write an order on one of my +tablets. Do you take my place for a minute." Withdrawing behind +the line, the grand master sat down on a fragment of stone, and, +drawing a tablet from a pouch in his girdle, he wrote on it, "In +all things carry out the instructions of Sir Gervaise Tresham: he +is acting by my orders and authority, and has full power in all +respects." + +He handed the slip of parchment to Gervaise, who hurried to the +water gate in the inner harbour, threw off his helmet and armour, +issued out at the gate, and plunged into the sea. He swam out some +distance, in order to avoid the missiles of the Turks, who were +trying to scale the wall from the mole, and then directed his +course to St. Michael's, which guarded the inner entrance to the +fort. He had fastened the parchment in his hair, and as some of the +garrison of the tower, noticing his approach, came down to assist +him, he handed it to them and was at once taken to the commander +of St. Michael, answering as he went the anxious questions as to +how matters stood at the breach. + +"Aid is sorely needed. The Turks have gained no foot of ground as +yet, but many of the knights are killed and most of the others +utterly exhausted with heat and labour. Unless aid reaches them +speedily, the tower, with all its defenders, will be lost." + +The instant the commander knew what was required, he bade six of the +knights embark with Gervaise in a boat moored behind the tower, +and row up the harbour to the spot where the shipping was all massed +together, protected by the high ground of the fortress from the +Turkish fire. Gervaise waved his hand, as he neared the end of +the harbour, to the officer on the walls, and while the six knights +who were with him ran off to tell the master of the galleys to +prepare two of them to leave the port instantly, Gervaise explained +to the officer in charge of the wall at that point the plan that +he was charged to carry out, and asked for twenty knights to assist +him. + +"It will leave us very weak along here," the officer said. "Then +let me have ten, and send for another ten from other parts of the +wall. Here is the grand master's order, giving me full power and +authority, and it is all important that no single moment shall be +wasted." + +"You shall have twenty of mine," the officer said, "and I will draw +ten from the langue next to us to fill their places." + +In a few minutes the quay was a scene of bustle and activity. +Gervaise picked out ten of the smallest vessels; the knights went +among the other ships, seized all goods and stores that would be +useful as combustibles, and compelled the crews to carry them on +board the craft chosen as fire ships. Then barrels were broken +open, old sails and faggots saturated with oil and pitch, and in +little more than a quarter of an hour after his arrival, Gervaise +had the satisfaction of seeing that the ten boats were all filled +with combustibles, and ready to be set on fire. He now called for +volunteers from the sailors, and a number of them at once came +forward, including many of the captains. He placed one of these in +command of each fire ship, and gave him four of the sailors. + +"The galleys will tow you out," he said, "and take you close to the +enemy's ships. We shall range you five abreast, and when I give +the word, the one at the end of the line will steer for the nearest +Turk, and, with oars and poles, get alongside. The captain will +then light the train of powder in the hold, throw the torch among +the straw, and see that, if possible, the men fasten her to the +Turk; but if this cannot be done, it is not essential, for in the +confusion the enemy will not be able to get out of the way of the +fire ship as it drives down against her. At the last moment you +will take to your boats and row back here. We will protect you +from the assaults of any of the Turkish ships." + +Having made sure that all the captains understood the orders, +Gervaise took command of one of the galleys, the senior knight +going on board the other. The ten fire ships were now poled out until +five were ranged abreast behind each craft; Gervaise requested the +commander of the other galley to lie off the point of St. Nicholas +until he had got rid of his five fire ships, then to advance and +launch his craft against the Turks. The smoke of the guns lay +so heavy on the water, and the combatants were so intent upon the +struggle at the breach, that Gervaise steered his galley into the +midst of the Turkish vessels laden with troops ready to disembark, +without attracting any notice; then, standing upon the taffrail, +he signalled to the two outside boats to throw off their ropes +and make for the Turkish ship nearest to them. This they did, and +it was not until a sheet of flame rose alongside, that the enemy +awoke to the sense of danger. + +The other three fire ships were almost immediately cast off. Two +of them were equally successful, but the Turks managed to thrust +off the third. She drifted, however, through the shipping, and +presently brought up alongside one of the vessels fast aground. +With but ten knights, Gervaise could not attack one of the larger +vessels, crowded with troops; but there were many fishing boats +that had been pressed into the service, and against one of these +Gervaise ordered the men to steer the galley. A shout to the rowers +made them redouble their efforts. A yell of dismay arose from +the Turkish troops as they saw the galley bearing down upon them, +and frantic efforts were made to row out of her way. These were in +vain, for her sharp prow struck them amidships, cutting the boat +almost in two, and she sank like a stone, the galley, without a +pause, making for another boat. + +Looking back, Gervaise saw that his consort was already in the +midst of the Turks, among whom the wildest confusion prevailed, +each ship trying to extricate herself from the mass, upon which +the batteries of the fortress now concentrated their efforts. Two +fresh columns of flame had already shot up, and satisfied that +all was going well, Gervaise continued his attack upon the smaller +craft, six of whom were overtaken and sunk. Three or four of the +larger vessels endeavoured to lay themselves alongside the galley, +but her speed was so superior to theirs that she easily evaded +the attempts, and, sweeping round, rejoined the other galley which +had just issued from among the Turks, who were already in full +retreat. The defenders of St. Nicholas, reanimated by the sight +of the discomfiture of the Turkish fleet, with a loud shout rushed +down from the spot which they had held for so many hours, drove +their assailants before them, and flung themselves upon the crowd +assembled at the foot of the breach. + +These had already suffered terribly from the fire of the batteries. +Again and again they had striven to storm the mound of rubbish, +and had each time been repulsed, with the loss of their bravest +leaders. Seeing themselves abandoned by the ships, a panic seized +them, and as the knights rushed down upon them they relinquished +all thoughts of resistance, and dashed into the shallow water. +Many were drowned in the attempt to swim across the deep channel +in the middle, some succeeded, while others made their escape in +the boats in which they had been brought ashore from the ships. + +The struggle was over. The two galleys made for the breach, and +the knights leapt out as soon as the boats grounded, and, wading +ashore, joined the group that had so long and gallantly sustained +the unequal fight. Fatigue, exhaustion, and wounds, were forgotten +in the triumph of the moment, and they crowded round the grand +master and Caretto, to whose joint exertions the success of the +defence was so largely due. + +"Do not thank me, comrades," D'Aubusson said. "No man has today +fought better than the rest. Every knight has shown himself worthy +of the fame of our Order. The meed of praise for our success is +first due to Sir Gervaise Tresham. At the moment when I began to +doubt whether we could much longer withstand the swarms of fresh +foes who continued to pour against us, while we were overcome by +heat and labour, Sir Gervaise, who had throughout been fighting +at my side, offered to swim into the port, to fit out a dozen of +the merchant craft there as fire ships, and to tow them round into +the midst of the Turkish vessels behind the two galleys that were +lying ready for service. I remembered how he had before destroyed +the corsair fleet at Sardinia with fire ships, and the proposal +seemed to me as an inspiration sent from Heaven, at this moment +of our great peril. I wrote him an order, giving him full authority +to act in my name, and in a time that seemed to me incredibly +short I saw him round the point with the fire ships in tow. You +saw, as well as I did, how completely the plan was carried out. Ten +or twelve of the Turkish ships are a mass of flames, and besides +these I noted that the galley ran down and destroyed several smaller +craft filled with soldiers. The panic in the ships spread to the +troops on shore, and rendered the last part of our task an easy +one. I say it from my heart that I consider it is to Sir Gervaise +Tresham that we owe our success, and that, had it not been for +his happy thought, the sun would have gone down on our dead bodies +lying on the summit of the breach, and on the Turkish flag waving +over the fort of St. Nicholas." + +Until now none of the defenders of the breach had known how what +seemed to them an almost miraculous change in the fortune of the +fight had come about, and they thronged round Gervaise, shaking +his hand, and many of them warmly embracing him, according to the +custom of the time. + +"It was but natural that the idea should occur to me," he said, +"having before successfully encountered them with fire ships; and +as all on shore, and especially these knights, aided me with all +their power, it took but a brief time to get the boats in readiness +for burning. Much credit, too, is due to the merchant captains +and sailors who volunteered to take charge of the fire ships and +to manoeuver them alongside the Turks." + +The grand master and the knights who had borne the brunt of the +battle now retired along the mole to the town, bearing with them +their most seriously wounded comrades, and assisting those whose +wounds were less severe. The twenty knights who had manned the two +galleys remained in the fort. Caretto continued in command, as, +although he had suffered several wounds, he refused to relinquish +his post. Gervaise, who had, -- thanks partly to his skill with +his weapons, but still more to the temper of the splendid suit of +armour presented to him by Genoa, -- escaped without a scratch, +volunteered to remain with him until next morning, his principal +motive for making the request being his desire to escape from +further congratulations and praise for the success of his plan. +After Caretto's wounds had been dressed by the knights, and he +and Gervaise had partaken of some food and wine, which they greatly +needed, Caretto was persuaded to lie down for a time, the knights +promising to bring him word at once if they perceived any movement +whatever on the part of the enemy. Gervaise remained with him, +feeling, now the excitement was over, that he sorely needed rest +after his exertions in the full heat of the summer sun. + +"It has been a great day, Gervaise," Caretto said, "and I only hope +that when again I go into battle with the infidel, I shall have +you at hand to come forward at the critical moment with some master +stroke to secure victory. Claudia will be pleased indeed when she +hears how the knight who bears her gage has again distinguished +himself. She will look on the gay and idle young fops of Genoa +with greater disdain than ever. Now you need not say anything in +protest, the more so as I feel grievously weak, and disposed for +sleep." + + + +CHAPTER XXII THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH + + +Two hours later Caretto and Gervaise were roused by the arrival of +a hundred knights in place of the previous garrison; these bore +the news that the pasha had sent in a flag of truce to ask for an +armistice until sundown, to enable him to carry off for burial +the bodies of those who had fallen in the attack. The request had +been willingly granted; but D'Aubusson had at the same time thought +it well to send down a strong reinforcement to the garrison to +prevent any attempt at treachery on the part of the Turks. + +"I have seldom heard pleasanter news," Caretto said; "for just as +I fell asleep I was wondering how we were to rid ourselves of the +corpses of the infidels. By tomorrow the place would have become +unbearable; and though, living, the Turks could not turn us out +of the tower, they would when dead speedily have rid the place of +us." + +In half an hour a number of Moslem vessels were seen approaching. +Caretto did not wish the Turks to imagine that he doubted their +good faith, and while directing the main body of knights to remain +in concealment near the breach, he placed two on sentry duty on +the crest of the ruins, and, with four other knights and Gervaise, +went down in complete armour to salute the officer in command of +the burying party, as he landed from the boats. The ships anchored +a short distance out, and a number of boats rowed from them to +the shore. As the Turkish officer landed, Caretto saluted him, and +said in Arabic, + +"I give you courteous greeting, Sir. When the cannon cease to sound +and swords are sheathed, there is no longer animosity between brave +men; and no braver than those whose bodies lie stretched there, +breathed the air of heaven. If, sir, I and the knights with me +do not uncover our heads, it is from no want of respect for the +dead, but solely because we dare not stand bareheaded under the +fierce rays of the sun." + +The Turk answered with equal courtesy, complimenting the knights +on their defence. + +"Had I not seen it with my own eyes," he said, "I should have deemed +it altogether impossible that so small a number of men could thus +for hours have withstood the attacks of some of the best of the +sultan's troops. Tales have come down to us from our fathers of +the marvellous prowess of the knights of your Order, and how at +Smyrna, at Acre, and elsewhere, they performed such feats of valour +that their name is still used by Turkish mothers as a bugbear to +frighten their children. But the stories have always seemed to me +incredible; now I perceive they were true, and that the present +members of the Order in no way fall short of the valour of their +predecessors." + +The knights remained with the Turkish commander and some of his +officers while the work of collecting and carrying away the dead +was performed, the conversation on their side being supported +by Caretto and Gervaise. No less than seven hundred bodies were +carried down to the boats, besides a great many wounded by the +artillery fire. None were, however, found breathing among the +great pile of dead at the upper part of the breach, for the axes +and double handed swords of the knights had, in most of the cases, +cleft through turban and skull. + +"This represents but part of our loss," the Turkish commander said +sadly, as the last party came down with their burdens to the boats. +"At least as many more must have perished in the sea, either in +their endeavours to escape when all was lost, in the destruction +of their vessels by fire, by the shot from your batteries, or by +being run down by your galleys. Ah, Sir Knight, if it had not been +for the appearance of your fire ships, methinks the matter might +have ended differently." + +"In that I altogether agree with you," Caretto said. "We were +indeed, well nigh spent, and must have soon succumbed had it not +been that the fire ships arrived to our rescue. You have a fair +right to claim that the victory would have remained in your hands, +had not those craft gone out and snatched it from you." + +Then, with salutes on both sides, the Turks took their places in the +boats, and the knights returned to the fort. As soon as darkness +came on, a large body of slaves were marched down from the town, +and, under the direction of the knights, laboured all night at the +mound, removing great quantities of the fallen stones and rubbish +in a line halfway up it, and piling them above so as to form a +scarp across the mound that would need ladders to ascend. Another +party worked at the top of the mound, and there built up a wall +eight feet high. The work was completed by daylight, and the +knights felt that they were now in a position to resist another +attack, should Paleologus again send his troops to the assault. + +The night had passed quietly. There was a sound of stir and movement +in the Turkish battery, but nothing that would excite the suspicion +of a large body of troops being in motion. When it became light +it was seen that the Turkish ships had sailed away to their +previous anchorage on the other side of the Island, and although +at considerable intervals the great cannon hurled their missiles +against the fort, it was evident that, for the time at least, the +attack was not to be pressed at that point. A fresh body of slaves, +however, came down from the town to relieve those who had been +all night at work, and the repair of the defences was continued, +and with greater neatness and method than had been possible in the +darkness. + +At eight o'clock the bells of St. John's Church gave notice that +a solemn service of thanksgiving for the repulse of the enemy was +about to be held. Notice had been sent down early to the tower; and +all the knights who could be spared, without too greatly weakening +the garrison, went up to attend it; the service was conducted with +all the pomp and ceremony possible, and after it was over a great +procession was formed to proceed to the shrine, where a picture +of the Virgin held in special reverence by the Order was placed. + +As it wound through the streets in splendid array, the grand master +and officials in all their robes of state, the knights in full +armour and the mantles of the Order, while the inhabitants in gala +costume lined the streets, windows, and housetops, the ladies waving +scarves and scattering flowers down on the knights, the roar of +great cannon on the south side of the city showed that the Turks +had commenced the attack in another quarter. Without pausing, the +procession continued its way, and it was not until the service in +the chapel had been concluded that any steps were taken to ascertain +the direction of the attack. As soon as it was over, the knights +hastened to the walls. During the night the Turks had transported +their great basilisks, with other large pieces of artillery, from +the camp to the rising ground on the south side of the city, and +had opened fire against the wall covering the Jews' quarter, and +at the same time against the tower of St. Mary on the one hand +and the Italian tower on the other. + +From other commanding spots huge mortars were hurling great fragments +of rock and other missiles broadcast into the town. The portion +of the wall selected for the attack showed that the Turks had been +well informed by their spies of the weak points of the defence. The +wall behind which the Jews' quarter lay, was, to all appearance, of +thick and solid masonry; but this was really of great age, having +formed part of the original defences of the town, before the +Order had established itself there. The masonry, therefore, was ill +fitted to resist the huge balls hurled against it by the basilisks. +The langue of Provence was in charge of this part of the wall, +and, leaving them for the present to bear the brunt of the storm, +the grand master sent the knights who could be spared, to assist +the inhabitants to erect shelters against the storm of missiles +falling in the town. + +Sheds with sharply sloping roofs, constructed of solid timber, +were built against the inner side of the walls, and beneath these +numbers of the inhabitants found refuge. The work was performed with +great celerity by the inhabitants, aided by the gangs of slaves, +and in two or three days the townspeople were all in shelter, +either in these sheds, in the vaults of the churches, or in other +strongly constructed buildings. + +Among the missiles hurled into the town were balls filled with Greek +fire, but the houses being entirely built of stone, no conflagrations +of importance were caused by them, as a band of knights was organised +specially to watch for these bombs, and whenever one of them was +seen to fall, they hurried from their lookout to the spot, with +a gang of slaves carrying baskets of earth and buckets of water, +and quenched the flames before they had made any great headway. + +The roar of the bombardment was almost continuous, and was heard +at islands distant from Rhodes, telling the inhabitants how the +battle between the Christians and the Moslems was raging. + +It was not long before the wall in the front of the Jews' quarter +began to crumble, and it was soon evident that it must, ere many +days, succumb to the storm of missiles hurled against it. D'Aubusson +lost no time in making preparations to avert the danger. He +ordered all the houses in rear of the wall to be levelled; a deep +semicircular ditch was then dug, and behind this a new wall, +constructed of the stones and bricks from the houses destroyed, +was built, and backed with an earthen rampart of great thickness +and solidity. + +The work was carried on with extraordinary rapidity. The grand +master himself set the example, and, throwing aside his robes and +armour, laboured with pick and shovel like the commonest labourer. +This excited the people to the highest pitch of enthusiasm, and +all classes threw themselves into the task. Knights and slaves, +men, women, and children, and even the inmates of the convents +and nunneries, aided in the work, and when at last the outer wall +fell, and the Turks thought that success was at hand, the pasha +saw with astonishment and dismay that entry to the city was still +barred by a work as formidable as that which he had destroyed +at an enormous expenditure of ammunition. There was now a short +breathing time for the besieged; but the depression which the failure +of their efforts excited among the Turks, was shortly dispelled +by the arrival of a ship, with a despatch from Constantinople, in +which the pasha was informed that the sultan himself was about to +proceed to Rhodes with a reinforcement of a hundred thousand men, +and a fresh park of artillery. + +Paleologus had some doubts as to whether the report was true or +was merely intended to stimulate him to new efforts for the speedy +capture of the place. Knowing well that the grand master was the +heart and soul of the defence, and that the failure of the assault +was mainly due to his energy and ability, he determined to resort +to the weapon so frequently in use in Eastern warfare -- that of +assassination. To this end he employed two men, one a Dalmatian, +the other an Albanian; these presented themselves before the walls +as deserters, and as there was no reason for suspecting their tale, +they were admitted within the gates, and welcomed as having escaped +from enforced service. They soon spread the tale of the speedy +coming of the sultan with vast reinforcements, and as the pasha +had on the previous day caused salutes to be fired, and other +demonstrations to be made, the news was readily credited, and caused +the greatest dismay among the defenders. + +Some of the knights of the Italian and Spanish langues believed +the prospect of a successful defence against so enormous a force +was absolutely hopeless, and determined to put pressure upon +D'Aubusson to treat for surrender before it became too late. They +opened negotiations with an Italian named Filelfo, one of D'Aubusson's +secretaries, who undertook to lay their opinion before the grand +master. D'Aubusson at once summoned the knights concerned in +the matter before him. They found him with several members of the +council. + +"Sir Knights," he said, "I have heard from my secretary your +opinions in the matter of a surrender, and since you are in such +terror of the Moslem sultan, you have my full permission to leave +the town; and, more than that, I will myself secure your safe +departure, which might be imperilled if your comrades or even +the inhabitants of the town came to learn that you had advocated +surrender; but," he went on, changing his tone from that of sarcasm +to sternness, "if you remain with us, see that the word surrender +never again passes your lips, and be assured that, should you +continue your intrigues, in that direction, you shall meet with +the fate you so justly deserve." + +Overwhelmed by the grand master's accusation and sternness, the Italian +and Spanish knights threw themselves on their knees and implored +him to grant them an early opportunity of retrieving their fault by +battle with the infidel. Feeling that the lesson had been sufficiently +severe, and that henceforth there would be no renewal of intrigues +for a surrender, D'Aubusson forgave them, and promised them a place +in the van when next the Moslems attacked. The incident was not +without its advantage, for the two pretended deserters, believing +that Filelfo, who had also fallen under the displeasure of the +grand master, would be ready to join in the conspiracy against +his life, approached him. Filelfo, who was greatly attached to +D'Aubusson, saw by their manner that they wished to engage him +in some intrigue, and, feigning great resentment and anger at +his disgrace, led them on until they divulged the entire plot for +D'Aubusson's assassination, and made brilliant offers to him if +he would afford them facilities for carrying it out, producing, in +proof of their power to do so, a letter of the pasha, authorising +them to make such promises in his name. + +Filelfo at once divulged the whole plot to D'Aubusson. The two men +were immediately arrested, tried by the council, and sentenced to +death. They were not, however, formally executed, for the populace, +obtaining news of their treachery, broke in upon their guards, +and tore them to pieces. Foiled in his attempt on the life of the +grand master, the pasha prepared for a renewal of the attack, and +it was not long before the knights on the lookout at the church +of St. John perceived that the fort of St. Nicholas was again to be +the scene of the attack. It was ere long discovered that a large +number of men were busy some distance along the shore in building +a long structure, that could only be intended for a floating bridge. +Among the sailors who had aided in the attack with the fire ships +were several men belonging to an English trader in the port. All +who had done so had been handsomely rewarded for their conduct, and +five of the Englishmen had afterwards gone to the English auberge +and had asked to be enrolled for service against the Turks, as +they were weary of remaining on board in idleness when there was +work to be done. Their offer had been accepted, and they had, in +common with all the sailors in the port, laboured at the construction +of the inner wall. When that was completed, Sir John Boswell, +under whose special charge they had been placed, said to Gervaise, +"I think that I cannot do better than send these men down to St. +Nicholas. It is probable that now the Turks see that they can do +nothing at the new breach, they may try again there. Sailors are +accustomed to night watches, and there are many of our knights who +are not used to such work, and can be better trusted to defend a +breach than to keep a vigilant watch at night. Will you take these +men down to Caretto, and tell him that he can sleep soundly if +he has a couple of them on watch? One of them, Roger Jervis, who +is the mate of their ship, can speak some Italian, and as he is +in command of them, Caretto will find no trouble in making them +understand him." + +St. Nicholas had now been put into a fair state of defence, as a +party had been kept steadily at work there. Gervaise had not been +to the tower since the morning after the assault, and saw with +satisfaction how much had been done to render it secure. He found +that Caretto was fast recovering from his wounds. + +"As it seems probable, Sir Fabricius," he said, after the first +greetings to the knight, "that the Turks will favour you with another +visit, I have brought you five watchdogs. They are countrymen of +mine, and were among those who navigated the fire ships the other +day. Sir John Boswell has sent them down; they are, of course, +accustomed to keep watch at night. One of them is mate of their +vessel, and will be in command of them; he speaks a little Italian, +and so will understand any orders you may give him. I have been +speaking to him as we came down; he will divide his men into two +watches, and will himself be on guard all night. Will you assign +them some quiet place where they can sleep in the daytime? They +can erect a shelter with a piece of sail cloth and a few bits of +board, and they will, of course, be furnished with food." + +"I shall be very glad to have them, for I am always restless at +night, lest those on watch should close their eyes. You see, they +have quite made up their minds that this fort will not be attacked +again, and so are less inclined to be vigilant than they would +be, did they think that an attack was impending." + +Now that there was reason to believe that St. Nicholas might again +be attacked, Gervaise was frequently there with orders or inquiries +from the grand master. A number of vessels in the harbour were +fitted up as fire ships, so as to be in readiness when the attack +came. He was about to start early one morning when he saw Roger +Jervis coming up with a heavy anchor on his shoulder. + +"Why, what are you bringing that up here for?" he asked. "Have you +been diving; for I see your clothes are dripping with water?" + +"Ay, ay, sir, I have been in the water, and that Italian commander +told me to come straight up here to tell the grand master all about +the story; and right glad am I to have met you, for I should have +made but a poor fist of it alone; I don't know more of their lingo +than just to talk a few words of it." + +"Then you had better tell me the story before I take you in." + +"Well, it was like this, Sir Knight: I had Hudson and Jeffreys +posted upon the wall, and I thought I would take a turn down on +the rocks, for it was a dark night, and you can see much farther +when you are by the edge of the water than you can when you are +at the masthead. I sat there for an hour, and was thinking that it +was about time to go up and turn out the other watch, when I saw +something dark upon the water. It wasn't a ship, that was certain, +and if it was a boat there wasn't any one in it; but it was too dark +to make quite sure what it was. I watched it for a time, though I +did not think much of the thing, taking it for a boat that had got +adrift, or maybe a barrel from one of the Turkish ships. Presently +I made out that it was a good bit nearer than when I first saw +it. + +"That puzzled me. There is no tide to speak of in these seas, and +there was no wind moving about. I could make out now that it was +a boat, though a very small one, but certainly there was no one +rowing it. It looked a very strange craft, and as I saw by the +way it was bearing that it would come ashore about five or six +fathoms from where I was sitting, I slid quietly off the rock, put +my sword down by me handy for action, and waited. Presently the +boat came up alongside the rock, and a fellow stood up from behind +the stern. I was glad to see him, for I had begun to think that +there was witchcraft in the thing moving along by itself, but I +can tell you I was savage with myself for not having guessed there +was a man swimming behind and pushing it on. + + +"He stooped over the boat, and took something heavy out; then +he felt about among the rocks under the water, and then laid the +thing down there, and seemed to me to be settling it firm. I had +half a mind to jump up and let fly at him, but then I thought +it would be better to let him finish what he was doing, and go off +with the idea that no one had seen him. So I kept hid until he +started again. He waded a short way before he had to swim, and I +could see that as he went he was paying out a rope over the stern. +It was clear enough now what he had been up to: he had been fixing +an anchor. What he did it for, or what use it could be to him, I +could not say, but it was certain that he would not take all that +trouble, with the chance of being knocked on the head, for nothing; +so I waited for a bit till he had got out of sight, and over to +the other side of the port. + +"Then I got up and felt about, and, chancing to get my foot under +the rope, went right over into the water. After that you may guess +I was not long in finding the anchor. I unknotted the rope from +it and carried it ashore; then it struck me that the Turks might +take it into their heads to give a pull on it in the morning, and +if they did; they would find out that their game, whatever it was, +had been found out; so I got hold of a stone of about twenty pound +weight, and fastened the rope's end round it. That was enough to +prevent the rope getting slack and make them think that it was +still fast to the anchor; but, of course, if they pulled hard on +it it would come home directly. I went and reported the matter the +first thing this morning to the governor. He seemed to think that +it was important, and told me to bring the anchor up to the grand +master, who would get one of the English knights to find out all +about it; for he could not make out much of what I said." + +"It is very important," Gervaise said, "and you behaved very wisely +in the matter, and have rendered a great service by your discovery. +I will take you in at once to the grand master." + +Still bearing the anchor, the sailor followed Gervaise into an +apartment where D'Aubusson was taking council with some of the +senior knights. + +"Pardon my interrupting your Highness," Gervaise said; "but +the matter is so important that I knew you would listen to it, +however occupied you were." And he then repeated the narrative of +the sailor's discovery. + +"This is indeed of the highest importance," D'Aubusson said, "and +the knowledge that it gives us may enable us to defeat an attempt, +that might otherwise have proved our ruin. You see, knights, it +solves the question that we were just discussing. We agreed that +this long floating bridge that they have been constructing, was +intended to enable them to cross the outer port and again attack +St. Nicholas; and yet it seemed to us that even by night our +batteries would be able to keep up such a fire on the boats, towing +the head of the bridge across, as to render it well nigh impossible +for them to get it over. Now you see what their plan is. With the +aid of this rope, the end of which they think is firmly fixed on +our side, they mean to haul the bridge across, and that so silently +that they hope to be upon us almost before we have time to don +our armour. We shall now be fully prepared, and need have no fear +of the result." + +There could now be little doubt that the attack would be made +without loss of time, especially as the Turks believed that they +could get their bridge across unseen. The fire ships -- which were +altogether more formidable than those Gervaise had improvised -- +were ordered to be made ready for action. This being arranged, +the admiral left the council at once, that no time should be lost +in getting them in readiness. D'Aubusson then turned to the English +sailor. + +"You have rendered us a great service indeed by your vigilance, and +showed great prudence by allowing the Turk to believe that he had +accomplished his mission unsuspected. Had he thought he had been +observed, some other plan would have been adopted. For so great a +service it is meet that a great reward should be given." + +He then took a bag from the hands of one of his secretaries, whom +he had sent to fetch it, while they were discussing the matter of +the fire ships. + +"Here are two hundred golden crowns," he added, handing the bag +to the seaman. "With these you can either settle on shore, or can +build a stout ship and pursue your calling. Should you do so, call +her the St. Nicholas, in remembrance of the gratitude of the Order +of St. John for your having saved that fort from the Turks." + +Astonished and delighted at the reward, which represented a very +large sum in those days, the sailor stammered his thanks, and +added, "I hope tonight that if I again have charge of a fire ship, +I may be able to do more to prove to your Highness how grateful +I am for the gift." + +Throughout the day preparations for the defence of St. Nicholas +went on unceasingly. Gangs of men, as usual, worked in the breach; +but, as it was deemed advisable that there should be no outward +show of activity that would lead the Turks to suspect that their +design had been discovered, neither reinforcements of men nor +munitions were sent along the mole; everything being taken out by +boats, which, rowing closely along under the wall, were hidden from +the view of the Turks. Barrels of Greek fire and pitch, cauldrons +for heating the latter, a store of firewood, great balls of cotton +steeped in oil and turpentine, sheaves of darts, spikes on short +staves, that were, after darkness fell, to be thrust in among the +fallen masonry to form a chevaux-de-frise -- these, and all other +matters that the ingenuity of the defenders could suggest, were +landed at the water gate of the fort, while the garrison was +strengthened by the addition of a large number of knights. Stores +of ammunition were collected in readiness at all the batteries that +commanded the mouth of the outer port, and by sunset D'Aubusson +felt that everything that was possible had been done to meet the +impending storm. + +At midnight the Turkish preparations were complete. The attack +by the bridge was to be assisted by a large number of boats and +other craft, and many armed galleys were also brought up to destroy +or tow away the defenders' fire ships. Paleologus himself was down +by the shore directing the preparations. Some of his best troops +were placed upon the floating bridge, and, when all was ready, the +order was given to pull upon the rope. No sooner, however, did +the strain come upon it than there was a jerk, the rope slackened, +and it was at once evident that the anchor had been discovered and +the well laid plan disconcerted. Paleologus was furious, but, +believing that the attack he had arranged would still be irresistible, +he ordered a number of boats to take the bridge in tow, while +a still larger force was to make a direct attack upon the breach. +The movement was to be conducted as silently as possible until it +was discovered, and then a dash forward was to be made. + +It was two o'clock before the fresh arrangements were completed +and the boats put out. They had gone but a short distance when +the anxious watchers in St. Nicholas learnt by the dull, confused +sound that came across the water, that the attack was, in spite +of the failure of the plan to take the bridge silently across, to +be persevered in. A cannon was at once fired to give notice to the +other batteries to be in readiness, and as soon as the dark mass +of boats was made out the guns of the fort opened a destructive +fire upon them, and a moment later were seconded by those from +the fortress; these, however, were at present being fired almost +at random, as the Turkish boats could not be made out at that +distance. Now that all need for concealment was at an end, the +Turkish war cry rose shrilly in the air, and the boatmen bent to +their oars. The great cannon at St. Anthony's Church hurled their +tremendous missiles at the tower, seconded by the fire of a number +of other pieces that had in the darkness been brought down almost +to the water's edge. + +As before, the boats swept up to the foot of the breach, the Turks +leaped out, and, undismayed by the storm of shot, climbed up +to the assault. The short ladders that they had brought with them +enabled them to surmount the escarpments so laboriously made, +and with loud shouts of "Allah!" they flung themselves upon the +defenders on the crest of the breach. Here they were met by a line +even more difficult to break through than before. The knights +were ranged three deep; those in the front were armed with swords +and battleaxes, while those in the other two lines thrust their +spears out between the swordsmen, covering them with a hedge +of steel points. Others in the rear brought up buckets of blazing +pitch and Greek fire, and, advancing through gaps left for the +purpose, hurled the buckets down into the struggling mass on the +slope. There the fire not only carried death among the assailants, +but the lurid flames enabled the batteries to direct their shot +with terrible effect upon the breach, the crowded boats at its foot, +and the bridge which was, with immense labour, presently got into +position. + +It was not long before fresh light was thrown upon the scene, as +the fire ships, issuing out from the inner harbour, burst into +columns of flame, and, towed by boats, came into action. They +were convoyed by the two galleys, each with a full complement of +knights, and these soon became engaged in a fierce fight with the +Turkish vessels that bore down to arrest the course of the fire +ships. The scene was indeed a terrible one, the roar of cannon, +the shouts of the combatants, the screams of the poor wretches +upon whom the terrible Greek fire fell, the clash of arms and the +shouts and cries of the Turks as they pressed across the bridge, +united in a din that thrilled with horror the spectators, both in +the city and on St. Stephen's Hill. + +Several of the Turkish galleys, in their efforts to arrest the +approach of the fire ships towards the bridge, became themselves +involved in the flames; but they were so far successful that when +daylight broke the bridge was still intact and the combat at the +breach continued to rage with determination and fury on both sides. +The Turks there were led by a brave young prince named Ibrahim, a +near relative of the sultan, with whom he was a great favourite, +and he was ever in the front line of the assailants, his splendid +bravery animating the soldiers to continue their efforts. As the +daylight broadened out, however, the light enabled the Christian +gunners to aim with far greater accuracy than had before been +possible, and, concentrating their fire upon the bridge, across +which reinforcements continued to press to the support of the +assailants, they succeeded in sinking so many of the boats that +it was no longer passable. + +Next they turned their fire upon the Turkish galleys, four of which +they sank. Shortly afterwards, a ball struck the gallant young +leader of the Turks, who, although previously several times wounded, +had continued to fight in the front line. He fell dead, and his +followers, disheartened by his fall and by the destruction of the +bridge, at once abandoned their efforts, and rushed down to the +foot of the breach. The terrible scene enacted at the repulse of +the previous attack was now repeated. The concentrated fire of the +guns of the defenders carried destruction into the crowded mass. +Some gained the boats that still remained uninjured, and rowed +for the opposite shore; the greater number rushed into the water +and strove to recross it either by swimming or by the aid of the +debris of the shattered boats. Their total loss was greater even +than that suffered by them in the first attack, between two and +three thousand being either killed or drowned, among them a number +of their best officers. The amount of spoil, in the form of rich +jewels and costly gold ornaments, found on the bodies of the dead +piled on the breach, was very great. + +For three days after this terrible repulse the Turks were inactive, +the pasha remaining shut up in his tent, refusing to see any one, +or to issue orders. At the end of that time he roused himself from +his stupor of grief and disappointment, and, abandoning the idea +of any further attack upon the point that had cost him so dearly, +he ordered the troops to move round and renew the attack upon the +wall in front of the Jews' quarter, and commence the construction +of a battery on the edge of the great ditch facing the retrenchment +behind the breach before effected. The knights of Italy and Spain +determined to seize the opportunity of retrieving the disgrace +that had fallen upon them. At night they descended into the deep +cutting, carrying across their ladders, and, silently mounting +the opposite side, rushed with loud shouts into the unfinished +battery. The Turks there, taken utterly by surprise, made but a +slight resistance; a few were immediately cut down, and the rest +fled panic stricken. + +The knights at once set the woodwork of the battery on fire, hurled +the guns down into the ditch, and then returned triumphantly into +the town, the dashing feat completely reinstating them in the good +opinion of the grand master and their comrades. + +The incident showed the pasha that he must neglect no precautions, +and, accordingly, he commenced his works at a distance from the +walls, and pushed his approaches regularly forward until he again +established a battery on the site of that from which his troops +had been so unceremoniously ejected. While forming the approaches, +the workmen had been constantly harassed by the fire from the +guns on the walls, suffering considerable loss of life; but their +numerical superiority was so vast that the loss in no way affected +the plans of the pasha. + +As soon as the battery was completed, gangs of men, accustomed to +mining operations, set to work in its rear to drive sloping passages +downwards, opening into the face of the great cutting, and through +these vast quantities of earth and stones were poured, so as to +afford a passage across it, the depth being largely diminished by +the great pile of rubbish that had already fallen from the breached +wall. This novel mode of attack was altogether unexpected. The +knights had regarded the fosse that had been cut at such an +enormous expenditure of labour as forming an altogether impassable +obstruction, and were dismayed at seeing the progress made in +filling it up. D'Aubusson himself, full of resources as he was, +saw that the defence was seriously threatened, unless some plan +of meeting this unexpected danger could be devised. + +He consulted Maitre Georges; but the latter could make no suggestion; +his only advice being the erection of a battery at a spot where +it was almost self evident that it could be of no utility whatever. +Other circumstances combined to render the suspicions D'Aubusson +had entertained of the good faith of the renegade almost a certainty. +Georges was seized, tried, and put to torture, and under this owned +that he had been sent into the town for the purpose of betraying +it; and he was, the same day, hung in the great square. His guilt +must always be considered as uncertain. There was no proof against +him, save his own confession; and a confession extorted by torture +is of no value whatever. There are certainly many good grounds +for suspicion, but it is possible that Georges really repented +his apostacy, and acted in good faith in deserting the standard +of Paleologus. He was undoubtedly a man of altogether exceptional +ability and acquirements, and even the knights who have written +accounts of the siege do justice to the fascination of his manner +and the charm of his conversation. + +D'Aubusson now set to work in another direction to counteract the +efforts of the Turks. He erected an immense wooden catapult, which +threw huge pieces of rock into the midst of the Turkish works, +crushing down the wooden screens erected to hide their approaches, +breaking in the covered ways, and causing great loss of life +among the besiegers. At the same time galleries were driven below +the breach, opening into the ditch, where their exits were concealed +by masses of rubbish. Through these strong working parties issued +out at night, and carried away up the passages the rocks and other +materials that the Turks had, during the day, brought, with immense +labour, from a distance to the shoot. The materials so carried +away were piled up behind the retrenchment, greatly adding to its +thickness and strength. + +For some days the Turks observed, to their astonishment, that +the road they were constructing across the ditch was diminishing +instead of increasing in bulk, and at length it became so evident +that the garrison were in some way removing the materials, that +the pasha determined to deliver the assault before the heap was +so far diminished as to become impassable. His former defeats had, +however, taught him that success could not be always calculated +upon, however good its prospect might appear; and although he had +no real hope that the defenders would yield, he sent a formal +summons for them to do so. This was refused with disdain, and +preparations were at once made for the assault. + +The pasha promised to his soldiers the sack of the town and all +the booty captured, and so assured were they of success that sacks +were made to carry off the plunder. Stakes, on which the knights, +when taken prisoners, were to be impaled, were prepared and +sharpened, and each soldier carried a coil of rope with which to +secure his captive. + +Before ordering the assault, the way was prepared for it by a +terrible fire from every siege gun of the Turks. This was kept up +for twenty-four hours, and so tremendous was the effect that the +knights were unable to remain on the ramparts. The Turkish troops +moved into position for attack, their movements being covered by +the roar of the guns, and soon after sunrise on the 22nd of July +the signal was given, and at a number of different points the +Turks rushed to the assault. All these attacks, save that on the +breach, were merely feints, to distract the attention of the garrison, +and to add to the confusion caused by this sudden and unexpected +onslaught. The pasha's plans were well designed and carried out; +the knights, unable to keep their places on the ramparts under the +storm of missiles, had retired to shelter behind the walls. There +was no thought of an instant assault, as they considered that +this would not be delivered until the new wall behind the breach +had been demolished. + +Consequently, the rush of the Turks found the defenders altogether +unprepared. Swarming across the mass of debris in the ditch, they +ascended the breach without opposition, and their scaling ladders +were placed against the new wall before the knights could hurry +up to its defence. Even before the alarm was given in the town, +the Turkish standard was waving on the parapet, and the Moslems +were crowding on to the wall in vast numbers. The suddenness of +the attack, the complete surprise, the sound of battle at various +points around the walls, caused for a time confusion and dismay +among the knights charged with the defence of the wall facing the +breach. Roused by the uproar, the inhabitants of the town rushed +up to their roofs to ascertain what was happening, and their cries +of wild terror and alarm at seeing the Turkish banner on the walls +added to the confusion. D'Aubusson sprang up from the couch, on +which he had thrown himself in full armour, at the first sound of +the alarm, and, sending off messages to all the auberges to summon +every man to the defence, ran down into the town, followed by a +small party of knights. + +Rushing through the streets, now filled with half dressed people +wild with terror, he reached the foot of the wall, whose summit +was crowded with the enemy, and saw in an instant that all was lost +unless they could be driven thence without delay. The effect of +his presence was instantaneous. The knights, hitherto confused +and dismayed, rallied at once, and prepared for the desperate +undertaking. The bank on the inside was almost perpendicular, and +those charged with its defence had used two or three ladders for +ascending to the rampart. These were at once seized and planted +against the wall. + +The position of the contending parties was now reversed; the Christians +were the assailants, the Turks the defenders. D'Aubusson himself +was the first to ascend. Covering his head with his shield, he +mounted the rampart; but ere he could gain a footing on the top +he was severely wounded and hurled backwards. Again he made the +attempt, but was again wounded and thrown down. Once more he mounted, +and this time made good his footing. A moment later, Gervaise, who +had accompanied him from the palace, stood beside him. Animated +with the same spirit as his leader, he threw himself recklessly +against the Turks, using a short, heavy mace, which in a melee +was far more useful than the long sword. Scimitars clashed upon +his helmet and armour; but at every blow he struck a Turk fell, +and for each foot he gained a knight sprang on to the wall and +joined him. Each moment their number increased, and the war cry of +the Order rose louder and fiercer above the din. The very number +of the Turks told against them. Crowded together as they were they +could not use their weapons effectually, and, pressing fiercely +upon them, the knights drove them back along the wall on either +hand, hurling them down into the street or over the rampart. On +so narrow a field of battle the advantage was all on the side of +the knights, whose superior height and strength, and the protection +afforded by their armour, rendered them almost invincible, nerved +as they were with fury at the surprise that had overtaken them, +and the knowledge that the fate of the city depended upon their +efforts. After a quarter of an hour's desperate conflict the Turks +were driven down the partial breach effected in the wall by the +last bombardment, and the Christians were again the masters of their +ramparts. Paleologus, however, hurried up reinforcements, headed +by a band of janissaries, whose valour had decided many an obstinate +conflict. Before ordering them to advance, he gave instructions to +a company of men of approved valour to devote all their efforts to +attacking D'Aubusson himself, whose mantle and rich armour rendered +him a conspicuous object among the defenders of the breach. Advancing +to the attack, the janissaries burst through the mass of Turks +still continuing the conflict, and rushed up the breach. Then the +chosen band, separating from the rest, flung themselves upon the +grand master, the suddenness and fury of their attack isolating +him and Gervaise from the knights around. + +Surrounded as he was by foes, already suffering from two severe +wounds and shaken by his falls from the ladder, the grand master +yet made a valiant defence in front, while Gervaise, hurling his +mace into the face of one of his assailants, and drawing his two +handed sword, covered him from the attack from behind. D'Aubusson +received two more severe wounds, but still fought on. Gervaise, +while in the act of cutting down an assailant, heard a shout of +triumph from behind, and, looking round, he saw the grand master +sinking to the ground from another wound. With a cry of grief and +fury Gervaise sprang to him, receiving as he did so several blows +on his armour and shield intended for the fallen knight, and, +standing across him, showered his blows with such strength and +swiftness that the janissaries shrank back before the sweep of +the flashing steel. More than one who tried to spring into close +quarters fell cleft to the chin, and, ere his assailants could +combine for a general rush, a body of knights, who had just beaten +off their assailants, fell upon the ranks of the janissaries with +a force and fury there was no withstanding, and the chosen troops +of the sultan for the first time broke and fled. + +Excited almost to madness by the sight of their beloved master +stretched bleeding on the ground, the knights dashed down the +breach in eager pursuit. This action was decisive of the fate of +the struggle. The panic among the janissaries at once spread, and +the main body of troops, who had hitherto valiantly striven to +regain the advantage snatched from them, now lost heart and fled +in confusion. But their escape was barred by the great body of +reinforcements pressing forward across the heap of rubbish that +formed the breach over the deep ditch. Maddened by fear, the +fugitives strove to cut a way through their friends. The whole of +the defenders of the breach now fell upon the rear of the struggling +mass, hewing them down almost without resistance, while the +cannon from the walls and towers kept up an unceasing fire until +the last survivors of what had become a massacre, succeeded in +gaining their works beyond the ditch, and fled to their camp. From +every gateway and postern the knights now poured out, and, gathering +together, advanced to the attack of St. Stephen's Hill. They met +with but a faint resistance. The greater portion of the disorganised +troops had made no pause at their camp, but had continued their +headlong flight to the harbour, where their ships were moored, +Paleologus himself, heartbroken and despairing at his failure, +sharing their flight. The camp, with all its rich booty and the +great banner of the pasha, fell into the hands of the victors, +who, satisfied with their success, and exhausted by their efforts, +made no attempt to follow the flying foe, or to hinder their +embarkation; for even now the Turks, enormously outnumbering them as +they did, might be driven by despair to a resistance so desperate +as once again to turn the tide of victory. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII THE REWARD OF VALOUR + + +Gervaise knew nothing at the time of the final result of the battle, +for as soon as the knights had burst through the circle of his +opponents, he sank insensible on the body of the grand master. When +he came to himself, he was lying on a bed in the hospital of the +Order. As soon as he moved, Ralph Harcourt, who was, with other +knights, occupied in tending the wounded, came to his bedside. +"Thank God that you are conscious again, Gervaise! They told me +that it was but faintness and loss of blood, and that none of your +wounds were likely to prove mortal, and for the last twelve hours +they have declared that you were asleep: but you looked so white +that I could not but fear you would never wake again." + +"How is the grand master?" Gervaise asked eagerly. Ralph shook +his head. + +"He is wounded sorely, Gervaise, and the leech declares that one +at least of his wounds is mortal; still, I cannot bring myself to +believe that so great a hero will be taken away in the moment of +victory, after having done such marvels for the cause not only of +the Order, but of all Christendom." + +"Then you beat them back again from the breach?" Gervaise said. + +"That was not all. They were in such confusion that we sallied +out, captured their camp, with the pasha's banner and an enormous +quantity of spoil, and pursued them to their harbour. Then we halted, +fearing that they might in their desperation turn upon us, and, +terribly weakened as we were by our losses, have again snatched +the victory from our grasp. So we let them go on board their ships +without interference, and this morning there is not a Turkish sail +in sight. The inhabitants are well nigh mad with joy. But elated +as we are at our success, our gladness is sorely damped by the +state of the grand master, and the loss of so many of our comrades, +though, indeed, our langue has suffered less than any of the others, +for the brunt of the attacks on St. Nicholas and the breach did +not fall upon us, still we lost heavily when at last we hurried up +to win back the wall from them." + +"Who have fallen?" Gervaise asked. + +"Among the principal knights are Thomas Ben, Henry Haler, Thomas +Ploniton, John Vaquelin, Adam Tedbond, Henry Batasbi, and Henry +Anlui. Marmaduke Lumley is dangerously wounded. Of the younger +knights, some fifteen have been killed, and among them your old +enemy Rivers. He died a coward's death, the only one, thank God, +of all our langue. When the fray was thickest Sir John Boswell +marked him crouching behind the parapet. He seized him by the +gorget, and hauled him out, but his knees shook so that he could +scarcely walk, and would have slunk back when released. Sir John +raised his mace to slay him as a disgrace to the Order and our +langue, when a ball from one of the Turkish cannon cut him well +nigh in half, so that he fell by the hands of the Turks, and not +by the sword of one of the Order he had disgraced. Fortunately +none, save half a dozen knights of our langue, saw the affair, +and you may be sure we shall say nothing about it; and instead of +Rivers' name going down to infamy, it will appear in the list of +those who died in the defence of Rhodes." + +"May God assoil his soul!" Gervaise said earnestly. "'Tis strange that +one of gentle blood should have proved a coward. Had he remained +at home, and turned courtier, instead of entering the Order, he +might have died honoured, without any one ever coming to doubt +his courage." + +"He would have turned out bad whatever he was," Ralph said +contemptuously; "for my part, I never saw a single good quality +in him." + +Long before Gervaise was out of hospital, the glad tidings that +D'Aubusson would recover, in spite of the prognostications of +the leech, spread joy through the city, and at about the same time +that Gervaise left the hospital the grand master was able to sit +up. Two or three days afterwards he sent for Gervaise. + +"I owe my life to you, Sir Gervaise," he said, stretching out his +thin, white hand to him as he entered. "You stood by me nobly +till I fell, for, though unable to stand, I was not unconscious, +and saw how you stood above me and kept the swarming Moslems at +bay. No knight throughout the siege has rendered such great service +as you have done. Since I have been lying unable to move, I have +thought of many things; among them, that I had forgotten to give +you the letters and presents that came for you after you sailed +away. They are in that cabinet; please bring them to me. There," +he said, as Gervaise brought a bulky parcel which the grand master +opened, "this letter is from the Holy Father himself. That, as you +may see from the arms on the seal, is from Florence. The others +are from Pisa, Leghorn, and Naples. Rarely, Sir Gervaise, has any +potentate or knight earned the thanks of so many great cities. +These caskets accompanied them. Sit down and read your letters. +They must be copied in our records." + +Gervaise first opened the one from the Pope. It was written by his +own hand, and expressed his thanks as a temporal sovereign for the +great benefit to the commerce of his subjects by the destruction +of the corsair fleet, and as the head of the Christian Church +for the blow struck at the Moslems. The other three letters were +alike in character, expressing the gratitude of the cities for +their deliverance from the danger, and of their admiration for the +action by which a fleet was destroyed with a single galley. Along +with the letter from Pisa was a casket containing a heavy gold +chain set with gems. Florence sent a casket containing a document +bestowing upon him the freedom of the city, and an order upon the +treasury for five thousand ducats that had been voted to him by +the grand council of the Republic; while Ferdinand, King of Naples, +bestowed on him the grand cross of the Order of St. Michael. + +"The armour I had hung up in the armoury, where it has been carefully +kept clean. I guessed what it was by the weight of the case when +it came, and thought it best to open it, as it might have got spoilt +by rust. It is a timely gift, Sir Gervaise, for the siege has +played havoc with the suit Genoa gave you; it is sorely battered, +dinted, and broken, and, although you can doubtless get it repaired, +if I were you I would keep it in its present state as a memorial +-- and there could be no prouder one -- of the part you bore in +the siege. I have seen Caretto this morning. He sails for Genoa +tomorrow, where he will, I hope, soon recover his strength, for +the wounds he received at St. Nicholas have healed but slowly. He +said" -- and a momentary smile crossed the grand master's face -- +"that he thought a change might benefit you also, for he was sure +that the air here had scarce recovered from the taint of blood. +Therefore, here is a paper granting you three months' leave. His +commandery is a pleasant one, and well situated on the slopes of +the hills; and the fresh air will, doubtless, speedily set you up. +I should like nothing better than a stay there myself, but there +is much to do to repair the damages caused by the siege, and to +place the city in a state of defence should the Turks again lay +siege to it; and methinks Mahomet will not sit down quietly under +the heavy reverse his troops have met with." + +"But I should be glad to stay here to assist in the work, your +Highness." + +"There are plenty of knights to see to that," D'Aubusson replied, +"and it will be long before you are fit for such work. No, I +give my orders for you to proceed with Caretto to Genoa -- unless, +indeed, you would prefer to go to some other locality to recruit +your strength." + +"I would much rather go with Sir Fabricius, your Highness, than to +any place where I have no acquaintances. I have a great esteem +and respect for him." + +"He is worthy of it; there is no nobler knight in the Order, and, +had I fallen, none who could more confidently have been selected +to fill my place. He has an equally high opinion of you, and spoke +long and earnestly concerning you." + +A fortnight later the ship carrying the two knights arrived at +Genoa. + +"I will go ashore at once, Gervaise," Caretto said. "I know not +whether my cousin is in the city or on her estate; if the former, +I will stay with her for a day or two before going off to my +commandery, and of course you will also be her guest. I hope she +will be here, for methinks we shall both need to refit our wardrobes +before we are fit to appear in society." + +"Certainly I shall," Gervaise agreed; "for, indeed, I find that +my gala costume suffered a good deal during my long absence; and, +moreover, although I have not increased in height, I have broadened +out a good deal since I was here two years ago." + +"Yes; you were a youth then, Gervaise, and now you are a man, and +one of no ordinary strength and size. The sun of Tripoli, and your +labours during the siege, have added some years to your appearance. +You are, I think, little over twenty, but you look two or three +years older. The change is even greater in your manner than in +your appearance; you were then new to command, doubtful as to your +own powers, and diffident with those older than yourself. Now for +two years you have thought and acted for yourself, and have shown +yourself capable of making a mark even among men like the knights +of St. John, both in valour and in fitness to command. You saved +St. Nicholas, you saved the life of the grand master; and in the +order of the day he issued on the morning we left, granting you +three months' leave for the recovery of your wounds, he took the +opportunity of recording, in the name of the council and himself, +their admiration for the services rendered by you during the siege, +and his own gratitude for saving his life when he lay helpless +and surrounded by the Moslems -- a testimony of which any knight +of Christendom might well feel proud." + +It was three hours before Caretto returned to the ship. + +"My cousin is at home, and will be delighted to see you. I am sorry +that I have kept you waiting so long, but at present Genoa, and, +indeed, all Europe, is agog at the news of the defeat of the Turks, +and Italy especially sees clearly enough that, had Rhodes fallen, +she would have been the next object of attack by Mahomet; therefore +the ladies would not hear of my leaving them until I had told them +something at least of the events of the siege, and also how it +came about that you were there to share in the defence. I see that +you are ready to land; therefore, let us be going at once. Most +of the people will be taking their siesta at present, and we shall +get through the streets without being mobbed; for I can assure +you that the mantle of the Order is just at present in such high +favour that I had a hard task to wend my way through the streets +to my cousin's house." + +On arriving at the palace of the Countess of Forli, Gervaise was +surprised at the change that had taken place in the Lady Claudia. +From what Caretto had said, he was prepared to find that she had +grown out of her girlhood, and had altered much. She had, however, +changed even more than he had expected, and had become, he thought, +the fairest woman that he had ever seen. The countess greeted him +with great cordiality; but Claudia came forward with a timidity +that contrasted strangely with the outspoken frankness he remembered +in the girl. For a time they all chatted together of the events of +the siege, and of his captivity. + +"The news that you had been captured threw quite a gloom over us, +Sir Gervaise," the countess said. "We at first consoled ourselves +with the thought that you would speedily be ransomed; but when +months passed by, and we heard that all the efforts of the grand +master had failed to discover where you had been taken, I should +have lost all hope had it not been that my cousin had returned after +an even longer captivity among the Moors. I am glad to hear that +you did not suffer so many hardships as he did." + +"I am in no way to be pitied, Countess," Gervaise said lightly. +"I had a kind master for some months, and was treated as a friend +rather than as a slave; afterwards, I had the good fortune to be +made the head of the labourers at the buildings in the sultan's +palace, and although I certainly worked with them, the labour was +not greater than one could perform without distress, and I had +naught to complain of as to my condition." + +After talking for upwards of an hour, the countess told Caretto +that she had several matters on which she needed his counsel, and +retired with him to the next room of the suite opening from the +apartment in which they had been sitting. For a minute or two the +others sat silent, and then Claudia said, + +"You have changed much since I saw you last, Sir Gervaise. Then it +seemed to me scarcely possible that you could have performed the +feat of destroying the corsair fleet; now it is not so difficult +to understand." + +"I have widened out a bit, Lady Claudia. My moustache is really a +moustache, and not a pretence at one; otherwise I don't feel that +I have changed. The alteration in yourself is infinitely greater." + +"I, too, have filled out," she said, with a smile. "I was a thin girl +then -- all corners and angles. No, I don' t want any compliments, +of which, to tell you the truth, I am heartily sick. And so," +she went on in a softer tone, "you have actually brought my gage +home! Oh, Sir Gervaise," -- and her eyes filled with tears -- "my +cousin has told me! How could you have been so foolish as to remain +voluntarily in captivity, that you might recover the gage a child +had given you?" + +"Not a child, Lady Claudia. A girl not yet a woman, I admit; yet +it was not given in the spirit of a young girl, but in that of +an earnest woman. I had taken a vow never to part with it, as you +had pledged yourself to bestow no similar favour upon any other +knight. I was confident that you would keep your vow; and although +in any case, as a true knight, I was bound to preserve your gift, +still more so was I bound by the thought of the manner in which +you had presented it to me." + +"But I could not have blamed you -- I should never have dreamt of +blaming you," she said earnestly, "for losing it as you did." + +"I felt sure, Lady Claudia, that had it been absolutely beyond +my power to regain it you would not have blamed me; but it was +not beyond my power, and that being so had I been obliged to wait +for ten years, instead of two, I would not have come back to you +without it. Moreover, you must remember that I prized it beyond +all things. I had often scoffed at knights of an order like ours +wearing ladies' favours. I had always thought it absurd that we, +pledged as we are, should thus declare ourselves admirers of one +woman more than another. But this seemed to me a gage of another +kind; it was too sacred to be shown or spoken of, and I only +mentioned it to Caretto as he cross questioned me as to why I refused +the offer of ransom; and should not have done so then, had he not +been present when it was bestowed. I regarded it not as a lightly +given favour, the result of a passing fancy by one who gave favours +freely, but as a pledge of friendship and as a guerdon for what +I had done, and therefore, more to be honoured than the gifts of a +Republic freed from a passing danger. Had you then been what you +are now, I might have been foolish enough to think of it in another +light, regardless of the fact that you are a rich heiress of one of +the noblest families in Italy, and I a knight with no possessions +save my sword." + +"Say not so, Sir Gervaise," she said impetuously. "Are you not a +knight on whom Genoa and Florence have bestowed their citizenship, +whom the Holy Father himself has thanked, who has been honoured +by Pisa, and whom Ferdinand of Naples has created a Knight of the +Grand Cross of St. Michael, whom the grand master has singled out +for praise among all the valiant knights of the Order of St. John, +who, as my cousin tells me, saved him and the fort he commanded +from capture, and who stood alone over the fallen grand master, +surrounded by a crowd of foes. How can you speak of yourself as a +simple knight?" + +Then she stopped, and sat silent for a minute, while a flush of +colour mounted to her cheeks. + +"Give me my gage again, Sir Gervaise," she said gently. In silence +Gervaise removed it from his neck, wondering greatly what could +be her intention. She turned it over and over in her hand. + +"Sir Knight," she said, "this was of no great value in my eyes when +I bestowed it upon you; it was a gage, and not a gift. Now it is +to me of value beyond the richest gem on earth; it is a proof of the +faith and loyalty of the knight I most esteem and honour, and so +in giving it to you again, I part with it with a pang, for I have +far greater reason to prize it than you can have. I gave it you +before as a girl, proud that a knight who had gained such honour +and applause should wear her favour, and without the thought that +the trinket was a heart. I give it to you now as a woman, far +prouder than before that you should wear her gage, and not blind +to the meaning of the emblem." + +Gervaise took her hand as she fastened it round his neck, and +kissed it; then, still holding it, he said, "Do you know what you +are doing, Claudia? You are raising hopes that I have never been +presumptuous enough to cherish." + +"I cannot help that," she said softly. "There is assuredly no +presumption in the hope." + +He paused a moment. + +"You would not esteem me," he said, holding both her hands now, +"were I false to my vows. I will return to Rhodes tomorrow, and +ask the grand master to forward to the Pope and endorse my petition, +that I may be released from my vows to the Order. I cannot think +that he or the Holy Father will refuse my request. Then, when I +am free, I can tell you how I love and honour you, and how, as I +have in the past devoted my life to the Order, so I will in the +future devote it to your happiness." + +The girl bowed her head. + +"'Tis right it should be so," she said. "I have waited, feeling +in my heart that the vow I had given would bind me for life, and +I should be content to wait years longer if needs be. But I am bound +by no vows, and can acknowledge that you have long been the lord +of my life, and that so long as you wore the heart I had given +you, so long would I listen to the wooing of no other." + +"I fear that the Countess, your mother -- " Gervaise began, but +she interrupted him. + +"You need not fear," she said. "My mother has long known, and knowing +also that I am not given to change, has ceased to importune me +to listen to other offers. Her sole objection was that you might +never return from captivity. Now that you have come back with +added honours, she will not only offer no objection, but will, I +am sure, receive you gladly, especially as she knows that my cousin +Sir Fabricius, for whom she has the greatest affection, holds you +in such high esteem." + +Six months later Gervaise again landed at Genoa, after having stayed +at Rome for a few days on his way back. D'Aubusson had expressed +no surprise at his return to Rhodes, or at the request he made. + +"Caretto prepared me for this," he said, smiling, "when he asked +me if you might accompany him to Genoa. The Order will be a loser, +for you would assuredly have risen to the grand priorage of your +langue some day. But we have no right to complain; you have done +your duty and more, and I doubt not that should Mahomet again lay +siege to Rhodes, we may count on your hastening here to aid us?" + +"That assuredly you may, sir. Should danger threaten, my sword +will be as much at the service of the Order as if I were still a +member of it." + +"I by no means disapprove," D'Aubusson went on, "of knights leaving +us when they have performed their active service, for in civil life +they sometimes have it in their power to render better service to +the Order than if passing their lives in the quiet duties of a +provincial commandery. It will be so in your case: the lady is a +great heiress, and, as the possessor of wide lands, your influence +in Northern Italy may be very valuable to us, and in case of need +you will, like my brother De Monteuil, be able to bring a gathering +of men-at-arms to our aid. Have no fear that the Pope will refuse +to you a release from your vows. My recommendation alone would be +sufficient; but as, moreover, he is himself under an obligation to +you, he will do so without hesitation. Since you have been away, +your friend Harcourt has been appointed a commander of a galley, +and Sir John Boswell, being incapacitated by the grievous wounds +he received during the siege, has accepted a rich commandery in +England, and sailed but two days since to take up his charge. By +the way, did you reply to those letters expressing your thanks and +explaining your long silence?" + +"Yes, your Highness, I wrote the same evening you gave them to me." + +"That is right. The money voted you by Florence will be useful to +you now, and there is still a sum sent by your commandery owing +to you by the treasury. I will give you an order for it. However +rich an heiress a knight may win, 'tis pleasant for him to have +money of his own; not that you will need it greatly, for, among +the presents you have received, the jewels are valuable enough for +a wedding gift to a princess." + +Gervaise was well received at Rome, and the Pope, after reading +the grand master's letter, and learning from him his reason for +wishing to leave the Order, without hesitation granted him absolution +from his vows. A few months later there was a grand wedding at the +cathedral of Genoa, the doge and all the nobles of the Republic +being present. + +Ralph Harcourt and nine other young knights had accompanied Gervaise +from Rhodes by the permission, and indeed at the suggestion, of +the grand master, who was anxious to show that Gervaise had his +full approval and countenance in leaving the Order. Caretto, who +had been appointed grand prior of Italy, had brought the knights +from all the commanderies in the northern republics to do honour to +the occasion, and the whole, in their rich armour and the mantles +of the Order, made a distinguishing feature in the scene. + +The defeat of the Turks created such enthusiasm throughout Europe +that when the grand prior of England laid before the king letters +he had received from the grand master and Sir John Kendall, speaking +in the highest terms of the various great services Gervaise had +rendered to the Order, Edward granted his request that the act of +attainder against Sir Thomas Tresham and his descendants should be +reversed and the estates restored to Gervaise. The latter made, +with his wife, occasional journeys to England, staying a few months +on his estates in Kent; and as soon as his second son became old +enough, he sent him to England to be educated, and settled the estate +upon him. He himself had but few pleasant memories of England; he +had spent indeed but a very short time there before he entered the +house of the Order in Clerkenwell, and that time had been marked +by constant anxiety, and concluded with the loss of his father. +The great estates that were now his in Italy demanded his full +attention, and, as one of the most powerful nobles of Genoa, he +had come to take a prominent part in the affairs of the Republic. + +He was not called upon to fulfil his promise to aid in the defence +of Rhodes, for the death of Mahomet just at the time when he was +preparing a vast expedition against it, freed the Island for a long +time from fear of an invasion. From time to time they received +visits from Ralph Harcourt, who, after five years longer service +at Rhodes, received a commandery in England. He held it a few years +only, and then returned to the Island, where he obtained a high +official appointment. + +In 1489 Sir John Boswell became bailiff of the English langue, +and Sir Fabricius Caretto was in 1513 elected grand master of the +Order, and held the office eight years, dying in 1521. + +When, in 1522, forty-two years after the first siege, Rhodes was +again beleaguered, Gervaise, who had, on the death of the countess, +become Count of Forli, raised a large body of men-at-arms, and +sent them, under the command of his eldest son, to take part in +the defence. His third son had, at the age of sixteen, entered the +Order, and rose to high rank in it. + +The defence, though even more obstinate and desperate than the +first, was attended with less success, for after inflicting enormous +losses upon the great army, commanded by the Sultan Solyman himself, +the town was forced to yield; for although the Grand Master +L'Isle Adam, and most of his knights, would have preferred to bury +themselves beneath the ruins rather than yield, they were deterred +from doing so, by the knowledge that it would have entailed the +massacre of the whole of the inhabitants, who had throughout the +siege fought valiantly in the defence of the town. Solyman had +suffered such enormous losses that he was glad to grant favourable +conditions, and the knights sailed away from the city they had held +so long and with such honour, and afterwards established themselves +in Malta, where they erected another stronghold, which in the end +proved an even more valuable bulwark to Christendom than Rhodes had +been. There were none who assisted more generously and largely, by +gifts of money, in the establishment of the Order at Malta than +Gervaise. His wife, while she lived, was as eager to aid in the +cause as he was himself, holding that it was to the Order she owed +her husband. And of all their wide possessions there were none so +valued by them both, as the little coral heart set in pearls that +she, as a girl, had given him, and he had so faithfully brought +back to her. + + + +THE END + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS *** + +This file should be named kniwc10.txt or kniwc10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, kniwc11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, kniwc10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/kniwc10.zip b/old/kniwc10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..19cd67a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/kniwc10.zip |